Yamaha PSR-2100 Manual de usuario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: PSR-2100

Categoría: Pianos digitales

Tipo: Manual de usuario

OWNER’S MANUAL

DIC 99

OWNER’S MANUAL

M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation

WA44060 301APAP3.3-01A0

Printed in China

Yamaha PK CLUB (Portable Keyboard Home Page, English only)

http://www.yamahaPKclub.com/

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

Introduction

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply

(adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power sup-

ply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on

the name plate, or speciﬁcally recommended by Yamaha.

WARNING:

Do not place this product in a position where

anyone could walk on, trip over ,or roll anything over

power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an

extension cord is not recommended! IF you must use an

extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25' cord (or

less ) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number,

the larger the current handling capacity. For longer exten-

sion cords, consult a local electrician.

This product should be used only with the components

supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by

Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety

markings and instructions that accompany the accessory

product.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:

The information contained in this manual is believed to be

correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves

the right to change or modify any of the speciﬁcations

without notice or obligation to update existing units.

This product, either alone or in combination with an ampli-

ﬁer and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of pro-

ducing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing

loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high

volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you

experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you

should consult an audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time

period before damage occurs.

Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or

accessory mounting ﬁxtures that are either supplied with

the product or as optional accessories. Some of these

items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed.

Please make sure that benches are stable and any

optional ﬁxtures (where applicable) are well secured

BEFORE using.

Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating

only. No other uses are recommended.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relat-

ing to how a function or effect works (when the unit is

operating as designed) are not covered by the manufac-

turer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibil-

ity. Please study this manual carefully and consult your

dealer before requesting service.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user

safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe

that our products and the production methods used to pro-

duce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the let-

ter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the

following:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable

battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The

average life span of this type of battery is approxi-

mately ﬁve years. When replacement becomes neces-

sary, contact a qualiﬁed service representative to

perform the replacement.

This product may also use “household” type batteries.

Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that

the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and

that the charger is intended for the battery being

charged.

When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new,

or with batteries of a different type. Batteries MUST be

installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation

may result in overheating and battery case rupture.

Warning:

Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery.

Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used

batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your

area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type

batteries in your area for battery disposal information.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged beyond repair,

or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at

an end, please observe all local, state, and federal reg-

ulations that relate to the disposal of products that con-

tain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is

unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The name plate is located on the bottom of the prod-

uct. The model number, serial number, power require-

ments, etc., are located on this plate. You should

record the model number, serial number, and the date

of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain

this manual as a permanent record of your purchase.

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

92-BP (bottom)

PSR-2100/1100

(3)-7

1/2

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even

death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions

include, but are not limited to, the following:

•

Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the instrument. The

required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

•

Use the speciﬁed adaptor (PA-300 or an equivalent recom-

mended by Yamaha) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in

damage to the instrument or overheating.

•

Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust

which may have accumulated on it.

•

Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as

heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise

damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a posi-

tion where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it.

•

Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the inter-

nal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no

user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning,

discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualiﬁed

Yamaha service personnel.

•

Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in

damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liq-

uids which might spill into any openings.

•

Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

•

Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.

A burning item may fall over and cause a ﬁre.

•

If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if

there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if

any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it,

immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the adaptor

plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by quali-

ﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or

others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited

to, the following:

•

When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet,

always hold the plug itself and not the cord.

•

Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or

during electrical storms.

•

Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a mul-

tiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or

possibly cause overheating in the outlet.

•

Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or

extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or

in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disﬁgu-

ration or damage to the internal components.

•

Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo

equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise,

the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise.

•

Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it

might accidentally fall over.

•

Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and

other cables.

•

Use only the stand speciﬁed for the instrument. When attaching

the stand, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could

cause damage to the internal components or result in the instru-

ment falling over.

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/AC power adaptor Location

PSR-2100/1100

(3)-7

2/2

•

Before connecting the instrument to other electronic compo-

nents, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the

power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to mini-

mum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their

minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while

playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

•

When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use

paint thinners, solvents, cleaning ﬂuids, or chemical-impregnated

wiping cloths.

•

Do not insert a ﬁnger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.

•

Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the

gaps on the panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the

power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC out-

let. Then have the instrument inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha ser-

vice personnel.

•

Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument,

since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.

•

Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instru-

ment, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or

connectors.

•

Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high

or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent

hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the

ears, consult a physician.

Saving and backing up your data

•

Some of the current memory data (see page 42) is lost when you

turn off the power to the instrument. Save the data to a ﬂoppy

disk/the User Drive (see page 39, 47).

Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect opera-

tion. Save important data to a ﬂoppy disk.

Backing up the ﬂoppy disk

•

To protect against data loss through media damage, we recom-

mend that you save your important data onto two ﬂoppy disks.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still ﬂowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not

using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.

Connections

Maintenance

Handling caution

Saving data

When you change settings in a display page and then exit

from that page, System Setup data (listed in the Parameter

Chart of the separate Data List booklet) is automatically

stored. However, this edited data is lost if you turn off the

power without properly exiting from the relevant display.

Caution for data operations

Make sure NEVER to turn the PSR-2100/1100’s power off during any kind of data operation involving the USER/

FLOPPY DISK drives — such as saving, deleting, or copying/pasting — until the operation is completely ﬁnished.

(Make sure to wait until the alert message disappears.)

Tur ning the power off during the operation results in the loss of the data being saved or pasted to the respective drive.

Keeping the power on during such operations is particularly important in regard to the USER drive. Turning off the

power while performing a save/delete/paste operation with the USER drive may result in loss of ALL data on the USER

drive (upon the next power on) — and not just the data in question. In other words, if you are performing a save/delete/

paste operation on only the song data of the USER drive and you turn off the power before the operation is completed,

you risk losing ALL your USER drive data — including all voices, styles, Multi Pad banks and Registration Memory pre-

sets you’ve saved to the USER drive.

This caution also applies to creating a new folder on the USER drive or using the factory reset operation (page 154).

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modiﬁcations to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

PSR-2100/1100

Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha PSR-2100/1100!

We recommend that you read this manual carefully

so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced

and convenient functions of the PSR-2100/1100.

We also recommend that you keep this manual

in a safe and handy place for future reference.

PSR-2100/1100

Accessories

■

PA-300 AC Adaptor

■

Floppy Disk (blank)

■

Music Rest (page 17)

■

Data List

■

Owner’s Manual

*May not be included in your area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer.

About this Owner’s Manual and Data List

This manual consists of four main sections: Introduction, Quick Guide, Basic Operation, and Reference.

Also, a separate Data List is provided.

Introduction (page 2):

Please read this section ﬁrst.

Quick Guide (page 20):

This section explains how to use the basic functions.

Basic Operation (page 38):

This section explains how to use the basic operations including display-based controls.

Reference (page 55):

This section explains how to make detailed settings for the PSR-2100/1100’s various

functions.

Data List :

Voice List, MIDI Data Format, etc.

Trademarks:

• Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.

• IBM-PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

• Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation.

• All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.

* The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear

somewhat different from those on your instrument.

* The example Operation Guide displays shown in this Manual are taken from the PSR-2100, and in English.

* This product (PSR-2100) is manufactured under license of U.S. Patents No.5231671, No.5301259, No.5428708, and

No.5567901 from IVL Technologies Ltd.

* The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd.

* Copying of the commercially available software is strictly prohibited except for your personal use.

This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has

license to use others' copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, styles ﬁles, MIDI ﬁles, WAVE

data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant

laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON'T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.

PSR-2100/1100

Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and

Floppy Disk

Be sure to handle ﬂoppy disks and treat the disk drive with care. Follow the important precautions below.

• 3.5" 2DD and 2HD type ﬂoppy disks can be used.

To insert a ﬂoppy disk into the disk drive:

• Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing

upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward,

towards the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the

slot, slowly pushing it all the way in until it clicks into

place and the eject button pops out.

To eject a ﬂoppy disk:

Before ejecting the disk, be sure to conﬁrm that data

is not being written to the ﬂoppy disk.

If data is currently being written to the ﬂoppy disk in

the following operations, the messages “Now

executing,” “Now copying,” and “Now formatting”

appears in the display.

•Moving, copying, pasting, saving, or deleting data

(page 45 - 47).

• Naming ﬁles and folders (page 44); creating a new

folder (page 47).

• Copying a disk to an another disk (page 153);

formatting the disk (page 153).

• Never attempt to remove the disk or turn the power off

when the data is being written to the ﬂoppy disk.

Doing so can damage the disk and possibly the disk

drive. Press the eject button slowly as far as it will go;

the disk will automatically pop out. When the disk is

fully ejected, carefully remove it by hand.

• If the eject button is pressed too quickly, or if it is not

pressed in as far as it will go, the disk may not eject

properly. The eject button may become stuck in a half-

pressed position with the disk extending from the

drive slot by only a few millimeters. If this happens, do

not attempt to pull out the partially ejected disk, since

using force in this situation can damage the disk drive

mechanism or the ﬂoppy disk. To remove a partially

ejected disk, try pressing the eject button once again,

or push the disk back into the slot and then repeat the

eject procedure.

• Be sure to remove the ﬂoppy disk from the disk drive

before turning off the power. A ﬂoppy disk left in the

drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and

dirt that can cause data read and write errors.

• Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument

employs a precision magnetic read/write head which,

after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of

magnetic particles from the disks used that will

eventually cause read and write errors.

•To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order

Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially-

available dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the

head about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer

about the availability of proper head-cleaning disks.

• Never insert anything but ﬂoppy disks into the disk

drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk

drive or ﬂoppy disks.

Compatible Disk Type

Inserting/Ejecting Floppy Disks

Drive lamp

When the power is turned on, the drive lamp (at

the bottom left of the drive) lights to indicate the

drive can be used.

Eject button

Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head

PSR-2100/1100

To handle ﬂoppy disks with care:

• Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply

pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep ﬂoppy

disks in their protective cases when they are not in

use.

• Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely

high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust

or liquids.

• Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed

surface of the ﬂoppy disk inside.

• Do not expose the disk to magnetic ﬁelds, such as

those produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc.,

since magnetic ﬁelds can partially or completely erase

data on the disk, rendering it unreadable.

• Never use a ﬂoppy disk with a deformed shutter or

housing.

• Do not attach anything other than the provided labels

to a ﬂoppy disk. Also make sure that labels are

attached in the proper location.

To protect your data (Write-protect Tab):

•To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide

the disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position

(tab open).

Data backup

•For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that

you keep two copies of important data on separate

ﬂoppy disks. This gives you a backup if one disk is lost

or damaged. To make a backup disk use the Disk to

Disk function on page 153.

About the Display Messages

A message (information or conﬁrmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation.

When such messages appear, simply follow the instructions as shown by pressing the corresponding button.

About the Floppy Disks

write-protect tab open

(protect position)

For this example, press the

[G] (YES) button to

execute formatting.

You can select the desired

language from the Help dis-

play (page 52).

PSR-2100/1100

Table of Contents

Introduction ............................ 2

PRECAUTIONS.......................................................... 3

Accessories ............................................................... 6

About this Owner’s Manual and Data List .............. 6

Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD)

and Floppy Disk..................................................... 7

About the Display Messages.................................... 8

Application Index................................................... 12

What can you do with the PSR-2100/1100?.......... 14

Setting Up the PSR-2100/1100.............................. 16

Panel Controls and Terminals................................ 18

Quick Guide ........................... 20

Playing the Demos ................................................. 20

Song Playback ........................................................ 21

Playback of Songs ....................................................21

Playing Voices ........................................................ 25

Playing a Voice ........................................................25

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously ..........................26

Playing Different Voices with the

Left and Right Hands ............................................27

Playing Styles ......................................................... 28

Playing a style..........................................................28

Style Sections...........................................................30

One Touch Setting...................................................32

Music Finder........................................................... 33

Using the Music Finder ............................................33

Searching the Music Finder Records.........................34

Playing with the Songs .......................................... 36

Playing Along with the PSR-2100/1100....................36

Recording ................................................................37

Basic Operations

— Organizing Your Data ....... 38

Contents shown in the Main Display .................... 38

Open/Save Display................................................. 39

Example — Open/Save display ................................40

Selecting Files and Folders..................................... 43

File/Folder-related Operations .............................. 44

Naming Files/Folders ...............................................44

Moving Files/Folders ................................................45

Copying Files/Folders...............................................46

Deleting Files/Folders...............................................46

Saving Files ..............................................................47

Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder ..............47

Displaying Upper Level pages ..................................47

Entering Characters and Changing Icons .................47

Using the [DATA ENTRY] Dial................................ 49

Direct Access — Instant Selection of Displays....... 50

Help Messages ....................................................... 52

Using the Metronome............................................ 53

Adjusting the Tempo ............................................. 53

Tap Tempo ..............................................................54

Reference

Playing the Demos.................55

Voices.....................................57

Selecting a Voice .................................................... 57

Layer/Left — Playing Several Sounds

Simultaneously .................................................... 59

Layer — Layering Two Different Voices ................... 59

Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left

and Right Sections of the Keyboard ..................... 60

Applying Voice Effects ........................................... 60

PITCH BEND Wheel & MODULATION Wheel........ 61

Adjusting the Octave setting ................................. 61

Styles......................................62

Playing a style ........................................................ 62

Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only .................. 64

Adjusting the Volume Balance/Channel Muting ...... 64

Chord Fingerings.................................................... 65

Arranging the Style Pattern (SECTIONS:

MAIN A/B/C/D, INTRO, ENDING, BREAK) ......... 67

Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys

(SYNC. STOP) ...................................................... 68

Selecting Intro and Ending Types (INTRO/ENDING)...69

Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when changing

accompaniment sections — Auto Fill In................ 69

Appropriate Panel Setting for the Selected Style

(ONE TOUCH SETTING) ...................................... 70

Automatically Changing One Touch Settings

with the Sections — OTS Link .............................. 71

Registering the Panel Controls in One Touch Setting

(ONE TOUCH SETTING) ...................................... 71

Calling Up Ideal Setups for Your Music

— Music Finder.................................................... 72

Searching the Ideal Setups — Music Finder Search.. 73

Editing Records — Music Finder Record Edit ........... 74

The Multi Pads .......................76

Playing the Multi Pads ........................................... 76

Chord Match .......................................................... 76

Multi Pad Edit......................................................... 77

Song Playback........................78

Compatible Song Types ......................................... 78

Song Playback ........................................................ 79

Playing the Internal Songs....................................... 79

Playing Back Songs on Disk..................................... 81

Other Playback-related Operations.......................... 81

Muting Specific Parts

— Track1/Track2/Extra Tracks............................ 82

Repeat Playback of a Specific Range ..................... 82

PSR-2100/1100

Displaying Music Notation — Score ...................... 83

Displaying the Lyrics .............................................. 86

Saving and Recalling

Custom Panel Setups

— Registration Memory ........ 87

Registering Panel Setups — Registration Memory... 87

Saving Your Registration Memory Setups.................88

Recalling a Registration Memory Setup ................ 89

Editing Voices

— Sound Creator ................... 90

Operation ............................................................... 90

Regular Voice Parameters...................................... 91

Organ Flutes (PSR-2100 only)................................ 94

Recording Your Performances

and Creating Songs

— Song Creator ..................... 95

About Song Recording........................................... 95

Quick Recording..................................................... 96

Multi Recording ..................................................... 97

Recording Individual Notes — Step Record .......... 99

Operation ................................................................99

Recording Melodies — Step Record (Note) ............101

Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompani-

ment — Step Record (Chord) .............................102

Select the Recording Options: Starting, Stopping,

Punching In/Out — Rec Mode.......................... 104

Editing a Recorded Song ..................................... 105

Editing Channel-related Parameters — Channel.....105

Editing Note Events — 1 - 16.................................108

Editing Chord Events — CHD.................................109

Editing System Events

— SYS/EX. (System Exclusive) .............................109

Inputting and Editing Lyrics ...................................110

Customizing the Event List — Filter........................110

Creating Accompaniment Styles

— Style Creator ................... 111

About Creating Accompaniment Styles .............. 111

Style File Format .................................................. 112

Operation ............................................................. 112

Realtime Recording — Basic ................................ 113

Step Recording..................................................... 114

Assembling an Accompaniment Style

—Assembly........................................................ 115

Edit the Created Accompaniment Style .............. 116

Change the Rhythmic Feel

— Groove and Dynamics....................................116

Editing the Channel Data.......................................118

Making Style File Format Settings — Parameter .....119

Creating Multi Pad

— Multi Pad Creator ............121

Operation ............................................................. 121

Multi Pad Realtime Recording — Record ............ 122

Start recording...................................................... 122

Stop recording...................................................... 122

Step Recording or Editing Multi Pads — Edit...... 123

Adjust the Volume Balance

and Changing Voices

— Mixing Console ................124

Operation ............................................................. 124

Setting the Level Balance and Voice

— Volume/Voice ............................................... 125

Changing the Tone of the Voice — Filter............ 126

Changing Pitch-related Settings — Tune ............ 126

Adjusting the Effects ............................................ 127

Effect Structure ..................................................... 129

Setting the Equalizer—EQ (PSR-2100 only) ........ 130

Using a Microphone

— MIC. (PSR-2100 only).......131

Selecting a Vocal Harmony Type ......................... 131

Making Settings for the Vocal Harmony

and Microphone — MICROPHONE SETTING ... 133

Adjusting the Vocal Harmony Settings

and Microphone Effects — OVERALL SETTING ... 133

Setting the Microphone Volume and Related Effects

— TALK SETTING............................................... 135

Making Global and

Other Important Settings

— Function...........................136

Operation ............................................................. 136

Fine Tuning the Pitch/Selecting a Scale

— Master Tune/Scale Tune............................... 138

Tuning the Overall Pitch — Master Tune............... 138

Selecting a Scale — Scale Tune ............................. 138

Setting Song-related Parameters

— Song Settings................................................ 140

Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters

— Style Setting, Split Point,

and Chord Fingering......................................... 141

Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters

— Style Setting and Split Point .......................... 141

Setting the Fingering Method — Chord Fingering 142

Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard

— Controller...................................................... 142

Making Settings for the Pedals .............................. 142

Changing the Touch Sensitivity Modulation

and Transpose — Keyboard/Panel...................... 144

Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze,

and Voice Set..................................................... 145

PSR-2100/1100

Introduction

Quick Guide

Basic Operations - Organizing Your Data

Playing the Demos

Voices

Styles

The Multi Pad

Creating Multi Pad - Multi Pad Creator

Song Playback

Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups

- Registration Memory

Editing Voices - Sound Creator

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs

- Song Creator

Creating Accompaniment Styles

- Style Creator

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices

- Mixing Console

Making Global and Other Important Settings

- Function

Using Your PSR-2100/1100 with Other Devices

Using a Microphone - MIC. (PSR-2100 only)

Appendix

Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration

Memory Presets — Registration Sequence ..........145

Maintaining Panel Settings — Freeze .....................145

Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings

— Voice Set ........................................................146

Setting Harmony and Echo.................................. 146

Setting the MIDI Parameters............................... 148

Making Overall System Settings (Local Control,

Clock, etc.) — System.........................................148

Transmitting MIDI Data — Transmit ......................149

Receiving MIDI Data — Receive .............................150

Setting Root Note Channels — Root ......................150

Setting Chord Channels — Chord Detect ..............150

Other Settings — Utility ...................................... 151

Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome,

Parameter Lock, and Tap — CONFIG 1...............151

Making Settings for the Display

and Voice Number Indication — CONFIG 2........152

Copying and Formatting Disks — Disk...................153

Entering Your Name and Language Preference

— Owner............................................................154

Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the

PSR-2100/1100 — System Reset.........................154

Using Your PSR-2100/1100

with Other Devices.............. 155

Using the Headphones (PHONES jack)...................155

Connecting the Microphone or Guitar

(MIC./LINE IN jack) (PSR-2100 only)...................155

Playing the sounds of the PSR-2100/1100 through an

external audio system, and recording the sounds to

an external recorder (AUX OUT/OUTPUT jacks) .....156

Using the Pedal (footswitch) or Foot Controller

(FOOT PEDAL 1/2 jack).......................................156

Connecting external MIDI devices

(MIDI terminals) .................................................156

Connecting to a Computer

(USB terminal, MIDI terminal).............................157

What’s MIDI?.........................................................158

What You Can Do With MIDI.................................160

MIDI Data Compatibility........................................161

Disk format ............................................................161

Sequence Format...................................................161

Voice Allocation Format .........................................162

Troubleshooting.................. 163

Specifications ...................... 165

Index ................................... 167

PSR-2100/1100

Application Index

Use this index to ﬁnd reference pages that may be helpful for your particular

application and situation.

Listening

Listening to the internal songs................................................................................................................ page 79

Listening to disk songs ....................................................................... “Playing Back Songs on Disk” on page 81

Listening to demo songs......................................................................................................................... page 55

Listening to the demo of the selected voices .......................................................................................... page 57

Listening to songs with the special voices of the PSR-2100/1100 ......................................................... page 125

Playing

Playing an accompaniment that matches pitch..................................................“Transpose Assign” on page 144

Combining two voices ...................................................... “Layer — Layering Two Different Voices” on page 59

Playing separate voices with the right and left hands

...........................“Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard” on page 60

Changing the sound

Enhancing the sound with touch and other effects ......................................“Applying Voice Effects” on page 60

.................................................................................................................“Adjusting the Effects” on page 127

Adjusting the Level Balance................................................................................................................. page 125

Combining two voices ...................................................... “Layer — Layering Two Different Voices” on page 59

Playing separate voices with the right and left hands

...........................“Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard” on page 60

Creating voices ...................................................................................................................................... page 90

Playing the auto accompaniment

Playing the accompaniment automatically............................................................................................. page 62

Calling up ideal panel settings for your music........................................................................................ page 72

Practicing

Practicing with an accurate and steady tempo............................................. “Using the Metronome” on page 53

Recording

Recording your performance...........................................................................................................pages 96, 97

Creating a song by entering notes .......................................................................................................... page 99

Creating your original settings

Creating voices ...................................................................................................................................... page 90

Creating accompaniment styles............................................................................................................ page 111

Creating multi pads.............................................................................................................................. page 121

PSR-2100/1100

Application Index

Using a microphone (PSR-2100 only)

Connecting the microphone.............. “Connecting the Microphone or Guitar (MIC./LINE IN jack)” on page 155

Adding automatic harmonies to your singing ....................................................................................... page 131

Settings

Registering Panel Setups......................................................................................................................... page 87

Tuning the pitch/Selecting a scale ........................................................................................................ page 138

Making detailed settings for playing back songs ................................................................................... page 140

Making detailed settings for the auto accompaniment.......................................................................... page 141

Making detailed settings for the keyboard voices ................................................................................. page 144

Making detailed settings for MIDI ........................................................................................................ page 148

Connecting the PSR-2100/1100 to other devices

Basic information on MIDI..................................................................................... “What’s MIDI?” on page 158

Recording your performance........“Playing the sounds of the PSR-2100/1100 through an external audio system,

and recording the sounds to an external recorder (AUX OUT/OUTPUT jacks)” on page 156

Raising the volume ......................“Playing the sounds of the PSR-2100/1100 through an external audio system,

and recording the sounds to an external recorder (AUX OUT/OUTPUT jacks)” on page 156

Connecting a computer..................... .“Connecting to a Computer (USB terminal/MIDI terminals)” on page 157

Quick solution

Basic functions of the PSR-2100/1100 and how you can best use it ................................................pages 12, 14

Resetting the PSR-2100/1100 to the default setting

................. “Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the PSR-2100/1100 — System Reset” on page 154

Displaying the Messages ......................................................................“About the Display Messages” on page 8

Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................... page 163

PSR-2100/1100

BALANCE

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

DIRECT

ACCESS

PART

CHANNEL ON/OFF

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

TRANSPOSE

ACMP

STANDBY

INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

BALLAD USERLATIN

POP & ROCK

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

BALLROOM

DANCE

RESET

MIN MAX

FADE

IN/OUT

TEMPO

STOP

TAP TEMPO

RESET

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

STYLE

MARCH &

WALTZ

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

REPEAT

SWING &

JAZZ

MULTI PAD

STYLE CONTROL

MASTER VOLUME

PART

What can you do with the PSR-2100/1100?

SONG

Playback previously recorded

songs (page 21, 36, 78)

Enjoy a wide variety of preset songs

as well as songs on commercially

available disks.

Multi Pads

Add spice to your performance

with special dynamic phrases

(page 76, 121)

By simply pressing one of the Multi

Pads, you can play short rhythmic or

melodic phrases. You can also create

your original Multi Pad phrases by

recording them directly from the

keyboard.

DEMO

Explore the Demos

(page 20, 55)

These not only showcase the

stunning voices and styles of

the instrument, they

introduce you to the various

functions and features — and

give you hands-on

experience using the PSR-

2100/1100!

STYLE

Back up your performance with Auto

Accompaniment (page 28, 62)

Playing a chord with your left hand automatically

plays the auto accompaniment backing. Select an

accompaniment style — such as pop, jazz, Latin,

etc. — and let the PSR-2100/1100 be your backing

band!

DIGITAL RECORDING

Record your performances

(page 95, 111)

With the powerful and easy-to-use song

recording features, you can record your

own keyboard performances, and create

your own complete, fully orchestrated

compositions — which you can then save to

the USER drive or a ﬂoppy disk for future

recall.

PSR-2100/1100

USER

ENTER

EXIT

FREEZE MEMORY

DATA ENTRY

ORGAN FLUTES

STRINGS CHOIR & PAD

GUITAR

MAIN

BACK NEXT

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

LAYER

BASS

PIANO & HARPSI.

E.PIANO

UPPER OCTAVE

WOODWIND

PERCUSSION

VARIATION

MONOTOUCH

SUSTAIN

DSP

HARMONY/

ECHO

LEFT

HOLD

SYNTH.

BRASS

ORGAN &

ACCORDION

VOICE EFFECT

VOICE

ONE TOUCH SETTING

REGISTRATION MEMORY

MIC.

EFFECT

RESET

VOCAL

HARMONY

MIC.

SETTING

VH TYPE

SELECT

TALK

OVER

SIGNAL

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

LCD

CONTRAST

MIDIUSB FOOT PEDAL

INPUT

VOLUME

MIC./

LINE IN

DC IN 16V

LRRL/L+R

AUX OUT

(LEVEL FIXED)

OUTPUT

OUT

MIC. LINEIN

LCD

The large LCD (together

with the various panel

buttons) provides

comprehensive and easy-

to-understand control of

the PSR-2100/1100’s

operations.

MUSIC FINDER

Call up the perfect accompaniment

style (page 33, 72)

If you know what song you want to play,

but you don’t know which style or voice

would be right for it, let the Music Finder

help you. Just select the song title, and

the PSR-2100/1100 automatically calls

up the most appropriate style and voice.

Vocal Harmony (PSR-2100 only)

Add automatic vocal backing to your singing (page 131)

The amazing Vocal Harmony feature (on the PSR-2100)

automatically produces backup vocal harmonies for lead vocals

that you sing into a microphone. You can even change the

gender of the harmony voices — for example, letting you add

female backup to your own male voice (or vice versa).

VOICE

Enjoy a huge variety of

realistic voices (page 25, 57)

The PSR-2100/1100 features a

wealth of exceptionally authentic

and dynamic voices — including

piano, strings, woodwinds, and

more!

Organ Flutes (PSR-2100 only)

Craft your own organ voices

(page 94)

This special function not only gives you a

full set of rich and luscious organ sounds,

it also lets you create your own original

organ voices, just as on a traditional

organ, by increasing and decreasing the

ﬂute footages, and adding percussive

sounds.

USB terminal

Make music with a computer — quickly and

easily (page 157)

Dive in and take advantage of the wide world of

computer music software. Connections and setup

are exceptionally easy, and you can play back

your computer recorded parts with different

instrument sounds — all from a single PSR-2100/

1100!

PSR-2100/1100

Setting Up the PSR-2100/1100

Make sure that the PSR-2100/1100’s STANDBY/ON

switch is at the STANDBY (off) position.

Connect one end of the AC cable to the PA-300.

Connect the PA-300’s DC plug to the PSR-2100/

1100’s DC IN terminal on the instrument’s rear

panel.

Connect the other end (normal AC plug) to the

nearest electrical outlet.

WARNING

Do not attempt to use an AC adaptor other than the Yamaha PA-

300 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha. The use of an

incompatible adaptor may cause irreparable damage to the PSR-

2100/1100, and may even pose a serious shock hazard! ALWAYS

UNPLUG THE AC ADAPTOR FROM THE AC POWER OUTLET

WHEN THE PSR-2100/1100 IS NOT IN USE.

CAUTION

Never interrupt the power supply (e.g. unplug the AC adaptor)

during any PSR-2100/1100 record operation! Doing so can result

in a loss of data.

CAUTION

Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity

is still ﬂowing to the instrument at a minimum level. When not

using the PSR-2100/1100 for an extended period of time, be sure

to unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.

When you have made all the necessary connections

(page 155) between your PSR-2100/1100 and any other

devices, make sure that all volume settings are turned

down all the way to zero. Then turn on every device in

your setup in the order of MIDI masters (senders), MIDI

slaves (receivers), then the audio equipment (mixers,

ampliﬁers, speakers, etc.). This ensures smooth MIDI

operation and prevents speaker damage.

When powering down the setup, ﬁrst turn down the

volume for each audio device, then switch off each

device in the reverse order (ﬁrst audio devices, then

MIDI).

Power Supply

DC IN 16V

LRRL/L+R

AUX OUT

(LEVEL FIXED)

OUTPUT

DC IN

To electrical outlet

Power-on Procedure

MIDI master (transmitting device)

Audio equipment (first mixer, then amplifier)

12345678910111213141516LR

PSR-2100/1100 as MIDI slave (MIDI receiving device)

POWER

ON!!

PSR-2100/1100

CAUTION

In order to avoid possible damage to the speakers or other connected

electronic equipment, always switch on the power of the 2100/1100

before switching on the power of the ampliﬁed speakers or mixer and

ampliﬁer. Likewise,always switch off the power of the 2100/1100 after

switching off the power of the ampliﬁed speakers or mixer and ampli-

ﬁer.

CAUTION

Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position,electricity is still

ﬂowing to the instrument at a minimum level. When not using the

PSR-2100/1100 for an extended period of time, be sure to unplug the

AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.

Before you switch your 2100/1100 on or off, ﬁrst turn down the vol-

ume of any connected audio equipment.

1 Press the [STANDBY/ON] switch.

→ The main display appears in the display.

When you’re ready to turn off the power, press the

[STANDBY/ON] switch again.

→ Both the display and the drive lamp (at the

bottom left of the drive) will turn off.

2 Adjusting the display contrast

If the LCD is difﬁcult to read, adjust the

contrast with the [LCD CONTRAST]

knob on the rear panel.

3 Setting the volume

Use the [MASTER VOLUME]

dial to adjust the volume to

an appropriate level.

The Panel Logos

The logos printed on the PSR-2100/1100 panel indicate

standards/formats it supports and special features it includes.

GM System Level 1

“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard

which guarantees that any data conforming to the standard will

play accurately on any GM-compatible tone generator or

synthesizer from any manufacturer.

XG Format

XG is a new Yamaha MIDI speciﬁcation which signiﬁcantly

expands and improves on the “GM System Level 1” standard

with greater voice handling capacity, expressive control, and

effect capability while retaining full compatibility with GM. By

using the PSR-2100/1100 XG voices, it is possible to record

XG-compatible song ﬁles.

XF Format

The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File)

standard with greater functionality and open-ended

expandability for the future. The PSR-2100/1100 is capable of

displaying lyrics when an XF ﬁle containing lyric data is played.

(SMF is the most common format used for MIDI sequence ﬁles.

The PSR-2100/1100 is compatible with SMF Formats 0 and 1,

and records “song” data using SMF Format 0.)

Vocal Harmony (PSR-2100 only)

Vocal Harmony employs state-of-the-art digital signal

processing technology to automatically add appropriate vocal

harmony to a lead vocal line sung by the user. Vocal Harmony

can even change the character and gender of the lead voice as

well as the added voices to produce a wide range of vocal

harmony effects.

Disk Orchestra Collection

The DOC voice allocation format provides data playback

compatibility with a wide range of Yamaha instruments and

MIDI devices.

Style File Format

The Style File Format (SFF) is Yamaha’s original style ﬁle format,

which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality

automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord

types. The PSR-2100/1100 uses the SFF internally, reads

optional SFF style disks, and creates SFF styles using the Style

Creator feature.

USB

USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial

interface for connecting a computer with peripheral devices. It

allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while

the power to the computer is on).

Powering Up

STANDBY

MAIN

BACK NEXT

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

LAYER

LCD

CONTRAST

MIN MAX

FADE

IN/OUT

MASTER VOLUME

Music Rest

The PSR-2100/1100 is supplied with a music rest that

can be attached to the instrument by inserting it into

the slot at the rear of the control panel.

PSR-2100/1100

Panel Controls and Terminals

POWER

[STANDBY/ON] switch.........................................................P. 17

WHEEL

PITCH BEND.......................................................................P. 61

MODULATION (PSR-2100 only)..........................................P. 61

PHONES

[PHONES] jack ..................................................................P. 155

METRONOME

[METRONOME] button ........................................................P. 53

SONG

[EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button......................................P. 82

[TRACK 2 (L)] button............................................................P. 82

[TRACK 1 (R)] button...........................................................P. 82

[REPEAT] button..................................................................P. 82

[REC] button ........................................................................P. 95

[TOP] button.........................................................................P. 81

[START / STOP] button........................................................P. 79

[REW] button........................................................................P. 81

[FF] button............................................................................P. 81

STYLE

STYLE buttons.....................................................................P. 62

TRANSPOSE

[E] [F] buttons.............................................................P. 144

TEMPO

[E] [F] buttons...............................................................P. 53

[TAP TEMPO] button............................................................P. 54

MASTER VOLUME

[MASTER VOLUME] dial......................................................P. 17

[FADE IN / OUT] button........................................................P. 68

MULTI PAD

[1] - [4] buttons.....................................................................P. 76

[STOP] button ......................................................................P. 76

STYLE CONTROL

[ACMP] button......................................................................P. 63

[BREAK] button....................................................................P. 67

[INTRO] button...............................................................P. 31, 69

MAIN [A] button.................................................................... P. 67

MAIN [B] button.................................................................... P. 67

MAIN [C] button ................................................................... P. 67

MAIN [D] button ................................................................... P. 67

[ENDING / rit.] button.....................................................P. 31, 69

[AUTO FILL IN] button..........................................................P. 69

[OTS LINK] button................................................................P. 71

[SYNC.STOP] button............................................................P. 68

[SYNC.START] button..........................................................P. 63

[START / STOP] button........................................................P. 63

DIGITAL STUDIO

[SOUND CREATOR] button.................................................P. 90

[DIGITAL RECORDING] button ...................................P. 95, 111

[MIXING CONSOLE] button............................................... P. 124

[DEMO] button.....................................................................P. 55

[HELP] button....................................................................... P. 52

[FUNCTION] button ........................................................... P. 136

BALANCE

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

DIRECT

ACCESS

PAR T

CHANNEL ON/OFF

TRANSPOSE

ACMP

STANDBY

PITCH BEND MODULATION

PHONES

INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

BALLAD USERLATIN

POP & ROCK

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

BALLROOM

DANCE

RESET

MIN MAX

FADE

IN/OUT

TEMPO

STOP

TAP TEMPO

RESET

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

STYLE

MARCH &

WALTZ

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

REPEAT

SWING &

JAZZ

MULTI PAD

STYLE CONTROL

MASTER VOLUME

PAR T

LCD

CONTRAST

MIDIUSB

OUTIN

CLICK

42 44

5554 56

58 61

40 46 49

2 3

9 10

10 11 12 13 14

7 8

1716

24 25

30 33

PSR-2100/1100

DISPLAY CONTROL

[A] - [J] buttons.....................................................................P. 43

[DIRECT ACCESS] button...................................................P. 50

[BALANCE] button...............................................................P. 64

[CHANNEL ON / OFF] button........................................P. 64, 81

[1▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons.................................................P. 38 - 48

[BACK] button ................................................................P. 43, 49

[NEXT] button ................................................................P. 43, 49

VOICE PART ON / OFF [MAIN] button ................................P. 59

VOICE PART ON / OFF [LAYER] button..............................P. 59

VOICE PART ON / OFF [LEFT] button.................................P. 59

[ENTER] button....................................................................P. 49

[DATA ENTRY] dial............................................................... P. 49

[EXIT] button........................................................................P. 43

[LCD CONTRAST] knob......................................................P. 17

VOICE EFFECT

[LEFT HOLD] button............................................................P. 61

[TOUCH] button ...................................................................P. 60

[SUSUTAIN] button ..............................................................P. 60

[HARMONY / ECHO] button................................................P. 61

[MONO] button.....................................................................P. 61

[DSP] button.........................................................................P. 60

[VARIATION] button .............................................................P. 61

VOICE

VOICE buttons.....................................................................P. 57

UPPER OCTAVE

[UPPER OCTAVE] button.....................................................P. 61

MIC.

MIC. buttons (PSR-2100 only) ...........................................P. 131

MUSIC FINDER

[MUSIC FINDER] button......................................................P. 72

ONE TOUCH SETTING

[1] - [4] buttons.....................................................................P. 70

REGISTRATION MEMORY

[FREEZE] button..................................................................P. 89

[1] – [8] buttons....................................................................P. 87

[MEMORY] button................................................................P. 87

FLOPPY DISK

Floppy disk drive (3.5”)........................................................... P. 7

Microphone (PSR-2100 only)

[INPUT VOLUME] knob......................................................P. 155

[MIC. LINE IN] jack............................................................. P. 155

Connectors

[USB] terminal....................................................................P. 157

MIDI [OUT] [IN] terminals................................................... P. 156

[FOOT PEDAL 1 (SWITCH)] jack.......................................P. 156

[FOOT PEDAL 2] jack........................................................ P. 156

AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) [L] [R] jacks.............................P. 156

OUTPUT [L / L+R] [R] jacks...............................................P. 156

DC IN terminal ...................................................................P. 156

USER

ENTER

EXIT

FREEZE MEMORY

DATA ENTRY

ORGAN FLUTES

STRINGS CHOIR & PAD

GUITAR

MAIN

BACK NEXT

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

LAYER

BASS

PIANO & HARPSI.

E.PIANO

UPPER OCTAVE

WOODWIND

PERCUSSION

VARIATION

MONOTOUCH

SUSTAIN

DSP

HARMONY/

ECHO

LEFT

HOLD

SYNTH.

BRASS

ORGAN &

ACCORDION

VOICE EFFECT

VOICE

ONE TOUCH SETTING

REGISTRATION MEMORY

MIC.

EFFECT

RESET

VOCAL

HARMONY

MIC.

SETTING

VH TYPE

SELECT

TALK

OVER

SIGNAL

FOOT PEDAL

INPUT

VOLUME

MIC./

LINE IN

DC IN 16V

LRRL/L+R

AUX OUT

(LEVEL FIXED)

OUTPUT

MIC. LINE

68 70

74 75

81 82

L M

9392 94

57 58

69 70

79 80

Quick Guide

Quick Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Playing the Demos

The PSR-2100/1100 features an extensive variety of

Demo songs, that showcase its rich, authentic voices and

its dynamic rhythms and styles.

What’s more, there’s a special selection of Demo

functions. These take you through a hands-on journey of

all the important features and functions of the instrument

— letting you see ﬁrsthand how to effectively use the

PSR-2100/1100 in your own music.

Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the demo mode and return to the MAIN display when you’ve ﬁnished playing the

demo songs.

When you’re done with the Demos, you can get to know your PSR-2100/1100 even better with these functions:

• Song playback (page 21)

• Short demo playback of the selected voice (in the Voice Open display; page 26).

Reference

on page 55

Demo button

BACK NEXT

For this example, VOICE

is selected. Voice Demos

showcase the voices of

the PSR-2100/1100.

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

2 Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the Demo

categories.

Function Demos demon-

strate many of the different

functions on the PSR-2100/

1100. Style Demos intro-

duce you to the rhythms and

accompaniment styles of the

PSR-2100/1100 (page 55).

1 Press the [DEMO] button to

call up the menu for

selecting a Demo

song.

Press any of the [A] to [J] buttons or [8▼] (AUTO) button (FUNCTION page only) to select the Demo songs.

For this example, press the [A] button to playback the Oboe demo.

MAIN

LEFT

LAYER

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

For details about the Demos,

refer to page 55.

Song Playback

Quick Guide

Song Playback

Here’s where all of the amazing voices, effects, rhythms, styles and other sophisticated features of

the PSR-2100/1100 come together — in songs!

The following songs are compatible for playback on the PSR-2100/1100. Refer to pages 78, 161 for more details on

the logos.

Playback of Songs

1 If you want to play back a disk song, insert an appropriate disk containing song data into the disk drive.

Reference

on page 78

Song related buttons

Floppy disk drive

BALANCE and

CHANNEL buttons

Make sure that the Lan-

guage setting for the instru-

ment (page 154) is the same

as that of the ﬁle name of the

song that you are playing

back.

Disks bearing this logo contain song data for voices deﬁned in the GM standard.

Disks bearing this logo contain song data using the XG format, an extension of the GM

standard that provides a wider variety of voices and more comprehensive sonic control.

Disks bearing this logo contain song data for voices deﬁned in Yamaha’s DOC format.

Songs containing a large

amount of data may not be

able to be read properly by

the instrument, and as such

you may not be able to

select them. The maximum

capacity is about 200–

300KB, however this may

differ depending on the data

contents of each song.

• Make sure to read the

section “Using the Floppy

Disk Drive (FDD) and

Floppy Disks” on page 7.

CAUTION

Song Playback

Quick Guide

2 Press the [A] button to call up the Song Open display.

If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.

3 Press the [A] - [C] button to select the Voice/Style/Function folder.

Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the drive.

In the example display at left, the PRESET page is

selected; at right, FLOPPY DISK is selected.

PRESET (Songs for Demos)

FLOPPY DISK (commercially available

songs, your own songs, etc.)

From the MAIN display (the

display shown when the

power is turned on), you can

select songs, voices, accom-

paniment styles, etc.

Song Playback

Quick Guide

4 Press one of the [A] to [J] buttons to select the song ﬁle.

5 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to start playback.

6 While the song is playing, try using the Mute function to turn certain instrument channels off or on —

letting you craft dynamic arrangements on the ﬂy!

1) Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button.

2) Press the [1▲▼] - [8▲▼] button corresponding to the channel you wish to turn on or off.

REC

START/STOP

TOP

NEW SONG SYNC. START

•To rewind or fast forward to the playback point of the song, press the [REW] or [FF] button.

• With song data software (Standard MIDI format 0) that includes lyrics, you can view the lyr-

ics on the display during playback. You can also view the score. See pages 83 and 86 for

details.

PART

CHANNEL ON/OFF

81 2 3 4 5 6 781 2 3 4 5 6 7

If the STYLE tab is

selected, press this button

again.

Song Playback

Quick Guide

7 Finally, take the producer’s seat and try your hand at mixing. These Balance controls let you adjust the levels

of the individual parts — the song, the style, your singing (PSR-2100 only), and your playing.

1) Press the [BALANCE] button.

2) Press the [1▲▼] - [8▲▼] button corresponding to the part of which the volume you wish to adjust.

8 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to stop playback.

BALANCE

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

You can call up a full set of

mixing controls by pressing

the [MIXING CONSOLE]

button (page 124).

REC

START/STOP

TOP

NEW SONG SYNC. START

• The [FADE IN/OUT] but-

ton (page 68) can be used

to produce smooth fade-

ins and fade-outs when

starting and stopping the

song, as well as the

accompaniment.

Playing Voices

Quick Guide

Playing Voices

The PSR-2100/1100 features a stunning variety of over 700 dynamic, rich and realistic voices. Try

playing some of these voices now and hear what they can do for your music. Here, you’ll learn how

to select individual voices, combine two voices in a layer, and split two voices between your left and right hands.

Playing a Voice

1 Press the [MAIN] button to turn the MAIN part on, then press the [F] button to call up the menu for

selecting MAIN voice.

If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.

2 Select a voice group.

Reference

on page 57

Voice related buttons

MAIN

LEFT

LAYER

The voice you’re selecting

here belongs to the MAIN

part, and is called the MAIN

voice. (See page 59 for more

information.)

You’ll want to hear the MAIN

voice all by itself — so make sure

that the LAYER and LEFT parts

are turned off.

Turn MAIN on.

USER ORGAN FLUTES

STRINGS CHOIR & PAD

GUITAR BASS

PIANO & HARPSI.

E.PIANO

WOODWIND

PERCUSSION

SYNTH.

BRASS

ORGAN &

ACCORDION

VOICE

For this example, STRINGS

is selected.

Press the [BACK]/[NEXT]

button to select the memory

location of the voice. For this

example, PRESET is

selected.

Playing Voices

Quick Guide

3 Select a voice.

4 Play the voices.

Naturally, you can play the voice yourself from the keyboard, but you can also

have the PSR-2100/1100 demonstrate the voice for you. Simply press the [8▲]

button from the display above, and a Demo of the voice plays automatically.

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously

1 Press the VOICE PART ON/OFF [LAYER] button to turn

the LAYER part on.

2 Press the [G] button to select the LAYER part.

3 Select a voice group.

Here, we’ll select a lush pad to ﬁll out the sound. Call up

the “CHOIR & PAD” group.

4 Select a voice.

For example, select “Gothic Vox.”

5 Play the voices.

Now, you can play two different voices together in a rich

sounding layer — the MAIN voice you selected in the

previous section, plus the new LAYER voice you’ve

selected here.

And that’s just the beginning. Check out these other voice-related features:

• Create your own original voices — quickly and easily — by changing the settings of existing voices (page 90).

• Set up your favorite panel settings — including voices, styles, and more — and call them up whenever you need

them (page 87).

For this example,

”Orchestra” is

selected.

Press the corresponding buttons to select the

other pages — and discover even more voices.

Press the [8▲] button to start the

Demo for the selected voice. To stop

the Demo, press this button again.

There’s more to the Demo features

than just voices, though–for more

information, see page 55.

•You can instantly jump

back to the Main display

by “double-clicking” on

one of the [A] - [J] buttons.

• The voices displayed on

the PSR-1100 are differ-

ent from the example dis-

play at left; however, the

operations are identical.

MAIN

LEFT

LAYER

USER ORGAN FLUTES

STRINGS CHOIR & PAD

GUITAR BASS

PIANO & HARPSI.

E.PIANO

WOODWIND

PERCUSSION

SYNTH.

BRASS

ORGAN &

ACCORDION

VOICE

Playing Voices

Quick Guide

Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands

1 Press the VOICE PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button to turn the LEFT

part on.

2 Press the [H] button to select the LEFT part.

3 Select a voice group.

Here, we’ll select the “STRINGS” group — so that you can play

rich, orchestral chords with your left hand.

4 Select a voice, then press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN

display.

For example, select “Symphon. Str.”

5 Call up the SPLIT POINT display (page 141). From here, you can set the particular key on the keyboard that

separates the two voices — called the Split Point. To do this, simultaneously hold down the [F] or [G] button

and press the desired key on the keyboard. (For more information, see page 141.)

6 Play the voices.

The notes you play with your left hand sound one voice, while

the notes you play with your right sound a different voice (or

voices).

MAIN and LAYER voices are meant to be played with the right

hand. The LEFT voice is played with the left hand.

7 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

MAIN

LEFT

LAYER

USER ORGAN FLUTES

STRINGS CHOIR & PAD

GUITAR BASS

PIANO & HARPSI.

E.PIANO

WOODWIND

PERCUSSION

SYNTH.

BRASS

ORGAN &

ACCORDION

VOICE

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

Split Point

LEFT

MAIN/LAYER

EXIT

Playing Styles

Quick Guide

Playing Styles

The PSR-2100/1100 has a huge variety of musical “styles” that you can call upon to back up your

own performance. They give you anything from a simple, yet effective piano backing or percussion

accompaniment to a full band or orchestra.

Playing a style

1 Select a style group and a style.

2 Turn ACMP on.

The speciﬁed left-hand section of the keyboard becomes the “Auto Accompaniment” section, and chords

played in this section are automatically detected and used as a basis for fully automatic accompaniment with

the selected style.

Reference

on page 62

Style related buttons

BALLAD USERLATIN

POP & ROCK BALLROOM

DANCE

STYLE

MARCH &

WALTZ

SWING &

JAZZ

For this example,

EuroTrance is selected.

For this example, Dance is

selected.

Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to

select the memory location of the

style. For this example, PRESET is

selected.

Auto Accompaniment

section

Split Point

ACMP

• The point on the keyboard

that separates the auto

accompaniment section

and the right-hand sec-

tion of the keyboard is

called the “split point.”

Refer to page 141 for

instructions on setting the

split point.

Playing Styles

Quick Guide

3 Turn SYNC.START on.

4 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the style starts.

For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below).

5 Change the tempo by using the TEMPO[ ] [ ] buttons if necessary.

Simultaneously press the TEMPO [ ] [ ] buttons to return the tempo to its

original setting. Press the [EXIT] button to leave the TEMPO display.

6 Try playing other chords with your left hand.

For information on how to enter chords, see “Chord Fingerings” on page 65.

7 Press the STYLE [START/STOP] button to stop the style.

And there’s much more. Check out these other style-related features:

• Easily create your own original styles (page 90).

• Set up your favorite panel settings — including styles, voices, and more — and call them up whenever you need

them (page 87).

Embellish and enhance your melodies — with the automatic Harmony and Echo effects

This powerful performance feature lets you automatically add harmony notes to the melodies you play with your

right hand — based on the chords you play with your left. Tremolo, Echo, and other effects are available, too.

1Turn HARMONY/ECHO on.

2Turn ACMP on (page 28).

3 Play a chord with your left hand and play some notes in the right-hand range of the

keyboard.

The PSR-2100/1100 has various Harmony/Echo types (page 146).

The Harmony/Echo type may change according to the selected MAIN voice.

• Harmony/Echo is just one of the many Voice Effects you can use. Try out some of

the other effects and see how they can enhance your performance (page 60).

SYNC.

START

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment

section

The Tempo can also be

adjusted by using the [TAP

TEMPO] button (page 54).

VARIATION

MONOTOUCH

SUSTAIN

DSP

HARMONY/

ECHO

LEFT

HOLD

VOICE EFFECT

For details about Harmony/

Echo types, refer to the sep-

arate Data List.

Playing Styles

Quick Guide

Style Sections

Each style in the auto accompaniment is made up of “sections.” Since each section is a rhythmic variation of the basic

style, you can use them to add spice to your performance and mix up the beats — while you’re playing. Intros, Endings,

Main patterns, and Breaks — they’re all here, giving you the dynamic elements you need to create professional-

sounding arrangements.

1 - 3 Use the same operations as in “Playing a style” on pages 28 and 29.

4 Press the [INTRO] button.

5 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the Intro starts.

For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below).

When the playback of the intro is ﬁnished, it automatically leads into main section.

6 Press any of the MAIN [A] to [D] buttons or [BREAK]

button as desired. (See the Accompaniment Structure

on the next page.)

7 Press the [AUTO FILL IN] button to add a ﬁll-in, if

necessary.

Fill-in patterns play automatically between each change in

the Main sections.

8 Press the [ENDING] button.

This switches to the ending section. When the ending is

ﬁnished, the style automatically stops.

INTRO This is used for the beginning of the song. When the intro ﬁnishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the

main section.

MAIN This is used for playing the main part of the song. It plays an accompaniment pattern of several measures,

and repeats indeﬁnitely until another section’s button is pressed.

BREAK This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment, to make your

performance sound even more professional.

ENDING This is used for the ending of the song. When the ending is ﬁnished, the auto accompaniment stops

automatically.

INTRO

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

BREAK

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment

section

INTRO

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

BREAK

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

INTRO

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

BREAK

Playing Styles

Quick Guide

■ Accompaniment Structure

Other Controls

FADE IN/OUT The [FADE IN/OUT] button can be used to produce smooth fade-ins and fade-outs (page 68)when starting and stopping

the style.

TAP TEMPO The style can be started at any tempo you desire by “tapping” out the tempo with the [TAP TEMPO] button. For details,

see page 54.

SYNC.STOP When Synchro Stop is on, you can stop and start the style anytime you want by simply releasing or playing the keys (in

the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard). This is a great way to add dramatic breaks and accents to your

performance. For details, see page 68.

INTRO (page xx)

MAIN VARIATION

Press the [ENDING] button.

INTRO A INTRO B INTRO C

ENDING (page xx)

You can have the

ending gradually slow

down (ritardando) by

pressing the [ENDING]

button again while the

ending is playing back.

MAIN

VARIATION

MAIN

VARIATION

MAIN

VARIATION

MAIN

VARIATION

via BREAK

(max. three patterns)

ENDING A ENDING B ENDING C

(max. three patterns)

INTRO (page 69)

ENDING (page 69)

• An Intro doesn’t necessarily have to be at the beginning! If you want, you can play an Intro section in the middle of your performance by

simply pressing the [INTRO] button at the desired point.

•Watch your timing with the Break sections. If you press a [BREAK] button too close to the end of the measure (i.e., after the ﬁnal eighth

note), the Break section starts playing from the next measure. This also applies to the Auto Fill-in.

• Mix up your intros and use any of the other sections to start the style, if you want.

• If you want to come back into the style right away after an Ending, simply press the [INTRO] button while the Ending section is playing.

• If you press the [BREAK] button while the ending is playing, the break will immediately start playing, continuing with the main section.

FADE

IN/OUT

TAP TEMPO

SYNC.

STOP

Playing Styles

Quick Guide

One Touch Setting

One Touch Setting is a powerful and convenient feature that automatically calls up the most appropriate panel settings

(voice number, etc.) for the currently selected style, with the touch of a single button. This is a wonderful way to

instantly reconﬁgure all the settings on the PSR-2100/1100 to match the style you want to play.

1 Select a style (page 28).

2 Press one of the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] buttons.

Not only does this instantly call up all the settings

(voices, effects, etc.) that match the current style (see

page 70) — it also automatically turns on ACMP and

SYNC. START, so that you can immediately start playing

the style.

3 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the auto

accompaniment starts.

4 Play melodies with your right hand and play various chords

with your left hand.

5 Try out other One Touch Setting setups.

You can also create your own One Touch Setting

setups.

For details, refer to page 71.

• Here’s another way to further automate musical changes and spice up your performance: Use the convenient OTS

(One Touch Setting) Link function to automatically change One Touch Settings when you select a different Main

section (page 71).

ONE TOUCH SETTING

buttons

ONE TOUCH SETTING

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment

section

ONE TOUCH SETTING

Music Finder

Quick Guide

Music Finder

If you want to play in a certain song but don’t know which style and voice settings would be appropriate, the

convenient Music Finder can help you out. Simply select the song name from the Music Finder and the PSR-2100/

1100 automatically makes all appropriate panel settings to let you play in that music style!

Using the Music Finder

1 Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button.

2 Select a record.

For this example, press the [1▲▼] - [3▲▼] buttons to select a record by song title.

3 Play along with the style playback.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

Reference

on page 72

MUSIC FINDER button

MUSIC

FINDER

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Select the desired

record.

Press the [BACK]/[NEXT]

button to select the desired

page of records. For this

example, ALL is selected.

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment

section

You can also have the voice

and other important settings

change automatically with the

style changes. To do this, turn

on OTS LINK (page 71) and

set the OTS LINK TIMING

(page 141) to “REAL TIME”

Music Finder

Quick Guide

Searching the Music Finder Records

The Music Finder is also equipped with a convenient search function that lets you enter a song title or keyword — and

instantly call up all the records that match your search criteria.

1 Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button.

2 Press the [I] button to call up the MUSIC FINDER SEARCH 1 display.

MUSIC

FINDER

The results of Search 1 and

2 appear in the correspond-

ingly numbered SEARCH 1/

2 displays.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Press the [8▲] (START SEARCH)

button.

The search function calls up all

records that contain the entered

word or words.

Press the [F], [G]

and [H] to clear

the previous

conditions, if

necessary.

For this example,

press the [A]

button to call up

the display for

inputting the song

title.

Refer to page 48 for instruc-

tions on entering characters.

Enter the song title,

then press the [8▲]

(OK) button.

For this example,

ANY is selected.

For this example,

ALL is selected.

Music Finder

Quick Guide

7 Select a record (see step #2 on page 33) and play along with the style playback.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

You can also create your own Music Finder setups and save them to ﬂoppy disk (pages 38 and 47). In this

way, you can expand your Music Finder collection by exchanging them with other PSR-2100/1100 users.

For details, refer to page 74.

• In the example above, you speciﬁed a song title, but you can also look for relevant records by keyword or music

genre — for example, Latin, 8-beat, etc. (page 73).

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment

section

Saving and Recalling Music Finder Data

To save your Music Finder data, call up the MUSIC FINDER Open/Save window from

the SYSTEM RESET page (page 154) of the UTILITY display, and follow the same

procedure as that in the Open/Save window for Voice (page 43, 47). To recall the saved

data, execute the appropriate operation from the MUSIC FINDER’s Open/Save window.

Records can be replaced or added (page 74).

In the instructions above, all Music Finder data is handled together. Besides this, when

you save or load style ﬁles, the Music Finder data that uses the relevant style ﬁle(s) is

stored or added automatically. When you copy or move a style ﬁle on a ﬂoppy disk to

the USER drive (page 45, 46), the record which was recorded when storing the relevant

style is automatically added to the PSR-2100/1100.

Music Finder data is compat-

ible for both the PSR-2100

and the PSR-1100.

Playing with the Songs

Quick Guide

Playing with the Songs

Playing Along with the PSR-2100/1100

In this section, try using the PSR-2100/1100’s song playback features to cancel or mute the right-hand melody while

you play the part yourself. It’s like having a very talented and versatile playing partner accompany you while you

perform.

1 - 4 Use the same operations as in “Song Playback” on pages 21 - 23.

5 Press the [TRACK 1] button to cancel the right hand melody part.

6 If you want to have the notation displayed as you play, press the [C] button. If you want to see the lyrics,

press the [B] button.

If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.

7 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button and play the part.

If you want, you can adjust the tempo by pressing the TEMPO[ ] [ ]

buttons.

8 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to stop playback.

Reference

on page 78

Song related

buttons

(R)

TRACK

To cancel the left hand part,

press the [TRACK 2] button.

If the selected song does not

contain lyric data, lyrics are

not displayed.

• If you want to start the song right

away without an intro, use the Sync

Start function. To set Sync Start to

standby, simultaneously hold down

the [TOP] button and press the

SONG [START/STOP] button. Song

playback starts automatically the

moment you start playing the melody.

• If you can hear the PSR-2100/1100

playing the melody part as well,

check the channel setting for the

melody part in the song data, and

change the channel assigned to

Track 1 (page 140). You can also

change the song channel itself per-

manently (page 106).

REC

START/STOP

TOP

NEW SONG SYNC. START

REC

START/STOP

TOP

NEW SONG SYNC. START

Playing with the Songs

Quick Guide

Recording

The PSR-2100/1100 lets you record, too — quickly and easily. Try out the Quick Recording feature now and capture

your keyboard performance.

1 - 3 Select a voice for recording. Use the same operations as in “Playing a Voice” on pages 25, 26.

4 Press the [REC] and [TOP] buttons simultaneously to select “New Song” for recording.

5 Press the [REC] button.

6 Recording starts as soon as you start playing the keyboard.

7 When you’ve ﬁnished recording, press the [REC] button.

8 To hear your newly recorded performance, return the song to the beginning by

using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button.

9 Save the recorded data as required (pages 39, 47).

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

NEW SONG SYNC. START

REC

The recorded data will be

lost if you turn off the

power. To keep your impor-

tant recordings, you’ll

need to save them to the

User drive or ﬂoppy disk.

CAUTION

REC

START/STOP

TOP

NEW SONG SYNC. START

PSR-2100/1100

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

When the power is turned on, the MAIN Display appears, showing important and relevant

operation information.

Pressing the [A]-[J] buttons when the MAIN Display appears calls up displays corresponding

to each button. The displays called up by the buttons (with the exception of [B] and [C]) are

called Open/Save displays (see following page). Pressing the [B] and [C] buttons calls up the

Lyrics display and Score display respectively.

1 Transpose (page 144)

The [TRANSPOSE] buttons allow the pitch of the keyboard and song to be shifted down or up in semitones. The transpose value by the

semitone shifted is displayed here.

2 Song (page 78)

The name of the currently selected song and other song information is displayed.

3 Playback Position of Song (page 78) or Accompaniment Style (page 62)

The current position of the song or the accompaniment style being played is displayed.

4 Tempo (page 53)

When a song or a accompaniment style is playing, the tempo is displayed.

5 Chord (page 65)

When [ACMP] is on, the chord speciﬁed in the left hand section is displayed.

6 Accompaniment Style (page 62)

The name, beat, and tempo of the accompaniment style selected currently is displayed.

7 Intro and Ending (page 69)

The names of the intro and ending of the currently selected style are displayed.

8 Octave (page 61)

The [UPPER OCTAVE] buttons allow the pitch of the keyboard to be shifted down or up in octave steps. The octave value shifted is displayed here.

9 Split Point (page 141)

Split Points are speciﬁc positions on the keyboard that divide the keyboard into separate sections. There are two kinds of Split Points: “A”, which

separates the auto accompaniment from the rest of the keyboard, and “L”, which divides the left-hand and right-hand sections.

0 Registration Sequence (page 145)

You can save your custom panel settings as a Registration Memory preset and recall it at any time pressing the appropriate REGISTRATION

MEMORY [1]-[8] button. You can also use the Registration Sequence function to program the Registration Memory presets to be selected in

any speciﬁed order, and step through that order by using the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons or the pedal. The Registration Sequence is displayed

here (unless Registration Sequence mis set to OFF).

A Main Part (page 57)

The voice selected for the Main part is displayed.

B Layer Part (page 59)

The voice selected for the Layer part is displayed.

C Left Part (page 60)

The voice selected for the Left part is displayed.

D Multi Pad Bank (page 76)

The Multi Pads allow you to instantly play back special phrases (such as rhythmic ﬁlls and melodies) during your performance, by pressing the

MULTI PAD [1]-[8] buttons. Multi Pad data is stored in banks (four pads to a bank), and both preset and user banks are available. The name of the

currently selected Multi Pad bank is displayed here.

E Registration Memory Bank (page 88)

Registration Memory presets are stored in banks, eight presets to a bank. The name of the currently selected Registration Memory bank is

displayed here.

F Volume balance of the parts (page 64)

You can change the volume balance by pressing the [1▲▼]-[8▲▼] buttons under the LCD. The volume balance of each part is displayed.

Contents shown in the Main Display

If the MAIN Display is

not shown, press the

[DIRECT ACCESS]

button followed by the

[EXIT] button.

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PSR-2100/1100

The PSR-2100/1100 utilizes a variety of data types — including voices, accompaniment styles, songs, multi pads and

registration memory settings. Much of this data is already programmed and contained in the PSR-2100/1100; you can

also create and edit your own data with some of the functions on the instrument.

All this data is stored in separate ﬁles — just as is done on a computer.

Here, we’ll show you how to use the basic operations of the display controls in handling and organizing the data of the

PSR-2100/1100 in ﬁles and folders.

Files can be opened, saved, named, moved, or deleted in their respective Open/Save displays. You can select these

displays according to their respective ﬁle types, as well: Song, Voice, Style, etc. Moreover, you can organize your data

efﬁciently by putting various ﬁles of the same type into a single folder.

The Open/Save displays for Song, Voice, Style, Multi Pad Bank and Registration Bank can be called up from the MAIN

display (the display shown when the power is turned on) by pressing the appropriate [A] - [J] button.

Open/Save Display

The following Open/

Save display types are

also available; however,

these are selected from

displays other than the

MAIN display

(page 154

• SYSTEM SETUP

• MIDI SETUP

• USER EFFECT

• MUSIC FINDER

Open/Save display for

Song (page 79)

handles the Song ﬁles.

Open/Save display for

Voice (page 57)

handles the Voice ﬁles.

Open/Save display for Style (page 62)

handles the Style ﬁles.

Open/Save display for Registration

Bank (page 88)

handles the Registration Bank ﬁles.

Open/Save display for

Multi Pads (page 76, 121)

handles the Multi Pad Bank

ﬁles.

If the MAIN screen is

not displayed, press the

[DIRECT ACCESS]

button followed by the

[EXIT] button.

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PSR-2100/1100

Example — Open/Save display

Each Open/Save display consists of three kinds of drive pages: PRESET, USER, and FLOPPY DISK.

In the examples given here, the Open/Save display for Voice is shown.

BACK NEXT

PRESET drive

The ﬁles that are pre-

programmed and installed

internally to the PSR-2100/1100

are kept here. Preset ﬁles can be

loaded but cannot be re-written.

However, you can use a preset

ﬁle as a basis for creating your

own original ﬁle (which can be

saved in the USER or FLOPPY

DISK drive).

USER drive

Files kept here are those

containing your own original

data, created or edited using the

various functions of the PSR-

2100/1100. They are stored

internally to the PSR-2100/1100.

FLOPPY DISK drive

You can also store your original

data to ﬂoppy disk.

Commercially available disk

software can also be called up

here. Naturally, these ﬁles are

available only when the

appropriate disk is inserted in

the ﬂoppy disk drive.

File

All data, both pre-

programmed and your own

original, are stored as “ﬁles.”

Current Memory

“Current Memory” is the area where the voice is called up when you

select a voice. Also it is the area where you edit your voice using the

SOUND CREATOR function. Your edited voice should then be saved

as a ﬁle in the USER or FLOPPY DISK drive.

Recording songs (page 95) and creating accompaniment styles

(page 111) are done within the current memory. Please make sure to

properly save this data to the USER/FLOPPY DISK drive as a ﬁle or

ﬁles. The data will be lost if you turn off the power without saving.

For details, see page 42.

Calls up the upper

level directory page.

In this example, the

voice folder selection

page can be called

up.

Changes drives among

PRESET, USER and

FLOPPY DISK.

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PSR-2100/1100

■ Files and Drives

BACK NEXT

FLOPPY DISKUSERPRESET

PRESET drive

Cannot be overwritten

Voice

Style

Song

Multi Pad Bank

Vocal Harmony Type

(PSR-2100 only)

MIDI Template

MIDI Setup

User Effect

Music Finder

USER drive

Voice

Style

Song

Multi Pad Bank

Registration Memory Bank

Vocal Harmony Type

MIDI Template

MIDI Setup

User Effect

Music Finder

FLOPPY DISK drives

Voice

Style

Song

Multi Pad Bank

Registration Memory Bank

MIDI Setup

User Effect

Music Finder

Copy

Copy & Paste / Cut & Paste

This is the Voice Open/Save display

called up by pressing the [PIANO] but-

ton in the VOICE section.

You can also manage ﬁles (copying,

saving, etc.) on the USER drive or

ﬂoppy disk by using a computer.

(page 157)

Select a Memory drive by

using the [BACK]/[NEXT]

buttons.

System Setup System Setup System Setup

The Open/Save display

indicates only those

ﬁles that can be man-

aged from the selected

display. The FD (Floppy

Disk) drive of the Voice

Open/Save display, for

example, indicates only

voices even if style or

song ﬁles are saved to

the ﬂoppy disk.

Save

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PSR-2100/1100

■ Features and Memory Drives

Voice

Style

One Touch Setting

Registration Memory

Music Finder

Record

System Setup

Song

Four Multi Pads

MIDI settings

User Vocal Harmony

User Effect

User Master EQ

Voice

Style

Registration Memory

Bank

Music Finder

System Setup

Song

Multi Pad Bank

MIDI Template

MIDI Setup

User Effect

Sound Creator

Style Creator

Panel settings

Song Creator

Multi Pad Creator

MIDI

Vocal Harmony Type

(PSR-2100 only)

User Effect

(Mixing Console)

Master EQ Edit

(Mixing Console)

(PSR-2100 only)

Unedited voice

Edit

Record/

Assemble

Creating a

New Record

Record

Edit

Data not maintained when the power is turned off

Features Current Memory

Data maintained when the power is turned off

Compare

USER drive

FLOPPY DISK drive

Save

The Save operation is executed from the

Open/Save display.

The corresponding Open/Save display

can be called up from the [FUNCTION]

→

UTILITY

→

SYSTEM RESET display.

Save

The data in the USER/

FLOPPY DISK drive is

maintained even when the

power is turned off. How-

ever, currently active data

in memory may be lost

when you select another

ﬁle or turn the power off.

Make sure to save any

necessary data in mem-

ory to the User drive or the

Floppy Disk drive before

selecting another ﬁle or

turning the power off.

CAUTION

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PSR-2100/1100

Select a ﬁle shown in the display. In this example, we’ll select a voice ﬁle.

First, press the VOICE [PIANO & HARPSI.] button to call up the display containing the ﬁles.

This display (“Open/Save” display) is typical of those used to call up and store ﬁles (voice ﬁles).

The PSR-2100/1100 already contains a variety of voices in the PRESET section. You can store your own original voices

created with the Sound Creator function to the USER or FLOPPY DISK section.

Selecting Files and Folders

ENTER

DATA ENTRY

BACK NEXT

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

END

Select “PRESET,” “USER,” or “FLOPPY

DISK” by using the [BACK][NEXT]

button.

Use the [1▲] - [7▲] buttons to

turn the pages.

When the amount of pages exceeds

seven, the bottom of the display changes

as shown below.

Press Next

Press Prev.(previous)

Select the ﬁle/folder.

There are two ways to select the ﬁle/folder:

• Press the [A] - [J] button.

Press the letter button corresponding to the

ﬁle/folder you wish to call up. (In the example

display shown above, the voice ﬁles are

shown.)

• Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial and the

[ENTER] button.

When you turn the [DATA ENTRY] dial, the

highlight moves among the available ﬁles/

folders. Highlight the desired ﬁle or folder

(voice ﬁles are shown in the example above)

and press the [ENTER] button to call up the

selected item.

Double-clicking the

appropriate [A] -[J] button

calls up the corresponding

ﬁle and returns to the MAIN

display.

Highlighting the desired ﬁle

and double-clicking the

[ENTER] button calls up the

corresponding ﬁle and

returns to the MAIN display.

Press the [EXIT] button

to go back to the MAIN

display.

You can go back to the

previous display by

pressing the [EXIT]

button.

Selecting a different language in the “LAN-

GUAGE” display (page 52, 154) may cause

the following problems.

• Some characters of the ﬁle names you

entered may be garbled.

• Files may not be accessible.

Restoring the original language solves

the above problems.

Reading the ﬁles on the computer with a

different language system may cause

similar problems to those above.

Exiting from small pop-up

windows

You can also exit from small

pop-up windows (such as in the

illustration below) by pressing

the [EXIT] button.

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PSR-2100/1100

Naming Files/Folders

You can assign names to ﬁles and folders. Any ﬁle/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK sections can be named or

renamed. Execute the following steps when there is data in the User drive. If there are Preset ﬁles/folders you wish to

rename, copy them beforehand (page 46) and use them as User ﬁles/folders.

File/Folder-related Operations

END

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Press the [1▼] (NAME) button (page 39).

The NAME display appears.

Select the appropriate ﬁle/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button.

The currently selected ﬁle/folder is highlighted. To select another ﬁle/folder, press one of the [A] -

[J] buttons.

To cancel, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.

Input the new name (page 48).

Press the [8▲] (OK) button.

To cancel, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.

A ﬁle/folder name can con-

tain up to 50 half size letters

(or 25 Hiragana and kanji let-

ters), including the Icon ID

(see the note below) and the

extension.

The ﬁle name will appear on

your computer as follows. If

you change the Icon ID or

the extension, the icon may

change or the ﬁle may not be

properly recognized.

ABCDE.S002.MID

File ID Icon ID

Extension

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PSR-2100/1100

Moving Files/Folders

You can move ﬁles and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any ﬁle/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK

sections can be moved, using the cut-and-paste operation described below.

END

Press the [2▼] (CUT) button (page 39).

The CUT display appears.

Select the desired ﬁle/folder for moving.

Select the appropriate ﬁle/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button.

The currently selected ﬁle/folder is highlighted. To select another ﬁle/folder, press one of the [A] -

[J] buttons.

Several ﬁles/folders can be selected together, even those from other pages. To release or cancel

the selection, press the button of the selected ﬁle/folder again.

Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to select all the ﬁles/folders in the displayed page (USER/FLOPPY

DISK). When the [6▼] (ALL) button is pressed the [6▼] button changes to “ALL OFF” button to

release or cancel the selection.

Press the [7▼] (OK) button.

To stop the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.

This operation cannot be

used to directly move a ﬁle/

folder from one ﬂoppy disk to

another. If you want to do

this, cut and paste the ﬁle or

folder from the ﬁrst ﬂoppy

disk to the USER page, then

change disks and paste it to

the FLOPPY DISK page.

All ﬁles/folders in a ﬂoppy

disk can be copied to

another disk in one batch

(page 153).

Call up the destination display.

Only the USER and FLOPPY DISK pages can be selected as the destination.

Press the [4▼] (PASTE) button.

The ﬁle/folder you cut is now pasted at the destination.

After being pasted, the ﬁles

are automatically re-ordered

in alphabetical order and

displayed.

About ﬁles/folders in a

ﬂoppy disk

In the FLOPPY DISK page

of the Open/Save display,

only the ﬁles which can be

handled in that Open/Save

display will appear — even

though a folder in a ﬂoppy

disk can contain different

kinds of ﬁles.

In the case of a folder cut-

and-paste operation (for

ﬂoppy disk), an entire folder

can be cut; however, only the

speciﬁc ﬁles which can be

handled in the current Open/

Save display will be pasted.

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PSR-2100/1100

Copying Files/Folders

You can also copy ﬁles and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any ﬁle/folder in the PRESET, USER and

FLOPPY DISK sections can be copied, using the copy-and-paste operation described below.

Deleting Files/Folders

You can also delete ﬁles and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any ﬁle/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK

sections can be deleted, using the operation described below.

END

Press the [3▼] (COPY) button (page 39).

The COPY display appears.

Select the desired ﬁle/folder.

Select the appropriate ﬁle/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button.

The currently selected ﬁle/folder is highlighted. To select another ﬁle/folder, press one of the [A] - [J]

buttons.

Several ﬁles/folders can be selected together, even those from other pages. To release or cancel the

selection, press the button of the selected ﬁle/folder again.

Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to select all the ﬁles/folders in the displayed page (PRESET/USER/

FLOPPY DISK). When the [6▼] (ALL) button is pressed, the [6▼] (ALL) button changes to “ALL

OFF,” letting you release or cancel the selection.

Press the [7▼] (OK)

button.

To stop the operation,

press the [8▼] (CANCEL)

button.

This operation cannot be

used to directly copy a ﬁle/

folder from one ﬂoppy disk to

another. If you want to do

this, copy and paste the ﬁle

or folder from the ﬁrst ﬂoppy

disk to the User page, then

change disks and paste it to

the Floppy Disk page.

Call up the destination

display.

Only the USER and FLOPPY

DISK pages can be selected

as the destination.

Press the [4▼]

(PASTE) button.

The ﬁle/folder you copied

is now pasted at the

destination.

Please note that the copy

functions are intended for

your personal use only.

END

Press the [5▼] (DELETE) button (page 39).

The DELETE display appears.

Select the desired ﬁle/folder.

Select the appropriate ﬁle/folder and press the [7▼](OK)

button.

The currently selected ﬁle/folder is highlighted. To select

another ﬁle/folder, press one of the [A] - [J] buttons.

Several ﬁles/folders can be selected together, even

those from other pages. To release or cancel the

selection, press the button of the selected ﬁle/folder

again.

Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to select all the ﬁles/folders

in the displayed page (USER/FLOPPY DISK). When the

[6▼] (ALL) button is pressed, the [6▼] (ALL) button

changes to “ALL OFF,” letting you release or cancel the

selection.

Press the [7▼] (OK) button.

To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL)

button.

The message “Are you sure you want to delete the

“******” ﬁle (or data/folder)? YES/NO” appears.

YES...........Deletes the highlighted item.

NO.............Exits from the prompt without deleting.

When several ﬁles have been selected, the message

“Are you sure you want to delete the “******” ﬁle (or

data/folder)? YES/YES ALL/NO/CANCEL” appears.

YES/NO.....Deletes the highlighted item (YES), or

skips the highlighted item without

deleting (NO).

YES ALL...Deletes all selected items at once.

CANCEL...Exits from the prompt without deleting.

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PSR-2100/1100

Saving Files

This operation lets you save the data (such as song and voice) you created in current

memory (page 40) to ﬁles. The ﬁles can be saved only to the USER and FLOPPY DISK

drives.

If the Open/Save display for the type of data you wish to save is not shown, ﬁrst return to

the MAIN display by pressing the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button.

Then, press the appropriate button [A]–[J] from the MAIN display to call up the respective

Open/Save display. Finally, call up the USER or FLOPPY DISK page (pages 38, 40).

Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder

This operation lets you easily organize your various ﬁles into categories by creating a new

folder for each category. Folders can only be created in the USER and FLOPPY DISK

sections.

Displaying Upper Level pages

Press the [8▼] (UP) button to call up the upper level pages. For example, you can call up the folder level pages from

the ﬁle level pages.

Entering Characters and Changing Icons

The internal memory capac-

ity of the PSR-2100/1100 is

about 580KB (PSR-2100) /

260KB (PSR-1100). Memory

capacity for 2DD and 2HD

ﬂoppy disks is about 720KB

and 1440KB, respectively.

When you store data to these

locations, all ﬁle types of the

PSR-2100/1100 (Voice,

Style, Song, Registration,

etc.) are stored together.

The ﬁles of commercially

available DOC software and

Yamaha Disklavier software,

and their edited ﬁles on the

PSR-2100/1100, can be

stored in the USER page,

but cannot be copied to

another ﬂoppy disk.

Folder directories can con-

tain up to four levels.

The maximum total number

of ﬁles and folders which can

be stored is 800 (PSR-2100)

/ 400 (PSR-1100), but this

may differ depending on the

length of the ﬁle names.

The maximum number of

ﬁles which can be stored in a

folder will be 250.

Enter a name for the new ﬁle (page 48).

Press the [8▲] (OK) button.

To stop the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.

Press the [6▼]

(SAVE) button.

Enter the name of the new folder (page 48).

Press the [8▲](OK) button.

To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.

Call up the page to

which you wish to

create a new folder

and press the [7▼]

(NEW) button

(page 39).

If you select Japanese as the Language in the

FUNCTION display (page 154), the following

different types of characters and sizes can be

entered:

(kana-kan)

Hiragana and kanji, marks (full size)

(kana)

Katakana (normal size), marks (full size)

(kana)

Katakana (half size), marks (half size)

A B C — Alphabet (capital and small letters, full size), numbers (full size), marks (full size)

ABC — Alphabet (capital and small letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size)

If you’ve selected a language other than Japanese in the FUNCTION display (page 154), the

following types of characters are available:

CASE — Alphabet (capital letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size)

case — Alphabet (lowercase letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size)

Change the type of character by using the [1▲] button.

Call up the ICON SELECT display by pressing

the [1▼] button. This lets you change the icon

at the left of the ﬁle name.

Press the [1▼]

(NAME), [6▼]

(SAVE), or [7▼]

(NEW) button

(page 39).

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PSR-2100/1100

Entering Characters

The instructions that follow show you how to enter characters in naming your ﬁles and folders. The method is much the

same as inputting names and numbers to your cell phone.

Move the cursor to the desired position by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial.

Press the appropriate button, [2▲] - [7▲] and [2▼]- [6▼], corresponding to the character you wish to enter.

Several different characters are assigned to each button, and the characters change each time you press the button.

To actually enter the selected character, move the cursor or press another letter-input button.

If you’ve entered a character by mistake, move the cursor to the character letter you wish to erase and press the

[7▼] (DELETE) button. If you want to delete all of the characters on the line at once, press and hold down the

[7▼] (DELETE) button for a while. When the cursor appears in reverse display (highlight), only the reversed area is

deleted.

To actually enter the new name, press the [8▲] (OK) button.

To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button.

■ Converting into Kanji (Japanese language)

This applies only if you are using the “ (kana-kan)” button (in Japanese). When

the input “hiragana” characters are shown in reverse display (highlighted), press the

[ENTER] button one or several times to convert the characters into the appropriate

kanji. The reversed area can be changed by the [DATA ENTRY] dial. The converted

area can be changed back to “hiragana” by the [7▼] (DELETE) button. The reversed

area can be cleared at once by the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. To actually enter the

change, press the [8▲] (OK) button or enter the next character. To enter the

“hiragana” itself (without converting it), press the [8▲] (OK) button.

■ Entering special character marks (umlaut, accent, Japanese “ ” and “ ”)

Select a character to which a character mark is to be added and press the [6▼] button

(before actual entry of the character.)

■ Entering miscellaneous characters (marks)

You can call up the mark list by pressing the [6▼] button, after actually entering a

character by moving the cursor.

Move the cursor to the desired mark by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, then press the

▲] (OK) or [ENTER] button.

■ Entering numbers

First, select one of the following: “A B C” (full-size alphabet), “ABC” “CASE” (half-size

capital alphabet) and “case” (half-size lowercase alphabet). Then, press and hold

down the appropriate button, [2

▲] - [7▲] and [2▼] - [5▼], for a while, or press it

repeatedly until the desired number is selected.

The following half-size

marks cannot be used in

naming ﬁles and folders:

¥ \ / : * ? “ < > |

In the case of characters

which are not accompanied

by special character marks

(with the exception of kana-

kan and half-size katakana),

you can call up the mark list

by pressing the [6▼] button

after selecting a character

(before actual entry of a

character).

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PSR-2100/1100

Changing the Icon

You can also change the icon that

appears at the left of the ﬁle name.

Call up the ICON SELECT display by

pressing the [1▼] (ICON) button from

the character input display (page 48).

Select the desired icon by using the

[A] - [J] buttons, or by using the

[3▲▼] - [5▲▼] buttons, then enter

the selected icon by pressing the [8▲]

(OK) button.

This convenient control lets you easily select items in the display or quickly change parameter values. The actual

function of the [DATA ENTRY] dial differs depending on the selected display.

■ Adjusting values

You can change parameter values by

rotating the [DATA ENTRY] dial. In the

example [BALANCE] display, turning

the dial adjusts the volume of the part

in reverse display (highlight). To adjust

the volume of another part, ﬁrst select

the part by pressing the [

▲▼] button

corresponding to the part, then rotate

the [DATA ENTRY] dial.

■ Selecting items

You can select the desired item or

function in the display by rotating the

[DATA ENTRY] dial. The selected item

can then be called up or executed by

using the [ENTER] button.

In the example VOICE display, you

can select the desired voice ﬁle with

the [DATA ENTRY] dial, and call up

the selected item by pressing the

[ENTER] button on the panel.

BACK NEXT

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Cancels the icon selection operation.

Tur ns pages

for icon

selection.

Enters the

selected icon.

Using the [DATA ENTRY] Dial

DATA ENTRY

ENTER

DATA ENTRY

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PSR-2100/1100

With the convenient Direct Access function, you can instantly call up the desired display — with just a single additional

button press. Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button and a message appears in the display prompting you to press the

appropriate button. Then, simply press the button corresponding to the desired setting display to instantly call up that

display. In the example below, Direct Access is used to call up the display for selecting the Chord Fingering (page 142).

Refer to the Direct Access Chart (page 51) for a list of the displays that can be called up

with the Direct Access function.

Direct Access — Instant Selection of Displays

USER

ENTER

EXIT

BALANCE

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

DIRECT

ACCESS

PART

CHANNEL ON/OFF

FREEZE MEMORY

DATA ENTRY

ORGAN FLUTES

STRINGS CHOIR & PAD

GUITAR

MAIN

BACK NEXT

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

LAYER

BASS

PIANO & HARPSI.

E.PIANO

UPPER OCTAVE

WOODWIND

PERCUSSION

VARIATION

MONOTOUCH

SUSTAIN

DSP

HARMONY/

ECHO

LEFT

HOLD

SYNTH.

BRASS

ORGAN &

ACCORDION

VOICE EFFECT

VOIC E

ONE TOUCH SETTING

REGISTRATION MEMORY

MIC.

EFFECT

RESET

VOCAL

HARMONY

MIC.

SETTING

VH TYPE

SELECT

TALK

OVER

SIGNAL

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

TRANSPOSE

ACMP

STANDBY

INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

BALLAD USERLATIN

POP & ROCK

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

BALLROOM

DANCE

RESET

MIN MAX

FADE

IN/OUT

TEMPO

STOP

TAP TEMPO

RESET

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

STYLE

MARCH &

WALTZ

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

1 REPEAT

SWING &

JAZZ

MULTI PAD

STYLE CONTROL

MASTER VOLUME

PART

DIRECT

ACCESS

DIRECT

ACCESS

ACMP

Here’s a convenient way to

return to the MAIN display

from any other display:

Simply press the [DIRECT

ACCESS] button, then the

[EXIT] button.

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PSR-2100/1100

Direct Access Chart

Operation: [DIRECT ACCESS] button + button listed below Corresponding LCD display and function

See pages

SONG [TRACK1]

FUNCTION

SONG SETTING

TRACK1 CHANNEL selection 140

[TRACK2] TRACK2 CHANNEL selection 140

[EXTRA TRACKS]

140

[REPEAT]

[METRONOME] UTILITY METRONOME settings 151

[REC] —

[TOP] —

[START/STOP] —

[REW] —

[FF] —

STYLE [POP & ROCK]

FUNCTION

STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT SPLIT POINT (ACMP) setting 141

[SWING & JAZZ]

[BALLROOM]

[MARCH & WALTZ]

[BALLAD]

[DANCE]

[LATIN]

[USER]

TRANSPOSE [ ] CONTROLLER TRANSPOSE assignment 144

[] MIXING CONSOLE TUNE TRANSPOSE settings 126

TEMPO [ ]

FUNCTION

MIDI MIDI CLOCK setting 148

[]

[TAP TEMPO]

UTILITY

TAP settings 152

[FADE IN/OUT] FADE IN/OUT settings 151

MULTI PAD [1]

MULTI PAD MULTI PAD EDIT 77

[2]

[3]

[4]

[STOP] DIGITAL RECORDING MULTI PAD CREATOR REPEAT/CHORD MATCH settings 122

STYLE CONTROL [ACMP] FUNCTION CHORD FINGERING FINGERING TYPE selection 141

[BREAK]

MIXING CONSOLE (STYLE PART)

VOLUME/VOICE

VOICE settings

125[INTRO] PANPOT settings

MAIN [A] VOLUME settings

MAIN [B]

FILTER

HARMONIC CONTENT settings

126

MAIN [C] BRIGHTNESS settings

MAIN [D]

EFFECT

REVERB settings

127[ENDING/rit.] CHORUS settings

[AUTO FILL IN] DSP settings

[OTS LINK]

FUNCTION STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT 141

[SYNC. STOP] SYNC. STOP WINDOW setting

[SYNC. START] —

[START/STOP] —

DIGITAL STUDIO [SOUND CREATOR]

FUNCTION MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE

MASTER TUNING setting

138

[DIGITAL RECORDING] SCALE TUNING setting

[MIXING CONSOLE] PSR-2100 MIXING CONSOLE EQ settings 130

PSR-1100 —

MENU [DEMO]

FUNCTION

UTILITY

LANGUAGE selection 154

[HELP] LCD BRIGHTNESS settings 152

[FUNCTION] MIDI MIDI settings 148

[DIRECT ACCESS] Exit from the Direct Access mode

[BALANCE]

MIXING CONSOLE (SONG PART) VOLUME/VOICE

VOLUME settings

125

[CHANNEL ON/OFF] VOICE settings

[NEXT] —

[BACK] —

VOICE PART [MAIN]

MIXING CONSOLE TUNE OCTAVE settings 126[LAYER]

[LEFT]

[MUSIC FINDER] MUSIC FINDER MUSIC FINDER SEARCH1 (Searching the records) 34

[EXIT] Return to the MAIN display

[ENTER] —

VOICE EFFECT [LEFT HOLD]

FUNCTION

STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT

SPLIT POINT (LEFT) setting 141

[TOUCH] CONTROLLER KEYBOARD TOUCH assignment 144

[SUSTAIN] MIXING CONSOLE EFFECT REVERB settings 127

[HARMONY/ECHO] FUNCTION HARMONY/ECHO 146

[MONO]

MIXING CONSOLE

TUNE PORTAMENTO TIME settings 126

[DSP]

EFFECT

DSP settings

127

[VARIATION] EFFECT TYPE selection

VOICE [PIANO & HARPSI]

FUNCTION VOICE SET settings 146

[E.PIANO]

[ORGAN & ACCORDION]

[PERCUSSION]

[GUITAR]

[BASS]

[BRASS]

[WOODWIND]

[STRINGS]

[CHOIR&PAD]

[SYNTH.]

[XG]

[USER]

[ORGAN FLUTES] (PSR-2100 only)

MIXING CONSOLE EQ settings 130

UPPER OCTAVE [ ] —

[] —

MIC. (PSR-2100 only) [VH TYPE SELECT] VOCAL HARMONY VOCAL HARMONY EDIT (Editing the VOCAL HARMONY parameters) 131

[MIC. SETTING]

MIXING CONSOLE EFFECT

MIC. EFFECT TYPE selection

127[VOCAL HARMONY] MIC. REVERB setting

[EFFECT] MIC. DSP setting

[TALK] MIC. SETTING TALK SETTING 135

ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] —

[2] —

[3] —

[4] —

REGISTRATION MEMORY [FREEZE] FUNCTION FREEZE 145

[1]

REGISTRATION BANK REGISTRATION EDIT (Editing the RAGISTRATION) 88

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]

[MEMORY]

FUNCTION

REGISTRATION SEQUENCE (Creating the REGISTRATION SEQUENCE) 145

PEDAL [PEDAL1]

CONTROLLER

PEDAL1 function assignment

142

[PEDAL2] PEDAL2 function assignment

WHEEL [PITCH BEND] MIXING CONSOLE TUNE PITCH BEND RANGE settings 126

[MODULATION] (PSR-2100 only) FUNCTION CONTROLLER MODULATION WHEEL settings 144

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PSR-2100/1100

The Help messages give you explanations and descriptions of all the main functions and features of the PSR-2100/1100.

Help Messages

USER

ENTER

EXIT

BALANCE

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

DIRECT

ACCESS

PART

CHANNEL ON/OFF

FREEZE MEMORY

DATA ENTRY

ORGAN FLUTES

STRINGS CHOIR & PAD

GUITAR

MAIN

BACK NEXT

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

LAYER

BASS

PIANO & HARPSI.

E.PIANO

UPPER OCTAVE

WOODWIND

PERCUSSION

VARIATION

MONOTOUCH

SUSTAIN

DSP

HARMONY/

ECHO

LEFT

HOLD

SYNTH.

BRASS

ORGAN &

ACCORDION

VOICE EFFECT

VOIC E

ONE TOUCH SETTING

REGISTRATION MEMORY

MIC.

EFFECT

RESET

VOCAL

HARMONY

MIC.

SETTING

VH TYPE

SELECT

TALK

OVER

SIGNAL

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

TRANSPOSE

ACMP

STANDBY

INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

BALLAD USERLATIN

POP & ROCK

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

BALLROOM

DANCE

RESET

MIN MAX

FADE

IN/OUT

TEMPO

STOP

TAP TEMPO

RESET

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

STYLE

MARCH &

WALTZ

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

1 REPEAT

SWING &

JAZZ

MULTI PAD

STYLE CONTROL

MASTER VOLUME

PART

HELP

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

ENTER

DATA ENTRY

BACK NEXT

EXIT

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

2-1 Select the desired

Help topic.

2-2 Call up the

topic.

Select the Language, if necessary. The

language selected here are also used for

various “Messages” shown during operations.

Help messages can be displayed in

any one of the following languages:

ENGLISH

JAPANESE

GERMAN

FRENCH

SPANISH

ITALIAN

When two or more pages available,

use this to select different pages.

Help messages also feature links to the detailed explanation or actual

setting display of the selected topic. Simply select the underlined word

(using the [DATA ENTRY] dial), and press the [ENTER] button to jump to

the detailed explanation or actual setting display of the selected topic.

Press this to return

to the previous

display.

END

The language can also be selected in

the FUNCTION “LANGUAGE”

(page 154) display.

Selecting a different language here

may cause the following problems.

• Some characters of the ﬁle names

you entered may be garbled.

• Files may not be accessible.

Restoring the original language

solves the above problems.

Reading the ﬁles on the computer

with a different language system may

cause similar problems to those

above.

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PSR-2100/1100

The metronome provides a click sound, giving you an accurate tempo guide when you practice, or letting you hear and

check how a speciﬁc tempo sounds.

The metronome starts by pressing the [METRONOME]

button. Adjust the

tempo by using the TEMPO[ ] [ ] buttons (see below).

To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME] button again.

This section shows you to adjust the playback tempo — which not only affects the metronome, but also the playback of

a song or an accompaniment style.

Using the Metronome

USER

ENTER

EXIT

BALANCE

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

DIRECT

ACCESS

PART

CHANNEL ON/OFF

FREEZE MEMORY

DATA ENTRY

ORGAN FLUTES

STRINGS CHOIR & PAD

GUITAR

MAIN

BACK NEXT

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

LAYER

BASS

PIANO & HARPSI.

E.PIANO

UPPER OCTAVE

WOODWIND

PERCUSSION

VARIATION

MONOTOUCH

SUSTAIN

DSP

HARMONY/

ECHO

LEFT

HOLD

SYNTH.

BRASS

ORGAN &

ACCORDION

VOICE EFFECT

VOIC E

ONE TOUCH SETTING

REGISTRATION MEMORY

MIC.

EFFECT

RESET

VOCAL

HARMONY

MIC.

SETTING

VH TYPE

SELECT

TALK

OVER

SIGNAL

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

TRANSPOSE

ACMP

STANDBY

INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

BALLAD USERLATIN

POP & ROCK

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

BALLROOM

DANCE

RESET

MIN MAX

FADE

IN/OUT

TEMPO

STOP

TAP TEMPO

RESET

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

STYLE

MARCH &

WALTZ

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

1 REPEAT

SWING &

JAZZ

MULTI PAD

STYLE CONTROL

MASTER VOLUME

PART

METRO-

NOME

The sound, volume level,

and the beat (time signature)

of the metronome can all be

changed (page 151).

Adjusting the Tempo

USER

ENTER

EXIT

BALANCE

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

DIRECT

ACCESS

PART

CHANNEL ON/OFF

FREEZE MEMORY

DATA ENTRY

ORGAN FLUTES

STRINGS CHOIR & PAD

GUITAR

MAIN

BACK NEXT

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

LAYER

BASS

PIANO & HARPSI.

E.PIANO

UPPER OCTAVE

WOODWIND

PERCUSSION

VARIATION

MONOTOUCH

SUSTAIN

DSP

HARMONY/

ECHO

LEFT

HOLD

SYNTH.

BRASS

ORGAN &

ACCORDION

VOICE EFFECT

VOIC E

ONE TOUCH SETTING

REGISTRATION MEMORY

MIC.

EFFECT

RESET

VOCAL

HARMONY

MIC.

SETTING

VH TYPE

SELECT

TALK

OVER

SIGNAL

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

TRANSPOSE

ACMP

STANDBY

INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

BALLAD USERLATIN

POP & ROCK

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

BALLROOM

DANCE

RESET

MIN MAX

FADE

IN/OUT

TEMPO

STOP

TAP TEMPO

RESET

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

STYLE

MARCH &

WALTZ

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

1 REPEAT

SWING &

JAZZ

MULTI PAD

STYLE CONTROL

MASTER VOLUME

PART

TEMPO

TAP TEMPO

RESET

Songs and accompaniment

styles have been given

default (initial) tempo

settings, designed to best

suit the song/style.

TEMPO

TAP TEMPO

RESET

EXIT

Press either the TEMPO [ ]

button or the [] button.

Adjust the tempo by using either the TEMPO [ ]

[] buttons or the [DATA ENTRY] dial.

The number in the display indicates how many

quarter-note beats there are in one minute. The

range is between 5 and 500. The higher the value,

the faster the tempo.

When you change the tempo, both tempos of the

current song and style will be changed to the same

tempo. To restore their respective default (initial)

tempo settings, press both the TEMPO [ ] [ ]

buttons simultaneously. Also refer to the “Tempo

Indications — MAIN display” (page 54) for more

about tempo.

1 2

Press this to

close the

TEMPO display.

END

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data

PSR-2100/1100

Tap Tempo

This useful feature lets you tap out the tempo for a song or an accompaniment style.

Simply tap the [TAP TEMPO] button at the desired speed, and the tempo of the song or

the accompaniment style changes to match your tapping.

■ Tempo Indications — MAIN Display

There are three different tempo indications in the Main display, as shown below.

Hitting the [TAP TEMPO]

button produces a tapping

sound. You can change this

sound, if desired (page 152).

You can also use Tap Tempo

to automatically start the

song or accompaniment

style at the desired tempo.

While both the song and

accompaniment style are

stopped, tap the [TAP

TEMPO] button several

times, and the selected

accompaniment style starts

automatically at the tempo

you tapped. While a song is

set to Sync. Start stand-by

(page 63, 79), tapping the

[TAP TEMPO] button starts

the song playback in the

same manner. For songs

and styles in 2/4 and 4/4

time, tap four times; for 3/4

time, tap three times; for 5/4

time, tap ﬁve times.

TEMPO

TAP TEMPO

RESET

Tap the [TAP TEMPO] button twice

to change the tempo.

Playback the song or the

accompaniment style

(page 62, 79).

Indicates the default (initial) tempo

setting for the currently selected

song (unless the tempo has been

changed manually).

Indicates the current tempo for the

selected song, accompaniment

style or the metronome which is

now playing back. When nothing is

playing back (stopped), this

indicates the tempo for the selected

style. When the song and style are

played back simultaneously, the

tempo of the style is automatically

changed to match the tempo of the

song, and is displayed here. This

tempo is used for recording when

recording a song or

accompaniment style.

Indicates the default (initial) tempo

setting for the currently selected

accompaniment style (unless the

tempo has been changed

manually).

PSR-2100/1100

Reference

Playing the Demos

The PSR-2100/1100 is an extraordinarily versatile and sophisticated instrument, featuring a wide variety of dynamic

voices and rhythms, plus a wealth of advanced functions. Three different types of Demo songs have been specially

prepared showcasing the stunning sound and features of the PSR-2100/1100.

USER

ENTER

EXIT

BALANCE

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

DIRECT

ACCESS

PART

CHANNEL ON/OFF

FREEZE MEMORY

DATA ENTRY

ORGAN FLUTES

STRINGS CHOIR & PAD

GUITAR

MAIN

BACK NEXT

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

LAYER

BASS

PIANO & HARPSI.

E.PIANO

UPPER OCTAVE

WOODWIND

PERCUSSION

VARIATION

MONOTOUCH

SUSTAIN

DSP

HARMONY/

ECHO

LEFT

HOLD

SYNTH.

BRASS

ORGAN &

ACCORDION

VOICE EFFECT

VOIC E

ONE TOUCH SETTING

REGISTRATION MEMORY

MIC.

EFFECT

RESET

VOCAL

HARMONY

MIC.

SETTING

VH TYPE

SELECT

TALK

OVER

SIGNAL

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

TRANSPOSE

ACMP

STANDBY

INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

BALLAD USERLATIN

POP & ROCK

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

BALLROOM

DANCE

RESET

MIN MAX

FADE

IN/OUT

TEMPO

STOP

TAP TEMPO

RESET

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

STYLE

MARCH &

WALTZ

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

1REPEAT

SWING &

JAZZ

MULTI PAD

STYLE CONTROL

MASTER VOLUME

PART

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

BACK NEXT

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

2-3 Press one of these buttons to

start the desired demo.

2-2 Use these to select

different display pages.

Press this to play back all Demo songs/items continuously, starting

from the ﬁrst item at the top left of the display. This is available only

from the FUNCTION page.

All of the available demos are played back in sequence, starting from the one

at top left. The VOICE and STYLE pages do not have the [AUTO] button;

however, all demo songs are played back in sequence.

Pressing this button cancels the interactive features of the Function Demos

(otherwise available in step 3 below).

2-1 Use the [BACK][NEXT] buttons to select the desired Demo category.

Function Demos ....... These demonstrate each of the different functions.

Voice Demos ............. These showcase the voices.

Style Demos.............. These introduce you to the rhythms and accompaniment styles.

Playing the Demos

PSR-2100/1100

EXIT

END

Return to the MAIN screen.

ENTER

MAIN

BACK NEXT

LEFT

LAYER

This example shows the Sound System

in the FUNCTION demo.

For the Function demos, an introduction screen appears in the display and

the Demo starts playing.

Select the desired word or item by using the

[DATAENTRY] dial, then press the [ENTER]

button or number buttons ([1▼], [2▼], etc.)

to call it up.

Use the [BACK][NEXT]

buttons in the introduction

screen to call up the previ-

ous or next page.

Press the SONG [START/

STOP] button to stop the

Demo song. To start the

Demo again from the point

at which it was stopped,

press the SONG [START/

STOP] button again.

Rewind and fast-forward

can also be used with the

Demo songs (page 81).

PSR-2100/1100

Voices

The PSR-2100/1100 gives you an enormous selection of authentic voices, including various keyboard instruments,

strings and brass — and many, many more.

USER

ENTER

EXIT

BALANCE

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

DIRECT

ACCESS

PART

CHANNEL ON/OFF

FREEZE MEMORY

DATA ENTRY

ORGAN FLUTES

STRINGS CHOIR & PAD

GUITAR

MAIN

BACK NEXT

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

LAYER

BASS

PIANO & HARPSI.

E.PIANO

UPPER OCTAVE

WOODWIND

PERCUSSION

VARIATION

MONOTOUCH

SUSTAIN

DSP

HARMONY/

ECHO

LEFT

HOLD

SYNTH.

BRASS

ORGAN &

ACCORDION

VOICE EFFECT

VOIC E

ONE TOUCH SETTING

REGISTRATION MEMORY

MIC.

EFFECT

RESET

VOCAL

HARMONY

MIC.

SETTING

VH TYPE

SELECT

TALK

OVER

SIGNAL

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

TRANSPOSE

ACMP

STANDBY

INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

BALLAD USERLATIN

POP & ROCK

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

BALLROOM

DANCE

RESET

MIN MAX

FADE

IN/OUT

TEMPO

STOP

TAP T EMPO

RESET

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

STYLE

MARCH &

WALTZ

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

1REPEAT

SWING &

JAZZ

MULTI PAD

STYLE CONTROL

MASTER VOLUME

PART

USER ORGAN FLUTES

STRINGS CHOIR & PAD

GUITAR BASS

PIANO & HARPSI.

E.PIANO

WOODWIND

PERCUSSION

SYNTH.

BRASS

ORGAN &

ACCORDION

VOICE

Selecting a Voice

USER ORGAN FLUTES

STRINGS CHOIR & PAD

GUITAR BASS

PIANO & HARPSI.

E.PIANO

WOODWIND

PERCUSSION

SYNTH.

BRASS

ORGAN &

ACCORDION

VOICE

MAIN

LEFT

LAYER

Select the desired voice group.

The voice you’re selecting

here belongs to the MAIN

part, and is called the MAIN

voice. (See page 59 for more

information.)

You’ll want to hear the

MAIN voice all by itself —

so make sure that the

LAYER and LEFT parts

are turned off.

Press the [MAIN] button to turn the MAIN part on, then press [F] button to call

up the menu for selecting the MAIN voice.

When you select a voice

group, the last selected

voice will automatically be

selected.

Turn MAIN on.

Voices

PSR-2100/1100

Voice Characteristics

The voice type and its deﬁning characteristics are indicated above the voice name.

Live! (PSR-2100 only)

These acoustic instrument sounds were sampled in stereo, to produce a truly authentic, rich sound — full of

atmosphere and ambience.

Cool!

These voices capture the dynamic textures and subtle nuances of electric instruments — thanks to a huge amount

of memory and some very sophisticated programming.

Sweet!

These acoustic instrument sounds also beneﬁt from Yamaha’s sophisticated technology — and feature a sound so

ﬁnely detailed and natural, you’ll swear you’re playing the real thing!

Drum

Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the

keyboard.

SFX

Various special effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard.

Organ Flutes! (PSR-2100 only)

This authentic organ voice lets you use the Sound Creator to adjust the various footages and craft your own

original organ sounds.

Keyboard Percussion

When one of the drum of SFX kits is selected in the PERCUSSION voice group, various drum, percussion, and special

effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard. The various drums and

percussion instruments of the Standard Kit are indicated by symbols below the assigned keys. Keep in mind that even

though different kits feature different sounds, some same-named sounds in different kits are identical.

Refer to the separate Data List (Drum/key Assignment List) for a listing of the sounds in each drum/SFX kit.

END

EXIT

Play the keyboard to hear the

selected

voice.

Press this to return

to the MAIN

display.

BACK NEXT

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

3-3 Select the voice.

3-1 Select the

memory

location of

the voice

(PRESET/

USER/

FLOPPY

DISK).

Press this to start the

demo of the selected

voice. To stop the demo

at any time, press this

button again.

Press this to call up the display for selecting the voice group.

Indicates that the display is for

selecting the MAIN voice (page 25).

3-2 Select the

various pages

in the current

voice group.

Selecting a voice automati-

cally selects the best-suited

effect and other settings for

that particular voice. You can

disable this so that settings

are not automatically

selected (page 146).

You can set how much the

volume of the voice changes

according to your playing

strength (page 144).

For a list of the available

voices, refer to the separate

Data List.

You can set whether the

voice bank and program

change numbers (“MSB-

LSB-Program Change num-

ber” at the right above the

voice name) are displayed or

not (page 152).

XG is a major enhancement

of the GM System level 1 for-

mat, and was developed by

Yamaha specially to provide

more voices and variations,

as well as greater expressive

control over voices and

effects, and to ensure com-

patibility of data well into the

future.

Voices

PSR-2100/1100

The PSR-2100/1100 lets you set three voices for simultaneous play: MAIN, LAYER, and LEFT. By effectively combining

these three, you can create richly textured, multi-instrument setups for your performance.

Playing a layer of two voices

Playing two voices separately — on the left

and right sections of the keyboard

Playing three different voices — one on the

left section of the keyboard, plus a layer of

two on the right

Layer — Layering Two Different Voices

Layer/Left — Playing Several Sounds Simultaneously

USER

ENTER

EXIT

BALANCE

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

DIRECT

ACCESS

PART

CHANNEL ON/OFF

FREEZE MEMORY

DATA ENTRY

ORGAN FLUTES

STRINGS CHOIR & PAD

GUITAR

MAIN

BACK NEXT

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

LAYER

BASS

PIANO & HARPSI.

E.PIANO

UPPER OCTAVE

WOODWIND

PERCUSSION

VARIATION

MONOTOUCH

SUSTAIN

DSP

HARMONY/

ECHO

LEFT

HOLD

SYNTH.

BRASS

ORGAN &

ACCORDION

VOICE EFFECT

VOIC E

ONE TOUCH SETTING

REGISTRATION MEMORY

MIC.

EFFECT

RESET

VOCAL

HARMONY

MIC.

SETTING

VH TYPE

SELECT

TALK

OVER

SIGNAL

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

TRANSPOSE

ACMP

STANDBY

INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

BALLAD USERLATIN

POP & ROCK

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

BALLROOM

DANCE

RESET

MIN MAX

FADE

IN/OUT

TEMPO

STOP

TAP TEMPO

RESET

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

STYLE

MARCH &

WALTZ

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

1 REPEAT

SWING &

JAZZ

MULTI PAD

STYLE CONTROL

MASTER VOLUME

PART

MAIN

LEFT

LAYER

LAYER part

MAIN part

LEFT part

MAIN part

Split point

Left range Right range

LEFT part

MAIN part

Split point

LAYER part

Left range Right range

MAIN

LEFT

LAYER

EXIT

END

Press this to

turn the LAYER

function on. To

turn it off, press

the button again.

There is an alternate way for

quickly selecting both the

MAIN and LAYER voices

from the panel: While hold-

ing down one panel voice

button, press a second

voice button. The ﬁrst

selected voice becomes the

MAIN voice, and the second

becomes the LAYER.

Select Layer with the [G] button. Press the same

button to call up the VOICE display, from which you

can select the speciﬁc voice you want to play in a

layer with the Main voice. The method of selecting a

voice here is the same as that in VOICE (MAIN)

display (page 57).

Press this to

return to the

MAIN

display.

Voices

PSR-2100/1100

Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard

This section of the panel lets you add a variety of effects to the voices you play on the keyboard.

■ TOUCH

This button turns the touch response of the keyboard on or off. When this is set to off, the same volume is produced no

matter how strongly or softly you play the keyboard.

■ SUSTAIN

When this Sustain feature is on, all notes played on the keyboard (MAIN/LAYER parts only) have a longer sustain. You

can also set the Sustain depth (page 93).

■ DSP

The PSR-2100/1100 features a variety of dynamic built-in digital effects, letting you

process the sound in various ways. You can use DSP to enhance the voices in subtle ways

— such as by applying chorus to add animation and depth, or using a symphonic effect to

give the sound warmth and richness. DSP also has effects such as distortion that can

completely change the character of the sound. DSP is set for the currently selected part

(MAIN/LAYER/LEFT).

Set the LEFT to

ON. Press this

button again to

set it to OFF.

MAIN

LEFT

LAYER

Select LEFT with the [H] button. Press the same

button to call up the VOICE display, from which

you can select the speciﬁc voice you want to play

in a left. How to select the voice is the same as the

way of VOICE (MAIN) screen (page 57).

The split point can be freely

set to any key on the key-

board. (page 141).

Each part (MAIN, LAYER,

and LEFT) can have its own

volume setting (page 64).

You can also use the LAYER

and LEFT functions

together, to create a combi-

nation layer/split. To do this,

set separate voices for the

left and right sections of the

keyboard (as indicated), and

set up a layer of two different

voices on the right.

EXIT

END

Press this to

return to the

MAIN display.

Applying Voice Effects

USER

ENTER

EXIT

BALANCE

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

DIRECT

ACCESS

PART

CHANNEL ON/OFF

FREEZE MEMORY

DATA ENTRY

ORGAN FLUTES

STRINGS CHOIR & PAD

GUITAR

MAIN

BACK NEXT

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

LAYER

BASS

PIANO & HARPSI.

E.PIANO

UPPER OCTAVE

WOODWIND

PERCUSSION

VARIATION

MONOTOUCH

SUSTAIN

DSP

HARMONY/

ECHO

LEFT

HOLD

SYNTH.

BRASS

ORGAN &

ACCORDION

VOICE EFFECT

VOIC E

ONE TOUCH SETTING

REGISTRATION MEMORY

MIC.

EFFECT

RESET

VOCAL

HARMONY

MIC.

SETTING

VH TYPE

SELECT

TALK

OVER

SIGNAL

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

TRANSPOSE

ACMP

STANDBY

INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

BALLAD USERLATIN

POP & ROCK

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

BALLROOM

DANCE

RESET

MIN MAX

FADE

IN/OUT

TEMPO

STOP

TAP TEMPO

RESET

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

STYLE

MARCH &

WALTZ

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

1REPEAT

SWING &

JAZZ

MULTI PAD

STYLE CONTROL

MASTER VOLUME

PART

VARIATION

MONOTOUCH

SUSTAIN

DSP

HARMONY/

ECHO

LEFT

HOLD

VOICE EFFECT

Press one of the effect buttons to turn the corresponding effects on. Press it again to turn the effect off.

For explanations on each of the effects, see below.

The DSP and VARIATION

effect types and the their

depth can be selected and

adjusted in the MIXING CON-

SOLE display (page 127).

Voices

PSR-2100/1100

■ VARIATION

This control changes the Variation effect settings, letting you alter some aspect of the effect, depending on the selected

type. For example, when the Rotary Speaker effect is selected (page 127), this lets you switch the rotor speed between

slow and fast.

■ HARMONY/ECHO

This control adds Harmony or Echo effects to the voices played on the right hand section

of the keyboard (page 146).

■ MONO

This control determines whether the voice is played monophonically (only one note at a

time) or polyphonically for each part (MAIN/LAYER/LEFT). This is set to MONO when the

lamp is lit, and set to polyphonic when the lamp is off. When set to MONO, only the last

note played will sound. This lets you play wind instrument voices more realistically.

Depending on the selected voice, the MONO setting also lets you effectively use the

Portamento effect, when playing in legato.

■ LEFT HOLD

This function causes the left part voice to be held even when the keys are released — the

same effect as when the sustain pedal is pressed. This function is especially effective when

used with the auto accompaniment. For example, if you play and release a chord in the

auto accompaniment section of the keyboard (with the left part on and the Left voice set

to Strings), the strings part sustains, adding a natural richness to the overall

accompaniment sound.

Use the PSR-2100/1100 PITCH BEND

wheel to bend notes up (roll the wheel away

from you) or down (roll the wheel toward

you) while playing the keyboard. The PITCH

BEND wheel is self-centering and will

automatically return to normal pitch when

released.

The Modulation function applies a vibrato

effect to notes played on the keyboard (PSR-

2100). Moving the MODULATION wheel

all the way towards yourself minimizes the

depth of the effect, while rotating it away

from yourself increases it.

The [UPPER OCTAVE] button allows the MAIN and LAYER parts to be simultaneously

transposed up or down by one octave.

You can add special empha-

sis to melody lines you play

over chords by using the

Layer function with a mono-

phonic voice. Set the Main

voice to play polyphonically

and set the Layer voice to

play monophonically

(MONO). In this case, the

melody you play — including

the top notes of any chords

— sounds monophonically.

Tr y this using the following

voices.

MAIN voice

: Brass Section

(polyphonic) +

LAYER voice

Sweet Trump (monophonic)

The Portamento effect creates

a smooth pitch glide between

successively played notes.

PITCH BEND Wheel & MODULATION Wheel

PITCH BEND

The maximum pitch bend

range can be changed

(page 126).

MODULATION

In order to avoid accidentally

applying modulation set the

depth to its minimum setting.

Adjusting the Octave setting

More detailed octave-related

settings for each part can be

made by using the Mixing

Console function

(page 126).

UPPER OCTAVE

RESET

PSR-2100/1100

Styles

The PSR-2100/1100 features styles (accompaniment patterns) in a variety of different musical genres including pops,

jazz, Latin and dance. To use it, all you have to do is play the chords with your left hand as you perform and the

selected Accompaniment Style (style) matching your music will automatically play along, instantly following the chords

you play. Try selecting some of the different styles (refer to separate Data List (Style List) ) and play them.

USER

ENTER

EXIT

BALANCE

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

DIRECT

ACCESS

PART

CHANNEL ON/OFF

FREEZE MEMORY

DATA ENTRY

ORGAN FLUTES

STRINGS CHOIR & PAD

GUITAR

MAIN

BACK NEXT

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

LAYER

BASS

PIANO & HARPSI.

E.PIANO

UPPER OCTAVE

WOODWIND

PERCUSSION

VARIATION

MONOTOUCH

SUSTAIN

DSP

HARMONY/

ECHO

LEFT

HOLD

SYNTH.

BRASS

ORGAN &

ACCORDION

VOICE EFFECT

VOIC E

ONE TOUCH SETTING

REGISTRATION MEMORY

MIC.

EFFECT

RESET

VOCAL

HARMONY

MIC.

SETTING

VH TYPE

SELECT

TALK

OVER

SIGNAL

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

TRANSPOSE

ACMP

STANDBY

INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

BALLAD USERLATIN

POP & ROCK

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

BALLROOM

DANCE

RESET

MIN MAX

FADE

IN/OUT

TEMPO

STOP

TAP TEMPO

RESET

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

STYLE

MARCH &

WALTZ

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

1 REPEAT

SWING &

JAZZ

MULTI PAD

STYLE CONTROL

MASTER VOLUME

PART

ACMP INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

STYLE CONTROL

Playing a style

BACK NEXT

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

USER

ENTER

EXIT

BALANCE

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

DIRECT

ACCESS

PART

CHANNEL ON/OFF

FREEZE MEMORY

DATA EN TRY

ORGAN FLUTES

STRINGS CHOIR & PAD

GUITAR

MAIN

BACK NEXT

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

LAYER

BASS

PIANO & HARPSI.

E.PIANO

UPPER OCTAVE

WOODWIND

PERCUSSION

VARIATION

MONOTOUCH

SUSTAIN

DSP

HARMONY/

ECHO

LEFT

HOLD

SYNTH.

BRASS

ORGAN &

ACCORDION

VOICE EFFECT

VOIC E

ONE TOUCH SETTING

REGISTRATION MEMORY

MIC.

EFFECT

RESET

VOCAL

HARMONY

MIC.

SETTING

VH TYPE

SELECT

TALK

OVER

SIGNAL

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

TRANSPOSE

ACMP

STANDBY

INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

BALLAD USERLATIN

POP & ROCK

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

BALLROOM

DANCE

RESET

MIN MAX

FADE

IN/OUT

TEMPO

STOP

TAP TEMPO

RESET

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

STYLE

MARCH &

WALTZ

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

1 REPEAT

SWING &

JAZZ

MULTI PAD

STYLE CONTROL

MASTER VOLUME

PART

BALLAD USERLATIN

POP & ROCK BALLROOM

DANCE

STYLE

MARCH &

WALTZ

SWING &

JAZZ

2-2 Select a Style.

2-1 Select a location

(Preset, User,

Floppy Disk) for

saving the style.

When you've opened a lower directory's

display, this button (UP) lets you call up

the next higher directory, from which you

can select Style groups.

For a list of the available

accompaniment styles,

refer to the separate

Data List.

Styles

PSR-2100/1100

ACMP INTROBREAK

STYLE CONTROL

ACMP INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

STYLE CONTROL

ACMP INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

STYLE CONTROL

Auto Accompaniment section

Split point

END

When the [ACMP] button is set to on, you can play/indicate chords from the auto

accompaniment section of the keyboard. (Depending on the settings, this may be

the range of the Left voice, or the entire keyboard.)

Turn SYNC. (SYNCHRONIZED) START on.

The Tempo can be adjusted

using the TEMPO [ ][ ] or

[TAP TEMPO] button.

If you tap the [TAP TEMPO]

button, the tempo will adjust to

the same speed that you tapped.

You can set the key range

for auto accompaniment

(page 141).

•You can begin the rhythm

channels (tracks) of the

Style by pressing the

[START/STOP] button.

• The rhythm channels of

the style can also be

started by tapping the

[TAP TEMPO] button.

With the style stopped,

tap the [TAP TEMPO]

button three, four or ﬁve

times (three for 3/4 time,

four for 2/4 or 4/4 time,

ﬁve for 5/4 time).

When you simultaneously

play back accompaniment

styles with a song, the

accompaniment parts

recorded to the song (chan-

nels 9 - 16) are temporarily

replaced by the selected

accompaniment style — let-

ting you try out and use dif-

ferent accompaniment with

the song (page 80).

Turn ACMP off.

Sync. Start

Enabling this lets you start

the style simply by playing

the keyboard.

As soon as you play a chord with the auto accompaniment section, the style starts.

For details about chord ﬁngerings, refer to page 65.

Accompaniment Style Characteristics

The deﬁning characteristics of some of the accompaniment styles are indicated above the relevant style names in the Open/Save display.

Session!

These styles provide even greater realism and authentic backing by mixing in original chord types and changes, as well as special riffs with

chord changes, with the Main sections. These have been programmed to add “spice” and a professional touch to your performances of

certain songs and in certain genres. As a result, the styles may not necessarily be appropriate — or even harmonically correct — for all

songs and for all chord playing. In some cases for example, playing a simple major triad may result in a seventh chord, or playing an on-bass

chord may result in incorrect or unexpected accompaniment.

START/STOP

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

Stop the style.

PSR2100_E.book Page 63 Tuesday, January 28, 2003 2:11 PM

Styles

PSR-2100/1100

Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only

Adjusting the Volume Balance/Channel Muting

ACMP INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

STYLE CONTROL

Rhythm starts.

Select a style (page 62).

The Rhythm channels are

part of the styles. Each style

has different rhythm pat-

terns.

Set to off.

Play along with the rhythm playback.

The Tempo can be adjusted using the TEMPO [ ][ ] or [TAP TEMPO] buttons.

If you tap the [TAP TEMPO] button, the tempo will adjust to the same speed that

you tapped.

Press the STYLE [START/STOP] button

again to stop the rhythm playback.

END

You can also start the

rhythm simply by playing a

key on the keyboard, if Sync

Start is enabled (turn on the

[SYNC.START] button).

BALANCE

PART

CHANNEL ON/OFF

BALANCE display

Adjust the output level of the Part.

Parts played from the

keyboard (MAIN/LAYER/

LEFT)

STYLE part (Auto

Accompaniment section)

SONG part

MIC part

MULTI PAD part

CHANNEL ON/OFF display

Call up the STYLE display by pressing the [CHANNEL ON/OFF]

button, then turn the instrument you want to cancel off. To listen to

only one instrument by itself, hold down the appropriate button for

the channel to set the channel to SOLO. To cancel SOLO, simply

press the appropriate channel button again.

Channel

Refers to the MIDI channel

in the song data

(page 160). The channels

are assigned as shown

below.

Song

1 - 16

Accompaniment Style

9 - 16

Call up the

BALANCE

display.

Call up the

Channel ON/

OFF display.

Styles

PSR-2100/1100

The style playback can be controlled by the chords you play in the keys to the left of the split point. There are 7 types of

ﬁngerings as described below. Go to the CHORD FINGERING page (page 142), and select the Chord Fingerings. The

page shows how to play chords with your left hand.

SINGLE FINGER

Single Finger accompaniment makes it simple to produce beautifully orchestrated accompaniment using major,

seventh, minor and minor-seventh chords by pressing a minimum number of keys on the auto accompaniment section

of the keyboard. The abbreviated chord ﬁngerings described below are used.

MULTI FINGER

The Multi Finger mode automatically detects Single Finger or Fingered chord ﬁngerings,

so you can use either type of ﬁngering without having to switch ﬁngering modes. If you

want to play minor, seventh, or minor-seventh chords using the SINGLE FINGER

operation in the MULTI FINGER Mode, always press the closest white/black key(s) to the

root of the chord.

FINGERED

This mode lets you produce accompaniment by playing full chords on the auto

accompaniment section of the keyboard. The Fingered mode recognizes the various

chord types listed on the next page.

FINGERED ON BASS

This mode accepts the same ﬁngerings as the FINGERED mode, but the lowest note

played in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard is used as the bass note,

allowing you to play “on bass” chords. For example, to indicate a C-on-E chord, play a C

major chord with E as the lowest note (E, G, C).

FULL KEYBOARD

This method detects chords in the entire key range. Chords are detected in a way similar

to Fingered, even if you split the notes between your left and right hands — for example,

playing a bass note with your left hand and a chord with your right, or by playing a chord

with your left hand and a melody note with your right.

AI FINGERED

This mode is basically the same as FINGERED, with the exception that less than three

notes can be played to indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.).

AI FULL KEYBOARD

When this advanced auto accompaniment mode is engaged, the PSR-2100/1100 will automatically create appropriate

accompaniment while you play just about anything, anywhere on the keyboard using both hands. You don’t have to

worry about specifying the accompaniment chords. Although the AI Full Keyboard mode is designed to work with many

songs, some arrangements may not be suitable for use with this feature.

This mode is similarto FULL KEYBOARD, with the exception that less than three notes can be played to indicate the

chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.). 9

and 11

chords cannot be played.

Chord Fingerings

For a major chord, press the root key only.

For a minor chord, simultaneously press the root key

and a black key to its left.

For a seventh chord, simultaneously press the root

key and a white key to its left.

For a minor-seventh chord, simultaneously press the

root key and both a white and black key to its left.

Cm7

Chord detection in the AI

Full Keyboard mode occurs

at approximately 8th-note

intervals. Extremely short

chords — less than an 8th

note in length — may not be

detected.

In Full Keyboard mode,

chords are detected based

on the lowest and second

lowest notes you play. If the

two lowest notes fall within a

single octave, those two

notes determine the chord. If

the lowest note and the sec-

ond lowest note are sepa-

rated by more than one

octave, the lowest note

becomes the bass and the

chord is determined from the

second lowest note and the

other notes played in the

same octave.

Artiﬁcial Intelligence

PSR2100_E.book Page 65 Tuesday, January 28, 2003 2:11 PM

Styles

PSR-2100/1100

* Only this voicing (inversion) is recognized. Other chords not marked with an asterisk can be played in any inversion.

Chord Name [Abbreviation] Normal Voicing

Display for root “C”

Major [M] 1 - 3 - 5 C

Ninth [9] 1 - 2 - 3 - 5 C9

Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6

Sixth ninth [6

] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 or 3 - 6 - 2* C6

Major seventh [M7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7

Major seventh ninth [M7

] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5)j - 7 CM7

Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7

]

1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - (5) - 7

CM7

Flatted ﬁfth [ 5] 1 - 3 - 5 C 5

Major seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [M7

] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 CM7

Suspended fourth [sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 Csus4

Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - 5 Caug

Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 CM7aug

Minor [m] 1 - 3 - 5 Cm

Minor ninth [m9] 1 - 2 - 3 - 5 Cm9

Minor sixth [m6] 1 - 3 - 5 - 6 Cm6

Minor seventh [m7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 Cm7

Minor seventh ninth [m7

] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 3 - 7 - 2 Cm7

Minor seventh eleventh [m7

] 1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - ( 7) Cm7

Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 CmM7

Minor major seventh ninth [mM7

] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 CmM7

Minor seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [m7

] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 Cm7 5

Minor major seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [mM7

] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 CmM7

Diminished [dim] 1 - 3 - 5 Cdim

Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - 3 - 5 - 6 Cdim7

Seventh [7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 C7

Seventh ﬂatted ninth [7

] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 C7

Seventh add ﬂatted thirteenth [7

] 1 - 3 - 5 - 6 - 7 C7

Seventh ninth [7

] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 3 - 7 - 2* C7

Seventh add sharp eleventh [7

]

1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - (5) - 7

Seventh add thirteenth [7

] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - 7 or 3 - 6 - 7 C7

Seventh sharp ninth [7

] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 C7

Seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [7

] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 C7

Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 C7aug

Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 - 7 C7sus4

Suspended second [sus2] 1 - 2 - 5 Csus2

Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode (Example for “C” chords)

( )

CM7

( )

Caug

Cm6

Cm7

( )

Cm7



CmM7



Cm7

( )

Cm9

CmM7

( )

CmM7

( )

Cdim

Cdim7

( )



( )



Csus4



( )

CM7



( )

CM7



( )



( )

C7aug

Cm7

( )

CM7aug

( )

C7sus4 Csus2

• Notes in parentheses can

be omitted.

•For FINGERED, FIN-

GERED ON BASS, and AI

FINGERED, if you play

any three adjacent keys

(including black keys), the

chord sound will be can-

celed and only the rhythm

instruments will continue

playing (Chord Cancel

function). This let you play

back only the rhythm.

• Playing two same root

keys in the adjacent

octaves produces accom-

paniment based only on

the root.

•A perfect ﬁfth (1 + 5) pro-

duces accompaniment

based on the root and the

ﬁfth.

• The auto accompaniment

Style will sometimes not

change when related

chords are played in

sequence (e.g. some

minor chords followed by

the minor seventh).

•You can also have the

PSR-2100/1100 “teach”

you how to play Fingered

chords. From the CHORD

FINGERING display

(page 142), specify the

chord you want to learn,

and the notes you should

press are indicated in the

display.

 



 













 

 





 





















 





Styles

PSR-2100/1100

The PSR-2100/1100 features various types of Auto Accompaniment Sections that allow

you to vary the arrangement of the Style. They are: Intro, Main, Break and Ending. By

switching among them as you play, you can easily produce the dynamic elements of a

professional-sounding arrangement in your performance.

Arranging the Style Pattern

(SECTIONS: MAIN A/B/C/D, INTRO, ENDING, BREAK)

You can also use this func-

tion to play only rhythms

(page 64).

ACMP INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

STYLE CONTROL

Auto Accompaniment section

Split point

ACMP INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

STYLE CONTROL

Select a style (page 62).

2-1 Turn the ACMP function on.

2-2 Press the [INTRO] button. To cancel the INTRO section

before starting the style, press the [INTRO] button again.

2-3 Turn the SYNC. START function on.

The Intro section starts as soon as you play a key in the Auto

Accompaniment section of the keyboard, and changes to the Main section.

Press this button to add breaks.

• If you press the [INTRO]

button, you can play back

an Intro section while an

accompaniment is play-

ing.

•You can dynamically con-

trol the level of the

accompaniment by how

softly or strongly you play

the keys in the Auto

Accompaniment section

of the keyboard

(page 141).

• If you press the [SYNC.

START] button while an

accompaniment is play-

ing, the accompaniment

will stop and the PSR-

2100/1100 will enter Syn-

chronized Start standby

status.

•You can also change

style sections by using

the pedal (page 142).

• The Break section lets

you add dynamic varia-

tions and breaks in the

rhythm of the accompani-

ment, to make your per-

formance sound even

more professional. If you

press the [BREAK] but-

ton while an accompani-

ment is playing, the ﬁll-in

will play back for one

measure.

• The indicator of the desti-

nation section (MAIN A/

B/C/D) will ﬂash while the

Break is playing.

• When the [AUTO FILLIN]

button is set to on and the

MAIN [A][B] [C][D] but-

ton is pressed after the

ﬁnal half beat (eighth

note) of the measure, the

ﬁll-in will begin from the

next measure.

• Section button indications

— [BREAK], [INTRO],

[MAIN], [ENDING] but-

tons

LED is green

— The section is not

selected.

LED is red

— The section is cur-

rently selected.

LED is off

— No section data; the

section cannot be

played.

Main sections can be shifted.

Styles

PSR-2100/1100

Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys (SYNC. STOP)

When the Synchro Stop function is engaged, accompaniment playback will stop

completely when all keys in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard are released.

Accompaniment playback will start again as soon as the key in the Auto Accompaniment

section is played.

Fade-in/Fade-out

The accompaniment style also include a convenient Fade-in/Fade-out function that

gradually fades in and fades out the accompaniment. To start the style with a fade-in,

press the [FADE IN/OUT] button, then turn SYNC. START on. To cancel the fade-in

before starting the style, press the button again.

To fade out and stop the Style, press this button while the style is playing. The time of the

fade-in/fade-out can also be set (page 151).

• Styles can also be started

by pressing the STYLE

[START/STOP] button.

•You can select the Intro

and Ending type by press-

ing the [E] button in the

MAIN window (page 69).

• If you press the [INTRO]

button while the ending is

playing, the Intro section

will begin playing after the

ending is ﬁnished.

• When the [AUTO FILLIN]

button is set to on and you

press a MAIN button while

the ending is playing, ﬁll-in

accompaniment will

immediately start playing,

continuing with the Main

section.

•You can begin the accom-

paniment by using the

Ending instead of the Intro

section. In this case, the

auto accompaniment

doesn’t stop when the

ending is ﬁnished.

• If you select a different

style while the style is not

playing, the “default”

tempo for that style is also

selected. If the accompa-

niment is playing, the

same tempo is maintained

even if you select a differ-

ent style.

• When STOP ACMP is set

to on and the accompani-

ment is not playing, you

can play both chords and

bass in the Auto Accom-

paniment section in the

keyboard (page 141).

ACMP INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

STYLE CONTROL

This switches to the ending section. When the ending is ﬁnished, the Style stops

automatically. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by

pressing the same [ENDING/rit.] button again while the ending is playing back.

Auto Accompaniment section

Split point

END

Turn ACMP (Accompaniment) on.

ACMP INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

STYLE CONTROL

Turn SYNC. STOP on. SYNC. START is also automatically set to on when

SYNC. STOP is turned on.

As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the auto accompaniment

starts.

You can also use the SYNC.

STOP function by pressing

the auto accompaniment

section/left-hand range

brieﬂy (page 141).

The auto accompaniment stops when you release your left hand from the keys.

Playing a chord with your left

hand automatically restarts the

auto accompaniment.

Press the [SYNC. STOP]/

[SYNC. START] button

again to stop the

accompaniment.

Synchro Stop cannot be set

to on when the ﬁngering

mode is set to Full Key-

board/AI Full Keyboard or

the auto accompaniment on

the panel is set to off.

Styles

PSR-2100/1100

Selecting Intro and Ending Types (INTRO/ENDING)

Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when

changing accompaniment sections — Auto Fill In

Select a Intro

Select a Ending

Play the style using

the Intro or Ending

section (page 30, 31).

To call up the [MAIN] dis-

play, ﬁrst press the [DIRECT

ACCESS] button, then press

the [EXIT] button.

Fill

A short phrase used to add

variation to the style.

ACMP INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

STYLE CONTROL

Play the style and switch among the accompaniment sections as they play

(page 30, 31).

Fill-in patterns play automatically between each change in the Main

sections.

You can also add a ﬁll-in by

pressing the selected MAIN

button again.

To cancel the Auto Fill, press the [AUTO FILLIN] button again.

You can temporarily disable

Auto Fill In during a perfor-

mance by pressing the next

Main section’s button twice

quickly.

END

Styles

PSR-2100/1100

The convenient One Touch Setting function makes it easy for you to select voices and effects that are appropriate to the style

you’re playing. Each preset style has four pre-programmed panel setups that you can select by pressing a single button.

Appropriate Panel Setting for the Selected Style

(ONE TOUCH SETTING)

USER

ENTER

EXIT

BALANCE

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

DIRECT

ACCESS

PART

CHANNEL ON/OFF

FREEZE MEMORY

DATA EN TRY

ORGAN FLUTES

STRINGS CHOIR & PAD

GUITAR

MAIN

BACK NEXT

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

LAYER

BASS

PIANO & HARPSI.

E.PIANO

UPPER OCTAVE

WOODWIND

PERCUSSION

VARIATION

MONOTOUCH

SUSTAIN

DSP

HARMONY/

ECHO

LEFT

HOLD

SYNTH.

BRASS

ORGAN &

ACCORDION

VOICE EFFECT

VOIC E

ONE TOUCH SETTING

REGISTRATION MEMORY

MIC.

EFFECT

RESET

VOCAL

HARMONY

MIC.

SETTING

VH TYPE

SELECT

TALK

OVER

SIGNAL

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

TRANSPOSE

ACMP

STANDBY

INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

BALLAD USERLATIN

POP & ROCK

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

BALLROOM

DANCE

RESET

MIN MAX

FADE

IN/OUT

TEMPO

STOP

TAP TEMPO

RESET

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

STYLE

MARCH &

WALTZ

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

1 REPEAT

SWING &

JAZZ

MULTI PAD

STYLE CONTROL

MASTER VOLUME

PART

ONE TOUCH SETTING

ACMP INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

STYLE CONTROL

ONE TOUCH SETTING

Select a style (page 62).

Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons ([1] - [4]).

ONE TOUCH SETTING

LED is green — The One Touch Setting is not selected.

LED is off — No One Touch

Setting data. The button is

not available.

LED is red — The One Touch Setting is currently selected.

As soon as you play a

chord with your left

hand, the auto

accompaniment starts.

Auto Accompani-

ment section

Split point

Stop the Auto Accompaniment.

Try out other One Touch Setting setups. You can also create your own One

Touch Setting setups (page 71).

Various settings (such as voices, effects, etc.) that match the selected

style can be instantly recalled. When the style is not playing, Auto

Accompaniment and Sync. Start will automatically be turned on.

For details about the One Touch Setting parameters, refer to the

separate Data List (Parameter Chart).

Styles

PSR-2100/1100

Automatically Changing One Touch Settings with the Sections — OTS Link

The convenient OTS (One Touch Setting) Link function lets you automatically have One Touch Settings change when

you select a different Main section (A - D).

Registering the Panel Controls in One Touch Setting (ONE TOUCH SETTING)

This section covers how to create your own One Touch Setting setups (four setups per style). For a list of One Touch

Setting setup parameters, refer to the separate Data List (Parameter Chart).

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

When you switch among the Main sections (A

- D), the corresponding One Touch Setting will

be called up automatically.

The Main sections A, B, C, and D correspond

to One Touch Settings 1, 2, 3, and 4,

respectively.

The One Touch Settings

can be set to change with

the sections in one of two

different timings (page 141):

• Immediately when you

press a section button.

• At the next measure (in

an accompaniment

style), after you press a

section button.

To cancel the OTS Link function, press the [OTS LINK] button again.

END

MEMORY

ONE TOUCH SETTING

Select a style.

Set up the panel controls

such as selecting a voice

as required.

Press the [MEMORY]

button.

END

A message prompting you to save the current style will appear. Select “YES”

to call up the STYLE display, then save the panel settings (page 39, 47).

Unless you store the panel

settings here, the registered

settings will be deleted

when you select a different

accompaniment style.

Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons:[1] through [4].

The items you can register in a One Touch Setting are Voice, Harmony, Multi Pad and Pedal

Styles

PSR-2100/1100

The Music Finder feature lets you instantly call up the appropriate settings for the

instrument — including voice, style, and One Touch Settings — simply by selecting the

desired song title. If you want to play a certain song but don’t know which style and voice

settings would be appropriate, the convenient Music Finder function will help you out.

The recommended settings, which together make up a “record,” can also be edited and

stored. This lets you create and save your own Music Finder records for future recall.

Calling Up Ideal Setups for Your Music — Music Finder

The MUSIC FINDER

records and its contents is

just one example of the rec-

ommended panel setups.

You can also create your

own Music Finder settings

for your favorite songs and

genres.

Keep in mind that Music

Finder is a performance aid

in that it automatically ﬁnds

appropriate accompaniment

styles and voices for your

playing. Even though you

can specify song titles, it

does not actually contain

song data.

USER

ENTER

EXIT

BALANCE

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

DIRECT

ACCESS

PART

CHANNEL ON/OFF

FREEZE MEMORY

DATA ENTRY

ORGAN FLUTES

STRINGS CHOIR & PAD

GUITAR

MAIN

BACK NEXT

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

LAYER

BASS

PIANO & HARPSI.

E.PIANO

UPPER OCTAVE

WOODWIND

PERCUSSION

VARIATION

MONOTOUCH

SUSTAIN

DSP

HARMONY/

ECHO

LEFT

HOLD

SYNTH.

BRASS

ORGAN &

ACCORDION

VOICE EFFECT

VOIC E

ONE TOUCH SETTING

REGISTRATION MEMORY

MIC.

EFFECT

RESET

VOCAL

HARMONY

MIC.

SETTING

VH TYPE

SELECT

TALK

OVER

SIGNAL

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

TRANSPOSE

ACMP

STANDBY

INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

BALLAD USERLATIN

POP & ROCK

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

BALLROOM

DANCE

RESET

MIN MAX

FADE

IN/OUT

TEMPO

STOP

TAP TEMPO

RESET

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

STYLE

MARCH &

WALTZ

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

1REPEAT

SWING &

JAZZ

MULTI PAD

STYLE CONTROL

MASTER VOLUME

PART

MUSIC

FINDER

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

MUSIC

FINDER

Select a record. For example, select the top

record by pressing the [1▲▼] button to call up

the recommended setups.

The setting data shown here is referred to as a

“record.”

All...........................Show all records.

FAVORITE..............Show the records that have added to the “Favorite” page.

SEARCH1,2...........Show the results by SEARCH function (page 73).

Sorting the records

MUSIC.......The record is sorted by song title.

STYLE.......The record is sorted by style name.

BEAT.........The record is sorted by beat.

TEMPO .....The record is sorted by tempo.

Change the order of the records

(ascending or descending).

Add the selected record to “Favorite (Bookmark)” page

When you press the [H] button, the “Add selected

data to the favorite list? YES/NO” message will be

displayed. Select [YES] to add the selected page to

“FAVORITE” page.

To delete the added record, select the record in the

“FAVORITE” page and press the [H](DELETE

FROM FAVORITE) button.

Search record(s). Enter the condition of the search in the

MUSIC FINDER SEARCH display (page 73). The results of

SEARCH 1 or 2 appear in the “SEARCH 1” or “SEARCH 2”

page respectively.

Call up the MUSIC FINDER RECORD EDIT (page 74) display (for

editing the selected record).

Turn TEMPO LOCK on/off. TEMPO LOCK function lets you avoid changing

the Tempo during style playback when selecting another record. The on/off

setting affects all pages (ALL/FAVORITE/SEARCH 1/SEARCH 2).

Select a record by style name. When

sorting the records by style name,

press these buttons to move the cursor

to the next /previous style.

Simultaneously press the [▲▼] buttons

to move the cursor to the ﬁrst record.

Select a

record by

song title.

When sorting

records by

song title, use

the [1▲▼] but-

ton to skip up

or down

through the

songs alpha-

betically.

Simulta-

neously press

the [▲▼] but-

tons to move

the cursor to

the ﬁrst

record.

Show the

number of

records of

each page.

Play the style (page 63).

Records can be selected by

using the [DATA ENTRY]

dial and pressing the

[ENTER] button.

Styles

PSR-2100/1100

Searching the Ideal Setups — Music Finder Search

You can search the record by music title or keywords. The results appears in the display.

■ [A] MUSIC

Searches by music or song title. Press this button to call up the display for

inputting the song title.

When you enter the song title (page 48), the search function calls up all

records that contain the entered word or words.

■ [B] KEYWORD

Searches by keyboard. Press this button to call up the display for inputting the

keyword.

When you enter the keyword (page 48), the search function calls up all records that contain the entered word or words.

You can search several different keywords simultaneously by inserting a separator (comma) between each. The search

function ﬁnds and displays all records that contain at least one match in the keywords.

■ [C] STYLE

Searches by style name. Press this button to call up the STYLE FILE SELECT display. Press

the [A] through [J] button in the display to select the desired accompaniment style. This

convenient function lets you ﬁnd all songs that use a certain accompaniment style.

■ [D] BEAT

Searches by beat or rhythmic feel.

■ [E] SEARCH AREA

Selects a speciﬁc location for searching. You can further narrow down your search by using the SEARCH 1 and 2

selections.

■ [F]~[H] CLEAR

Clears the entered item at left.

■ [1▲▼] TEMPO FROM

You can also narrow your search by specifying a tempo range. This lets you set the minimum tempo for the search. Press

the [

▲▼] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the tempo value to the minimum.

■ [2▲▼]TEMPO TO

You can also narrow your search by specifying a tempo range. This lets you set the maximum tempo for the search.

Press the [▲▼] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the tempo value to the maximum.

■ [3▲▼]~[5▲▼] GENRE

Selects the speciﬁc music genre for searching. The available range includes all genres (ANY), the preset genres, and any

genres you’ve entered yourself (page 72).

■ [8▼] CANCEL

Press this to cancel the operation and return to the previous display.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Start searching the record.

The results that satisfy all

the conditions appear in the

SEARCH page. For details

about the search settings in

this display, see below.

Press the [I]

(SEARCH 1)

button or [J]

(SEARCH 2)

button in the

MUSIC FINDER

display.

Enter the

conditions for

the search (see

below), then

start search by

using [START

SEARCH] button.

The STYLE FILE SELECT

display can only be used to

select the style name for

searching; it cannot be used

to call up the actual accom-

paniment style.

Styles

PSR-2100/1100

Editing Records — Music Finder Record Edit

From this display, you can call up existing records and edit them to suit your

preferences. You can even use this to create your own Music Finder records.

■ [A] MUSIC

Selects the music or song title for editing. Press the button to call up the

display for inputting the music or song title, then edit the name as desired.

■ [B] KEYWORD

Selects the keyword for editing. Press the button to call up the display for

inputting the keyword, then edit it as desired.

You can enter several different keywords by inserting a separator (comma)

between each.

■ [C] STYLE

Selects the style name for editing. Always enter the name when a new record is registered.

Press the button to call up the STYLE FILE SELECT display. Press the [A] through [J] button

in the display to select the desired ﬁle you want to change/clear/register.

■ [D] BEAT

Selects the beat (time signature) for editing. When another ﬁle is selected by pressing the

[C] button, the current beat setting is replaced with the beat setting of the selected ﬁle.

■ [E] FAVORITE

Adds the selected record to the FAVORITE page (page 72).

■ [F]~[H] CLEAR

Clears the entered item at left.

■ [I] DELETE RECORD

Clears the selected record. The deleted record number becomes empty. When you press this button, a message appears

prompting you to execute, abort or cancel the operation.

YES ............. Press this to clear the record and close the display.

NO ............. Press this to close the display without clearing the record.

CANCEL...... Press this to close the message box and return to the previous display.

You can also change/clear a

preset record. To avoid chang-

ing/clearing the record, register

the record as a new record

after editing.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Press the [8 ▲▼] (RECORD EDIT) button in the MUSIC FINDER display.

Change/clear the record data. You can also register new records. For

details about all settings and operations, see below.

All Music Finder records can be

stored together as a single ﬁle

(page 154). When calling up a

stored ﬁle, a message appears

prompting you to replace or

append the records as desired.

• Replace:

All Music Finder records cur-

rently in the instrument are

deleted and replaced with the

records of the selected ﬁle.

• Append:

The records called up are

added to the vacant record

numbers.

The STYLE FILE SELECT

display can only be used to

select the style name for

record editing; it cannot be

used to call up the actual

accompaniment style.

Keep in mind that the Beat

setting made here is only for

the Music Finder search

function; this does not affect

the actual Beat setting of the

accompaniment style itself.

Styles

PSR-2100/1100

■ [J] NEW RECORD

Registers a new record. The smallest available empty record number is used for registering.

When you press this button, a message appears prompting you to execute, abort or cancel

the operation.

YES ............. Press this to register the record and close the display.

NO ............. Press this to close the display without registering the record.

CANCEL...... Press this to close the message box and return to the previous display.

■ [1▼▲] TEMPO

Determines the tempo for the selected style. When changing the style with the [C] button, the tempo is automatically

changed to that of the changed style.

■ [3▼▲]~[5▼▲] GENRE

Indicates and changes the genre to which the selected record is assigned. The available range includes all preset genres

as well as any you’ve entered yourself.

■ [6▼▲] GENRE NAME

For entering a genre name. Press the button to call up the display for inputting

the genre name, then edit the name as desired. A maximum of 200 genre

names can be stored.

The genre name you input becomes effective when the current record is edited (overwritten) by pressing the [8

▲] (OK)

button, or when a new record is registered by pressing the [J] (NEW RECORD) button.

If you exit from the MUSIC FINDER EDIT display without actually editing or registering a record, the input genre name

is deleted.

■ [8▲] OK

Executes all editing and changes to the record. When you press this button, a message appears prompting you to

execute, abort or cancel the operation.

YES ............. Press this to replace the record and close the display.

NO ............. Press this to close the display without replacing the record.

CANCEL...... Press this to close the message box and return to the previous display.

■ [8▼] CANCEL

Press this to cancel the operation and return to the MUSIC FINDER display.

The maximum number of

records is 2500 (PSR-2100)/

1200 (PSR-1100), including

internal records.

To maintain the edited and registered data, make sure to save all Music Finder records as a ﬁle (page 154). If no saved, the data will

be lost when another Music Finder ﬁle is called up or the factory-programmed settings are restored (page 154).

CAUTION

PSR-2100/1100

The Multi Pads

The PSR-2100/1100 Multi Pads can be used to play a number of short pre-recorded rhythmic and melodic sequences

that can be used to add impact and variety to your keyboard performances.

Select the desired bank in the MULTI PAD Bank display (page 38).

Press any of the Multi Pads.

The corresponding phrase (in this case, for Pad 4) starts playing back in its entirety as

soon as the pad is pressed.

The Multi Pad function provides two different ways to stop in the middle of the

phrase:

•To stop all pads, press and release the [STOP] button.

•To stop speciﬁc pads, simultaneously hold down the [STOP] button and press the

pad or pads you wish to stop.

Turn ACMP on (page 63).

Play a chord with your left hand and press any of the Multi Pads.

In this example, the phrase for Pad 1 will be transposed into F major before playing back.

Try playing other chords and pressing the pads. Keep in mind that you can also change chords while a pad is playing back.

Multi Pads

Playing the Multi Pads

• Simply tap any of the Multi

Pads at any time to play

back the corresponding

phrase at the currently set

tempo.

•You can even play two,

three, or four Multi Pads at

the same time.

• Pressing the pad during

its playback will stop play-

ing and begin playing from

the top again.

MULTI PAD

STOP

Chord Match

MULTI PAD

STOP

Split Point

Auto Accompaniment

section

The Chord Match on/off sta-

tus depends on the selected

Multi Pad Bank.

The Multi Pad

PSR-2100/1100

This function lets you copy individual Multi Pad settings from one Multi Pad bank to another.

Multi Pad Edit

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Select the desired Multi Pad(s).

The same as the Open/Save

display on pages 44 and 47.

Calls up the upper

level directory page.

Open/Save display for Multi Pads (page 38)

PSR-2100/1100

Song Playback

Here you’ll learn how to play back songs. Songs include the internal songs of the instrument, performances you’ve

recorded yourself using the recording functions (page 95), and commercially available song data. You can use this

highly versatile feature in a variety of ways — playing along on the keyboard with the recorded song. You can also

display the music notation (PSR-2100 only) and lyrics in the LCD.

If you connect a microphone to the PSR-2100, you can sing along with the song or auto accompaniment and have

vocal harmony parts added automatically (page 131).

• Commercially available song data

Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with GM (General

MIDI).

Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s XG

format. XG is a signiﬁcant enhancement of the “GM system level 1”

standard, providing more voices, greater editing control, and support for

multiple effect sections and effect types.

Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s

DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) format.

Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s

original MIDI ﬁle format.

• Songs you recorded (page 95) and stored to the PSR-2100/1100 or disk.

USER

ENTER

EXIT

BALANCE

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

DIRECT

ACCESS

PART

CHANNEL ON/OFF

FREEZE MEMORY

DATA ENTRY

ORGAN FLUTES

STRINGS CHOIR & PAD

GUITAR

MAIN

BACK NEXT

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

LAYER

BASS

PIANO & HARPSI.

E.PIANO

UPPER OCTAVE

WOODWIND

PERCUSSION

VARIATION

MONOTOUCH

SUSTAIN

DSP

HARMONY/

ECHO

LEFT

HOLD

SYNTH.

BRASS

ORGAN &

ACCORDION

VOICE EFFECT

VOIC E

ONE TOUCH SETTING

REGISTRATION MEMORY

MIC.

EFFECT

RESET

VOCAL

HARMONY

MIC.

SETTING

VH TYPE

SELECT

TALK

OVER

SIGNAL

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

TRANSPOSE

ACMP

STANDBY

INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

BALLAD USERLATIN

POP & ROCK

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

BALLROOM

DANCE

RESET

MIN MAX

FADE

IN/OUT

TEMPO

STOP

TAP TEMPO

RESET

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

STYLE

MARCH &

WALTZ

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

1 REPEAT

SWING &

JAZZ

MULTI PAD

STYLE CONTROL

MASTER VOLUME

PART

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

1 REPEAT

Compatible Song Types

Commercially available

music data is subject to

intended only for your own

personal use.

For more information on the

song ﬁle types compatible

with the PSR-2100/1100,

see page 161.

Song Playback

PSR-2100/1100

Playing the Internal Songs

Song Playback

BACK NEXT

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

1 REPEAT

END

2-2 Open a folder and

select a song to be

played back.

2-1 Select the PRESET tab with the

[BACK] button.

You can enable the Synchro

Start for the song by simul-

taneously pressing the

[TOP] button and the

SONG [START/STOP] but-

ton. The song starts as

soon as you play the key-

board. You can also use this

function along with the

Style’s Synchro Start func-

tion (page 63).

You can have the volume

automatically fade in and

fade out at the beginning

and end of the song. Simply

press the [FADEIN/OUT]

button at the start of song

playback to fade in the song,

and press it again at the end

of the song to fade out.

Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO [ ][ ] buttons

(page 53) or the [TAP TEMPO] button.

You can even change the playback speed by tapping out

the tempo — simply tap the [TAP TEMPO] button twice.

The song starts.

To stop the song immediately, press the

button again.

Press the button in order to go back to the

previous screen.

START/STOP

EXIT

If the MAIN screen (at left) is

not displayed, press the

[DIRECT ACCESS] button

followed by the [EXIT] button.

You can also make a variety

of other settings (such as

tempo, voice selection, etc.)

and have them automati-

cally called up when you

play back the song

(page 107).

Songs can also be played

back continuously. Set

SONG CHAIN PLAY to ON

from the SONG SETTING

display (page 140).

Make sure that the Language

setting for the instrument

(page 154) is the same as that

of the ﬁle name of the song

that you are playing back.

Song Playback

PSR-2100/1100

Simultaneously Playing a Song and an Accompaniment Style

When playing back a song and an accompaniment style at the same time, channels 9 -

16 of the song data are replaced with accompaniment style channels — allowing you

to use the auto accompaniment styles and features in place of the accompaniment parts

of the song. Make the settings below and play your own chord substitutions in place of

the song’s chord data.

• [ACMP] button .................. ...ON

• [AUTO FILL IN] button ..... ...ON

Select the song and start playback by pressing the SONG [START/STOP] button.

Select the desired accompaniment style.

Start the style by pressing the STYLE [START/STOP] button.

While the song is playing, insert a break or change sections (with the STYLE

section buttons.)

Fill-in patterns play when you switch sections.

The style automatically stops when the song ﬁnishes or is stopped.

The accompaniment stops

when you stop the song. If

the accompaniment style is

playing and you start the

song, the accompaniment

automatically stops. How-

ever, for internal songs that

use accompaniment styles,

the accompaniment style is

not stopped.

END

Some of the internal songs have been created using the accompaniment styles. For these songs, the

accompaniment styles are automatically started when starting song playback.

Song Playback

PSR-2100/1100

Playing Back Songs on Disk

Insert the disk into the drive.

The method for playing back is the same as in the “Playing the Internal Songs” instructions

(page 79), except that you should select FLOPPY DISK page in the SONG display.

Other Playback-related Operations

■ Repeat / Rewind / Fast forward

■ Adjusting the Volume Balance / Muting Speciﬁc Channels

CHANNEL ON/OFF display

Select the [SONG] tab with the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button, and mute the desired channel

by setting it to [OFF]. To solo a channel (only that channel will sound), hold down the

appropriate button corresponding to the channel. To release the solo for the channel, press

that channel’s button again.

Before proceeding, make

sure to read the section

“Handling the Floppy Disk

Drive (FDD) and Floppy

Disk” (page 7).

You can set whether or not

the PSR-2100/1100 auto-

matically calls up the ﬁrst

disk song when a disk is

inserted (page 153).

Some song data for the PSR-

2100/1100 has been

recorded with special “free

tempo” settings. During play-

back of such song data, the

measure numbers shown in

the display will not corre-

spond to the actual measure;

this only serves as a refer-

ence as to how much of the

song has been played back.

Songs containing a large

amount of data may not be

able to be read properly by

the instrument, and as such

you may not be able to

select them. The maximum

capacity is about 200–

300KB, however this may

differ depending on the data

contents of each song.

Insert the disk shutter side

ﬁrst and label face up.

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

NEW SONG SYNC. START

During playback, you can have the song return to the top and play back again

from the beginning by pressing this button. When playback is stopped,

pressing this button returns the song to the beginning.

Press this button to call up the SONG POSITION display (see

below). To return to the SONG display, press the [EXIT] button.

When “BAR” is selected, you can specify a measure number (counted from the

beginning of the song) by using the [REW] and [FF] buttons.

When “PHRASE MARK” is selected, specify the phrase mark number by using the

[REW] and [FF] buttons.

Phrase Mark

This data speciﬁes a certain

location in the song data.

SONG POSITION display

“PHRASE MARK” is shown only when the song contains phrase marks. Press

the [J] button to toggle between “BAR” and “PHRASE MARK,” then use the

[REW] and [FF] buttons to select the desired measure or phrase mark.

BALANCE

PART

CHANNEL ON/OFF

Press this button to call up the BALANCE display (page 64).

Press this button to call up the CHANNEL ON/OFF display (see below).

Channel

Refers to the MIDI channel

in the song data. The chan-

nels are assigned as shown

below for the PSR-2100/

1100.

Song

1 - 16

Accompaniment Style

9 - 16

Song Playback

PSR-2100/1100

This feature lets you mute certain parts of the song (Track1, Track2, Extra Tracks), and play back only those parts you

want to hear. For example, if you want to practice the melody of a song, you can mute just the right-hand part and play

that part yourself.

This feature allows you to specify a certain range of the song (between Point A and Point B), and play it back repeatedly.

Muting Speciﬁc Parts — Track1/Track2/Extra Tracks

SONG

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

METRO-

NOMEREPEAT

Use this button to turn on/off

the right-hand part.

Use this button to turn on/off the left-hand part.

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

NEW SONG SYNC. START

Select the song to be played back (page 78).

Use this button to turn on/off the additional performance parts

(all but the right hand/left hand).

Start the song.

Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO [ ][ ] buttons (page 53).

All tracks are automatically

set to on when selecting a

different song.

To stop the song, press the

button again.

START/STOP

END

You can change the channel

assignments for Track 1 and

Track 2 (page 140), letting

you specify which parts are

muted when pressing the

[TRACK 1]/[TRACK 2]/

[EXTRA TRACKS] buttons.

Repeat Playback of a Speciﬁc Range

SONG

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

METRO-

NOMEREPEAT

START/STOP

Play back the song (page 79, 81).

You can also specify Points A and B when the song is stopped. Set Point A by

pressing the [REPEAT] button, then use the [FF] button to move to the desired

end location, then set Point B by pressing the [REPEAT] button again.

Stop the song.

To cancel the Repeat function, press the

button again.

REPEAT

Press this button at the point you want

the repeating phrase to start (Point A).

Press this button at the point you want

the repeating phrase to end (Point B).

After an automatic lead-in (to help guide you into the phrase), the range from

point A to point B is played back repeatedly.

Regardless of whether the song is playing back or is stopped, pressing the [TOP]

button returns to point A.

Point B cannot be selected

unless Point A has been

selected ﬁrst.

Specifying only Point A

results in repeat playback

between Point A and the

end of the song.

The speciﬁed A and B

points will be erased when

selecting a different song

number, cancelling the

Repeat function, or select-

ing a different repeat mode

— such as Phrase Repeat

or repeat in Song Chain

Play (page 136).

END

Song Playback

PSR-2100/1100

With this feature, you can have the notation automatically shown on the display as the song plays. This can be used

with your own recordings as well as the internal Demo songs.

Displaying Music Notation — Score

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Select the

desired song

(page 79, 81).

Enables/disables display of the left-hand key range.

Depending on other settings, this parameter may

be unavailable and may appear grayed out. If this is

the case, go to the detailed setting display (shown

below; use the [8▲▼] buttons) and set the LEFT

CH. parameter to any channel except “AUTO.” Or,

go to the SONG SETTING display in the Function

menu (page 136) and set the TRACK 2 parameter

to any channel except “OFF.”

Enables/disables display of the right-hand key range.

Channel 1 is automatically selected when [TRACK1]

is set to [OFF] from the SONG SETTING display

(page 140).

Enables/disables display of the chords.

If the selected song does not contain chord data, chords

are not displayed.

Enables/disables display of the note name (pitch).

Determines the display resolution (or zoom level) of the notation.

SMALL......Notation is shown in small size.

LARGE .....Notation is shown in large size.

The displayed notation is

generated by the PSR-

2100/1100 based on the

song data. As a result, it

may not be exactly the

same as commercially

available sheet music of the

same song — especially

when displaying notation of

complicated passages or

many short notes.

Some song data for the

PSR-2100/1100 has been

recorded with special "free

tempo" settings. For such

song data, the tempo, beat,

measure and music

notation will not displayed

correctly.

[RIGHT] and [LEFT] cannot

be turned off at the same

time.

The note name is indicated

at the left of the note. When

the space between the

notes is too small, the indi-

cation may be moved to the

top left of the note.

You can increase the num-

ber of measures that will be

displayed by decreasing the

other items to be displayed

(parts, lyrics, chords, etc.).

When accidentals (sharp

and ﬂats) and notes cannot

be displayed on one line,

they are displayed in the

next line from the middle of

the measure.

The notation functions can-

not be used to create song

data by inputting notes. For

information on creating

song data, see page 99.

If the MAIN screen (at left)

is not displayed, press the

[DIRECT ACCESS] button

followed by the [EXIT] but-

ton.

This calls up the detailed setting display for notation.

For details, see the next page.

Enables/disables display of the lyrics.

If the selected song does not contain lyric data, lyrics are

not displayed.

Song Playback

PSR-2100/1100

Detailed Settings for Notation

■ [1▲▼] LEFT CH/[2▲▼] RIGHT CH

This determines the Left channel (channel for the left-hand part) and Right channel (channel for the right-hand part).

This setting returns to AUTO when a different song is selected.

AUTO .........................The channels for the right- and left-hand parts are assigned automatically — setting the parts

to the same channel as the channel which is speciﬁed in the SONG SETTING display of the

Function menu (page 140).

1-16............................Assigns the part to the speciﬁed channel, 1- 16.

OFF (LEFT CH only)....No channel assignment.

■ [3▲▼], [4▲▼] KEY SIGNATURE

This lets you enter key signature changes in the middle of a song, at the stopped position. This menu is useful when

the selected song contains no key signature settings for displaying notation.

For a list of the key signatures, with their relative minor keys and accidentals, see the chart below.

■ [5▲▼] QUANTIZE

This gives you control over the note resolution in the notation, letting you shift or correct

the timing of all displayed notes so that they line up to a particular note value. Make sure

to select the smallest note value which is used in the song.

Note resolution:

1/4 note, 1/8 note, 1/16 note, 1/32 note, 1/4 note triplet, 1/8 note triplet, 1/16 note

triplet, 1/32 note triplet

When “LEFT” and “RIGHT”

are set to the same channel,

the notation of the right-hand

notes and left-hand notes

are displayed in piano format

(two connected staves).

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

The note indicates the root note of the major key, and the note indicates the root of the relative minor.

C Maj (A min) G Maj (E min) D Maj (B min) A Maj (F

min) E Maj (C

min) B Maj (G

min) F

Maj (D

min) C

Maj (A

min)

Maj (A

min) G

Maj (E

min) D Maj (B

min) A

Maj (F min) E

Maj (C min) B

Maj (G min) F Maj (D min)

Key Signatures and Accidentals

Short notes and ornamented

notes (such as trills and

grace notes) which are

shorter than the Note resolu-

tion will not be displayed in

the notation.

Song Playback

PSR-2100/1100

■ [6▲▼] NOTE NAME

Select the Note Name type when “NOTE” (page 83) is set to ON.

ABC ................. Note names are indicated as letters (C, D, E, F, G, A, B).

Fixed Do .......... Note names are indicated in solfeggio and differ depending on the selected language (page 52).

English.............. Do Re Mi Fa Sol La Ti

French.............. Ut Re Mi Fa Sol La Si

Italian............... Do Re Mi Fa Sol La Si

German............ Do Re Mi Fa Sol La Si

Spanish............. Do re Mi Fa Sol La Si

Japanese...........

Movable Do..... Note names are indicated in solfeggio according to the scale intervals, and as such are relative to

the key. The root note is indicated as Do. For example, in the key of G major the root note of Sol

would be indicated as Do.

As with “Fixed Do,” the indication differs depending on the selected language.

■ [8▲] OK

This closes the detailed setting display and starts generating the notation. You can also

execute this by pressing the [ENTER] button on the panel.

■ [8▼] CANCEL

This closes the detailed setting display without changing the settings. You can also

execute this by pressing the [EXIT] button on the panel.

You can select the display

pages (one before and after)

by the using the [BACK]/

[NEXT] buttons or the pedal

(page 142).

Song Playback

PSR-2100/1100

This function lets you display the lyrics while the song is playing back — making it easy to sing along with your

performance or song playback.

* Microphone input is available only on the PSR-2100.

Displaying the Lyrics

Select the

desired song

(page 79, 81).

The lyrics are

in reverse

display along

with song

playback.

Stop the song.

To return to the previous page, press the

button.

EXIT

END

The lyrics can be changed

(page 110).

The language used for lyr-

ics display depends on the

particular lyric data. If the

lyrics are garbled or unread-

able, you can remedy this

by changing the “LYRICS

LANGUAGE” setting from

the SONG SETTING dis-

play (page 140).

Start the song.

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

1 REPEAT

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

1 REPEAT

If the selected song does

not contain lyric data, lyrics

are not displayed.

In this example, select

“Lyrics” in the Function

folder of the PRESET

(SONG) page.

If the selected song

contains chord data, chord

names are displayed with

the lyrics.

PSR-2100/1100

Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory

Registration Memory is a powerful feature that lets you set up the PSR-2100/1100 just as you want — selecting speciﬁc

voices, styles, effect settings etc. — and save your custom panel setup for future recall. Then, when you need those

settings, simply press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button.

This shows you how to register your custom panel settings to the REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons. Make all the

settings you want with the panel controls, and Registration Memory will “remember” them for you.

USER

ENTER

EXIT

BALANCE

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

DIRECT

ACCESS

PART

CHANNEL ON/OFF

FREEZE MEMORY

DATA ENTRY

ORGAN FLUTES

STRINGS CHOIR & PAD

GUITAR

MAIN

BACK NEXT

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

LAYER

BASS

PIANO & HARPSI.

E.PIANO

UPPER OCTAVE

WOODWIND

PERCUSSION

VARIATION

MONOTOUCH

SUSTAIN

DSP

HARMONY/

ECHO

LEFT

HOLD

SYNTH.

BRASS

ORGAN &

ACCORDION

VOICE EFFECT

VOICE

ONE TOUCH SETTING

REGISTRATION MEMORY

MIC.

EFFECT

RESET

VOCAL

HARMONY

MIC.

SETTING

VH TYPE

SELECT

TALK

OVER

SIGNAL

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

TRANSPOSE

ACMP

STANDBY

INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

BALLAD USERLATIN

POP & ROCK

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

BALLROOM

DANCE

RESET

MIN MAX

FADE

IN/OUT

TEMPO

STOP

TAP T EMPO

RESET

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

STYLE

MARCH &

WALTZ

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

1 REPEAT

SWING &

JAZZ

MULTI PAD

STYLE CONTROL

MASTER VOLUME

PART

FREEZE MEMORY

REGISTRATION MEMORY

Registering Panel Setups — Registration Memory

END

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

FREEZE MEMORY

REGISTRATION MEMORY

FREEZE MEMORY

REGISTRATION MEMORY

Set up the panel controls as desired.

For a list of the settings that can be registered, refer to the separate Data List

(Parameter Chart).

Select the desired parameter groups

for the settings you want to register.

You can also use the [DATA ENTRY]

dial to navigate in this display. To

the corresponding box. Groups left

without checkmarks will not be included

in the Registration Memory setting.

This allows you to maintain certain

settings, even when switching among

Registration Memory presets. You can

also use the Freeze function (page 89)

to override the Registration Memory

changes — letting you prevent certain

panel settings from being changed.

Enters a checkmark to the

selected box. You can also

use the [ENTER] button.

Removes the checkmark from

the selected box. You can also

use the [ENTER] button.

Cancels the registration

and returns to the MAIN

display. You can also use

the [EXIT] button.

Press the desired

number button for

registering the settings.

Indicator is green .....The panel setting is registered, but not selected.

Indicator is red.........The panel setting is registered and is currently selected.

Indicator is off..........The panel setting is not registered.

Keep in mind that songs,

styles or multi pads on disk

cannot registered to Regis-

tration Memory. If you want

to register a disk-based

song, style or multi pad,

copy the relevant data to

“USER” in the SONG/

STYLE/MULTI PAD dis-

play (page 39) and register

the data separately.

For information on saving the settings registered here, refer to the next page.

To delete all currently reg-

istered settings at one

time, simultaneously hold

down the highest B key on

the keyboard and turn on

the power.

PSR2100_E.book Page 87 Tuesday, January 28, 2003 2:11 PM

Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory

PSR-2100/1100

Saving Your Registration Memory Setups

The settings registered to the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]-[8] buttons are saved as a single ﬁle.

REGISTRATION EDIT display

The contents of the current Registration Memory bank (REGIST.) are listed in the REGISTRATION EDIT screen. The

names of the stored Registration Memory presets are shown in the display and the indicators of the relevant

REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons are lit in green.

From this screen, you can select, name, or delete the Registration Memory presets.

Select ..........Press the [A] - [J] buttons. The REGIST. display is linked to the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] - [8]

buttons. When you select the Registration Memory preset in the display, the related button turns on

(indicator is red).

Name ..........This operation is the same as that in “Naming Files and Folders” (page 44) in “Basic Operations —

Organizing Your Data.”

Delete .........This operation is the same as that in “Deleting Files/Folders” (page 46) in “Basic Operations —

Organizing Your Data.”

Save the result of the Name/Delete operation by returning to the REGISTRATION BANK display and pressing

the [8

▼] (UP) button.

Keep in mind that the size of

the Registration bank ﬁles

and the memory space they

occupy depends on the

amount of functions set in

each.

BANK 01

All settings registered to buttons [1]-

[8] are referred to as a “bank.” The

banks can be saved to “USER” or

“FLOPPY DISK” as Registration

bank ﬁles.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Press the [DIRECT

ACCESS] button and [EXIT]

button to call up the MAIN

display.

Save the settings you’ve

made to the

Registration Memory

buttons as a single

Registration bank ﬁle

(page 47).

The REGISTRATION EDIT display

appears. For details on this display,

see below.

Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory

PSR-2100/1100

You can recall all of the panel settings you’ve made — or only those you speciﬁcally want or need. For example, if you

de-select “STYLE” in the REGISTRATION MEMORY display, you can keep the currently selected style even when you

change the Registration Memory preset.

Recalling the Registered Settings

Select the desired bank in the REGISTRATION BANK display (page 88).

Press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button (any whose indicators are

green) to recall the desired settings.

Selecting the Freeze Settings

Recalling a Registration Memory Setup

You can program your

Registration Memory presets

to be called up in sequence,

in any order you desire.

Once programmed, the

presets 1 - 8 can be selected

in sequence with the

[BACK][NEXT] buttons or

the pedal (page 145).

FREEZE MEMORY

REGISTRATION MEMORY

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

FREEZE MEMORY

REGISTRATION MEMORY

FREEZE MEMORY

REGISTRATION MEMORY

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Select the Freeze settings.

Enters a checkmark

to the selected box.

Press the [FREEZE] button. When Freeze is active (lamp is lit), the settings you speciﬁed in the Freeze

page will be maintained or left unchanged, even when changing Registration Memory presets.

Press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button (any whose indicators are green) to recall the

desired settings.

Removes the

checkmark from the

selected box.

Call up the “FREEZE”

page from the

REGIST.SEQUENCE/

FREEZE/VOICE SET

screen (page 145).

PSR-2100/1100

Editing Voices — Sound Creator

The PSR-2100/1100 has a Sound Creator feature that allows you to create your own voices

by editing some parameters of the existing voices. Once you’ve created a voice, you can

save it as a USER voice for future recall.

• The Voice can be edited in

realtime while playing

back a song/style.

•Keep in mind that adjust-

ments made to the param-

eters may not make much

change in the actual

sound depending on the

original settings of the

voice.

USER

ENTER

EXIT

BALANCE

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

DIRECT

ACCESS

PART

CHANNEL ON/OFF

FREEZE MEMORY

DATA ENTRY

ORGAN FLUTES

STRINGS CHOIR & PAD

GUITAR

MAIN

BACK NEXT

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

LAYER

BASS

PIANO & HARPSI.

E.PIANO

UPPER OCTAVE

WOODWIND

PERCUSSION

VARIATION

MONOTOUCH

SUSTAIN

DSP

HARMONY/

ECHO

LEFT

HOLD

SYNTH.

BRASS

ORGAN &

ACCORDION

VOICE EFFECT

VOIC E

ONE TOUCH SETTING

REGISTRATION MEMORY

MIC.

EFFECT

RESET

VOCAL

HARMONY

MIC.

SETTING

VH TYPE

SELECT

TALK

OVER

SIGNAL

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

TRANSPOSE

ACMP

STANDBY

INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

BALLAD USERLATIN

POP & ROCK

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

BALLROOM

DANCE

RESET

MIN MAX

FADE

IN/OUT

TEMPO

STOP

TAP TEMPO

RESET

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

STYLE

MARCH &

WALTZ

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

1REPEAT

SWING &

JAZZ

MULTI PAD

STYLE CONTROL

MASTER VOLUME

PART

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL

STUDIO

Operation

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

PART

Press the [F], [G] or [H] button to select the

Part (MAIN, LAYER or LEFT) containing the

voice you wish to edit.

Indicates the

parameters available

for editing in this

display. These

correspond to the

parameters/values

shown at the bottom

of the display.

Select the desired menu by

pressing the [NEXT]/

[BACK] button.

Opens the Save (Voice) display for saving

the edited voice as a User voice (page 47).

Select the desired menu.

The selected menu is highlighted.

Can be used during editing to compare

the sound of the original voice with the

edited voice.

Save the edited voice to the USER drive

(Flash ROM) as a USER voice (page 47).

ORGAN FLUTES (PSR-2100 only)

The voice can also be

selected in the SOUND

CREATOR display.

Press the

[SOUND

CREATOR]

button.

Edit the voice parameters.

The operations for each function selected in this step are covered in detail, starting on page 92 (Regular

Voice), and page 94 (Organ Flutes).

REGULAR VOICE

The settings are lost if the

edited part's voice is

switched to another voice.

Important data should be

saved to User Drive or

ﬂoppy disk.

Press the [USER] button to select the

edited voice, and play the keyboard.

CAUTION

Select or adjust the parameters.

Editing the voice -SOUND CREATOR-

PSR-2100/1100

Regular Voice Parameters

The parameter for Organ Flute, see page 94

The following parameters are linked to the ones in each display.

COMMON

The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 90.

COMMON Determines the common settings such as voice volume or octave.

SOUND Determines the timbre/EG (Envelope Generator)/vibrato of the voice.

EFFECT/EQ (PSR-2100)

EFFECT (PSR-1100)

Determines the effect depth/type and equalizer settings.

HARMONY Determines the Harmony/Echo settings.

Common parameter Other location

MONO VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL) page 61

PORTAMENTO TIME MIXING CONSOLE page 126

FILTER BRIGHTNESS MIXING CONSOLE page 126

FILTER HARMONIC CONTENT MIXING CONSOLE page 126

REVERB DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 127

CHORUS DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 127

DSP ON/OFF VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL) page 60

DSP DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 127

DSP TYPE/VARIATION MIXING CONSOLE/VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL) page 61,127

EQ LOW/GAIN MIXING CONSOLE page 124

EQ HIGH/GAIN MIXING CONSOLE page 124

HARMONY/ECHO TYPE HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 146

HARMONY/ECHO VOLUME HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 146

HARMONY/ECHO SPEED HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 146

HARMONY/ECHO ASSIGN HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 146

HARMONY/ECHO CHORD NOTE ONLY HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 146

HARMONY/ECHO TOUCH LIMIT HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 146

Keep in mind that there are

certain parameters whose

Sound Creator settings

affect only the Main part’s

voice.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Set the volume of the current edited

voice.

Set the portamento time of each

part (MAIN/LAYER/VOICE)

(page 126).

Determines the touch sensitivity, or

how greatly the volume responds to

your playing strength.

0.........Produces more dramatic

level drops, the more softly

you play.

64.......Normal response.

127.....Produces high volume for

any playing strength (ﬁxed)

Shift the octave range of the

selected voice up or down in

octaves. When the Main or Layer

part’s voice is used, the M/LYR

parameter is available; when the

Left part’s voice is used, the LEFT

parameter is available.

This determines whether the voice

is played monophonically (page 61).

Editing the voice -SOUND CREATOR-

PSR-2100/1100

SOUND

The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 90.

■ FILTER

FILTER settings determine the overall timbre of the sound by boosting or cutting a

certain frequency range.

■ EG

The EG (Envelope Generator) settings determine how the level of the sound changes in time. This lets you reproduce

many sound characteristics of natural acoustic instruments — such as the quick attack and decay of percussion

sounds, or the long release of a sustained piano tone.

• ATTACK ...... Determines how quickly the sound reaches its maximum

level after the key is played. The higher the value, the

slower the attack.

• DECAY........ Determines how quickly the sound reaches its sustain

level (a slightly lower level than maximum). The higher

the value, the slower the decay.

• RELEASE ..... Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after

the key is released. The higher the value, the slower the release.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Determines the ﬁlter, EG, and

vibrato settings (see below).

In addition to making the

sound either brighter or

more mellow, Filter can be

used to produce electronic,

synthesizer-like effects.

Cutoff frequency

Volume

Frequency

(pitch)

Cutoff range

These frequencies are

“passed” by the filter.

• BRIGHTNESS

Determines the cutoff frequency or

effective frequency (resonance) range of

the ﬁlter (see diagram). Higher values

result in a brighter sound.

Resonance

• Harmonic Content

Determines the emphasis given to the

cutoff frequency, set in BRIGHTNESS

above (see diagram). Higher values result

in a more pronounced effect.

Resonance

Volume

Frequency

(pitch)

Time

Level

Key on

Key off

ATTACK RELEASE

DECAY

If RELEASE is set to a large

value, the sustain becomes

long.

Editing the voice -SOUND CREATOR-

PSR-2100/1100

■ VIBRATO

• DEPTH........ Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect (see diagram). Higher

settings result in a more pronounced Vibrato.

• SPEED......... Determines the speed of the Vibrato effect (see diagram).

• DELAY ........ Determines the amount of time that elapses between the

playing of a key and the start of the Vibrato effect (see

diagram). Higher settings increase the delay of the Vibrato

onset.

EFFECT/EQ

The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 90.

HARMONY

The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 90.

The parameters are the same as for HARMONY/ECHO display of FUNCTION. For details, see page 147.

VIBRATO

Creates a wavering in the

sound by periodically chang-

ing the pitch.

DEPTH

SPEED

DELAY

Time

Level

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Determines the Frequency and

Gain of the Low and High EQ

bands (PSR-2100 only).

The same as the “Mixing Console”

on page 127.

Determines the Sustain depth

of each voice when the

[SUSTAIN] button is set to on.

Determines the DSP type.

For information on the effect

structure, see page 129; for a list of

available effect types, refer to the

separate Data List.

Editing the voice -SOUND CREATOR-

PSR-2100/1100

Organ Flutes (PSR-2100 only)

In addition to the many organ voices in the ORGAN voice category, the PSR-2100/1100 has an ORGAN FLUTES voice.

The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 90.

■ Parameters

Organ Type This parameter speciﬁes the type of organ tone generation to be simulated: Sine or Vintage.

Rotary SP Speed The Rotary SP Speed ([C]) button alternately switches between the slow and fast rotary speaker

speeds when a rotary speaker effect is selected for the Organ Flutes (see “DSP Type” below), and the

VOICE EFFECT [DSP] button is turned on (the Rotary SP Speed button has the same effect as the

VOICE EFFECT [VARIATION] button).

Vibrato On/Off This ([G]) button alternately turns the vibrato effect for the Organ Flutes voice ON or OFF.

Vibrato Depth Can be set to any of three levels via the Vibrato Depth ([H]) button. The button sequentially selects a

depth of “1”, “2”, or “3”.

Footage The footage settings determine the basic sound of the organ ﬂutes.

The term “footage” is a reference to the sound generation of traditional pipe organs, in which the sound

is produced by pipes of different lengths (in feet). The longer the pipe, the lower the pitch of the sound.

Hence, the 16’ setting determines the lowest pitched component of the voice, while the 1’ setting

determines the highest pitched component. The higher the value of the setting, the greater the volume

of the corresponding footage. Mixing various volumes of the footages lets you create your own

distinctive organ sounds.

Volume (VOL) Adjusts the overall volume of the Organ Flutes. The longer the graphic bar, the greater the volume.

Response (RESP) The Response control affects both the attack and sustain portion of the sound, increasing or

decreasing the response time of the initial swell and release, based on the FOOTAGE controls. The

higher the value the slower the swell and release.

Vibrato Speed (VIB. SPEED) Determines the speed of the vibrato effect controlled by the Vibrato On/Off and Vibrato Depth above.

Mode The MODE control selects between two modes: FIRST and EACH. In the FIRST mode, attack is

applied only to the ﬁrst notes played and held simultaneously; while the ﬁrst notes are held, any

subsequently played notes have no attack applied. In the EACH mode, attack is applied equally to all

notes.

Attack (4’, 2 2/3’, 2’) The ATTACK controls adjust the attack sound of the ORGAN FLUTE voice. The 4’, 2 2/3 ‘and 2’

controls increase or reduce the amount of attack sound at the corresponding footages. The longer the

graphic bar the greater the attack sound.

Length (LENG) The LENGTH control affects the attack portion of the sound producing a longer or shorter decay

immediately after the initial attack. The longer the graphic bar the longer the decay.

Reverb Depth

Chorus Depth

DSP on/off

DSP Depth

For details about the digital effects, see pages 60, 127.

DSP Type Determines the DSP effect type to be applied to the Organ Flutes voice. Normally this will be one of the

seven available Rotary Speaker effects. If any other type of effect is selected, the Rotary SP Speed

([C]) button in the FOOTAGE/VOL/ATTACK display will not control rotary speaker speed. Instead, it will

have the same effect as the VOICE EFFECT [VARIATION] button.

Variation Variation Determines whether the DSP variation will be set to Slow or Fast when the Organ Flutes voice is

selected (when the Voice Set function is ON — page 146).

Value Sets the DSP variation parameter value (e.g., “LFO Freq” for a Rotary Speaker effect) when the DSP

variation is turned on.

EQ Low

EQ High

The EQ parameters determine the Frequency and Gain of the Low and High EQ bands.

Adjust the Footage.

PSR-2100/1100

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs

— Song Creator

With these powerful yet easy-to-use song creating features, you can record your own keyboard performances and store

them for future recall. Several different recording methods are available: Quick Recording (page 96), which lets you

record easily and quickly; Multi Recording (page 97), which lets you record several different parts; and Step Recording

(page 99), which lets you enter notes one by one. Songs can include not only the voice settings for the keyboard

performance (Main, Layer, Left), but also the effects, vocal harmony and auto accompaniment parts. The recorded song

can be stored to internal memory or ﬂoppy disk (page 38, 47).

About Song Recording

There are two methods of recording songs: realtime recording and step recording.

■ Realtime Recording

This method lets you record performance data in real time. There are two ways to use

realtime recording: Quick and Multi.

Quick Recording (page 96)

This is the easiest recording method, and lets you quickly record the piano

song you are practicing. You can select from four parts: right hand, left hand

and auto accompaniment/multi pad. For example, you can record only your

right hand performance, or you can simultaneously record both your right

hand and the auto accompaniment.

Multi Recording (page 97)

This lets you record a song with several different instrument sounds, and create

the sound of a full band or orchestra. Record the performance of each instrument

individually and create fully orchestrated compositions. You can also record over

an existing part on an internal song or a song on disk with your own performance.

■ Step Recording (page 99)

This method lets you compose your performance by “writing” it down one event

at a time. This is a non-realtime, manual recording method — similar to writing

music notation onto paper. By using the Event List (page 108-110), you can input

notes, chords and other events one by one.

■ Song Editing (page 105)

The PSR-2100/1100 also lets you edit the songs you’ve recorded by the Quick

Recording, Multi Recording and Step Recording methods.

When re-recording a speciﬁc section of an already-recorded song, use the Punch

IN/OUT function (page 104).

USER

ENTER

EXIT

BALANCE

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

DIRECT

ACCESS

PART

CHANNEL ON/OFF

FREEZE MEMORY

DATA ENTRY

ORGAN FLUTES

STRINGS CHOIR & PAD

GUITAR

MAIN

BACK NEXT

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

LAYER

BASS

PIANO & HARPSI.

E.PIANO

UPPER OCTAVE

WOODWIND

PERCUSSION

VARIATION

MONOTOUCH

SUSTAIN

DSP

HARMONY/

ECHO

LEFT

HOLD

SYNTH.

BRASS

ORGAN &

ACCORDION

VOICE EFFECT

VOIC E

ONE TOUCH SETTING

REGISTRATION MEMORY

MIC.

EFFECT

RESET

VOCAL

HARMONY

MIC.

SETTING

VH TYPE

SELECT

TALK

OVER

SIGNAL

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

TRANSPOSE

ACMP

STANDBY

INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

BALLAD USERLATIN

POP & ROCK

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

BALLROOM

DANCE

RESET

MIN MAX

FADE

IN/OUT

TEMPO

STOP

TAP TEMPO

RESET

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

STYLE

MARCH &

WALTZ

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

1 REPEAT

SWING &

JAZZ

MULTI PAD

STYLE CONTROL

MASTER VOLUME

PART

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

1 REPEAT

DIGITAL RECORDING

• The internal memory capacity of

the PSR-2100/1100 is about

1520KB (PSR-2100)/700KB (PSR-

1100). Memory capacity for 2DD

and 2HD ﬂoppy disks is about

720KB and 1.44MB, respectively.

When you store data to these loca-

tions, all ﬁle types of the PSR-2100/

1100 (Voice, Style, Song, Registra-

tion, etc.) are stored together.

• The microphone input signal (PSR-

2100 only) cannot be recorded.

• Songs recorded on the PSR-2100/

1100 are automatically recorded as

SMF (Standard MIDI File format 0)

data. For details on SMF, see

page 161.

• Playback of the recorded song

data can be transmitted from MIDI

OUT, letting you play the sounds of

a connected external tone genera-

tor (page 149).

• The volume level of each channel

of the song can be adjusted from

the Mixing Console and the set-

tings can be saved. Moreover, even

after you’ve set a voice for your

keyboard play during recording,

you can record voice selections, so

that the voice changes automati-

cally during playback (page 107).

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator

PSR-2100/1100

This is the easiest recording method — perfect for quickly recording and playing back a piano song you’re practicing, so

you can check your progress.

■ Play back your new song

To play back the performance you just recorded, return the song to the beginning by using the [TOP] button and

press the SONG [START/STOP] button.

Playback stops automatically at the end of the song, and returns to the beginning of the song.

You can edit the recorded song data from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16) displays (page 108).

Press the [6▼] button from the Open/Save display for Song to store the recorded data (page 38, 47).

Quick Recording

If you wish to save the recording, make sure to store it to internal memory (USER drive) or ﬂoppy disk (page 39, 47).

If you turn off the power or re-record over an existing track before you save the performance, any previous recording will be erased.

CAUTION

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

NEW SONG SYNC. START

■ When creating a new song:

■ When recording over the part of an internal

song or a song on disk with your own

performance:

Select the desired song (page 79, 81).

Select the voice and accompaniment style you want to use in the song.

If you want to record to the MAIN/Layer/Left voices, make sure to set the [MAIN]/[LAYER]/[LEFT] buttons to ON.

Make any other desired settings (Reverb, Chorus, etc.) as well.

To record without specifying a particular track, press the [REC] button.

In this case, your performance will be recorded automatically to TRACK 1.

To specify the track for recording, simultaneously hold down the [REC] button

and press the button corresponding to the track you want to record.

You can select TRACK 1 or TRACK 2 and the EXTRA TRACKS for recording at the

same time.

• Specifying the recording track

To record your keyboard performance:

Press either the [TRACK 1] or [TRACK 2] button.

To record the auto accompaniment and multi pad performance:

Press the [EXTRA TRACKS] button.

To stop recording, press

the [REC] button again.

If the “LAYER” or “LEFT” but-

ton is on before pressing the

REC button, the correspond-

ing Layer and Left parts are

automatically recorded to dif-

ferent channels.

The performance of track 1/2

is recorded to the channel

speciﬁed in the SONG SET-

TING display (page 140).

Recording starts as soon as you play the keyboard.

You can also start recording by pressing the SONG/STYLE

[START/STOP] button. Recording can also be started by

pressing down the foot pedal, if the song start/stop

function is properly assigned to the pedal (page 142).

To stop recording, press the [REC] button again.

Recording can also be stopped by pressing down the foot pedal, if the song

start/stop function is properly assigned to the pedal (page 142).

END

To pause, press the SONG

[START/STOP] button. To

resume recording, press the

SONG [START/STOP] but-

ton again.

You can also use the metro-

nome click as a guide while

recording.

The sound of the metronome

is not recorded.

You can overdub a second

right-hand performance onto

Track 2 after recording the

ﬁrst right-hand performance

(including the layer voices)

on Track 1. To do this, set the

[LEFT] button to OFF and

repeat steps 2 and 3.

REC

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator

PSR-2100/1100

This lets you record a song with several different instrument sounds on up to sixteen channels, and create the sound of

a full band or orchestra.

The structure of the channels and parts are shown in the chart below.

About the accompaniment style parts

Rhythm.....This is the basis for the accompaniment, containing the drum and percussion rhythm patterns. Usually one of the drum kits is used.

Bass..........The Bass part uses various appropriate instrument sounds to match the style, such as acoustic bass, synth bass, and others.

Chord........This is the rhythmic chord backing, commonly used with piano or guitar voices.

Pad............This part features sustained chords and commonly uses lush sounds such as strings, organ, and choir.

Phrase ......This part is used for various embellishments and riffs that enhance the song, such as brass section accents and chord arpeggios.

Channels

Parts

(default settings)

Available parts Channels

Parts

(default settings)

Available parts

1Voice MAIN

Voice MAIN, LAYER, LEFT

Multi Pad1

Multi Pad2

Multi Pad3

Multi Pad4

Accompaniment style RHYTHM 1

Accompaniment style RHYTHM 2

Accompaniment style BASS

Accompaniment style CHORD1

Accompaniment style CHORD2

Accompaniment style PAD

Accompaniment style PHRASE1

Accompaniment style PHRASE2

MIDI

Accompaniment style

RHYTHM 1

Voice MAIN, LAYER, LEFT

Multi Pad1

Multi Pad2

Multi Pad3

Multi Pad4

Accompaniment style RHYTHM 1

Accompaniment style RHYTHM 2

Accompaniment style BASS

Accompaniment style CHORD1

Accompaniment style CHORD2

Accompaniment style PAD

Accompaniment style PHRASE1

Accompaniment style PHRASE2

MIDI

2Voice MAIN 10

Accompaniment style

RHYTHM 2

3Voice MAIN 11

Accompaniment style

BASS

4Voice MAIN 12

Accompaniment style

CHORD1

5Voice MAIN 13

Accompaniment style

CHORD2

6Voice MAIN 14

Accompaniment style

PAD

7Voice MAIN 15

Accompaniment style

PHRASE1

8Voice MAIN 16

Accompaniment style

PHRASE2

Multi Recording

If you wish to save the recording, make sure to store it to internal memory (USER drive) or ﬂoppy disk (page 39, 47).

If you turn off the power or re-record over an existing track before you save the performance, any previous recording will be erased.

CAUTION

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

NEW SONG SYNC. START

REC

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

■ When creating a new song:

■ When recording over the part of an internal

song or a song on disk with your own

performance:

Select the desired song (page 79, 81).

Select the desired channel for recording (set it to “REC”) simultaneously

holding down the [REC] button and pressing the appropriate button [1▲▼] -

[8▲▼]. Several channels can be selected at the same time.

REC......................... Enables recording for the channel

ON ......................... Enables playback of the channel

OFF......................... Mutes the channel

To cancel or disable

recording, press the

[REC] button once

again.

The part is automatically

selected when setting the

several channels to “REC” at

the same time.

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator

PSR-2100/1100

Select the part you want to assign to the channel to be recorded.

This determines which of the keyboard-played parts (Main/Layer/Left) and the

accompaniment style parts (RHYTHM 1/2, BASS, etc.) are recorded to the

recording channels

selected in step #2.

For a list of the initial

default assignments,

see page 97.

When selecting the MIDI

part

• Setting a single channel

to MIDI

All incoming data received

via any of the MIDI chan-

nels 1 - 16 is recorded.

When using an external

MIDI keyboard or control-

ler to record, this lets you

record without having to

set the MIDI transmit

channel on the external

device.

• Setting several channels

to MIDI

When using an external

MIDI keyboard or control-

ler to record, this records

data only over the set

MIDI channel — meaning

the external device must

also be set to the same

channel.

A single part (with the

exception of MIDI parts) can-

not be assigned to several

channels.

Recording starts as soon as you play the keyboard.

You can also start recording by pressing the

SONG/STYLE [START/STOP] button. The

recording can be started/stopped by pressing the

foot pedal if the recording punch in/out function is

set to the pedal (page 104).

To stop recording, press the [REC] button again.

You can also use the foot pedal to stop recording by releasing it, if the

recording punch in/out function has been assigned to the pedal (page 104).

To pause, press the SONG

[START/STOP] button. To

resume recording, press the

SONG [START/STOP] but-

ton again.

You can also use the metro-

nome click as a guide while

recording.

The sound of the metronome

is not recorded.

Play back your new song.

To play back the performance you just recorded, return the song to the

beginning by using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP]

button.

Playback stops automatically at the end of the song, and returns to the

beginning of the song.

To record a new part, repeat steps 2 - 6 above.

You can set previously recorded parts to play back, and monitor them

while you record a new part. Continue in this way until you have a

ﬁnished song.

You can edit the recorded song data from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16)

displays (page 108).

Press the [6▼] button from the Open/Save display for Song to store

the recorded data (page 38, 47).

END

The settings of the recorded

parts is stored temporarily

until you execute Quick

Recording, select a song, or

turn the power off.

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator

PSR-2100/1100

This method lets you create a song by entering notes one by one, without having to perform them in real time. This is

also convenient for recording the chords and the melody separately.

Operation

Recording Individual Notes — Step Record

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

PART

Select an existing song (page 79, 81) to which

you want to add parts or re-record. If you want

to create a new song, simultaneously press the

[REC] button and the [TOP] button.

Press the [A] button to call up the Song

Creator display.

Press the [DIGITAL RECORDING] button.

Using the [BACK]/[NEXT]

buttons, select the “1-16”

tab for recording melodies

and other parts, or select

the “CHD” (Chord) tab for

recording chords, and after

selecting the “1 - 16” tab,

select a record channel

with the [F] (CH) button.

BACK NEXT

Call up the Step Record

display by pressing the

[G] button.

Any voice, effect and other

settings you make in the

Mixing Console are automat-

ically cancelled when you

call up the CHD (Chord)

page.

The voices in the USER and

FLOPPY DISK pages can-

not be selected for Step

recording. You can select

voices from the PRESET

page; however, these may

sound slightly different from

the original voice.

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator

PSR-2100/1100

100

■ Bar/Beat/Clock

■ Velocity

The table below shows the available settings and the corresponding velocity values.

■ Gate Time

The following settings are available:

Normal ....................... 80%

Tenuto ........................ 99%

Staccato...................... 40%

Staccatissimo.............. 20%

Manual

....................... The gate time (note length) can be speciﬁed as a percentage by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial.

Kbd. Vel fff ff f mf mp p pp ppp

Actual

playing

strength

127 111 95 79 63 47 31 15

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Moves the cursor position

up and down.

Returns the cursor to the

beginning of the song (the

ﬁrst note of the ﬁrst

measure).

Determines the velocity

(loudness) of the note to be

entered (only when recording

the melody). For information

on velocity settings, see below.

Determines the length of the

note (as a percentage) from

the position at which it is to be

entered. (This is available only

when recording the melody.)

For information on gate time

settings, see below.

Each press of this button toggles

among the three basic note

selectors at the bottom of the

display: normal, dotted, and triplet.

(This is available only when

recording the melody.)

Deletes the event at the cursor.

Use these to move the

selected event, in units of

measures (BAR), beat, and

clocks. For information on

measure/beat/clock settings,

see below.

Speciﬁes the type of note to be input next. (Sixteenth

notes are available only when recording the melody.)

This also determines the position to which the pointer

will advance after a note has been entered.

First, select the desired voice. To enter the note, ﬁrst specify the length and loudness in this display,

then enter the pitch by actually playing the note on the keyboard.

To close the STEP RECORD display, press the [EXIT] button. Make sure to store the recorded

data by pressing the [I] (SAVE) button (page 47).

END

Bar

Beat

Clock

000-

1919

000-

1919

000-

1919

000-

1919

000-

1919

000-

1919

000-

1919

000-

1919

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator

101

PSR-2100/1100

Recording Melodies — Step Record (Note)

In this section, we’ll show you how to use Step Recording by

guiding you through this actual music example, shown at right.

The operations here apply to step 6 on page 100.

■ Play back the newly created melody

Use the [C] ( ) button to move the cursor to the beginning of the song, and press the SONG [START/STOP] button

to hear the newly entered notes. To actually enter the recorded data, press the [EXIT] button. The entered data can be

edited from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16) display (page 108).

1-1 Select this note.

1-3 ...press this (to input a tie).

1-2 While holding down this note...

2-2

2-3

2-1 Select this note.

4-1 Press this button to display the dotted notes.

4-2 Select this note.

4-3

5-1 Call up the normal notes by pressing this button.

5-3

5-2 Select this note.

The notation display on the instrument (PSR-2100) may not be accurate,

especially for tied notes or longer notes. To have the notation displayed

accurately, set the gate time to tenuto by using the [H] button, and input

the notes as desired.

To input rests, simply move the measure/beat/clock location for the desired rest time, then input the next note.

Select this note.

Selecting a note enters a rest of the equivalent value. For example, selecting an eighth note

() here results in a eighth note rest ( ).

▲

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator

PSR-2100/1100

102

Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompaniment — Step

Record (Chord)

The Chord Step recording feature makes it possible to record auto accompaniment chord changes one at a time with

precise timing. Since the changes don’t have to be played in real time, you can easily create complex, tight chord

changes — over which you can record the melody in normal fashion.

The operations here apply to step 6 on page 100.

Entering Chords and Sections (Chord Step)

For example, you can input the following chord progression by the procedure described below.

C F G F G7 C

MAIN A BREAK MAIN B

Enter the chords by using the currently

selected chord ﬁngering method in the Auto

Accompaniment section of the keyboard.

Press the MAIN [A] button to specify the section, and enter the chords as shown at right.

C F G

MAIN A

MAIN

Select this note value and play

the chords indicated at right.

001:1:000

001:3:000

002:1:000

C F G F G7

MAIN A BREAK

INTROBREAK

002:3:000

002:4:000

Press the [BREAK] button to specify the Break section, and enter the chords as shown at right.

Select this note value and play

the chords indicated at right.

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator

103

PSR-2100/1100

■ Play back the newly created chord progression

Use the [C] ( ) button to move the cursor to the beginning of the song, and press the

SONG [START/STOP] button to hear the newly entered notes. To actually enter the

recorded data, press the [EXIT] button. The entered data can be edited from the SONG

CREATOR (CHD) display (page 109). Finally, press the [F] (EXPAND) button from the

SONG CREATOR (CHD) display in order to convert the input data into song data.

Press the MAIN [B] button to specify the section and enter the chord indicated at right.

C F G F G7 C

MAIN A BREAK MAIN B

MAIN

003:1:000

Select this note value and play

the chords indicated at right.

To enter a ﬁll-in, press the

[AUTO FILL IN] button and

press one of the MAIN [A]–

[D] buttons.

END Mark

An “END” mark is shown in

the display, indicating the

end of the song data.

The actual position of the

End mark differs depending

on the section that is input at

the end of the song. When

an Ending section is input,

the End mark automatically

follows the Ending data.

When a section other than

Ending is input, the End

mark is set two measures

after the ﬁnal section.

The End mark can be freely

set to any position desired.

▲

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator

PSR-2100/1100

104

From this display you can set up how recording is started and stopped for either Quick Recording or Multi Recording.

To call up these settings, select the REC MODE display by using the [BACK][NEXT] button, after performing operation

steps 1 - 3 on page 99.

About Punch In/Out

This feature is useful primarily for re-recording or replacing a speciﬁc section of an already recorded channel. The

illustrations below indicate a variety of situations in which selected measures in an eight-measure phrase are re-recorded.

Select the Recording Options: Starting, Stopping,

Punching In/Out — Rec Mode

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Determines the measure at which Punch

In overwrite recording starts (when

“PUNCH IN AT” is selected).

These settings determine how recording will

start.

Normal

Overwrite recording starts when you press

the SONG [START/STOP] button or when

you play the keyboard with Synchro standby

set to ON.

First Key On

Overwrite recording starts as soon as you

start playing the keyboard. This setting also

preserves the previous lead-in data, letting

you record over the original lead-in without

erasing it.

Punch In At

The song plays back normally up to the

indicated Punch In measure (set by the

[3▲▼] buttons), then starts overwrite

recording at that Punch In measure.

These settings determine how recording will stop as well as what happens to previously recorded data.

Determines the Punch Out

measure — the measure at

which Punch In overwrite

recording stops (when

“PUNCH OUT AT” is

selected).

When this is set to ON, you

can use the foot pedal 2 to

control the punch-in and

punch-out points. (The current

function assignment of the

foot pedal is cancelled.) Press

and hold down the foot pedal

to record. Recording stops

when you release the pedal.

Calls up the SONG display,

from which you can save the

edited data.

Replace All

This deletes all data following the point at which recording is stopped.

Punch Out

This maintains all data following the point at which recording is stopped.

Punch Out At

Overwrite recording continues until the indicated Punch Out measure (set by the [6▲▼] buttons),

then stops at that Punch Out measure, after which song playback continues normally.

12345678

REC START setting

REC END setting

12345

Deleted

Start/start overwrite recording

Original data

Previously recorded data

Newly recorded data

Deleted data

NORMAL

REPLACE ALL

12345678

NORMAL

PUNCH OUT

12345678

NORMAL

PUNCH OUT AT=006

12345

Start/

play back original data

Start/

play back original data

Start/

play back original data

Start/

play back original data

Start/

play back original data

Start/

play back original data

Start playing the keys/

start overwrite recording

Start playing the keys/

start overwrite recording

Start playing the keys/

start overwrite recording

Start overwrite recording

Stop recording

FIRST KEY ON

REPLACE ALL

12345678

FIRST KEY ON

PUNCH OUT

12345678

Stop overwrite recording/

play original data

Stop overwrite recording/

play original data

Stop overwrite recording/

play original data

FIRST KEY ON

PUNCH OUT AT=006

12345

PUNCH IN AT=003

REPLACE ALL

12345678

PUNCH IN AT=003

PUNCH OUT

12345 7

PUNCH IN AT=003

PUNCH OUT AT=006

*1 When measures 1 - 2 are not

overwritten, recording starts

from measure 3.

*2 You’ll have to press the [REC]

button at the end of 5 measures.

Start/start overwrite recording

Stop recording

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator

105

PSR-2100/1100

Whether you’ve recorded a song using Quick Recording, Multi Recording, or Step Recording, you can use the editing

features to change the song data.

Editing Channel-related Parameters — Channel

Calling up the operations here apply to step 4 on page 99. To call up the display shown below, use the [BACK]/[NEXT]

buttons.

Quantize

Quantize lets you “clean up” or tighten the timing of a previously recorded channel. For example, the following

musical passage has been written with exact quarter-note and eighth-note values.

Even though you think you may have recorded the passage accurately, your actual performance may be slightly ahead

of or behind the beat. Quantize allows you to align all the notes in a channel so that the timing is absolutely accurate to

the speciﬁed note value (see below).

■ About Quantize Size

Set the Quantize size to correspond to the smallest notes in the channel you are working with. For example, if the

data was recorded with both quarter notes and eighth notes, use 1/8 note for the Quantize size. If you apply a 1/4

note Quantize size, the eighth notes would be moved on top of the quarter notes.

Editing a Recorded Song

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Use this to select the

desired edit operation.

Selects the desired channel

to be quantized.

Selects the quantize size (resolution).

See the below for the details.

Determines how strongly the

notes will be quantized. If a

value less than 100% is

selected, notes will be

moved toward the speciﬁed

quantization beats only by

the speciﬁed amount.

Applying less than 100%

quantization lets you

preserve some of the

“human” feel in the

recording.

Executes the Quantize

operation. After the

operation is completed, this

button changes to [UNDO],

letting you restore the

original data if you’re not

satisﬁed with the Quantize

results. The Undo function

only has one level; only the

previous operation can be

undone.

Calls up the SONG display,

from which you can save

the edited data.

One measure of eighth notes before quantization After 1/8 note quantization

1/8 note 1/16 note 1/32 note 1/16 note +

1/8 note triplet *

1/4 note

1/4 note triplet 1/8 note triplet 1/16 note triplet 1/8 note +

1/8 note triplet *

1/16 note +

1/16 note triplet *

The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks (*) are exceptionally convenient, since they allow you to quantize two different

note values at the same time, without compromising the quantization of either one. For example, if you have both straight 1/8 notes

and 1/8 note triplets recorded to the same channel, and you quantize to straight 1/8 notes, all notes in the channel are quantized to

straight 1/8 notes — completely eliminating any triplet feel in the rhythm. However, if you use the 1/8 note + 1/8 note triplet setting,

both the straight and triplet notes will be quantized correctly.

Quantize Size

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator

PSR-2100/1100

106

Delete

This lets you delete recorded data in the speciﬁed channel.

Mix

This function lets you mix the data of two channels and place the results in a different channel. It also lets you copy the

data from one channel to another.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Use these to select the

desired edit operation.

Deletes all data in the

selected channel. After the

operation is completed, this

button changes to [UNDO],

letting you restore the

original data. The Undo

function only has one level;

only the previous operation

can be undone.

Calls up the SONG display,

from which you can save

the edited data.

These select the channel

to be deleted.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Use these to select the

desired edit operation.

Executes the Mix operation.

After the operation is

completed, this button

changes to [UNDO], letting

you restore the original data

if you’re not satisﬁed with

the Mix results. The Undo

function only has one level;

only the previous operation

can be undone.

Calls up the SONG display,

from which you can save

the edited data.

These let you specify the two

source channels to be mixed.

If “COPY” is selected here, the data

from Source 1 is copied to the

Destination channel.

Determines the channel into which the

mix or copy results will be placed.

All data other than the mixed

note data is derived from the

Source 1 channel.

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator

107

PSR-2100/1100

Channel Transpose

This allows you to transpose the recorded data of individual channels up or down by a maximum of two octaves in

semitone increments.

Set Up

You can change the initial settings of the song — such as voice, level, and tempo — to the current settings of the mixing

console or panel controls.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Executes the Channel

Transpose operation. After

the operation is completed,

this button changes to

[UNDO], letting you restore

the original data if you’re not

satisﬁed with the Channel

Transpose results. The

Undo function only has one

level; only the previous

operation can be undone.

Calls up the SONG display,

from which you can save

the edited data.

Determines the amount of Channel Transpose for each channel.

Toggles between the two

channel displays: Channels

1 - 8, and Channels 9 - 16.

To simultaneously set all

channels to the same value,

adjust the Channel

Transpose for one of the

channels while holding

down this button.

Use these to select the

desired edit operation.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Use these to select the

desired edit operation.

Executes the SET

UP operation. Once

SET UP has been

executed, the

operation cannot be

cancelled or undone.

Calls up the SONG display,

from which you can save

the edited data.

Determines which playback features and functions will be automatically called up along with the selected song. All events, with the exception

of “KEYBOARD VOICE,” can be recorded only at the beginning of the song.

Before you select or checkmark any of these items (other than Keyboard Voice), make sure to return the song to the beginning by using the

[TOP] button, and stop playback.

Song............................Stores the tempo setting and all settings made from the Mixing Console.

Keyboard Voice........... This lets you automatically set the voice of the keyboard-played parts (Main/Layer/Left) when playing back the song.

Stores the keyboard-played voice and the part ON/OFF settings. To record a voice change for the keyboard-played

part in the middle of a song, stop the song at the desired point, make the voice change, and press the [D] (EXECUTE)

button.

Lyrics language.......... Stores the settings of the Lyrics display.

Score Setting.............. Stores the settings of the Score display (PSR-2100 only).

Mic. Settings............... Stores the microphone settings in the mixing console (PSR-2100 only).

Use this to checkmark the

selected item.

Checkmarked items are

stored with the song.

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator

PSR-2100/1100

108

Editing Note Events — 1 - 16

From this display, you can edit individual note events (see below). Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on

page 99. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below.

Note Events

Parameter Description

Note Determines the pitch, velocity (volume) and length of the note.

Ctrl (Control change)

Determines the control change number and value. For details on control change messages, refer to the

separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format).

Prog (Program change)

Determines the voice (program) number. For details on program change messages and how to set them, refer to

the separate Data List booklet (Voice List).

P.Bnd (Pitch bend) Determines the pitch bend value.

A.T. (After touch) Determines the after touch value.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Use these to move the

cursor up/down and select

the desired event.

Determines the channel to

be edited.

For coarse adjustment of the event

Calls up the Step Recording

display (page 100).

Calls up the Filter display

(page 110), letting you select

only the events you wish to

shown in the Event List.

Calls up the SONG display,

from which you can save

the edited data.

Holding this button down

while using the [A] and [B]

buttons lets you select

multiple events.

For ﬁne adjustment of the event value.

Cuts (deletes) all selected events. The cut events

are copied and can be pasted to another location.

Adds a new event to the Event List.

Copies all selected events. The

copied events can be pasted to

another location.

Deletes the

event at the

cursor position.

Pastes all cut or copied events to

the selected location.

If the value at the cursor has been

changed, pressing this restores the

original value.

Determines the current

position of the event being

edited.

Returns to the beginning

position of the current song

(the ﬁrst note of the ﬁrst

measure).

Use these to move the

cursor left/right and select

the desired parameter of

the highlighted event.

To actually enter an edited

value, move the cursor away

from the value or press the

SONG [START/STOP] but-

ton.

The sound of the voices

recorded with Step recording

may sound slightly different

from the original.

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator

109

PSR-2100/1100

Editing Chord Events — CHD

From this display, you can edit the chord events you’ve recorded to the song.

Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 99. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below.

With the exception of the [F] (EXPAND) button, the operations here are the same as those in Editing Note Events

(page 108).

Chord Events

Editing System Events — SYS/EX. (System Exclusive)

From this display, you can edit recorded System events.

Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 99. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. The

operations here are the same as those in Editing Note Events (page 108).

System Events

Parameter Description

Style (Accompaniment

style)

Displays the accompaniment style name. To enter an accompaniment style, call up the STYLE display and select

the desired style.

Tempo Determines the tempo value.

Chord Speciﬁes the chord — its root note, chord type, and on-bass note.

Sect (Section) Speciﬁes the section — its name and variation.

OnOff (Channel on/off) Determines whether speciﬁc channels (rhythm, bass, etc.) are turned on/off.

CH.Vol (Channel volume) Determines the level of speciﬁc channels (rhythm, bass, etc.).

S.Vol (Style volume) Determines the level of the entire accompaniment style.

Parameter Description

ScBar (Score initial measure) This determines the number of the top measure. The measure number is indicated in the MAIN display or in the

music notation. Only one value can be speciﬁed at the beginning of the song data.

Tempo Determines the tempo value.

Time (Time signature) Determines the time signature.

Key Determines the key, as well as the major/minor setting.

XG Prm (XG parameters) Allows you to make various detailed changes to the data. For more information on XG parameters, refer to the

separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format).

SYS/EX. (System Exclusive) Displays the System Exclusive data in the song. This does not let you change the actual contents of the data;

however, it lets you delete, cut, copy, and paste the data.

Meta (Meta event) Displays the SMF meta events in the song. This does not let you change the actual contents of the data;

however, it lets you delete, cut, copy, and paste the data.

Press this to convert the

recorded chord and section

entries into song data.

To actually enter an edited

value, move the cursor away

from the value or press the

SONG [START/STOP] but-

ton.

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator

PSR-2100/1100

110

Inputting and Editing Lyrics

This convenient function lets you enter the song name and the lyrics for the song. It also lets you change or correct

already existing lyrics. For more information on lyric events, see the chart below. Calling up operations here apply to

step 4 on page 99. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. The operations here are the same as

those in Editing Note Events (page 108).

In the following example, we’ll rewrite a portion of the lyrics to one of the songs, “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star.”

Select the internal song “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star.” The method for selection is the same as described on pages 79 and 86.

Lyrics Events

Customizing the Event List — Filter

This function lets you determine which event types will be shown in the event editing displays. To select an event for

display, checkmark the box corresponding to the event name. To ﬁlter out an event so that it is not shown on the list,

remove the checkmark so that the box is empty.

To call up the display below, press the [H] (FILTER) button from any of the following displays: CHD, 1 - 16, SysEX, or

LYRICS (page 108 - page 110).

Parameter Description

Name (Song name) Determines the song name. This calls up the NAME display, from which you can enter the name.

Lyrics Allows you to enter lyrics.

Code (Other controls) CR : Enters a line break in the lyrics text.

LF : Deletes the currently displayed lyrics and displays the next set of lyrics.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Move the cursor

to the event

containing the

lyric “star.”

Use these buttons to call up

the Lyric display, from

which you can input lyrics.

From the Lyric display

(page 48), enter the new

word, “(your name).”

Press this button

to save the newly

changed lyric

data.

Move the cursor to

the word “star.”

To actually enter an edited

value, move the cursor away

from the value or press the

SONG [START/STOP] but-

ton.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

EXIT

Calls up the Main Filter

display. For more

information on each event

type, refer to the separate

Data List booklet (MIDI

Data Format).

Enters checkmarks for all

items.

Reverses the checkmark

settings for all boxes. In

other words, this enters

checkmarks to all boxes that

were previously un-checked

and vice versa.

Calls up the Control

Change Filter display. For

more information on each

event type, refer to the

separate Data List booklet

(MIDI Data Format).

Calls up the Accompaniment Filter display.

For more information on each event type,

refer to the separate Data List booklet

(MIDI Data Format).

When “MAIN FILTER” or “ACCOMPANIMENT FILTER” is selected, these select the

item, scrolling up/down to the top or the bottom. When “CONTROL CHANGE FILTER”

is selected, these select the item, scrolling up/down eight items at a time.

Selects the item, scrolling up/

down one item at a time.

Enters/removes the checkmark

for the selected item.

Selects only note data;

checkmarks for all other

boxes are removed.

END

Execute the settings by

pressing the [EXIT] button.

111

PSR-2100/1100

Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator

This powerful feature lets you create your own original styles, which can then be used for auto accompaniment — just

as with the preset styles.

About Creating Accompaniment Styles

The chart at right shows the basic parts (or “channels”) that make up each section

of an accompaniment style. To create an accompaniment style, record patterns to

the various channels one by one, for each of the sections you want to create.

■ Realtime Recording (page 113)

You can record accompaniment styles by simply playing the parts from the

keyboard in real time. However, you don’t have to record every part yourself

— you can choose an existing preset accompaniment style that is close to the

style you want, then add or replace parts in that style as needed to create your

own custom style.

Realtime Recording Characteristics

• Loop recording

Since auto accompaniment playback repeats the accompaniment patterns of several measures in a “loop,” you can

also record patterns in a loop. For example, if you start recording with a two-measure Main section, the two

measures are repeatedly recorded. Notes that you record will play back from the next loop (repetition), letting you

record new material while hearing the parts you previously recorded.

• Overdub recording

This feature lets you record new material to a channel already containing recorded data, without deleting the

original data. In style recording, the recorded data remains intact, unless you speciﬁcally delete it yourself. For

example, if you start recording with a two-measure Main section, the two measures are repeated. As you record

notes to each pass of the loop (repetition), those notes play back from the next loop, letting you overdub new

material while hearing the previous parts.

■ Step Recording (page 114)

This method is like writing music notation on paper, since it allows

you to enter each note or individually, and specify its length. This is

ideal for making precise recordings, or for recording parts that are

difﬁcult to play.

■ Assembling an Accompaniment Style (page 115)

This convenient feature lets you create composite styles by combining

various patterns from the internal preset accompaniment styles. For

example, if you want to create your own original 8-beat style, you

could take rhythm patterns from the “8 Beat 1” style, use the bass

pattern from “8 Beat 2,” and import the chord patterns from the “60’s 8

Beat” style — combining the various elements to create one

accompaniment style.

■ Editing the created Accompaniment Style (page 116)

With the editing features, you can custom edit the styles you’ve

created by real time recording, step recording, and assembling from other styles.

USER

ENTER

EXIT

BALANCE

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

DIRECT

ACCESS

PART

CHANNEL ON/OFF

FREEZE MEMORY

DATA EN TRY

ORGAN FLUTES

STRINGS CHOIR & PAD

GUITAR

MAIN

BACK NEXT

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

LAYER

BASS

PIANO & HARPSI.

E.PIANO

UPPER OCTAVE

WOODWIND

PERCUSSION

VARIATION

MONOTOUCH

SUSTAIN

DSP

HARMONY/

ECHO

LEFT

HOLD

SYNTH.

BRASS

ORGAN &

ACCORDION

VOICE EFFECT

VOIC E

ONE TOUCH SETTING

REGISTRATION MEMORY

MIC.

EFFECT

RESET

VOCAL

HARMONY

MIC.

SETTING

VH TYPE

SELECT

TALK

OVER

SIGNAL

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

TRANSPOSE

ACMP

STANDBY

INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

BALLAD USERLATIN

POP & ROCK

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

BALLROOM

DANCE

RESET

MIN MAX

FADE

IN/OUT

TEMPO

STOP

TAP T EMPO

RESET

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

STYLE

MARCH &

WALTZ

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

1REPEAT

SWING &

JAZZ

MULTI PAD

STYLE CONTROL

MASTER VOLUME

PART

ACMP INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

STYLE CONTROL

DIGITAL RECORDING

Section Channel

INTRO A - D

RHYTHM 1, RHYTHM 2,

BASS, CHORD 1,

CHORD 2, PAD,

PHRASE 1, PHRASE 2

MAIN A - D

FILL IN A - D

BREAK

ENDING A - D

For information on the part

structure of accompaniment

styles, see page 97.

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

8Beat 1

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

8Beat 2

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

60’s 8 Beat

Rhythm 1

Rhythm 2

Bass

Chord 1

Chord 2

Pad

Phrase 1

Phrase 2

Any voice can be selected for

the RHY1 channel, with the

exception of Organ Flutes.

Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator

PSR-2100/1100

112

Style File Format

The Style File Format (SFF) combines all of

Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into

a single uniﬁed format. By using the edit

functions, you can take full advantage of the

SFF format and freely create your own styles.

The chart at right indicates the process by

which the accompaniment is played back.

(This does not apply to the rhythm channels.)

The basic or “source” pattern in the chart is the

original style data. This source pattern is

recorded using accompaniment style

recording (see below).

As shown in the chart at right, the actual

output of the accompaniment is determined by

various parameter settings and chord changes

(played in Auto Accompaniment section of the

keyboard) entered to this source pattern.

Source Pattern

1 Source Root (root note of basic chord)

2 Source Chord (type of basic chord)

Pitch Conversion

3 NTR (Note Transposition Rule)

4 NTT (Note Transposition Table)

Other Settings

5 High Key (threshold of the pitch

conversion)

6 Note Limit (soundable range)

7 RTR (Retrigger Rule; how the pitches of

the chord change)

Output

These are the patterns

recorded to the

accompaniment styles

(page 119).

This data is created by

chords played in the

Auto Accompaniment

section of the

keyboard (page 65).

These settings are

edited from the

PARAMETER display.

These parameters

determine how the

pitch of the source

pattern is converted

when you play chords

in the Auto

Accompaniment

section of the

keyboard.

Chord changes (in Auto Accompa-

niment section of the keyboard)

Operation

BACK NEXT

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

PART

Select the desired accompaniment style

for editing. To record a new

accompaniment style from scratch, call

up the BASIC page in the Style Creator

display and select “New Style” by

pressing the [C] button.

Record and edit the accompaniment style. For details on the

operations for each display, refer to the explanations starting

on the next page.

Use the [BACK]/

[NEXT] buttons to

select the various

pages.

Press the [EXIT]

button to close

the STYLE

CREATOR

display.

END

Call up the Style display

by pressing the [I]

(SAVE) button (in

Assembly page: [J]

button), then save the

recorded / edited data

to the USER or FLOPPY

DISK page.

Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator

113

PSR-2100/1100

You can use the Realtime Recording features to create your own accompaniment style — either from scratch or based

on the preset accompaniment data. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 112.

Realtime Recording — Basic

END

REC.... Channel is enabled for recording.

ON...... Channel is enabled for playback.

OFF .... Channel is muted.

Selects an empty style,

allowing you to create a

new style from scratch.

Calls up the display for changing the

tempo or beat (time signature).

When this button is pressed, “DELETE” will appear over

channels containing data. To delete data from a speciﬁc

channel, simultaneously hold down this button and press

the appropriate [1▲] - [8▲] button.

Available only when the channel is set to

[RHY1] or [RHY2], this lets you delete

speciﬁc percussion sounds during

recording. Simultaneously hold down this

button and press the key corresponding to

the instrument you want to delete.

First, select the desired voice. Start recording by pressing the STYLE [START/

STOP] button.

The selected section of the style starts playing back. Since the rhythm pattern

loops repeatedly, you can record new sounds and notes on each pass while

listening to the pattern. Icons above the keys conveniently indicate the

percussion instruments assigned to the keys.

Stop recording by pressing the STYLE [START/STOP] button again.

With the REC CHANNEL

display shown, close the

display by pressing the

[EXIT] button.

If you’ve enabled Sync Start

(by pressing the SYNC.

START button), you can

start recording by simply

pressing a key on the key-

board.

Select the desired channel for recording by simultaneously holding down the [F] (REC CH) button and

pressing the appropriate [1▲▼] - [8▲▼] button.

Before recording to one of the non-rhythm channels (BASS - PHR 2), make sure to delete the existing data

of the appropriate channel. You can make other settings (see the box “Other Parameters in the BASIC page”

on page 114) after closing the REC CHANNEL display by pressing the [EXIT] button. To call up the REC

CHANNEL display again, press the [F] (REC CH) button.

• Only Drum Kit/SFX Kit can

be selected for the RHY 2

channel.

•For the non-rhythm chan-

nels (BASS - PHR 2), all-

voices with the exception

of the Organ Fultes voice/

Drum Kit/SFX Kit can be

selected.

To release or cancel the

selection, press the [1▼] -

[8▼] button corresponding

to the channel you wish to

cancel. As long as you

continue to hold down the

[J] button, you can toggle

between deleting and

restoring the selected data.

Releasing the [J] button

permanently deletes the

data. Before recording to

one of the non-rhythm

channels (BASS - PHR 2),

make sure to delete the

existing data of the

appropriate channel.

Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator

PSR-2100/1100

114

With this method, you can create a style pattern by entering notes and other data individually, without having to

perform them in real time. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 112.

The actual recording process is the same as in Step Recording of songs (page 99), with the exception of the points

described below. You can also edit each event from the Edit page, and the editing process the same as in editing songs

(page 108).

•

In song recording, the end mark position can be changed freely. However, it cannot be changed when creating

accompaniment styles. This is because the length of the accompaniment style is automatically ﬁxed according to the

selected section. For example, when creating an accompaniment style based on a four-measure section, the end mark

position is automatically set to the end of the fourth measure, and cannot be changed from the Step Record screen.

• When editing the data recorded on the Edit page, you can switch between the type of data you want to edit (event

data or control data). Press the [F] (TRACK EVT) button to switch between the Event display (Note, Control Change,

etc.) and the Control display (System Exclusive, etc.).

Make sure to set the record channel from another display (e.g., BASIC display; page 112) beforehand.

Other Parameters in the Basic Display

[I] (SAVE) button

Calls up the Style display for saving the accompaniment style data.

[3▲▼][4▲▼] (Section) buttons

Determines the section to be recorded.

[5▲▼][6▲▼] (Pattern Length) buttons

Determines the length of the selected section’s pattern in measures (1 - 32). The Fill

In/Break section is ﬁxed at a length of one measure.

[D] (Execute) button

Executes the Pattern Length change.

Recording — Precautions

•The basic chord used for the accompaniment style is called the source chord.

All chords that play and the pitches that sound are derived from the source

chord. When recording the Main and Fill In sections (for a source chord of CM7),

keep the following points in mind:

* When recording to the Bass or Phrase channels, try to use only the

recommended notes; this will ensure that you can play various chords with the accompaniment style and get

optimum results. (Other notes may work, providing you use them as short passing tones.)

* When recording to the Chord or Pad channels, use only the notes of the CM7 chord; this will ensure that you

can play various chords with the accompaniment style and get optimum results. (Other notes may work,

providing you use them as short passing tones.)

The source chord is set by default to CM7; however, you can change this to any chord you prefer. Refer to the

section “Making Style File Format Settings – Parameter” on page 119.

• When recording Intro and Ending sections, you can ignore the source chord and use any notes or chord

progressions you like. In this case, if you set the NTR parameter to “ROOT TRANSPOSE” and NTT to

“HARMONIC MINOR” or “MELODIC MINOR” (in the PARAMETER page), the normal pitch conversions that

would result from playing different chords are cancelled (for playback) — meaning that the accompaniment

pitch conversion will only occur for changes in the root note or major/minor shifts.

You can also select the

desired section for recording

by pressing appropriate

panel button. Pressing one

of the Section buttons calls

up the SECTION display,

from which you can change

sections by using the [6▲▼]/

[7▲▼] buttons. To actually

enter the change, press the

[8▲] button.To select the Fill

In section, press the [AUTO

FILL IN] button.

CRC CRC

C = chord note

C, R = recommended note

Step Recording

Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator

115

PSR-2100/1100

This convenient function lets you combine accompaniment elements — such as rhythm, bass, and chord patterns —

from existing styles, and use them to create your own original accompaniment styles. The operations here apply to step

4 on page 112.

Assembling an Accompaniment Style —Assembly

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Selects the style section and

channel that will be copied to

the corresponding channels,

selected with the [A]-[D] and

[F]-[I] buttons above.

Determines the playback settings for each channel. You can

assemble the accompaniment style while the style section and

channel that will be copied are playing.

SOLO ............Mutes all but the selected channel. RHYTHM

channels set to REC in the REC CHANNEL display

(page 114) are played back simultaneously.

ON ................Plays back the selected channels. Any channels set

to ON in the REC CHANNEL display (page 113)

are played back simultaneously.

OFF ...............If the selected channel is set to ON in the REC

CHANNEL display (page 113), OFF does not

appear and is not available.

These let you select the accompaniment style that

will be used for each channel of your original

style. Select the desired channel by pressing the

[A] – [D], [F] – [I] buttons and press the same

button to call up the Style screen, from which you

can select the accompaniment style.

After repeating steps 1 and 2

as desired, press the [J] (SAVE)

button to save the assembled

style data. From here, you can

store the settings of all

channels (RHYTHM 1,

RHYTHM 2, BASS, etc.) to a

single accompaniment style.

If you change the section

and channel in steps #1 and

#2, the currently speciﬁed

section and channel are also

changed. The channels

being recorded are also

changed and recording is

stopped automatically.

The PLAY TYPE parameter

affects only the playback,

and does not change the

actual accompaniment style

data.

Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator

PSR-2100/1100

116

Change the Rhythmic Feel — Groove and Dynamics

These versatile features give you a wide variety of tools for changing the rhythmic feel of your created accompaniment

style. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 112.

■ Groove

Groove parameters

Original Beat Speciﬁes the beats to which Groove timing is to be applied. In other words, if “8 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is

applied to the 8th notes; if “12 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to 8th-note triplets.

Beat Converter Actually changes the timing of the beats (speciﬁed in the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above) to the selected value. For

example, when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “8 Beat” and BEAT CONVERTER is set to “12,” all 8th notes in the section are

shifted to 8th-note triplet timing. The “16A” and “16B” Beat Converter which appear when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “12

Beat” are variations on a basic 16th-note setting.

Swing Produces a “swing” feel by shifting the timing of the back beats, depending on the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above.

For example, if the speciﬁed ORIGINAL BEAT value is 8th notes, the Swing parameter will selectively delay the 2nd, 4th,

6th, and 8th beats of each measure to create a swing feel. The settings “A” through “E” produce different degrees of

swing, with “A” being the most subtle and “E” being the most pronounced.

Fine Selects a variety of Groove “templates” to be applied to the selected section. The “PUSH” settings cause certain beats to

be played early, while “HEAVY” settings delay the timing of certain beats. The numbered settings (2, 3, 4, 5) determine

which beats are to be affected. All beats up to the speciﬁed beat —but not including the ﬁrst beat — will be played early

or delayed (for example, the 2nd and 3rd beats, if “3” is selected). In all cases, “A” types produce minimum effect, “B”

types produce medium effect, and “C” types produce maximum effect.

Edit the Created Accompaniment Style

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Use these to select the

desired edit operation.

Calls up the Style display and

lets you store the edited

accompaniment style data.

Executes the Groove operation. After

the operation is completed, this button

changes to [UNDO], letting you

restore the original data if you’re not

satisﬁed with the Groove results. The

Undo function only has one level; only

the previous operation can be undone.

Determines the settings for each of the

Groove parameters (see the list below).

Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator

117

PSR-2100/1100

■ Dynamics

Dynamics parameters

Accent Type Selects the type of accent.

Strength

Determines how strongly the selected Accent Type (above) will be applied. The

higher the value, the stronger the effect.

Expand/Compress Expands or compresses the range of velocity values, around a central velocity

value “64.” Values higher than 100% expand the dynamic range, while values lower

than 100% compress it.

Boost/Cut Boosts or cuts all velocity values in the selected section/channel. Values above

100% boost the overall velocity, while values below 100% reduce it.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Use these to select the

desired edit operation.

Calls up the Style display

and lets you store the

edited accompaniment

style data.

Executes the Dynamics operation. After the

operation is completed, this button changes

to [UNDO], letting you restore the original

data if you’re not satisﬁed with the

Dynamics results. The Undo function only

has one level; only the previous operation

can be undone.

Determines the settings for each of the

Dynamics parameters (see the list

below).

Select the desired channel to which

Dynamics is to be applied.

Velocity is determined by

how strongly you play the

keyboard.

The more strongly you play

the keyboard, the higher the

velocity value and, hence,

the louder the sound.

Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator

PSR-2100/1100

118

Editing the Channel Data

In this display, there are ﬁve different channel-related edit functions, including Quantize, for editing the recorded

accompaniment style data. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 112.

■ Quantize

Refer to page 105.

■ Velocity Change

Boosts or cuts the velocity of all notes in the speciﬁed channel (selected with the [1▲▼]/[2▲▼] (CHANNEL)

buttons), according to the speciﬁed percentage (selected with the [4▲▼]/[5▲▼] (BOOST/CUT) buttons).

■ Bar Copy

This function allows data to be copied from one measure or group of measures to another location within the

speciﬁed channel. Use the [4▲▼] (TOP) and [5▲▼] (LAST) buttons to specify the ﬁrst and last measures in the

region to be copied. Use the [6▲▼] (DEST) button to specify the ﬁrst measure of the destination location, to which

the data is to be copied.

■ Bar Clear

This function clears all data from the speciﬁed range of measures within the selected channel. Use the [4▲▼] (TOP)

and [5▲▼] (LAST) buttons to specify the ﬁrst and last measures in the region to be cleared.

■ Remove Event

This function lets you remove speciﬁc events from the selected channel. Use the [4▲▼] - [6▲▼] (EVENT) buttons

to select the desired event type to be removed.

See the explanations below.

Preset channel BASS-

PHRASE 2 can not be

edited.

Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator

119

PSR-2100/1100

Making Style File Format Settings — Parameter

This display provides a variety of style controls— such as determining how the pitch and sound of the recorded style

change when playing the chords in the left-hand range of the keyboard. For details about the relationship between the

parameters, refer to “Style File Format” on page 112. The operations here are the same as described in step 4 on page 112.

■ Source Root/Chord

These settings determine the original key of the source pattern (i.e., the key used when recording the pattern). The default

setting of CM7 (with a Source Root of “C” and a Source Type of “M7”), is automatically selected whenever the preset data

is deleted prior to recording a new style, regardless of the Source Root and Chord included in the preset data. When you

change Source Root / Chord from the default CM7 to another chord, the chord notes and recommended notes will also

change, depending on the newly selected chord type. For details on chord notes and recommended notes, see page 114.

■ NTR (Note Transposition Rule) and NTT (Note Transposition Table)

• NTR (Note Transposition Rule)

This determines the system for pitch conversion of the source pattern. Two settings are available.

Root Trans (Root Transpose)

When the root note is transposed, the pitch relationship between notes is maintained. For example, the notes C3,

E3 and G3 in the key of C become F3, A3 and C4 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that

contain melody lines.

Root Fixed

The note is kept as close as possible to the previous note range. For example, the notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key

of C become C3, F3 and A3 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that contain chord parts.

When NTR is set to “Root

Fixed” and NTT is set to

“Bypass,” the “Source

Root” and “Source Chord”

parameters are changed to

“Play Root” and “Play

Chord,” respectively. In this

case, you can change

chords and hear the result-

ing sound for all channels.

See the explanations below.

CRC CR CRC C RC CRC C CR CRC C CR

CCC CR

CCC C CR CCC C RC

CRC

RCR

CR CR

CR CCR

CCR

RRCCC

CC RC

CR CC

CR C CR

CC RC C

CCR

CR R RC

CCR

CCC

CRC

CCC C

CRC CR

CRC CC

CCC

CCCR

RCC

CCC

RCC

CRC CRR

CRC

RCC

CR CC CCR CR

CMaj

CM7

Caug Cm6

Cm7



5 Cm7

Cm7

CmM7 CmM7

Cdim

Cdim7



Csus4

Csus2

C1+8

C1+5



CM7



C7aug

CM7aug

C7sus4



When the Source Root is C:

C = chord note

C, R = recommended

note

Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator

PSR-2100/1100

120

• NTT (Note Transposition Table)

This sets the note transposition table for the source pattern. Six transposition types are available.

Bypass

No transposition.

Melody

Suitable for melody line transposition. Use this for melody channels such as Phrase 1 and Phrase 2.

Chord

Suitable for chord transposition. Use for the Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels, especially when they contain piano

or guitar-like chordal parts.

Bass

Suitable for bass line transposition. This table is basically similar to the Melody table above, but recognizes on-

bass chords allowed in the FINGERED ON BASS ﬁngering mode. Use this primarily for bass lines.

Melodic Minor

When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third interval in the scale by

a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third interval is raised by a

semitone. Other notes are not changed.

Harmonic Minor

When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third and sixth intervals in

the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third and ﬂatted sixth

intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed.

■ High Key/Note Limit

• High Key

This sets the highest key (upper octave limit)

of the note transposition for the chord root

change. Any notes calculated to be higher

than the highest key are transposed down to

the octave just below the highest key. This

setting is effective only when the NTR

parameter (page 119) is set to “Root Trans.”

• Note Limit

This sets the note range (highest and lowest

notes) for voices recorded to the style

channels. By judicious setting of this range,

you can ensure that the voices sound as

realistic as possible — in other words, that no

notes outside the natural range are sounded

(e.g., high bass sounds or low piccolo

sound). The actual notes that sound are

automatically shifted to the set range.

■ RTR (Retrigger Rule)

These settings determine whether notes stop sounding or not and how they change pitch in response to chord

changes.

Stop

The notes stop sounding.

Pitch Shift

The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the type of the new chord.

Pitch Shift to Root

The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the root of the new chord.

Retrigger

The note is retriggered with a new attack at a new pitch corresponding to the next chord.

Retrigger To Root

The note is retriggered with a new attack at the root note of the next chord. However, the octave of the new note

remains the same.

C3-E3-G3

F3-A3-C4



2-A



2-C



3-F3-G



Example — When the highest key is F

Root changes

Notes played

E3-G3-C4

High Limit

Low Limit

F3-A3-C4



F3-G



3-C



Example — When the lowest note is C3 and the highest is D4

Root changes

Notes played

121

PSR-2100/1100

Creating Multi Pad — Multi Pad Creator

The PSR-2100/1100 lets you create your own original Multi Pad phrases — which you can use in your performances in

the same way as the preset Multi Pads.

USER

ENTER

EXIT

BALANCE

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

DIRECT

ACCESS

PART

CHANNEL ON/OFF

FREEZE MEMORY

DATA ENTRY

ORGAN FLUTES

STRINGS CHOIR & PAD

GUITAR

MAIN

BACK NEXT

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

LAYER

BASS

PIANO & HARPSI.

E.PIANO

UPPER OCTAVE

WOODWIND

PERCUSSION

VARIATION

MONOTOUCH

SUSTAIN

DSP

HARMONY/

ECHO

LEFT

HOLD

SYNTH.

BRASS

ORGAN &

ACCORDION

VOICE EFFECT

VOIC E

ONE TOUCH SETTING

REGISTRATION MEMORY

MIC.

EFFECT

RESET

VOCAL

HARMONY

MIC.

SETTING

VH TYPE

SELECT

TALK

OVER

SIGNAL

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

TRANSPOSE

ACMP

STANDBY

INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

BALLAD USERLATIN

POP & ROCK

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

BALLROOM

DANCE

RESET

MIN MAX

FADE

IN/OUT

TEMPO

STOP

TAP TEMPO

RESET

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

STYLE

MARCH &

WALTZ

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

1REPEAT

SWING &

JAZZ

MULTI PAD

STYLE CONTROL

MASTER VOLUME

PART

MULTI PAD

STOP

Operation

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

PART

BACK NEXT

Select the desired Multi Pad Bank for

editing. To record a new Multi Pad from

scratch, call up the RECORD page in

the Multi Pad Creator display and

select “New Bank” by pressing the [C]

(NEW BANK) button.

Record and Edit the Multi Pad. For details on the operations for

each display, refer to the explanations starting on the next page.

Use the [BACK]/

[NEXT] buttons

to select the

RECORD or

EDIT page.

Call up the Multi Pad

display by pressing the

[I] (SAVE) button, then

save the recorded /

edited data to the USER

or FLOPPY DISK page.

Press the [EXIT]

button to close the

MULTI PAD

display.

END

Creating Multi Pad — Multi Pad Creator

PSR-2100/1100

122

The operations here apply to step 4 on page 121.

Start recording

First, select the desired voice. Press the [H] (REC) button to set the Record standby mode.

Recording begins automatically as soon as you play on the keyboard. You can also start

recording by pressing the STYLE [START] button. If Chord Match (see below) is set to on

for the Multi Pad to be recorded, you should record using the notes of the C major

seventh scale (C, D, E, G, A and B).

Stop recording

Press the [H] (STOP) button or the panel STYLE/MULTI PAD [STOP] button to stop recording when you've ﬁnished

playing the phrase.

Turning Chord Match and Repeat On/Off

■ Repeat

Unless the Repeat function is on for the selected pad, playback will end automatically as soon as the end of the

phrase is reached. A phrase can be stopped while it is playing by pressing the MULTI PAD [STOP] button.

■ Chord Match

If a Multi Pad is played while Style is playing and the Chord Match function for that pad is ON, the phrase will be

automatically re-harmonized to match the accompaniment chords.

Multi Pad Realtime Recording — Record

Select the desired Multi

Pad for recording or editing.

You can also select it by

pressing the MULTI PAD

[1] to [4] button.

Selects an empty Multi Pad

bank, allowing you to create a

new Multi Pad from scratch.

Select this to engage

the Record standby

mode (synchronized

standby).

Select this to save the

recorded pad data to

USER or FLOPPY DISK

drive.

Turn Repeat/Chord Match of each pad

on or off (see below).

Calls up the NAME display to

input the new name.

• Other notes besides those

of the C major seventh

scale can be recorded;

however, this may result in

the recorded phrase not

matching the chord when

being played back.

• The rhythm part of the

currently selected style is

used as a rhythmic guide

(in place of a metronome),

playing back during

recording. However, it is

not recorded to the Multi

Pad.

CRC CRC

C = chord note

C, R = recommended note

Others: non-recommended note

Creating Multi Pad — Multi Pad Creator

123

PSR-2100/1100

With this method, you can create a Multi Pad by entering notes and other data individually, without having to perform

them in real time. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 121.

The actual recording process is the same as in Step Recording of songs (page 99), with the exception of the points

described below. You can also edit each event from the Edit page, and the editing process the same as in editing songs

(page 108).

•Just as with Song Recording, the End Mark position can be changed freely in the Multi Pad Creator. This allows you

to ﬁnely adjust the phrase length for the Pad. This would be convenient, for example, in synchronizing repeat

playback of a Pad (set to Repeat On) with the keyboard and auto accompaniment playback.

• Since the Multi Pads have only one track (channel), the track (channel) cannot be changed.

Step Recording or Editing Multi Pads — Edit

PSR-2100/1100

124

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices

— Mixing Console

Set up just like a real mixing console, this display gives you comprehensive control over the sound.

You can call up additional basic mixing controls by using the [BALANCE] button and the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button

(page 64).

■ About the parameters

•VOL/VOICE (Volume/Voice) (page 125)

This contains settings related to the volume and voice of each part/channel. Here you can also enable the Auto

Revoice feature — which automatically plays XG-compatible songs (page 162) with the rich and dynamic voices

that are exclusive to the PSR-2100/1100. This gives you much more authentic and realistic instrument sounds for

your song playback.

• FILTER (page 126)

These controls affect the tone quality of the voice, letting you add power, punch, or brightness to the sound.

• TUNE (page 126)

These give you various tuning controls.

• EFFECT (page 127)

These control the amount of effect applied to the sound.

• EQ (Equalizer) (PSR-2100 only) (page 130)

Determines the overall tone quality of the instrument, letting you adjust the sound to match the particular

performance space. Also you can adjust the volume or tone quality for each part.

Mixing Console

This set of controls

lets you adjust the

balance of the

voices and their ste-

reo position, as well

as the amount of

effect that is applied

to each voice.

USER

ENTER

EXIT

BALANCE

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

DIRECT

ACCESS

PART

CHANNEL ON/OFF

FREEZE MEMORY

DATA ENTRY

ORGAN FLUTES

STRINGS CHOIR & PAD

GUITAR

MAIN

BACK NEXT

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

LAYER

BASS

PIANO & HARPSI.

E.PIANO

UPPER OCTAVE

WOODWIND

PERCUSSION

VARIATION

MONOTOUCH

SUSTAIN

DSP

HARMONY/

ECHO

LEFT

HOLD

SYNTH.

BRASS

ORGAN &

ACCORDION

VOICE EFFECT

VOIC E

ONE TOUCH SETTING

REGISTRATION MEMORY

MIC.

EFFECT

RESET

VOCAL

HARMONY

MIC.

SETTING

VH TYPE

SELECT

TALK

OVER

SIGNAL

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

TRANSPOSE

ACMP

STANDBY

INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

BALLAD USERLATIN

POP & ROCK

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

BALLROOM

DANCE

RESET

MIN MAX

FADE

IN/OUT

TEMPO

STOP

TAP TEMPO

RESET

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

STYLE

MARCH &

WALTZ

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

1 REPEAT

SWING &

JAZZ

MULTI PAD

STYLE CONTROL

MASTER VOLUME

PART

MIXING CONSOLE

PART

Operation

MIXING CONSOLE

PART

PANEL PART

Includes the keyboard-played parts (Main/

Layer, Left), accompaniment parts, song,

microphone input (PSR-2100 only)

STYLE PART

Accompaniment parts

SONG CH 1 - 8

Channels 1 - 8 of song playback

SONG CH 9 -16

Channels 9 - 16 of song playback

Select the other Mixing Console pages by using the [BACK]/

[NEXT] buttons and set the desired parameters.

For information on the various parameters and settings and how

to use them, refer to the explanations starting on page 125.

From the MIXING CONSOLE display, press the button

repeatedly until the desired display is called up. Each press of the

button switches among the displays listed below.

You can quickly and easily

set all parts to the same

value for the same parame-

ter (except for the VOICE

parameter). Simulta-

neously hold down the [A] -

[J] button that corresponds

to the parameter you want

to change and use the [1] -

[8] buttons or the [DATA

ENTRY] dial to change the

value.

For details on parameters

related to the Sound Cre-

ator, see page 91.

Close the Mixing

Console display by

pressing the [EXIT]

button.

END

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices

— Mixing Console

125

PSR-2100/1100

The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 124.

Setting the Level Balance and Voice — Volume/Voice

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

PART

Set this to ON to enable automatic replacement of

the XG voices (in XG song data) with the special

voices of the PSR-2100/1100. To use the normal

XG voice set, turn this off.

VOICE

Calls up the VOICE display, from which you can select the desired voice (page 57). When the

Style part is selected, neither Organ Flutes voices nor User voices can be selected. When the

Song part is selected, User voices cannot be selected.

PANPOT

Determines the stereo position of the selected voice or track. A setting of 0 pans the sound hard

left, while 64 is at center, and 127 is at hard right.

VOLUME

Determines the level of each channel, giving you ﬁne control over the balance of all the parts.

Selects the XG voices to

be replaced (voices

usually used when

playing back)

Selects the voices used to replace the XG voices

(when SONG AUTO REVOICE is set to ON).

Executes the settings and closes the Auto

Revoice Setup display.

Closes the Auto Revoice Setup screen without

executing the settings.

Each press of this

button switches

among the various

parts/channels.

Use these to select the VOICE,

PANPOT, or VOLUME

parameter rows.

Allows you to select

the speciﬁc voice to

be replaced.

Keep in mind that using the

Revoice function may result

in unnatural or unexpected

sound, depending on the

particular song data.

ALL REVOICE

Replaces all of the replaceable

XG voices with the rich and

authentic voices of the PSR-

2100/1100.

BASIC REVOICE

Replaces only the recommended

voices that are suitable for playing

back the song.

ALL NO REVOICE

All the voices are returned to the

original XG voices.

These let you select

the voice of each

part, and adjust the

panpot and volume.

The [RHY2] categories in

the STYLE PART display are

only for the Drum Kit/SFX Kit

(percussion) voice.

The [RHY1] channel in the

STYLE PART display can be

assigned to any voice except

for the Organ Flutes voice.

When playing GM song data,

channel 10 (in the SONG

CH 9 - 16 page) can only be

used for a Drum Kit voice.

When changing the rhythm/

percussion voices (drum

kits, etc.) of the accompani-

ment style and song from

the VOICE parameter, the

detailed settings related to

the drum voice are reset,

and in some cases you may

be unable to restore the

original sound. In the case

of song playback, you can

restore the original sound

by returning to the begin-

ning of the song and playing

back from that point. In the

case of accompaniment

style play, you can restore

the original sound by select-

ing the same style again.

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices

— Mixing Console

PSR-2100/1100

126

The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 124.

PORTAMENTO TIME ............When the part is set to Mono (page 61, 91), this determines the Portamento time. The

higher the value, the longer the time it takes for the pitch to change. Portamento is only

applied when you play legato (playing the next note before releasing the previous one).

PITCH BEND RANGE ...........Determines the range of the PITCH BEND wheel for the corresponding part. The range is

from “0” to ”12” with each step corresponding to one semitone.

OCTAVE................................Determines the range of the pitch change in octaves, over two octaves up or down. The

value of this parameter is added to the value set via the [UPPER OCTAVE] button.

TUNING...............................Determines the pitch of the instrument.

Changing the Tone of the Voice — Filter

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

PART

Switches between the HARMONIC and BRIGHTNESS parameters.

HARMONIC........ Allows you to adjust the resonance effect

(see “Harmonic Content” on page 92).

BRIGHTNESS .... Determines the brightness of the sound by

adjusting the cutoff frequency (page 92).

Each press of this

button switches among

the various parts/

channels.

For details about the Filter,

see page 92.

Be careful with these con-

trols. Depending on the

selected voice, extreme set-

tings may result in noise or

distortion.

Changing Pitch-related Settings — Tune

Portamento is used to cre-

ate a smooth transition in

pitch from one note to the

next.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Switches among the available parameters: PORTAMENTO

TIME, PITCH BEND RANGE, OCTAVE, and TUNING.

These increase/decrease (transpose) the pitch in semitone units.

MASTER...Transposes both the pitch of the keyboard and that of the song playback.

SONG........Transposes the pitch of the song playback.

KBD ..........Transposes the pitch of the keyboard.

Refer to the explanation below.

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices

— Mixing Console

127

PSR-2100/1100

The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 124.

Adjusting the Effects

There are three effect sec-

tions: Reverb, Chorus, and

DSP (which contains a vari-

ety of effect types). For

details, refer to the Effect

Block list (page 128).

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

PART

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Switches among the

effect sections:

REVERB, CHORUS,

and DSP.

Determines the amount of effect that is applied to each part. For more information

about the characteristics of each effect, see the Effect Block list on page 128.

Press this to edit and store

the effect (page 127, 128).

These determine the effect block and let you assign the effect.

BLOCK............Determines the effect block (group of similar or related effects).

PART ...............Determines the part to which the Insertion effect is applied. It is effective only

when BLOCK is set to “DSP1/DSP,” PARAMETER is set to “CONNECTION,” and

VALUE is set to “Insertion” — or when BLOCK is set to “DSP2–4” (PSR-2100).

CATEGORY.....The various effect programs (in Type below) are grouped into categories. This

parameter may not be available depending on the selected block.

TYPE ...............Determines the type of effect that is assigned to the selected effect block. The

actual effect types that are available may differ depending on the selected block.

Each press of

this button

switches among

the various

parts/channels.

Indicates the type name for each effect block.

When the BLOCK

parameter is set to

REVERB, CHORUS, or

DSP1-4/DSP, press this

to call up the display

from which you can

change the detailed

settings for the effects.

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices

— Mixing Console

PSR-2100/1100

128

Effect Block

Block Parts Characteristics Number of User Effect

REVERB

All parts

Reproduces the warm ambience of playing in

a concert hall or jazz club.

CHORUS

All parts

Produces a rich “fat” sound as if several parts

are being played simultaneously.

DSP 1 (PSR-2100)

DSP(PSR-1100)

Main, Layer, Left, Song (Ch. 1 - 16),

MIC (PSR-2100 only), Style

In addition to reverb and chorus effects, this

section features a variety of special effects,

including distortion.

DSP2 - 4 (PSR-2100 only) Main, Layer, Left, Song (Ch. 1 - 16),

MIC (automatically assigned)

Any unused DSP blocks are automatically

assigned to the remaining active parts.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Determines the

effect block.

Calls up the

display for storing

the effect.

Determines the effect category.

Determines the effect type.

Determines the effect parameter to be adjusted.

Determines the level of the

effect (return level). This is not

available when BLOCK is set

to “DSP1/DSP,” PARAMETER

is set to “CONNECTION,” and

VALUE is set to “Insertion” or

when BLOCK is set to “DSP2–

4” (PSR-2100).

Determines the value of the

selected parameter.

Calls up the display

for naming the User

Effect (page 48).

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Select the

destination to

which the effect

is to be stored.

The number of

memory spaces

available for the

destination differs

for each block

(refer to the chart

below).

Stores the effect settings you

made above to a User Effect

location (SYSTEM) for future

recall. To call up the effect, select

USER from the CATEGORY

parameter and select the desired

effect from the TYPE parameter.

Keep in mind that in some

cases noise may result if

you adjust the effect param-

eters while playing the

instrument.

Switches between

the upper/lower

parameters. For the

lower parameter,

the depth can be

changed when the

[VARIATION]

button is on.

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices

— Mixing Console

129

PSR-2100/1100

Effect Structure

The PSR-2100/1100 features the following digital effect systems. The effect type, depth, and various parameters can be

set with the panel controls.

About the Effect Connections – System and Insertion

All the effect blocks are connected or routed in one of two ways: System or Insertion. System applies the selected effect

to all parts, while Insertion applies the selected effect to one speciﬁc part. Reverb and Chorus are System effects, and

DSP 2 - DSP 4 (PSR-2100 only) are Insertion effects. The DSP1/DSP effect, on the other hand, can be conﬁgured for

either System or Insertion routing.

The illustration below shows how the various effect blocks are set up and traces the signal ﬂow for the send/return

controls set on the PSR-2100/1100.

PSR-2100

OUT

Rev Send

MAIN VOICE

Dry

Cho Send

DSP Send

Unused DSP blocks are automatically

assigned to the active parts.

Rev Send

LAYER VOICE

Dry

Cho Send

Rev Send

LEFT VOICE

Dry

Cho Send

Rev Send

MIC

Dry

Cho Send

DSP Send

Rev Send

STYLE

(each channel)

SONG

(each channel)

Dry

Cho Send

DSP Send

CHORUS

Master EQ

REVERB

DRY LINE

DSP1

Chorus Return

DSP Return

Reverb Return

DSP1

MIC

Effect

Vocal

Harmony

When DSP is set as an Insertion effect

(here PART is set to one of the STYLE channels),

it is put here in the signal flow.

When DSP is set as a System effect,

it is put here in the signal flow.

Rev Send

Dry

Cho Send

DSP Send

DSP3

DSP4

DSP2

PSR-1100

OUT

Rev Send

MAIN VOICE

Dry

Cho Send

DSP Send

When DSP is set as an Insertion effect

(here PART is set to MAIN),

it is put here in the signal flow.

Rev Send

LAYER VOICE

Dry

Cho Send

DSP Send

Rev Send

LEFT VOICE

Dry

Cho Send

DSP Send

Rev Send

STYLE/SONG

(each channel)

Dry

Cho Send

DSP Send

CHORUS

REVERB

DRY LINE

DSP

Chorus Return

DSP Return

Reverb Return

DSP

When DSP is set as a System effect,

it is put here in the signal flow.

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices

— Mixing Console

PSR-2100/1100

130

Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to match the special character of the

room. The sound is divided into several frequency bands, allowing you to correct the sound by raising or lowering the

level for each band. The equalizer allows you to adjust the tone or timbre of the sound to match the performance space,

or to compensate for certain acoustic characteristics in your room. For example, you can cut some of the low range

frequencies when playing on stages or in large studio spaces where the sound is too “boomy,” or boost the high

frequencies in rooms and close spaces where the sound is relatively “dead” and free of echoes.The PSR-2100 possesses

a high grade ﬁve-band digital equalizer function. With this function, a ﬁnal effect —tone control— can be added to the

output of your instrument.

The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 124.

Setting the Equalizer—EQ (PSR-2100 only)

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

GAIN

FREQFREQ

Select the

desired Master

EQ type.

Call up the MASTER EQ

EDIT display.

Select the EQ type to adjust

the EQ LOW using the

[1▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons.

An edited PRESET or USER

curve can be stored to

USER 1 or 2.

Adjusts the overall gain of all EQ bands

simultaneously.

The PRESET and USER curves can be edited

as required via the corresponding LCD buttons

— EQ1 through EQ5.Each of the 5 bands can

be boosted (“+” values) or cut (“–”values) by up

to 12 dB.

Whenever an EQ band is edited the corresponding EQ value is highlighted and the number of the

edited band appears above the Q and FREQ controls. The Q and FREQ controls can then be

used to adjust the Q (bandwidth) and the FREQ (center frequency) of the selected band. The

higher the “Q,” the narrower the bandwidth. The available FREQ range is different for each band.

Select the

desired Master

EQ type.

Select the EQ type to adjust

the EQ HIGH using the [1▲▼]

- [8▲▼] buttons.

131

PSR-2100

Using a Microphone — MIC. (PSR-2100 only)

This extraordinarily powerful feature uses advanced voice-processing technology to automatically produce vocal

harmony based on a single lead vocal. Four distinct harmony modes as well as an extensive selection of preset harmony

types are provided. In addition to straightforward harmony, the PSR-2100 also lets you change the apparent gender of

the harmony and/or lead vocal sound. For example, if you are a male singer, you can have the PSR-2100 automatically

generate a two-part female backup. A comprehensive set of parameters gives you exceptionally precise and ﬂexible

control over the vocal harmony sound.

Selecting a Vocal Harmony Type

For details about connecting

a microphone, see

page 155.

USER

ENTER

EXIT

BALANCE

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

DIRECT

ACCESS

PART

CHANNEL ON/OFF

FREEZE MEMORY

DATA EN TRY

ORGAN FLUTES

STRINGS CHOIR & PAD

GUITAR

MAIN

BACK NEXT

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

LAYER

BASS

PIANO & HARPSI.

E.PIANO

UPPER OCTAVE

WOODWIND

PERCUSSION

VARIATION

MONOTOUCH

SUSTAIN

DSP

HARMONY/

ECHO

LEFT

HOLD

SYNTH.

BRASS

ORGAN &

ACCORDION

VOICE EFFECT

VOIC E

ONE TOUCH SETTING

REGISTRATION MEMORY

MIC.

EFFECT

RESET

VOCAL

HARMONY

MIC.

SETTING

VH TYPE

SELECT

TALK

OVER

SIGNAL

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

TRANSPOSE

ACMP

STANDBY

INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

BALLAD USERLATIN

POP & ROCK

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

BALLROOM

DANCE

RESET

MIN MAX

FADE

IN/OUT

TEMPO

STOP

TAP TEMPO

RESET

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

STYLE

MARCH &

WALTZ

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

1REPEAT

SWING &

JAZZ

MULTI PAD

STYLE CONTROL

MASTER VOLUME

PART

MIC.

EFFECT

VOCAL

HARMONY

MIC.

SETTING

VH TYPE

SELECT

TALK

OVER

SIGNAL

MIC.

EFFECT

VOCAL

HARMONY

MIC.

SETTING

VH TYPE

SELECT

TALK

OVER

SIGNAL

Use the SIGNAL and OVER indicators to determine the appropriate setting (page 155).

If you connect a microphone to the PSR-2100, you can

sing along with the song or auto accompaniment and have

vocal harmony parts added automatically.

This convenient function lets you temporarily cancel the

vocal harmony or other microphone effects when using

a connected microphone. This is especially useful when

you talk between songs during a performance.

Determines the on/off setting of the effect

applied to the microphone, set in the

MIXING CONSOLE display (page 127).

This calls up the VOCAL HARMONY TYPE

display (page 131) and lets you set the

desired harmony type.

This calls up the MICROPHONE SETTING

display (page 133) and lets you adjust the

level of the microphone and vocal harmony

effect.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Select a Vocal

Harmony type.

Press the [VH TYPE

SELECT] button.

This lets you adjust

the amount of

harmony effect that

is applied.

Using a Microphone — MIC. (PSR-2100 only)

PSR-2100

132

Vocal Harmony Parameter List

Chordal Type/Vocoder Type Determines how the harmony notes are applied.

Harmony Gender Type Can be set to “Off” or “Auto”. When “Auto”, the gender of the harmony sound is changed automatically.

Lead Gender Type Determines whether and how the gender of the lead vocal sound (i.e., the direct microphone sound) will be

changed. When “Off” no gender change occurs. When ”Unison”, “Male” or “Female” is selected the

corresponding gender change is applied to the lead vocal. (In this case the number of harmony notes which

can be produced in addition to the lead vocal is reduced to one.)

Lead Gender Depth Adjusts the degree of lead vocal gender change produced when one of the Lead Gender Types (above) is

selected.

Lead Pitch Correction When “Correct” is selected the pitch of the lead vocal is shifted in precise semitone steps. This parameter is

only effective when one of the Lead Gender Types is selected.

Auto Upper Gender Threshold Gender change will occur when the harmony pitch reaches or exceeds the speciﬁed number of semitones

above the lead vocal pitch.

Auto Lower Gender Threshold Gender change will occur when the harmony pitch reaches or exceeds the speciﬁed number of semitones

below the lead vocal pitch.

Upper Gender Depth Adjusts the degree of gender change applied to harmony notes higher than the Auto Upper Gender

Threshold.

Lower Gender Depth Adjusts the degree of gender change applied to harmony notes lower than the Auto Lower Gender

Threshold.

Vibrato Depth Sets the depth of vibrato applied to the harmony sound. Also affects the lead vocal sound if a Lead Gender

Type is selected.

Vibrato Rate Sets the speed of the vibrato effect.

Vibrato Delay Speciﬁes the length of the delay before the vibrato effect begins when a note is produced.

Harmony1 Volume Sets the volume of the ﬁrst harmony note.

Harmony2 Volume Sets the volume of the second harmony note.

Harmony1 Pan Speciﬁes the stereo (pan) position of the ﬁrst harmony note. When “Random” is selected the stereo position

of the sound will change randomly whenever the keyboard is played.

Harmony2 Pan Speciﬁes the stereo (pan) position of the second harmony note. When “Random” is selected the stereo

position of the sound will change randomly whenever the keyboard is played.

Harmony1 Detune Detunes the ﬁrst harmony note by the speciﬁed number of cents.

Harmony2 Detune Detunes the second harmony note by the speciﬁed number of cents.

Pitch to Note When “ON” the lead vocal sound “plays” the PSR-2100 tone generator system. (However, dynamic changes

in the vocal sound do not affect the volume of the tone generator.)

Pitch to Note Part Determines which of the PSR-2100 parts will be controlled by the lead vocal when the Pitch to Note

parameter is “ON”.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Save the changed

data (page 38, 47).

The saved settings can be

named (page 44) or deleted

(page 46) in the USER page.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous

display.

Select a Vocal Harmony type.

Select a Vocal Harmony parameter. Adjust the parameter value.

Return to the VOCAL HARMONY

TYPE display.

END

Using a Microphone — MIC. (PSR-2100 only)

133

PSR-2100

Operation

Adjusting the Vocal Harmony Settings and Microphone Effects —

OVERALL SETTING

The explanations here apply to step 2 above.

■ 3BAND EQ (3-BAND EQUALIZER)

Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to match the special character of the

room. The sound is divided into several frequency bands, allowing you to correct the sound by raising or lowering the

level for each band. The PSR-2100 features a high grade three-band digital equalizer function for the microphone sound.

Hz .............. Adjusts the center frequency of the corresponding band.

dB............... Boosts or cuts the level of the corresponding band by up to 12 dB.

■ NOISE GATE

This effect mutes the input signal when the input from the microphone falls below a speciﬁed level. This effectively

cuts off extraneous noise, allowing the desired signal (vocal, etc.) to pass.

SW.............. “SW” is the abbreviation of Switch. This turns Noise Gate on or off.

TH. ............. “TH.” is the abbreviation of Threshold. This adjusts the input level at which the gate begins to open.

Making Settings for the Vocal Harmony and Microphone

— MICROPHONE SETTING

BACK NEXT

Press the [MIC.

SETTING]

button.

Select the MICROPHONE SETTING page by using the [BACK]/[NEXT]

button and set the parameters.

For information on the various parameters and settings and

how to use them, refer to the explanations

below.

Press the [EXIT]

button to return to the

previous display.

END

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Select the 3BAND EQ.

Use these to change the value for each

function or setting. For details, see below.

Select the NOISE GATE/

COMPRESSOR.

Select the VOCAL HARMONY

CONTROL/MIC.

Using a Microphone — MIC. (PSR-2100 only)

PSR-2100

134

■ COMPRESSOR

This effect holds down the output when the input signal from the microphone exceeds a speciﬁed level. This is

useful when recording a signal with widely varying dynamics. It effectively “compresses” the signal, making soft

parts louder and loud parts softer.

SW.............. “SW” is the abbreviation of Switch. This turns Compressor on or off.

TH. ............. “TH.” is the abbreviation of Threshold. This adjusts the input level at which compression begins to be

applied.

RATIO ........ This adjusts the compression ratio.

OUT ........... Adjusts the ﬁnal output level.

■ VOCAL HARMONY CONTROL

The following parameters determine how the harmony is controlled.

VOCODER CONTROL

The Vocal Harmony effect is controlled by note data — the notes you play on the keyboard and/or the notes of the

song data. This parameter lets you determine which notes are used to control the harmony.

• SONG CHANNEL

MUTE/PLAY:

When set to “MUTE,” the channel selected below is muted (turned off) during keyboard performance or song

playback.

OFF:

Song data control over harmony is turned off.

1-16:

When playing back a song from disk or external MIDI sequencer, the note data recorded to the assigned song

channel controls the harmony.

• KEYBOARD

OFF: Keyboard control over harmony is turned off.

UPPER: Notes played to the right of the split point control the harmony.

LOWER: Notes played to the left of the split point control the harmony.

BALANCE

This lets you set the balance between the lead vocal (your own voice) and Vocal Harmony. Raising this value

increases the volume of the Vocal Harmony and decreases that of the lead vocal. When this is set to L<H63 (L: Lead

Vocal, H: Vocal Harmony), only the Vocal Harmony is output; when it is set to L63>H, only the lead vocal is output.

MODE

All of the Vocal Harmony types fall into one of three modes which produce harmony in different ways. The harmony

effect is dependent on the selected Vocal Harmony Mode and Track, and this parameter determines how the

harmony is applied to your voice. The three modes are described below.

VOCODER:

The harmony notes are determined by the notes you play on the keyboard (Main, Layer and Left) and/ or song

data which includes Vocal Harmony tracks.

CHORDAL:

During accompaniment playback, chords played in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard control the

harmony. During song playback, chords contained in song data control the harmony. (Not available if the song

does not contain any chord data.)

AUTO:

When the auto accompaniment or Left part is set to ON and if chord data exists in the song, the mode is

automatically set to CHORDAL. In all other cases, the mode is set to VOCODER.

CHORD

The following parameters specify the song data which will be used for chord detection.

OFF: Chords are not detected.

XF: Chords of XF format are detected.

1-16: Chords are detected from note data in the speciﬁed song channel.

■ MIC (MICROPHONE)

The following parameters determine how the microphone sound is controlled.

MUTE .............. When set to OFF, the microphone sound is turned off.

VOLUME ......... Adjusts the volume of the microphone sound.

Using a Microphone — MIC. (PSR-2100 only)

135

PSR-2100

Setting the Microphone Volume and Related Effects — TALK

SETTING

Determines the settings when the [TALK] button is on.

The explanations here apply to step 2 on page 133.

VOLUME/PAN/REVERB DEPTH/CHORUS DEPTH/TOTAL VOLUME ATTENUATOR

DSP/TYPE/DEPTH

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

This sets the stereo pan position

of the microphone sound.

This determines the volume of

the microphone sound.

These set the depth of the reverb and chorus effects

applied to the microphone sound.

This determines the amount of

attenuation to be applied to the overall

sound (excepting the microphone input)

— allowing you to effectively adjust the

balance between your voice and the

overall instrument sound.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

This turns the DSP effect applied to the

microphone sound ON or OFF.

This selects the type of DSP effect to be applied

to the microphone sound.

This sets the depth of the DSP effect

applied to the microphone sound.

PSR-2100/1100

136

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

The Function mode gives you access to various advanced functions related to the instrument as a whole. These

sophisticated functions let you customize the PSR-2100/1100 to your own musical needs and preferences.

Adjusting the Pitch and Tuning — Master Tune and Scale Tune

■ Master Tune (page 138)

This allows you to make ﬁne adjustments to the overall pitch of the instrument — letting you accurately match the

tuning with that of other instruments.

■ Scale Tune (page 138)

This determines the particular tuning system (or temperament) for the instrument. This is especially useful for playing

period pieces, to match the tuning system used during speciﬁc musical eras.

Setting Song-related Parameters — Song Settings (page 140)

These allow you to set parameters related to song playback.

Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting, Split Point, and Chord

Fingering

■ Style Setting / Split Point (page 141)

These determine the auto accompaniment-related settings, and let you set the split point.

■ Chord Fingering (page 142)

This determines the method for playing/indicating chords when using the auto accompaniment features. You can

even check how to play the chord, since the individual notes are indicated in the display.

USER

ENTER

EXIT

BALANCE

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

SOUND CREATOR

DIGITAL RECORDING

MIXING CONSOLE

DIGITAL

STUDIO

DIRECT

ACCESS

PART

CHANNEL ON/OFF

FREEZE MEMORY

DATA ENTRY

ORGAN FLUTES

STRINGS CHOIR & PAD

GUITAR

MAIN

BACK NEXT

LEFT

MUSIC

FINDER

LAYER

BASS

PIANO & HARPSI.

E.PIANO

UPPER OCTAVE

WOODWIND

PERCUSSION

VARIATION

MONOTOUCH

SUSTAIN

DSP

HARMONY/

ECHO

LEFT

HOLD

SYNTH.

BRASS

ORGAN &

ACCORDION

VOICE EFFECT

VOIC E

ONE TOUCH SETTING

REGISTRATION MEMORY

MIC.

EFFECT

RESET

VOCAL

HARMONY

MIC.

SETTING

VH TYPE

SELECT

TALK

OVER

SIGNAL

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

TRANSPOSE

ACMP

STANDBY

INTRO

START/STOP

MAIN

ENDING

/ rit.

AUTO

FILL IN

OTS

LINK

SYNC.

STOP

SYNC.

START

BREAK

BALLAD USERLATIN

POP & ROCK

REC REW FF

START/STOP

TOP

BALLROOM

DANCE

RESET

MIN MAX

FADE

IN/OUT

TEMPO

STOP

TAP T EMPO

RESET

NEW SONG SYNC. START

SONG

STYLE

MARCH &

WALTZ

METRO-

NOME

EXTRA

TRACKS

(STYLE) (R)(L)

TRACK

1REPEAT

SWING &

JAZZ

MULTI PAD

STYLE CONTROL

MASTER VOLUME

PART

FUNCTION

Operation

FUNCTION

HELP

DEMO

Select the desired function.

Set the parameters of the selected

function.

The operations for each function are

covered in the following explanations.

To return to the previous display, press the

[EXIT] button.

END

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

137

PSR-2100/1100

Making Settings for the Pedals and

Keyboard — Controller

■ Pedal (page 142)

These settings determine how the connected foot

pedals (including foot controllers and footswitches)

are used. They can be assigned to a variety of

functions, letting you control operations with your

feet — such as turning the accompaniment style on/

off, or triggering Fill In patterns.

■ Keyboard / Panel (page 144)

These settings determine the touch sensitivity of the

keyboard (how touch affects volume), the on/off

status of the Modulation wheel (PSR-2100 only), and

the pitch transpose settings (for the keyboard, song

data, and entire instrument).

Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze,

and Voice Set

■ Registration Sequence (page 145)

This determines the order in which the Registration

Memory presets (1 - 8) are called up — by using the

[BACK][NEXT] buttons or the pedal.

■ Freeze (page 145)

This lets you specify the settings you want to be

maintained or left unchanged, even when changing

Registration Memory presets.

■ Voice Set (page 146)

This lets you determine whether certain voice-related

settings (such as Effects, EQ, Harmony, etc.) are

automatically called up or not when you select a

voice.

Setting Harmony and Echo (page 146)

These let you set the type of Harmony or Echo effect

applied to the keyboard-played voices, as well as the

amount of effect.

Making MIDI Settings

■ System (page 148)

These determine various system messages settings

(such as Clock, Start/Stop, System Exclusive), as well

as Local Control on/off.

■ Transmit (page 149)

This determines how playback data is sent to

connected MIDI devices — i.e., which parts are

assigned to which MIDI Transmit channels. This also

lets you specify the type of data to be transmitted over

each channel.

■ Receive (page 150)

This determines how the parts of the PSR-2100/1100

respond to data from connected MIDI devices — i.e.,

which parts are assigned to which MIDI Receive

channels. This also lets you specify the type of data to

be received over each channel.

■ Root (page 150)

This determines the channel(s) recognized for the root

notes, for use with the auto accompaniment.

■ Chord Detect (page 150)

This determines the channel(s) recognized for the

chords, for use with the auto accompaniment.

Other Settings — Utility

■ Conﬁg 1 (page 151)

This page contains settings for Fade In/Out,

Metronome, Parameter Lock, and the Tap sound.

■ Conﬁg 2 (page 152)

From this page, you can adjust the display, and

change the voice number indication.

■ Disk (page 153)

From this page, you can format disks, and copy from

disk to disk.

■ Owner (page 154)

From this page, you can set the language of the

instrument, and input your own name — which is

shown automatically every time the power is turned

on.

■ System Reset (page 154)

This function restores the PSR-2100/1100 to its

original factory settings. You can also specify which

types of settings are to be restored, as well as store

your own original settings for future recall.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

PSR-2100/1100

138

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 136.

Tuning the Overall Pitch — Master Tune

Selecting a Scale — Scale Tune

Fine Tuning the Pitch/Selecting a Scale — Master Tune/Scale Tune

Hz (Hertz)

This unit of measurement

refers to the frequency of a

sound, and represents the

number of times a sound

wave vibrates in a second.

The Tune function does not

affect the Drum Kit or SFX

Kit voices.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Determines the overall

pitch of the PSR-2100/

1100, from 414.8 -

466.8 Hz. Press the 4

or 5 [▲▼] buttons

simultaneously to

instantly reset the value

to the factory setting of

440.0 Hz.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Determines the note to be tuned and the amount of tuning.

The tuning range is from “-64” through “0” to “+63.” Each increment

equals one cent (one “cent” is one hundredth of a semitone).

Determines the ﬁne tuning of the selected note in 1-

cent steps. Press the 4 or 5 [▲▼] buttons

simultaneously to instantly reset the value to the

factory setting.

Determines the base

note for each scale.

When the base note is

changed, the pitch of the

keyboard is transposed,

yet maintains the original

pitch relationship

between the notes.

Cent

A unit of pitch equal to 1/100

of a semitone (100 cents = 1

semitone).

You can register your origi-

nal scale tunings to a REG-

ISTRATION MEMORY

button. To do this, check-

mark “SCALE” in the REG-

ISTRATION MEMORY

display (page 87).

Select the desired scale template.

Selects which parts should be affected by the

scale setting.

Select the part to be set by pressing 6 or 7 [▲▼]

and set the function ON or OFF by pressing [▲▼].

Parts that are set to OFF remain in Equal

Temperament.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

139

PSR-2100/1100

Scale

■ Equal Temperament

The pitch range of each octave is divided equally into twelve parts, with each half-step evenly spaced in pitch. This

is the most commonly used tuning in music today.

■ Pure Major/Pure Minor

These tunings preserve the pure mathematical intervals of each scale, especially for triad chords (root, third, ﬁfth).

You can hear this best in actual vocal harmonies — such as choirs and acapella singing.

■ Pythagorean

This scale was devised by the famous Greek philosopher and is created from a series of perfect ﬁfths, which are

collapsed into a single octave. The 3rd in this tuning are slightly unstable, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and

suitable for some leads.

■ Mean-Tone

This scale was created as an improvement on the Pythagorean scale, by making the major third interval more “in

tune.” It was especially popular from the 16th century to the 18th century. Handel, among others, used this scale.

■ Werckmeister/Kirnberger

This composite scale combines the Werckmeister and Kirnberger systems, which were themselves improvements on

the mean-tone and Pythagorean scales. The main feature of this scale is that each key has its own unique character.

The scale was used extensively during the time of Bach and Beethoven, and even now it is often used when

performing period music on the harpsichord.

■ Arabic

Use these tunings when playing Arabic music.

Pitch settings for each scale (in cents; example scale of C)

The values shown in this chart are actually rounded off to the nearest whole number for use on the instrument.





EFF





Equal Temperament 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

Pure Major 0.0 -29.7 3.9 15.6 -14.1 -2.3 -9.4 2.3 -27.3 -15.6 18.0 -11.7

Pure Minor 0.0 33.6 3.9 15.6 -14.1 -2.3 31.3 2.3 14.1 -15.6 18.0 -11.7

Pythagorean 0.0 14.1 3.9 -6.3 7.8 -2.3 11.7 2.3 15.6 6.3 -3.9 10.2

Mean-Tone 0.0 -24.2 -7.0 10.2 -14.1 3.1 -20.3 -3.1 -27.3 -10.2 7.0 -17.2

Werckmeister 0.0 -10.2 -7.8 -6.3 -10.2 -2.3 -11.7 -3.9 -7.8 -11.7 -3.9 -7.8

Kirnberger 0.0 -10.2 -7.0 -6.3 -14.1 -2.3 -10.2 -3.1 -7.8 -10.2 -3.9 -11.7

Arabic1 0.0 0 -50.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -50.0 0.0 0.0

Arabic2 0.0 00.0 0.0 -50.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -50.0

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

PSR-2100/1100

140

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 136.

Setting Song-related Parameters — Song Settings

Quick Start

On some commercially avail-

able song data, certain set-

tings related to the song

(such as voice selection, vol-

ume, etc.) are recorded to

the ﬁrst measure, before the

actual note data. When

Quick Start is set to “ON,”

the PSR-2100/1100 reads

all initial non-note data of the

song at the highest possible

speed, then automatically

slows down to the appropri-

ate tempo at the ﬁrst note.

This allows you to start play-

back as quickly as possible,

with a minimum pause for

reading of data.

Channel

Refers to the MIDI channel

(page 160). The channels

are assigned as follows:

Song

1 - 16

Accompaniment Style

9 - 16

Phrase Mark

This data speciﬁes a certain

location in the song data.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Tur ns Quick Start on/off (see note).

Allows you to play back all songs

from the same folder continuously.

Determines the MIDI channel assigned

to the [TRACK2] button.

Determines the MIDI channel assigned

to the [TRACK1] button.

When set to “ON,” this

automatically sets the proper

Track 1 and Track 2 channels.

Normally, this should be set to

“ON.”

Determines the language of the

displayed lyrics.

When this is set to “AUTO,” the

language defaults to that of the

song data. When not set to

“AUTO,” the language defaults to

Japanese, when the internal

setting (page 154) is

JAPANESE; for all other

languages, this is set to

“INTERNATIONAL.”

Determines whether the Phrase

Mark Repeat function for the song

is on or off. When this is on, you

can repeatedly play back a

speciﬁed phrase (selection of

measures) of the song. The

method for specifying a phrase

mark is the same as that in the

SONG POSITION display

(page 81).

Determines the harmony channel for

Vocoder (PSR-2100 only) (page 134).

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

141

PSR-2100/1100

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 136.

Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting

and Split Point

Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters —

Style Setting, Split Point, and Chord Fingering

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

These select the part to which the split point

setting is applied: accompaniment, left-hand

range, or both. Press the desired key for the split

point while holding down one of these buttons.

The pressed key is included in the range for the

Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard

(ACMP) or the left-hand range (LEFT).

A+L (ACMP + LEFT)

Allows you to simultaneously set the split

point for both the left-hand range and the

Auto Accompaniment section of the

keyboard.

You can determine whether the chord played in the chord section will sound or not in the Stop

Accompaniment condition.

When this is set to “OFF,” you can use the Chord Match function (page 122) with the Multi Pads or the

Harmony effect (page 61) without having to playback a style.

This applies to the OTS Link function, in which One Touch Settings are automatically called up

with changes in the section. This determines the timing in which the One Touch Settings change

with the section. (The [OTS LINK] button must be on.)

Real Time

One Touch Setting is immediately called up when you press a section button.

Next Bar

One Touch Setting is called up at the next measure, after you press a section button.

The PSR-2100/1100 lets you automatically enable Sync Stop (page 68) simply

by quickly pressing/releasing keys in the Auto Accompaniment section of the

keyboard. This parameter lets you set the length of the key-hold time.

Tur ns touch response for the accompaniment on/off. When this is set to “ON,”

the accompaniment volume changes in response to your playing strength (in

the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard).

Determines the default section that is automatically called up when selecting

different accompaniment styles (when accompaniment is stopped).

Determines the split points for the auto accompaniment (ACMP) and the left-

hand range (LEFT). The same value can be set for both or for each

independently, using buttons [F], [G], and [H] (see above). You can use these

buttons by themselves to set the split point value.

About Section Set

When any of the Main A-D

sections is not included in

the accompaniment style

data, the nearest section is

automatically selected. For

example, when Main D is not

contained in the selected

accompaniment style, Main

C will be called up.

L (LEFT)

Allows you to set the split point for the left-hand range of the keyboard.

A (ACMP)

Allows you to set the split point for the Auto Accompaniment section of the

keyboard.

Stop Accompaniment

When auto accompaniment

is turned on and Synchro

Start is off, you can play

chords in the left-hand

(accompaniment) section of

the keyboard with the style

stopped, and still hear the

accompaniment chords.

About Split Point

Split point is the position on keyboard that separates the Auto

Accompaniment section (ACMP) and left-hand section (LEFT) from the

right-hand section (MAIN). The LEFT split point cannot be set lower than

the ACMP split point, and the ACMP split point cannot be set higher than

the LEFT split point.

Split point (A) Split point (L)

Split point (A) + (L)

Auto

Accompaniment

section

Auto Accompaniment section

+ Left-hand section

Left-hand

section

Right-hand

section

Right-hand

section

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

PSR-2100/1100

142

Setting the Fingering Method — Chord Fingering

This determines how the notes you play on the keyboard indicate or play the chords of the accompaniment. To learn

how to play certain chords, use the convenient Chord Tutor function (see note below).

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 136.

Making Settings for the Pedals

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Determines the ﬁngering

type (page 65).

This lets you change the root

note from the chord.

This lets you change the

chord type.

Indicates the note that belongs to a

chord in the music.

Indicates the note that

belongs to a chord. Some

notes can be omitted. The

chord name is indicated

next to “CHORD NAME.”

...Required

...Can be omitted

...Either note can be

omitted

...Can be omitted when

the note indicated by

is omitted

The chord indication in the

display applies to the Fin-

gered method, regardless if

another method is actually

selected.

Chord Tutor

The Chord Tutor feature is

essentially an electronic

“chord book” that shows you

appropriate ﬁngerings for

chords; it is useful when you

want to play certain chords.

Simply specify the desired

chord via the [6▲▼] - [8▲▼]

buttons, and the ﬁngerings

for the Fingered method are

indicated in the display.

Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard — Controller

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Determines the particular

pedal to which a function is

to be assigned.

Determines the function to be assigned to the

selected pedal. Any one of the available functions

can be assigned to each pedal.

For information on the assignable functions, see

“Pedal-controllable Functions” on the next page.

If necessary, you can turn

the corresponding part ON/

OFF or set the control depth

(see the next page).

Pedal on/off operation may

differ depending on the

particular pedal you’ve

connected to the [FOOT

PEDAL 1/2] jack. For

example, pressing down on

one pedal may turn the

selected function on, while

pressing a different make/

brand of pedal may turn the

function off. If necessary,

use this setting to reverse

the operation.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

143

PSR-2100/1100

Pedal-controllable Functions

* For best results, use the optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller.

The parameters below correspond to buttons [2▲▼] - [8▲▼], and their availability depends on the selected control Type. For example, if

SUSTAIN is selected as the Type, the parameters “HALF PEDAL POINT”, “MAIN”, “LAYER” and “LEFT” automatically appear in the display.

* For best results, use the optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller.

VOLUME* Allows you to use a foot controller (FOOT PEDAL 2 only) to control the volume.

SUSTAIN When the pedal is pressed notes played have a long sustain. Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any

sustained notes.

SOSTENUTO If you press and hold the pedal here, only the ﬁrst note will be sustained (the note that you played and held when

pressing the pedal). This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played staccato.

SOFT Pressing the pedal subtly reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played. It only applies to

certain voices — PIANO, for example.

GLIDE When the pedal is pressed the pitch changes, and then back to normal pitch when the pedal is released.

PORTAMENTO The portamento effect (a smooth slide between notes) can be produced while the pedal is pressed. Portamento is

produced when notes are played legato style (i.e., a note is played while the preceding note is still held). The

portamento time can be set via the Mixing Console display (page 126).

PITCHBEND*

Bend notes up or down while pedal is pressed (FOOT PEDAL 2 only). Same as the PITCH BEND wheel.

MODULATION* Applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard. The depth of the effect increases while pedal is pressed

(FOOT PEDAL 2 only)

. Same as the MODULATION wheel.

DSP VARIATION Same as the [VARIATION] button.

HARMONY/ECHO Same as the [HARMONY/ECHO] button.

VOCAL HARMONY (PSR-2100 only)

Same as the [VOCAL HARMONY] button

TALK (PSR-2100 only) Same as the [TALK] button.

SCORE PAGE+ (PSR-2100 only) While the song is stopped, you can turn to the previous score page (one page only).

SCORE PAGE- (PSR-2100 only) While the song is stopped, you can turn to the next score page (one page only).

SONG START/STOP Same as the SONG [START/STOP] button.

STYLE START/STOP Same as the STYLE [START/STOP] button.

TAP TEMPO Same as the [TAP TEMPO] button.

SYNCHRO START Same as the [SYNC. START] button.

SYNCHRO STOP Same as the [SYNC. STOP] button.

INTRO Same as the [INTRO] button.

MAIN A Same as the [MAIN A] button.

MAIN B Same as the [MAIN B] button.

MAIN C Same as the [MAIN C] button.

MAIN D Same as the [MAIN D] button.

FILL DOWN A ﬁll-in plays, automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate left.

FILL SELF Fill-in starts playing.

FILL BREAK Break starts playing.

FILL UP A ﬁll-in plays, automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate right.

ENDING Same as the [ENDING/rit.] button.

FADE IN/OUT Same as the [FADE IN/OUT] button.

FING/ON BASS The pedal alternately switches between the Fingered and On Bass modes (page 65).

BASS HOLD While the pedal is pressed, the Accompaniment Style bass note will be held even if the chord is changed. If the

ﬁngering is set to “FULL KEYBOARD,” the function does not work.

PERCUSSION

The pedal plays a percussion instrument selected by the [4

▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons. You can use the keyboard to

select the desired percussion instrument.

MAIN ON/OFF

Same as the [MAIN] button.

LAYER ON/OFF Same as the [LAYER] button.

LEFT ON/OFF Same as the [LEFT] button.

OTS+ Calls up the next One Touch Setting.

OTS- Calls up the previous One Touch Setting.

SONG, STYLE, M.PAD, MIC

(PSR-2100 only), LEFT,

LAYER, MAIN

These specify the part(s) that will be affected by the pedal.

HALF PEDAL POINT* You can specify how far down you should press on the foot pedal until the damper effect starts working. This can be set

for certain kinds of pedals, such as the foot pedal (YAMAHA FC7) (FOOT PEDAL 2 only).

UP/DOWN

When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines whether the pitch change goes up (is raised) or down (is lowered).

RANGE When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines the range of the pitch change, in semitones.

ON SPEED When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal is pressed.

OFF SPEED When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal is released.

KIT When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all available drum kits are shown here, letting you select the particular

drum kit used for the pedal.

PERCUSSION When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all sounds of the selected drum kit (in KIT above) are shown here. This

determines the particular instrument sound assigned to the pedal.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

PSR-2100/1100

144

Changing the Touch Sensitivity Modulation and Transpose — Keyboard/Panel

Keyboard Touch/Modulation Wheel

The Touch feature lets you control the volume of the voices by your playing strength. These settings allow you to

customize the keyboard’s touch response (sensitivity) to your personal playing preferences. You can also set whether the

Modulation wheel is effective or not — for each individual keyboard part.

Transpose Assign

This determines which aspect of the instrument is affected by the [TRANSPOSE] button.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

HARD 2

Requires strong playing to produce

high volume. Best for players with a

heavy touch.

HARD 1

Requires moderately strong playing for

higher volume.

NORMAL

Standard touch response.

SOFT 1

Produces high volume with moderate

playing strength.

SOFT 2 Produces relatively high volume even

with light playing strength. Best for

players with a light touch.

Selects the desired

parameter: Keyboard

Touch, Modulation

Wheel (PSR-2100) or

Transpose Assign.

Determines the

Touch sensitivity

setting (Keyboard

Touch only; refer to

the table at right).

Determines the

ﬁxed volume level

when touch is set

to “off” (Keyboard

Touch only).

Determines whether Touch and Modulation Wheel controls are on or not for the corresponding parts.

The TOUCH setting affects all voices globally. Keep

in mind that you can set each voice to a different

touch sensitivity (TOUCH SENSE). For example, to

play a pipe organ voice most authentically, you can

set this so that the voice is not affected by touch

(page 91).

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

KEYBOARD

For this setting, Transpose affects the pitch of the

keyboard-played voices (Main, Layer, and Left) and

the accompaniment styles.

SONG

For this setting, Transpose affects only the pitch of

the songs.

MASTER

For this setting, Transpose affects the pitch of the

entire instrument (keyboard voices,

accompaniment styles, and songs).

Transpose

Allows you to shift the pitch of the keyboard-played voices,

accompaniment style playback, and song data in semitone units.

Press one of the [TRANSPOSE] buttons.

A TRANSPOSE pop-up window, selected via TRANSPOSE

ASSIGN, appears.

Adjust the value by using the [TRANSPOSE] buttons.

Close the TRANSPOSE windows by pressing the

[EXIT] button.

• Selectively Transposing Keyboard/Song

These settings can be used to match both the song and your

keyboard performance to a certain key. For example, let’s say

you wish to play and sing along with a certain recorded song.

The song data is in F, but you feel most comfortable singing in D,

and you are accustomed to playing the keyboard part in C. To

match up the keys, keep the Master Transpose setting at “0,” set

the Keyboard Transpose to “2,” and set Song Transpose to “-3.”

This brings the keyboard part up in pitch and the song data

down to your comfortable singing key.

TRANSPOSE

RESET

END

The transpose function

does not affect the Drum

Kit or SFX Kit voices.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

145

PSR-2100/1100

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 136.

Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration Memory Presets —

Registration Sequence

You can save your custom panel settings to the Registration Memory presets, and call them up by pressing the

appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons [1] - [8]. The convenient Registration Sequence function lets you call up

the presets in any order you specify, by simply using the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons or the pedal as you play.

Maintaining Panel Settings — Freeze

This lets you specify the settings you want to be maintained or left unchanged, even when changing Registration

Memory presets. For details, see page 89.

Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Tur ns the Registration

Sequence function

on/off. When this is

set to “ON,” the

programmed

Registration

Sequence is shown at

the top right of the

Main display, and you

can step through the

sequence in this

display by using the

[BACK]/[NEXT]

buttons or the pedals.

Determines which pedal is used to advance

(increment) through the sequence.

Determines which

pedal is used to

reverse (decrement)

through the sequence.

Determines how Registration

Sequence behaves when

reaching the end of the

sequence.

Stop

Pressing the [NEXT] button or

the “advance” pedal has no

effect. The sequence is

“stopped.”

Top

The sequence starts again at

the beginning.

Next Bank

The sequence automatically

moves to the beginning of the

next Registration Memory bank

in the same folder.

Indicates the ﬁle name of the selected

Registration Memory bank.

Indicates the Registration Memory preset

numbers, in the order of the current

Registration Sequence.

These move the cursor position in the sequence.

Replaces the number at the cursor position with the

currently selected Registration Memory number.

Inserts the number of the currently

selected Registration Memory preset

immediately before the cursor position.

Deletes the number at the

cursor position.

Deletes all Registration

Memory numbers in the

sequence.

When you are using the pedal

to call up speciﬁed presets, you

can easily reset the Registra-

tion Sequence and go back to

the ﬁrst entry by holding down

the pedal for a few seconds

(the red box indicator at the top

right of the MAIN display goes

out). Press and release the foot

pedal to re-select the ﬁrst entry

in the sequence.

Setting Registration Sequence

Enable to “ON” overrides any

other Pedal settings (for ped-

als assigned to “Regist (+)

Pedal” and “Regist (-) Pedal”

here). These include the pedal

settings on page 142, and in

Voice Set on page 146.

When both “Regist (+) Pedal”

and “Regist (-) Pedal” are set

to “OFF,” the pedals cannot be

used to step through the Reg-

istration Sequence; only the

[BACK]/[NEXT] buttons can

be used in the MAIN display.

When both “Regist (+) Pedal”

and “Regist (-) Pedal” are set

to the same pedal, “Regist

(+) Pedal” takes priority.

Registration Sequence data

is included as part of the

Registration Memory bank

ﬁle. To save your newly pro-

grammed Registration

Sequence, store the current

Registration Memory bank

ﬁle (page 38, 47). Any Regis-

tration Sequence data is lost

when changing Registration

Memory banks, unless

you’ve stored it with the Reg-

istration Memory bank ﬁle.

Execute the settings by pressing the [EXIT] button.

END

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

PSR-2100/1100

146

Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings — Voice Set

When changing voices (selecting a voice ﬁle), the settings best matching the voice — the same as those set in the Sound

Creator — are always and automatically called up. From this page, you can set the on/off status for each part. For

example, each of the preset voices has its own LEFT PEDAL setting; however, even changing voices will not change the

LEFT PEDAL setting, if it is set to “OFF” in this page.

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 136.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Use these to select the

desired part.

These determine whether the corresponding voice-related settings

(Voice selection, Effects, EQ (PSR-2100 only) and Harmony/echo

assignment) are automatically called up or not when you select a voice.

These settings can be turned on or off independently for each part.

Normally, these should all be

set to “ON.”

Harmony/echo cannot be set

for the Layer and Left parts.

Setting Harmony and Echo

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Determines the Harmony type.

For details, see page 147.

Determines the lowest velocity value at

which the harmony note will sound. This

allows you to selectively apply the harmony

by your playing strength, letting you create

harmony accents in the melody. The

harmony effect is applied when you play

the key strongly (above the set value).

Determines the level of the Harmony effect.

Determines the speed of the Echo, Tremolo, and Trill

effects. This parameter is only available when Echo,

Tremolo, or Trill is selected in Type above.

This lets you assign the Harmony

effect to various parts. For details,

see page 147.

When this is set to “ON,” the Harmony

effect is applied only to the note that

belongs to a chord played in the Auto

Accompaniment section of the keyboard.

This parameter is not available when Multi

Assign, Echo, Tremolo, or Trill is selected in

Type above.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

147

PSR-2100/1100

About the Harmony Types

When a normal Harmony type (“Standard Duet” through “Strum”) is selected

When “Multi Assign” is selected

Multi Assign automatically assigns notes played simultaneously on the right-hand section of the keyboard to

separate parts (voices). For example, if you play two consecutive notes, the ﬁrst is played by the Main voice and the

second by the Layer voice.

When “Echo” is selected

An echo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard, in time with the currently set tempo.

When “Tremolo” is selected

A tremolo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard, in time with the currently set tempo.

When “Trill” is selected

Two notes held on the keyboard are played alternately, in time with the currently set tempo.

About the Harmony Assignments

AUTO

Harmony notes are automatically assigned the MAIN and LAYER parts.

Multi

This automatically assigns the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th added harmony notes to different parts (voices). For example, if the

Main and Layer parts are turned on and the “Standard Duet” type is selected, the note you play on the keyboard will be

played by the Main voice, and the added harmony note will be played by the Layer voice.

Main

Harmony is applied only to the Main part. When the Main part is turned off, Harmony is not applied.

Layer

Harmony is applied only to the Layer part. When the Layer part is turned off, Harmony is not applied.

Split point

Chords played to the left of the

split point control the harmony.

Harmony notes (based on the chord

and the selected type) are automatically

added to the melody played to the right

of the split point.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

PSR-2100/1100

148

In this section, you can make MIDI-related settings for the instrument. These settings can be stored all together from the

USER display, for future recall.For general information and details about MIDI, see “What is MIDI?” (page 158).

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 136.

Making Overall System Settings (Local Control, Clock, etc.) — System

Call up the display as described in step 2 above.

Local Control

Turns the Local Control for each part on or off. When Local Control is set to “ON,” the keyboard of the PSR-2100/1100

controls its own (local) internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard. If

you set Local to “OFF,” the keyboard and controllers are internally disconnected from the PSR-2100/1100’s tone

generator section so that no sound is output when you play the keyboard or use the controllers. For example, this allows

you to use an external MIDI sequencer to play the PSR-2100/1100’s internal voices, and use the PSR-2100/1100

keyboard to record notes to the external sequencer and/or play an external tone generator.

Setting the MIDI Parameters

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Select the desired template.

Call up the Edit display, then

select and set the desired

functions/parameters.

For details about each of the

MIDI edit displays, see the

following pages.

Preset MIDI Templates (Factory Set)

All Parts Transmit all parts including Main, Layer

and Left.

Master KBD The PSR-2100/1100 functions as a

master keyboard for controlling external

tone generators or other devices.

KBD & Style Tr ansmit Upper and Lower keyboard play

instead of the individual parts (Main/

Layer/Left).

Song All Transmit channels are set to

correspond to the Song channels 1-16.

Use this to play the PSR-2100/1100

song data with an external tone

generator, or to record your entire

performance to an external sequencer.

Clock Ext. MIDI IN terminal receives MIDI clock and

PSR-2100/1100 synchronizes with a

external MIDI device.

MIDI Accord 1 An ideal setup for controlling the

keyboard voice and accompaniment

style with a MIDI accordion.

MIDI Accord 2 Chord and bass buttons on a MIDI

accordion control the accompaniment

style, as well as play the chord and bass

parts.

MIDI Pedal 1 The MIDI pedal connected to MIDI IN

terminal controls the bass note of the

accompaniment.

MIDI Pedal 2 The MIDI pedal connected to MIDI IN

terminal plays the bass part.

MIDI OFF MIDI signals are neither sent nor

received.

Call up the User display

and press this button to

save the newly edited

MIDI settings.

Up to ten setups can

be saved.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display.

END

The saved settings can be named (page 44)

or deleted (page 46) in the User page.

For editing the Local Control parameters.

For editing the Message Switch

parameters.

For editing the Clock, Transmit Clock,

Receive Transpose, and Start/Stop

parameters.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

149

PSR-2100/1100

Clock, Transmit Clock, Receive Transpose, Start/Stop

■ Clock

Determines whether the PSR-2100/1100 is controlled by its own internal clock or a MIDI clock signal received from

an external device. “INTERNAL” is the normal Clock setting when the PSR-2100/1100 is being used alone. If you are

using the PSR-2100/1100 with an external sequencer, MIDI computer, or other MIDI device, and you want the PSR-

2100/1100 to be synchronized to the external device, set this function to “EXTERNAL.” In the latter case, the

external device must be connected to the PSR-2100/1100 MIDI IN terminal, and must be transmitting an

appropriate MIDI clock signal.

■ Transmit Clock

Turns MIDI clock transmission on or off. When this is set to “OFF,” no MIDI clock or START/STOP data is

transmitted.

■ Receive Transpose

When this parameter is set to “OFF,” note data received by the PSR-2100/1100 is not transposed, and when it is set

to “ON,” the received note data is transposed according to the current PSR-2100/1100 keyboard transpose

(page 144) setting.

■ Start/Stop

Determines whether incoming FA (start) and FC (stop) messages affect song or

style playback.

Message Switch

SYS/EX. Tx (TRANSMIT).....................Turns MIDI transmission of MIDI system exclusive message data ON or OFF.

SYS/EX. Rx (RECEIVE) ........................ Turns MIDI reception of MIDI exclusive data generated by external equipment

ON or OFF.

CHORD SYS/EX. Tx (TRANSMIT) ......Turns MIDI transmission of MIDI chord exclusive data (chord detect — root and

type) ON or OFF.

CHORD SYS/EX. Rx (RECEIVE)..........Turns MIDI reception of MIDI chord exclusive data generated by external

equipment ON or OFF.

Transmitting MIDI Data — Transmit

This determines which parts will send MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will be sent.

Data Types in the MIDI TRANSMIT/RECEIVE Display

* Available in RECEIVE display only (page 150).

Note Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played. Each message includes a speciﬁc note number which

corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played.

Control Change (CC) Control change data includes pedal and any other controller data.

Program Change (PC) Program change data corresponds to voice or “patch” numbers.

Pitch Bend (PB) See page 143.

After Touch (AT)* With this function, the PSR-2100/1100 senses how much pressure you apply to the keys while playing, and uses that

pressure to affect the sound in various ways, depending on the selected voice. This allows you to play with greater

expressiveness and add effects with your playing technique.

FA, FC

MIDI messages for starting/stop-

ping the song or style. The “FA”

message corresponds to start,

and “FC” corresponds to stop.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Determines the

channel for changing

transmit settings.

Determines the Part for the

selected channel.

Tur ns transmission of the

speciﬁed data type on or off.

See below for details on the

data types.

The dots corresponding to each

channel (1-16) ﬂash brieﬂy

whenever any data is

transmitted on the channel(s).

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

PSR-2100/1100

150

Receiving MIDI Data — Receive

This determines which parts will receive MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will be received.

MIDI Receive Parts

Setting Root Note Channels — Root

The note ON/OFF messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the root notes in the accompaniment

section. The root notes will be detected regardless of the accompaniment ON/OFF and split point settings.

Setting Chord Channels — Chord Detect

The note ON/OFF messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the chord notes in the

accompaniment section. The chords to be detected depend on the ﬁngering type. The root notes will be detected

regardless of the accompaniment ON/OFF and split point settings. The operation procedure is basically the same as that

of the ROOT display above.

OFF No MIDI data is received.

SONG Normally, the part receiving the MIDI data corresponds to the part/voice used in playing back the song data. Channels 1 - 16

correspond to song channels 1 - 16, respectively.

MAIN The MAIN part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel.

LAYER The LAYER part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel.

LEFT The LEFT part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel.

KEYBOARD

MIDI note data received by the PSR-2100/1100 plays the corresponding notes in the same way as if they are played on the keyboard.

ACMP RHYTHM1-2 The received notes are used as the accompaniment RHYTHM 1 and RHYTHM 2.

ACMP BASS The received notes are used as the accompaniment BASS.

ACMP CHORD1-2 The received notes are used as the accompaniment CHORD 1 and CHORD 2.

ACMP PAD The received notes are used as the accompaniment PAD.

ACMP PHRASE1-2 The received notes are used as the accompaniment PHRASE 1 and PHRASE 2.

EXTRA PART1-5 There are ﬁve parts specially reserved for receiving and playing MIDI data. Normally, these parts are not used by the instrument

itself. When these ﬁve channels are enabled, you can use the instrument as a 32-channel multi-timbral tone generator.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Determines the channel for

changing receive settings.

Determines the Part for the

selected channel. See below for

details about the receive parts.

Tur ns reception of the speciﬁed

data type on or off. See page 149

for details on the data types.

The dots corresponding to each

channel (1 - 32) ﬂash brieﬂy

whenever any data is received

on the channel(s).

The MIDI IN/OUT terminals

and Port 1 of the USB termi-

nal correspond to channels 1

- 16. Port 2 of the USB termi-

nal corresponds to channels

17 - 32.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Selects the channels in groups of

eight: 1 - 8, 9 - 16, 17 - 24, and 25

- 32, respectively.

Sets the desired channel to ON or OFF.

Sets all channels to OFF.

The MIDI IN/OUT terminals

and Port 1 of the USB termi-

nal correspond to channels 1

- 16. Port 2 of the USB termi-

nal corresponds to channels

17 - 32.

When several channels are

simultaneously set to “ON,”

the root note is detected

from merged MIDI data

received over the channels.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

151

PSR-2100/1100

The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 136.

Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome, Parameter Lock, and

Tap — CONFIG 1

Fade In Time, Fade Out Time, Fade Out Hold Time

These determine how long it takes for the accompaniment style and song to fade in or fade out.

Metronome

These let you make settings for the metronome-related parameters.

Other Settings — Utility

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Determines the time it takes for the

volume to fade in, or go from minimum to

maximum (range of 0 - 20.0 seconds).

Determines the time it takes for the

volume to fade out, or go from maximum

to minimum (range of 0 - 20.0 seconds).

Determines the time the volume is held

at 0 following the fade out (range of 0 -

5.0 seconds).

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Determines the level of the

metronome sound.

Determines which sound is used for the metronome.

Bell Off ........................Conventional metronome sound, with no bell.

Bell On.........................Conventional metronome sound, with bell.

Determines the time

signature of the metronome

sound.

When you start the song or

accompaniment style, the

values matching to them are

automatically set.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

PSR-2100/1100

152

Parameter Lock

This function is used to “lock” the speciﬁed parameters so that they can only be changed directly via the panel controls

— in other words, instead of via Registration Memory, One Touch Setting, Music Finder, or song and sequence data.

Tap Count

This lets you change settings of the tap sound, used for the Tap Start function (page 54).

Making Settings for the Display and Voice Number Indication

— CONFIG 2

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Selects the desired

parameter for locking/

unlocking.

Determines whether the selected

parameter is locked (checkmarked)

or unlocked (empty).

PSR-2100 only

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Determines the level of the tap

sound.

Determines the particular sound

used for the Tap Start function.

Any drum or percussion sound

in the Standard Kit (page 58)

can be selected.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Determines the brightness of

the backlit display.

Determines whether or not the voice bank

and number are shown in the PRESET

page of the VOICE display (page 57).

This is useful when you want to check the

proper bank select MSB/LSB values and

program number to specify when

selecting the voice from an external MIDI

device.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

153

PSR-2100/1100

Copying and Formatting Disks — Disk

• Copying cannot be done

between a 2DD disk and

2HD disk. When copying,

make sure both disk are

the same type.

• Depending on the amount

of data contained in the

original source disk, you

may have to swap the two

disks several times until all

of the data is properly

copied.

• Make sure to read the

section “Using the Floppy

Disk Drive (FDD) and

Floppy Disks” on page 7.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Tur ns the Song Auto Open function on or off.

When this is set to “ON,” the PSR-2100/1100

automatically calls up the ﬁrst disk song when

a disk is inserted.

This function copies all the data

from one disk to another, letting you

back up all your important data

before editing. For instructions, see

“Copying from Disk to Disk” below.

This function formats a

ﬂoppy disk (see below).

Source

disk

Copy Copy

Destination

disk

Internal memory

Copying from Disk to Disk

As shown below, ﬁrst copy the data of the original (source) disk to the PSR-2100/1100,

then copy the data to the backup (destination) disk.

Press the [F] button. A message

appears, prompting you to insert

the source disk.

Insert the disk containing the

original data into the drive and

press “OK.”

A “Now copying” message

appears, and the PSR-2100/

1100 begins copying data to

internal memory. To abort the

operation, press “CANCEL.”

At the “Please insert a destination

disk and press the OK button ”

prompt, eject the source disk and

replace it with a blank, formatted

disk, then press “OK.” To abort the

operation, press “CANCEL.”

When the operation is ﬁnished

(or when prompted), eject the

destination disk.

Commercially available

music data is subject to

protection by copyright

laws. Copying commer-

cially available data is

strictly prohibited,

except for your own per-

sonal use. Some music

software is purposely

copy-protected and

cannot be copied.

Formatting a Disk

When using an unformatted disk for the ﬁrst time, make sure to properly

format it on the PSR-2100/1100. This includes blank disks as well as disks

already initialized in a different format. Formatting erases all data on the

disk.

Insert the disk with shutter facing away from you and the label side up. To

start the Format operation, press the [H] (DISK FORMAT) button, in the

DISK page above.

The Format operation initializes a disk

with a speciﬁc ﬁle system, allowing the

corresponding device (in this case, the

PSR-2100/1100) to access it properly.

Since there are several types of for-

mats and disks available, you should

know which ones to use with the PSR-

2100/1100. 2DD disks are formatted to

a capacity of 720 KB, and 2HD disks

are formatted to a capacity of 1.44 MB.

Formatting a disk completely erases

all data on the disk. Make sure that

the disk you’re formatting does not

contain important data!

CAUTION

Disk Lamp

When the power is turned

on, the disk lamp (at the

bottom left of the drive)

lights to indicate the drive

can be used.

Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function

PSR-2100/1100

154

Entering Your Name and Language Preference — Owner

Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the PSR-2100/1100

— System Reset

This operation lets you restore the PSR-2100/1100 to its original factory settings. These settings include System Setup,

MIDI Setup, User Effect, Music Finder, and Files & Folders.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

Press this button to

enter an Owner name

(page 17; for

instructions on naming

see page 48). This

name is automatically

shown when you turn

the power on.

Determines the language

used for the display

messages. Once you

change this setting, all

messages will be shown in

the selected language.

Selecting a different language here may

cause the following problems.

• Some characters of the ﬁle names you

entered may be garbled.

• Files may not be accessible.

Restoring the original language solves the

above problems.

Reading the ﬁles on the computer with a dif-

ferent language system may cause similar

problems to those above.

81 2 3 4 5 6 7

These call up the corresponding Open/

Save displays. These let you store the

corresponding data as ﬁles to disk, for

future recall. Pressing each of these

buttons calls up the corresponding

Open/Save display, from which you can

select the corresponding PRESET

page. From this PRESET page, you

can save the relevant data.

Restores the System Setup parameters to the

original factory settings. You can also restore

only the System Setup settings by

simultaneously holding down the highest key

on the keyboard (C6) and turning on the power.

Restores the MIDI

templates to the original

factory settings.

Restores the User Effects

(page 128) to the original

factory settings.

Restores the Music Finder

data to the original factory

settings.

Deletes all ﬁles and folders

stored in the User page.

Executes the Factory Reset operation

for all items checkmarked above.

The functions and settings

below do not apply to the

Factory Reset operation.

However, you can restore

these to their original set-

tings by calling up the preset

System Setup ﬁles, using

the Open/Save System Files

function.

Language

Owner Name

LCD Brightness

All Music Finder records can

be stored together as a sin-

gle ﬁle. When calling up a

stored ﬁle, a message

appears prompting you to

replace or append the

records as desired.

Replace:

All Music Finder records cur-

rently in the instrument are

deleted and replaced with

the records of the selected

ﬁle.

Append:

The records called up are

added to the vacant record

numbers.

155

PSR-2100/1100

Using Your

PSR-2100/1100

with Other Devices

1 Using the Headphones

(PHONES jack).

A standard pair of stereo headphones can be plugged in

here for private practice or late-night playing. The internal

stereo speaker system is automatically shut off when a

pair of headphones is plugged into the PHONES jack

(page 152).

2 Connecting the Microphone

or Guitar (MIC./LINE IN jack)

(PSR-2100 only).

By connecting a microphone to the PSR-2100, you can

enjoy singing along with your own performance or song

playback. (A dynamic microphone is recommended.) The

PSR-2100 outputs your vocals or guitar sounds through

the built-in speakers.

Connect your microphone to the MIC./LINE IN jack

(standard 1/4" phone jack).

Set the [MIC. LINE] switch (located next to the MIC./

LINE IN jack) to the MIC. position.

Use the [INPUT VOLUME]

knob (located next to the

MIC./LINE IN jack) to set the

microphone volume then

trying singing into the

microphone.

The volume should be set high enough that the

SIGNAL lamp on the top panel lights steadily when

you sing, but not so high that the OVER lamp lights

(page 131).

Before connecting the PSR-2100/1100 to other electronic compo-

nents, turn off the power to all the components. Before turning the

power on or off to all components, set all volume levels to minimum

(0). Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may

occur.

CAUTION

Use an unidirectional microphone for best results.

MIC. LINE MIC. LINE

When connecting a microphone When connecting a guitar

You should set the [MIC. LINE] switch to the LINE position when

connecting an audio source with line-level output to the MIC./LINE

IN jack.

INPUT

VOLUME

MIC./

LINE IN

AUX OUT

(LEVEL FIXED)

MIC. LINE

MIDI FOOT PEDAL

OUT

DC IN 16V

R L/L+R

OUTPUT

USB

P.155

P.156

P.157

P.156

Using Your PSR-2100/1100 with Other Devices

PSR-2100/1100

156

3 Playing the sounds of the

PSR-2100/1100 through an

external audio system, and

recording the sounds to an

external recorder (AUX OUT/

OUTPUT jacks)

You can connect the PSR-2100/1100 to a wide range of

audio equipment by using the AUX OUT and OUTPUT

jacks.

Connect as shown in the illustrations below using

standard audio cables.

4 Using the Pedal (footswitch)

or Foot Controller (FOOT

PEDAL 1/2 jack)

By connecting a Foot Switch (the FC4 or FC5) to one of

the FOOT PEDAL jacks, you can replicate the function of

some panel buttons, doing things like starting and

stopping accompaniment.

By connecting an optional Foot Controller (such as the

FC7) to the FOOT PEDAL 2 jack, you can control any one

of a variety of important functions with your foot — such

as dynamically adjusting the volume as you play

(page 142).

5 Connecting external MIDI

devices (MIDI terminals)

Use the built-in MIDI terminals and standard MIDI cables

to connect external MIDI devices. For more information

about MIDI connections, see “What You Can Do With

MIDI” on page 160.

The MIDI terminals cannot be used when the USB

terminal is connected to a computer and active.

MIDI IN ...........Receives MIDI messages from an

external MIDI device

MIDI OUT........Sends out MIDI messages generated by

the PSR-2100/1100

For a general overview of MIDI and how you can

effectively use it, refer to the following sections:

• What’s MIDI? (page 158)

• What You Can Do With MIDI (page 160)

• MIDI functions (page 148)

Use audio cables and adaptor plugs with no resistance.

When the PSR-2100/1100 AUX OUT and OUTPUT jacks are

connected to an external audio system, ﬁrst turn on the power to

the PSR-2100/1100, then to the external audio system. Reverse

this order when you turn the power off.

CAUTION

LRRL/L+R

AUX OUT

(LEVEL FIXED)

OUTPUT

Audio cable

To powered speaker

RCA pin

plug

RCA pin plug

AUX IN

Cassette tape recorder

stereo system

Phone plug

(standard)

When these are connected

(with RCA pin plug; LEVEL

FIXED), the sound is output to

the external device at a ﬁxed

level, regardless of the

[MASTER VOLUME] control

setting.

When these are connected

(with standard phone

plugs), you can use the

[MASTER VOLUME]

control to adjust the volume

of the sound output to the

external device.

• If you connect the PSR-2100/1100 to a monaural device, use

only the OUTPUT L/L+R jack.

The polarity of the foot switch (normal or reverse) can also be

changed (page 142).

Make sure to connect or disconnect the pedal only when the power

is turned off.

CAUTION

•Never use MIDI cables longer than 15 meters.

Using Your PSR-2100/1100 with Other Devices

157

PSR-2100/1100

6 Connecting to a Computer

(USB terminal, MIDI terminal)

Connecting your PSR-2100/1100 to a computer allows

you to transfer data back and forth between the two and

take advantage of the powerful and versatile music

software available. You can connect the devices in one of

two ways:

■ Using the USB terminal

■ Using the MIDI terminals

The MIDI terminals cannot be used when the USB

terminal is in use.

An appropriate MIDI application for your computer

platform is required.

For details about the necessary MIDI settings for computer

and sequence software you are using, refer to the relevant

owner’s manuals.

Using the USB terminal

Connect the USB terminal of a computer to the USB

terminal of the PSR-2100/1100 using a USB cable. Make

sure to use a standard USB cable with the USB logo.

Using the MIDI terminals

When using a MIDI interface device installed in the

personal computer, connect the MIDI terminals of the

personal computer and the PSR-2100/1100 with standard

MIDI cables.

• When the computer has a MIDI interface installed,

connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the personal

computer to the MIDI IN terminal.

About the USB driver

You must install the speciﬁed USB driver (YAMAHA

USB MIDI Driver) to your computer before you can

transfer data between the computer and the PSR-

2100/1100.

You can download a copy of the YAMAHA USB MIDI

Driver free of charge from the XG Library on the

Yamaha Web site (http://www.yamaha-xg.com/).

NEC

PC-9821

NEC MultiSync

USB cable

If you are using a USB cable to connect the PSR-2100/1100 to

your computer, you must connect the USB cable before turning on

the power of the instrument.

Also, do not turn the power of the PSR-2100/1100 on/off while any

application software that uses USB or MIDI is running.

If you turn the power of the PSR-2100/1100 on or off or connect/

disconnect the USB cable in the following states, problems will

occur in the computer system, possibly causing it to “freeze” (hang

up), or causing the PSR-2100/1100 to stop functioning.

• While installing the driver.

• While starting or shutting down the operating system.

• While the computer is in an energy-save or sleep mode.

• When a MIDI application program is starting.

Make sure NOT to perform any of the following operations. Other-

wise, the computer may lock up or the PSR-2100/1100 functions

may be disabled.

•Turning the power on/off, or connecting/disconnecting the cable

too often.

• Shifting to energy-save or sleep mode while MIDI data is being

transferred, or returning from sleep mode.

• Disconnecting/connecting the cable while the PSR-2100/1100 is

on.

•Turning the power of the PSR-2100/1100 on/off, starting up your

computer, or installing the driver while a large amount of data is

being transferred.

CAUTION

• The PSR-2100/1100 will begin transmission a short time after

the USB connection is made.

• When using a USB cable to connect PSR-2100/1100 to your

computer, make the connection directly without passing through

a USB hub.

• Depending on the state of your computer, the operating state of

PSR-2100/1100 may become unstable. Do not use your com-

puter in a way that causes it to enter an unstable state.

When connecting the PSR-2100/1100 to a personal computer, ﬁrst

turn off the power to both the PSR-2100/1100 and the computer

before connecting any cables.

After making the proper connections and settings, turn on the

power of the computer ﬁrst, then that of the PSR-2100/1100.

NEC

PC-9821

NEC MultiSync

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

MIDI OUT MIDI IN

Using Your PSR-2100/1100 with Other Devices

PSR-2100/1100

158

• When using a MIDI interface with a Macintosh series

computer, connect the RS-422 terminal of the

computer (modem or printer terminal) to the MIDI

interface, then connect the MIDI OUT terminal on the

MIDI interface to the MIDI IN terminal of the PSR-

2100/1100, as shown in the diagram below.

• When using a Macintosh series computer, set the

MIDI interface clock setting in the application

software to match the setting of the MIDI interface

you are using. For details, refer to the owner’s

manual for the particular software you are using.

What’s MIDI?

Let’s consider an acoustic piano and a classical guitar as

representative acoustic instruments. With the piano, you

strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and

plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string

and the note sounds.

But how does a digital instrument go about playing a

note?

As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic

instrument, the sampled note (previously recorded note)

stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is

played based on information received from the keyboard,

and output through the speakers.

Now let’s examine what happens when we play back a

recording. When you playback a music CD (for example,

a solo piano recording), you’re hearing the actual sound

(vibrations in air) of the acoustic instrument. This is called

audio data, to distinguish it from MIDI data.

In the above example, the actual acoustic sounds of the

pianist’s performance are captured in the recording as

audio data, and this is recorded to CD. When you play

back that CD on your audio system, you can hear the

actual piano performance. The piano itself is not

necessary, since the recording contains the actual sounds

of the piano, and your speakers reproduce them.

MIDI IN

RS422

MIDI OUT

MINI DIN

8-pin

Internal ampInternal amp

Tone generator

(Electric circuit)

Playing

the keyboard

Pluck a string and the body

resonates the sound.

Based on playing information

from the keyboard, a

sampled note stored in the

tone generator is played

through the speakers.

Acoustic guitar note

production

Digital instrument note

production

Recording and playing back the performance of an acoustic

instrument (audio data)

Recording Playback

Tone generator

Sequencer

Recording and playing back the performance of a digital

instrument (MIDI data)

Controller (keyboard, etc.)

Recording Playback

In the case of digital instruments, the audio signals are sent

through output jacks (such as AUX OUT) on the instrument.

Using Your PSR-2100/1100 with Other Devices

159

PSR-2100/1100

The “controller” and “tone generator” in the illustration

above are equivalent to the piano in our acoustic

example. Here, the player’s performance on the keyboard

is captured as MIDI song data (see illustration below). In

order to record the audio performance on an acoustic

piano, special recording equipment is needed. However,

since the PSR-2100/1100 features a built-in sequencer

that lets you record performance data, this recording

equipment is unnecessary. Instead, your digital instrument

— the PSR-2100/1100 — allows you to both record and

play back the data.

However, we also need a sound source to produce the

audio, which eventually comes from your speakers. The

tone generator of the PSR-2100/1100 ﬁlls this function.

The recorded performance is reproduced by the

sequencer, playing back the song data, using a tone

generator capable of accurately producing various

instrument sounds — including that of a piano. Looked at

in another way, the relation of the sequencer and the tone

generator is similar to that of the pianist and the piano —

one plays the other. Since digital instruments handle

playback data and the actual sounds independently, we

can hear our piano performance played by another

instrument, such as guitar or violin.

Finally, we’ll take a look at the actual data that gets

recorded and that serves as the basis for playing the

sounds. For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note

using the grand piano sound on the PSR-2100/1100

keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a

resonated note, the electronic instrument puts out

information from the keyboard such as “with what voice,”

“with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it

pressed” and “when was it released.” Then each piece of

information is changed into a number value and sent to

the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the

tone generator plays the stored sampled note.

■ Example Keyboard Data

Panel operations on the PSR-2100/1100, such as playing

the keyboard and selecting voices, are processed and

stored as MIDI data. The auto accompaniment styles and

songs also consist of MIDI data.

MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument

Digital Interface, which allows electronic musical

instruments to communicate with each other, by sending

and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program

Change and various other types of MIDI data, or

messages.

The PSR-2100/1100 can control a MIDI device by

transmitting note related data and various types of

controller data.The PSR-2100/1100 can be controlled by

incoming MIDI messages which automatically determine

the tone generator mode, select MIDI channels, voices

and effects, change parameter values and of course play

the voices speciﬁed for the various parts.

MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel

messages and System messages.

■ Channel Messages

The PSR-2100/1100 is an electronic instrument that can

handle 16 channels (or 32 channels, when using the USB

terminal). This is usually expressed as “it can play 16

instruments at the same time.” Channel messages transmit

information such as Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for

each of the 16 channels.

Tone generator

Sequencer

Keyboard performance

(MIDI data)

Even though it is a single musical instrument, the PSR-2100/1100

can be thought of as containing several electronic components: a

controller, a tone generator, and a sequencer.

Voice number (with what voice) 01 (grand piano)

Note number (with which key) 60 (C3)

Note on (when was it pressed)

and

note off (when was it released)

Timing expressed numerically

(quarter note)

Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong)

Message Name PSR-2100/1100 Operation/Panel Setting

Note ON/OFF Messages which are generated when the

keyboard is played. Each message includes

a speciﬁc note number which corresponds

to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity

value based on how hard the key is played.

Program Change Voice selecting (control change bank select

MSB/LSB setting)

Control Change Volume, panpot (Mixing Console), etc.

MIDI data has the following advantages over audio data:

• The amount of data is much less, letting you easily store MIDI

songs to ﬂoppy disk.

• The data can be effectively and easily edited, even to the point of

changing voices and transforming the data.

The performance data of all songs and styles is handled as MIDI

data.

Using Your PSR-2100/1100 with Other Devices

PSR-2100/1100

160

MIDI channels

MIDI performance data is assigned to one of sixteen

MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1 - 16, the

performance data for sixteen different instrument parts

can be simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable.

Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV

station transmits its broadcasts over a speciﬁc

channel.Your home TV set receives many different

programs simultaneously from several TV stations and

you select the appropriate channel to watch the desired

program.

MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The

transmitting instrument sends MIDI data on a speciﬁc

MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single

MIDI cable to the receiving instrument. If the receiving

instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive Channel)

matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument

will sound according to the data sent by the

transmitting instrument.

For example, several tracks (channels) can be

transmitted simultaneously, including the style data (as

shown below).

Example: Recording the auto accompaniment of the PSR-2100/

1100 to an external sequencer

As you can see, it is essential to determine which data

is to be sent over which MIDI channel when

transmitting MIDI data (page 149). The PSR-2100/1100

also allows you to determine how the received data is

played back. (page 150).

■ System Messages

This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI

system. System messages include messages like Exclusive

Messages that transmit data unique to each instrument

manufacturer and Realtime Messages that control the

MIDI device.

The messages transmitted/received by the PSR-2100/1100

are shown in the MIDI Data Format and MIDI

Implementation Chart in the separate Data List.

What You Can Do With MIDI

The following MIDI settings can be made on the PSR-

2100/1100:

• MIDI templates (preset MIDI setups for various

applications) (page 148)

•Transmit (page 149)

• Receive (page 150)

• Local Control (page 148)

• Clock (page 149)

■ Record performance data (1-16 channels) using the

PSR-2100/1100 Auto Accompaniment features on a

external sequencer (such as a personal computer).

After recording, edit the data with the sequencer, then

play it again on the PSR-2100/1100 (playback).

When you want to use the PSR-2100/1100 as an XG-

compatible multi-timbral tone generator, set the receive

part for MIDI channels 1 to 16 to “SONG” in MIDI

Receive (page 150).

■ Play and control the PSR-2100/1100 from a separate

keyboard

Weather Report

News

MIDI transmit channel 2 MIDI receive channel 2

MIDI

cable

The PSR-2100/1100’s keyboard and internal tone generator are

also connected by MIDI (page 148).

MIDI cable or

serial cable

PSR-2100/1100 track (channnel)

MAIN

LAYER

LEFT

STYLE instrument

External sequencer

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 4

Track 5

Track 6

Track 7

Track 8

Track 9

Track 10

Track 11

Channel 1

Channel 2

Channel 3

Channel 4

Channel 5

Channel 6

Channel 7

Channel 8

Channel 9

Channel 10

Channel 11

Message Name PSR-2100/1100 Operation/Panel

Setting

System Exclusive

Message

Effect type settings (Mixing Console),

etc.

Realtime Messages Clock setting, Start/stop operation

Personal cumputer,

QY series etc.

MIDI receive

MIDI transmit

NEC

PC-9821

NEC MultiSync

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

MIDI OUT MIDI IN

PSR-2100/1100

MIDI IN MIDI OUT

MIDI receive

PSR-2100/1100

Using Your PSR-2100/1100 with Other Devices

161

PSR-2100/1100

MIDI Data Compatibility

This section covers basic information on data

compatibility: whether or not other MIDI devices can

playback the data recorded by PSR-2100/1100, and

whether or not the PSR-2100/1100 can playback

commercially available song data or song data created for

other instruments or on a computer. Depending on the

MIDI device or data characteristics, you may be able to

play back the data without any problem, or you may have

to perform some special operations before the data can be

played back. If you run into problems playing back data,

please refer to the information below.

Disk format

Floppy disks are the main storage medium for data used

with various devices, including computers. Different

devices have different systems of storing data, therefore it

is necessary to ﬁrst conﬁgure the ﬂoppy disk to the system

of the device being used.This operation is called

“formatting.”

•There are two types of ﬂoppy disks: MF2DD (double

sided, double density) and MF2HD (double sided,

high density), and each type has different formatting

systems.

• PSR-2100/1100 can record and playback with both

types of ﬂoppy disks.

• When formatted by the PSR-2100/1100, a 2DD disk

stores up to 720 KB (kilobytes) and a 2HD disk stores

up to1.44 MB (megabytes). (The ﬁgures “720 KB” and

“1.44MB” indicate the data memory capacity. They are

also used to indicate the format type of disk.)

• Playback is only possible when the MIDI device to be

used is compatible with the format of the disk.

Sequence Format

The system which records song data is called “sequence

format.”

Playback is only possible when the sequence format of

the disk matches that of the MIDI device. The PSR-2100/

1100 is compatible with the following formats.

■ SMF (Standard MIDI File)

This is the most common sequence format.

Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two

types: Format 0 or Format 1. Many MIDI devices are

compatible with Format 0, and most commercially

available software is recorded as Format 0.

•The PSR-2100/1100 is compatible with both Format 0

and Format 1.

• Song data recorded on the PSR-2100/1100 is

automatically recorded as SMF Format 0.

• Song data loaded to the PSR-2100/1100 is

automatically saved as SMF Format 0 regardless of the

original format.

■ ESEQ

This sequence format is compatible with many of

Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the PSR-2100/1100

series instruments.This is a common format used with

various Yamaha software.

■ XF

The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI

File) format with greater functionality and open-ended

expandability for the future.

•The PSR-2100/1100 is capable of displaying lyrics

when an XF ﬁle containing lyric data is played.

■ Style File

The Style File Format – SFF – is Yamaha’s original style ﬁle

format which uses a unique conversion system to provide

high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide

range of chord types.

Using Your PSR-2100/1100 with Other Devices

PSR-2100/1100

162

Voice Allocation Format

With MIDI, voices are assigned to speciﬁc numbers,

called “program numbers.” The numbering standard

(order of voice allocation) is referred to as the “voice

allocation format.”

Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice

allocation format of the song data matches that of the

compatible MIDI device used for playback.

The PSR-2100/1100 is compatible with the following

formats.

■ GM System Level 1

This is one of the most common voice allocation formats.

• Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System

Level1, as is most commercially available software.

■ XG

XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1

format, and was developed by Yamaha speciﬁcally to

provide more voices and variations, as well as greater

expressive control over voices and effects, and to ensure

compatibility of data well into the future.

• Song data recorded on the PSR-2100/1100 using

voices in the [XG] category is XG-compatible.

■ DOC

This voice allocation format is compatible with many of

Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the PSR series

instruments. This is also a common format used with

various Yamaha software.

Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions above,

the data may still not be completely compatible, depending on the

speciﬁcations of the devices and particular data recording

methods.

163

PSR-2100/1100

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

• The PSR-2100/1100 does not turn on; there

is no power.

Make sure that the PSR-2100/1100 has been plugged in properly (page 16).

•A click or pop is heard when the power is

turned on or off.

This is normal when electrical current is applied to the instrument.

• Noise is heard from the PSR-2100/1100’s

speakers.

Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the PSR-2100/1100 may produce

interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone, or use it further away from

the PSR-2100/1100.

• The display is too bright or too dark to read. The brightness of the display may be affected by the surrounding temperature;

try adjusting the contrast (page 17).

• The keyboard volume is low compared to that

of the Auto Accompaniment or song playback.

The overall keyboard volume or the independent volume level of the keyboard

part may be set too low. Raise the MAIN/LAYER/LEFT volume voices or lower

the STYLE/SONG volume in the BALANCE display (page 64).

• The volume of the Auto Accompaniment or

song playback is low compared to that of the

keyboard.

The volume level of one or more accompaniment parts or song channels is set

too low. Raise the part or channel level(s) in the appropriate MIXER display

(page 125).

• The overall volume is low, or no sound is

heard.

• The Master Volume is set too low; set it to an appropriate level with the

[MASTER VOLUME] dial.

• The volume of the individual parts may be set too low. Raise the volume of

MAIN, LAYER, LEFT, STYLE, and SONG in the BALANCE display (page 64).

• Make sure the desired channel is set to ON (page 64, 81).

• Headphones are connected, disabling the speaker output. Unplug the

headphones.

• Make sure the Local Control function is set to ON (page 148).

• Not all simultaneously-played notes sound. You may be exceeding the maximum polyphony of the PSR-2100/1100. When

this happens, the earliest played notes will stop sounding, letting the latest

played notes sound. See page 165 for information on the maximum polyphony.

• Accompaniment style or Song playback does

not start.

• MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure this is set to “INTERNAL”

(page 149).

• Make sure to press the appropriate [START/STOP] button. To play an

accompaniment style, press the STYLE [START/STOP] button (page 64); to

playback a song, press the SONG [START/STOP] button (page 79).

• “New Song” (a blank song) has been selected. Make sure to select an

appropriate song in the SONG display (page 79).

• The song has been stopped at the end of the song data. Return to the

beginning of the song by pressing the [TOP] button (page 81).

• The Multi Pads do not play back, even when

one of the MULTI PAD buttons is pressed.

MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure this is set to “INTERNAL”

(page 149).

• Only the rhythm channel plays. Make sure the Auto Accompaniment function is turned on; press the [ACMP]

button.

• The accompaniment style does not start,

even when Synchro Start is in standby

condition and a key is pressed.

You may be trying to start accompaniment by playing a key in the right hand

range of the keyboard. Make sure to play a key in the left-hand (accompaniment)

range of the keyboard.

• The desired chord is not recognized or output

by the auto accompaniment.

•You may not be playing the correct keys to indicate the chord. Refer to “Chord

Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode” (page 66).

•You may be playing the keys according to a different ﬁngering mode, and not

the one currently selected. Check the accompaniment mode, and play the

keys according to the selected mode (page 65).

• An unexpected result or malfunction occurred

during an operation.

If, during execution of an operation, you simultaneously press three or more

buttons that are unrelated to the operation or normal procedure, unexpected or

unusual results may occur.

•Auto accompaniment chords are recognized

regardless of the split point or where chords

are played on the keyboard.

This is normal if the ﬁngering mode is set to “Full Keyboard” or “AI Full Keyboard.”

If either of these is selected, chords are recognized over the entire range of the

keyboard, irrespective of the split point setting. If desired, select a different

ﬁngering mode (page 65).

Troubleshooting

PSR-2100/1100

164

• Certain notes sound at the wrong pitch. The Scale parameter has probably been set to something other than “Equal,”

changing the tuning system of the keyboard. Make sure “Equal” is selected as

the Scale in the Scale Tune page (page 138).

• Some channels do not properly play back

when playing back song data.

Make sure that playback of the relevant channel(s) is turned on (page 81).

• If you experience distorted or out-of-tune

sound from the Vocal Harmony feature, your

vocal microphone may be picking up

extraneous sounds (other than your voice) —

the Auto Accompaniment sound from the

PSR-2100/1100, for example. In particular,

bass sounds can cause mistracking of the

Vocal Harmony feature (PSR-2100 only).

The solution to this problem is to ensure that as little extraneous sound as

possible is picked up by your vocal microphone:

• Sing as closely to the microphone as possible.

• Use a directional microphone.

•Turn down the MASTER VOLUME or volume for each part.

• Separate the microphone from the instrument's speakers as much as possible.

• Cut the Low band via the 3 Band EQ function in the MICROPHONE SETTING

display (page 133).

• Increase the microphone input level (“TH.”) in the Compressor function from

the MICROPHONE SETTING display (page 133).

• Appropriate harmony notes are not produced

by the Vocal Harmony feature (PSR-2100

only).

Make sure you are using the appropriate method to specify the harmony notes

for the current Vocal Harmony mode. See page 134.

• The Harmony function does not operate. Harmony cannot be used with the Full Keyboard or AI Full Keyboard ﬁngering

modes. Select an appropriate ﬁngering mode (page 65).

• The microphone input signal and Vocal

Harmony sound (PSR-2100 only) cannot be

recorded.

This is normal; recording the audio input of the microphone is not possible.

• MIDI data is not transmitted or received via

the MIDI terminals, even when MIDI cables

are connected properly.

Remove the USB cable from the PSR-2100/1100’s USB terminal.

• When a voice is changed, the previously

selected effect is changed.

Each voice has its own suitable preset values which are automatically recalled

when the corresponding Voice Set parameters are turned on (page 146).

• There is a slight difference in sound quality

between notes played on the keyboard.

• Some voices have a looping sound.

• Some noise or vibrato is noticeable at higher

pitches, depending upon the voice.

This is normal and is a result of the PSR-2100/1100’s sampling system.

• Some voices will jump an octave in pitch

when played in the upper or lower registers.

This is normal. Some voices have a pitch limit which, when reached, causes this

type of pitch shift.

•Even though a Registration Memory setting

containing a User voice is selected, the Open/

Save display shows a Preset voice.

This is normal; even with the Preset voice shown, the actual sounding voice is

the selected User voice.

When a User voice is registered to the User drive or ﬂoppy disk, the actual

registered is: 1) the source Preset voice, and 2) the parameter settings as set in

the Sound Creator. When you recall a Registration Memory setting containing a

User voice, the PSR-2100/1100 selects the Preset voice (on which the User

voice is based), then applies the relevant parameter settings to it – so that your

original User voice is sounded.

• Disk save operations take a long time. This is normal. Keep in mind that it takes approximately 1 minute to save 1

megabyte of data to a ﬂoppy disk.

• The voice produces excessive noise.

Certain voices may produce noise, depending on the Harmonic Content and/or

Brightness settings in the FILTER page of the Mixing Console display (page 126).

• The sound is distorted or noisy. • The volume may be turned up too high. Make sure all relevant volume settings

are appropriate.

• This may be caused by the effects. Try canceling all unnecessary effects,

especially distortion-type effects (page 127).

• Some ﬁlter resonance settings in the Custom Voice Creator display (page 92)

can result in distorted sound. Adjust these settings if necessary.

• Is the gain of the Low band set too high in the Master Equalizer display

(Mixing Console — page 130)? (PSR-2100 only)

•A strange “ﬂanging” or “doubling” sound

occurs. Also, the sound is slightly different

each time the keys are played.

Both the Main and Layer parts are set to “ON,” and both parts are set to play the

same voice. Set the Layer part to “OFF” (page 59) or change the voice for each

part (page 57).

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

165

PSR-2100/1100

Speciﬁcations

: available

Model Name PSR-2100 PSR-1100

Sound Source AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling

Display 320 ✕ 240 dots backlit graphic LCD

Keyboard 61 keys (C1 - C6 with Initial Touch)

Voice Polyphony (max) 64 32

Voice Selection 338 voices + 480 XG voices

+ 16 Drum Kits

287 voices + 480 XG voices

+ 16 Drum Kits

Regular Voice 328 287

Sweet Voice 14 8

Cool Voice 6 2

Live Voice 12 1

Others 296 276

Organ Flutes 10 (8 Footages) —

Sound creator

Effects

Effect Blocks

Reverb 1

Chorus 1

DSP 4 1

Microphone 1 —

Effect Types

REVERB 29 Preset+3 User 23 Preset+3 User

CHORUS 25 Preset+3 User 15 Preset+3 User

DSP1/DSP 164 Preset+3 User 92 Preset+3 User

DSP2, 3, 4 88 Preset +10 User —

Master EQ 5 Preset + 2 User —

Part EQ 27 Parts —

Vocal Harmony 49 Preset +10 User —

Accompaniment

Style

Number of Accompaniment Styles 197 181

Number of Session Styles 6

Fingering Single Finger, Fingered, Fingered On Bass, Multi Finger, AI Fingered,

Full Keyboard, AI Full Keyboard

Style Creator

OTS (One Touch Setting) 4/Accompaniment Style

OTS link

Music Finder 2500 (max.) 1200 (max.)

Edit

Song Format SMF (Format 0,1), ESEQ

Preset Songs

Lyrics

Score

Recording Quick Recording, Multi Recording, Step Recording, Song Editing

Record Channels 16

Multi Pad Preset 4 Pads ✕ 54 Banks

Memory

Device

Floppy Disk (2HD, 2DD)

Flash Memory (internal) 1524KB 698KB

Flash Availability Song (SMF), Style (SFF), Registration, Voice, etc.

Tempo Tempo Range 5 - 500

Tap Tempo

Metronome

Sound Bell on/off

Specifications

PSR-2100/1100

166

* Speciﬁcations and descriptions in this owner's manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to

change or modify products or speciﬁcations at any time without prior notice. Since speciﬁcations, equipment or options may not

be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.

Registration

Memory

Buttons 8

Regist Sequence

Freeze

Others Demo Function, Voice, Style

Language 6 languages (English, Japanese, German, French, Spanish, Italian)

Help

Direct Access

Master Volume

Fade In/Out

Transpose Keyboard/Song/Master

Tuning

Scale Equal Temperament, Pure Major/Pure Minor, Pythagorean, Mean-Tone,

Werckmeister/Kirnberger, Arabic 1/2

Touch Response 5 level

Jacks/Connectors DC IN, PHONES, MIDI (OUT, IN), USB,

FOOT PEDAL1 (SWITCH), FOOT PEDAL2,

AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) (L/R), OUTPUT (L/L+R)

MIC (INPUT VOLUME, MIC./ LINE)

—

Pedal Functions VOLUME, SUSTAIN, SOSTENUTO, SOFT, GLIDE, PORTAMENTO,

PITCHBEND, MODULATION, DSP VARIATION, SONG START/STOP,

STYLE START/STOP, etc.

Ampliﬁers/

Speakers

Ampliﬁers 12 W ✕ 2

Speakers [12 cm + 4 cm (dome)] ✕ 2 (12 cm + 5 cm) ✕ 2

Power Consumption 31 W

Power supply Yamaha AC adaptor PA-300 (included)

*May not be included in your area.Please check with your Yamaha dealer.

Dimensions [W ✕ D ✕ H]

(without Music Rest)

973 ✕ 399 ✕ 161 mm

[38-5/16" ✕ 15-11/16" ✕ 6-5/16"]

Weight 10.5 Kg (23 lbs., 2 oz) 10.0 Kg (22 lbs., 1 oz)

Optional

accessories

Headphones HPE-150

Foot Switch FC4 / FC5

Foot Controller FC7

Keyboard Stand L-6, L-7s

Model Name PSR-2100 PSR-1100

167

PSR-2100/1100

Index

Numerics

1 - 16 ........................................................................... 99, 108

[1▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons ........................................... 19, 38–48

3BAND EQ (3-BAND EQUALIZER) .................................... 133

A (ACMP) ........................................................................... 141

[A] - [J] buttons............................................................... 19, 43

Accent Type ....................................................................... 117

Accessories ............................................................................ 6

Accompaniment style parts................................................... 97

[ACMP] button ............................................................... 18, 63

ACMP TOUCH .................................................................. 141

ADD TO FAVORITE............................................................. 72

Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices .............. 124

Adjusting the display contrast...............................................17

Adjusting the Effects ........................................................... 127

Adjusting the Tempo ............................................................ 53

Adjusting the Vocal Harmony Settings

and Microphone Effects .................................................. 133

Adjusting the Volume Balance ............................................. 64

Adjusting the Volume Balance / Muting Specific Channels...81

Adjusting values ................................................................... 49

AI ......................................................................................... 65

AI FINGERED ....................................................................... 65

AI FULL KEYBOARD ............................................................ 65

A+L (ACMP + LEFT)............................................................ 141

Append ................................................................................ 74

Applying Voice Effects.......................................................... 60

Appropriate Panel Setting for the Selected Style.................... 70

Arabic ................................................................................ 139

Arranging the Style Pattern ................................................... 67

Assembling an Accompaniment Style................................. 115

ASSIGN (HARMONY) .......................................................... 93

Attack (Organ Flutes)............................................................ 94

ATTACK (Regular Voice) ...................................................... 92

AUTO .................................................................................. 20

AUTO CH SET ................................................................... 140

[AUTO FILL IN] button................................................... 18, 69

Auto Revoice...................................................................... 125

Automatically Changing One Touch Settings

with the Sections............................................................... 71

AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) [L] [R] jacks.......................... 19, 156

[BACK] button..........................................................19, 43, 49

BALANCE............................................................................. 64

[BALANCE] button ......................................................... 19, 64

Bar Clear ............................................................................ 118

Bar Copy ............................................................................ 118

Bar/Beat/Clock.................................................................... 100

Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data .......................... 38

Bass...................................................................................... 97

BEAT .............................................................................. 73, 74

Beat Converter.................................................................... 116

Boost/Cut ........................................................................... 117

[BREAK] button .............................................................. 18, 67

BRIGHTNESS ....................................................................... 92

Calling Up Ideal Setups for Your Music ................................ 72

Cent....................................................................................138

Change the Rhythmic Feel ..................................................116

Changing Pitch-related Settings...........................................126

Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings...........146

Changing the Icon.................................................................49

Changing the Tone of the Voice..........................................126

Changing the Touch Sensitivity Modulation and Transpose.. 144

Channel..................................................64, 81, 105, 118, 140

Channel Messages ..............................................................160

Channel Muting....................................................................64

CHANNEL ON/OFF........................................................64, 81

[CHANNEL ON / OFF] button ..................................19, 64, 81

Channel Transpose .............................................................107

CHD...................................................................................109

Chord ...................................................................................97

Chord Detect ......................................................................150

Chord Events.......................................................................109

Chord Fingering............................................................65, 142

CHORD NOTE ONLY (HARMONY).....................................93

Chord Tutor ........................................................................142

Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode....................66

Chorus................................................................................129

CHORUS DEPTH (MIC.).....................................................135

Chorus Depth (Organ Flutes).................................................94

CHORUS DEPTH (Sound Creator) ........................................93

Clock..................................................................................149

COMMON ...........................................................................91

COMPARE............................................................................90

Compatible Song Types ........................................................78

COMPRESSOR....................................................................134

CONFIG 1 ..........................................................................151

CONFIG 2 ..........................................................................152

Connecting external MIDI devices ......................................156

Connecting the Microphone or Guitar (PSR-2100 only) ......155

Connecting to a Computer..................................................157

Controller ...........................................................................142

Converting into Kanji (Japanese language) ............................48

Cool! ....................................................................................58

COPY ...................................................................................46

Copying and Formatting Disks ............................................153

Copying Files/Folders............................................................46

Copying from Disk to Disk..................................................153

Creating Accompaniment Styles..........................................111

Current Memory ...................................................................40

Customizing the Event List — Filter.....................................110

CUT......................................................................................45

Data Compatibility..............................................................161

[DATA ENTRY] dial ........................................................19, 49

Data Types in the MIDI TRANSMIT/RECEIVE Display .........149

DC IN terminal .............................................................19, 156

DECAY .................................................................................92

DELETE (Basic Operations)....................................................46

Delete (Song Creator)..........................................................106

DELETE RECORD..................................................................74

Deleting Files/Folders............................................................46

[DEMO] button.........................................................14, 18, 55

DEPTH..................................................................................93

DESTINATION....................................................................106

Detailed Settings for Notation ...............................................84

[DIGITAL RECORDING] button........................14, 18, 95, 111

Index

PSR-2100/1100

168

[DIRECT ACCESS] button ............................................... 19, 50

Direct Access Chart.............................................................. 51

Disk ................................................................................... 153

Disk drive....................................................................... 41, 42

Disk format......................................................................... 161

Disk Orchestra Collection .................................................... 17

DISPLAY VOICE NUMBER................................................. 152

Displaying Music Notation...................................................83

Displaying the Lyrics ............................................................ 86

Displaying Upper Level pages .............................................. 47

DOC .................................................................................. 162

Drum ................................................................................... 58

[DSP] button .......................................................... 19, 60, 129

DSP Depth (Organ Flutes) .................................................... 94

DSP DEPTH (Sound Creator) ................................................ 93

DSP on/off (Organ Flutes) ..................................................... 94

DSP Type (Organ Flutes) ...................................................... 94

Dynamics........................................................................... 117

ECHO .......................................................................... 61, 146

Edit..................................................................................... 114

Edit the Created Accompaniment Style............................... 116

Editing a Recorded Song..................................................... 105

Editing Channel-related Parameters .................................... 105

Editing Chord Events .......................................................... 109

Editing Note Events ............................................................ 108

Editing Records .................................................................... 74

Editing System Events ......................................................... 109

Editing the Channel Data.................................................... 118

Editing Voices ...................................................................... 90

[EFFECT] button ........................................................... 19, 131

Effect Block ........................................................................ 128

Effect Connections.............................................................. 129

Effect Structure ................................................................... 129

EFFECT/EQ ........................................................................... 93

EFFECT/EQ (Organ Flutes) .................................................... 94

Effects................................................................................. 127

EG........................................................................................92

EG ATTACK (Sound Creator) ................................................ 92

EG DECAY (Sound Creator) .................................................. 92

EG RELES. (Sound Creator) ................................................... 92

Embellish and enhance your melodies

— with the automatic Harmony and Echo effects.............. 29

END Mark .......................................................................... 103

ENDING .............................................................................. 69

[ENDING / rit.] button.............................................. 18, 30, 68

[ENTER] button .............................................................. 19, 49

Entering Characters............................................................... 48

Entering Chords and Sections (Chord Step) ......................... 102

Entering miscellaneous characters (marks)............................ 48

Entering numbers ................................................................. 48

Entering special character marks

(umlaut, accent, Japanese “ ” and “ ”) .........................48

Entering Your Name and Language Preference ................... 154

EQ.............................................................................. 124, 130

EQ High (Organ Flutes) ........................................................ 94

EQ Low (Organ Flutes) ......................................................... 94

Equal Temperament............................................................ 139

ESEQ .................................................................................. 162

Example Keyboard Data ..................................................... 160

[EXIT] button .................................................................. 19, 43

Exit from Small Pop-up Windows ......................................... 43

Expand/Compress...............................................................117

[EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button.................................... 18, 82

Fade In Time, Fade Out Time, Fade Out Hold Time............151

[FADE IN / OUT] button .................................................18, 68

FAVORITE ............................................................................74

[FF] button......................................................................18, 81

File .......................................................................................40

File/Folder-related Operations...............................................44

Files/folders in a floppy disk..................................................45

Fill ........................................................................................69

Filter .....................................................................92, 110, 126

FILTER BRIGHT (Sound Creator) ...........................................92

FILTER HARMO. (Sound Creator)..........................................92

Fine ....................................................................................116

FINGERED............................................................................65

FINGERED ON BASS............................................................65

First Key On........................................................................104

FLOPPY DISK drive...................................................40, 41, 42

FLOPPY DISK SONG AUTO OPEN ....................................153

Floppy disk drive ..............................................................7, 19

FOOT PEDAL 1/2 jack........................................................156

FOOTAGE (Organ Flutes) .....................................................94

Footage (Organ Flutes)..........................................................94

[FOOT PEDAL 1 (SWITCH)] jack..................................19, 156

[FOOT PEDAL 2] jack...................................................19, 156

Formatting a Disk................................................................153

[FREEZE] button..............................................................19, 89

Freeze...........................................................................89, 145

FULL KEYBOARD.................................................................65

[FUNCTION] button.....................................................18, 136

Gate Time...........................................................................100

GENRE............................................................................73, 75

GENRE NAME ......................................................................75

GM System Level 1.......................................................17, 162

Groove ...............................................................................116

Groove parameters .............................................................116

GROUP SELECT....................................................................87

Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disk.........7

Harmonic Content ................................................................92

HARMONY ............................................................61, 93, 146

Harmony Assignments ........................................................147

Harmony Types ..................................................................147

[HARMONY / ECHO] button..........................................19, 61

Headphones .......................................................................155

Help messages can be displayed in any one of the

following languages...........................................................52

[HELP] button .................................................................18, 52

High Key.............................................................................120

Hz ......................................................................................138

ICON....................................................................................49

ICON SELECT .......................................................................49

[INPUT VOLUME] knob ...............................................19, 155

Inputting and Editing Lyrics.................................................110

Instant Selection of Displays .................................................50

INTRO..................................................................................69

[INTRO] button.........................................................18, 31, 67

Kbd.Vel...............................................................................100

KEY SIGNATURE ..................................................................84

Index

169

PSR-2100/1100

Keyboard Percussion ............................................................ 58

Keyboard Touch.................................................................144

Keyboard/Panel .................................................................. 144

KEYWORD..................................................................... 73, 74

Kirnberger .......................................................................... 139

L (LEFT) .............................................................................. 141

Layer .................................................................................... 59

Layering Two Different Voices ............................................. 59

LCD ..................................................................................... 15

[LCD CONTRAST] knob................................................. 19, 17

Left.......................................................................................60

LEFT CH...............................................................................84

[LEFT HOLD] button ...................................................... 19, 61

Length (LENG) (Organ Flutes). .............................................. 94

Live!..................................................................................... 58

Local Control ..................................................................... 148

Loop recording...................................................................111

Lyrics ........................................................................... 86, 110

LYRICS LANGUAGE .......................................................... 140

MAIN A/B/C/D ..................................................................... 67

MAIN [A] button ............................................................ 18, 67

MAIN [B] button ............................................................ 18, 67

MAIN [C] button ............................................................ 18, 67

MAIN [D] button............................................................18, 67

Maintaining Panel Settings ................................................. 145

Making Global and Other Important Settings...................... 136

Making Overall System Settings (Local Control, Clock, etc.)...148

Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome,

Parameter Lock, and Tap ................................................ 151

Making Settings for the Display

and Voice Number Indication.........................................152

Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard ..................... 142

Making Settings for the Vocal Harmony and Microphone... 133

Making Style File Format Settings ....................................... 119

Master Tune ....................................................................... 138

[MASTER VOLUME] dial................................................ 18, 17

Mean-Tone......................................................................... 139

[MEMORY] button.......................................................... 19, 87

Message Switch.................................................................. 149

Messages................................................................................ 8

Metronome ........................................................................ 151

[METRONOME] button .................................................. 18, 53

MIC....................................................................................131

MIC. buttons (PSR-2100 only) ...................................... 19, 131

[MIC. LINE IN] jack...................................................... 19, 155

MICROPHONE SETTING ................................................... 133

[MIC. SETTING] button ................................................ 19, 131

MIDI .................................................................................. 148

MIDI [OUT] [IN] terminals........................................... 19, 156

MIDI channels.................................................................... 160

MIDI IN.............................................................................. 156

MIDI OUT.......................................................................... 156

MIDI Receive Parts............................................................. 150

MIDI SET UP ...................................................................... 154

MIDI terminals ................................................................... 156

Mix .................................................................................... 106

[MIXING CONSOLE] button......................................... 18, 124

Mode (Organ Flutes)............................................................. 94

MODULATION...................................................... 18, 61, 144

[MONO] button ............................................................. 19, 61

MONO POLY (Sound Creator) ............................................. 91

Moving Files/Folders ............................................................ 45

MULTI FINGER.....................................................................65

MULTI PAD [1] - [4] buttons...........................................18, 76

Multi Pads.............................................................................14

Multi Recording....................................................................97

[MUSIC FINDER] button.....................................15, 19, 33, 72

Music Finder Record Edit......................................................74

Music Finder Search .............................................................73

Music Rest ............................................................................17

Muting Specific Parts ............................................................82

NAME.............................................................................44, 47

Naming Files and Folders......................................................44

NEW (Folder)........................................................................47

NEW RECORD .....................................................................75

[NEXT] button...........................................................19, 43, 49

NOISE GATE.......................................................................133

Normal ...............................................................................104

Note Events.........................................................................108

Note Limit...........................................................................120

NOTE NAME ........................................................................85

Nrm....................................................................................100

NTR (Note Transposition Rule)............................................119

NTT (Note Transposition Table) ..........................................120

NUMBER OF RECORDS.......................................................72

OCTAVE.............................................................................126

OCTAVE LEFT (Sound Creator) .............................................91

OCTAVE M/LYR (Sound Creator) ..........................................91

One Touch Setting................................................................32

ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] - [4] buttons...................19, 70, 71

Open/Save displays...............................................................39

Organ Flutes .............................................................15, 58, 94

Organ Type (Organ Flutes)....................................................94

Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder...........................47

Original Beat ......................................................................116

Other Parameters in the Basic Display ................................114

Other Playback-related Operations.......................................81

Other Settings .....................................................................151

OTS LINK TIMING..............................................................141

[OTS LINK] button..........................................................18, 71

OUTPUT [L / L+R] [R] jacks..........................................19, 156

OVERALL SETTING ............................................................133

Overdub recording .............................................................111

Owner ................................................................................154

Pad .......................................................................................97

PAN (MIC.) .........................................................................135

PANEL SUSTAIN (Sound Creator) .........................................93

Parameter ...........................................................................119

Parameter Lock...................................................................152

PASTE.............................................................................45, 46

Pedal ..................................................................................142

PEDAL 1/2 POLARITY.........................................................142

PEDAL PUNCH IN/OUT.....................................................104

Pedal-controllable Functions...............................................143

[PHONES] jack.............................................................18, 155

Phrase...................................................................................97

Phrase Mark..................................................................81, 140

PHRASE MARK REPEAT......................................................140

PITCH BEND ..................................................................18, 61

PITCH BEND RANGE .........................................................126

Pitch settings for each scale ................................................139

Playback of Songs.................................................................21

Index

PSR-2100/1100

170

Playing a style ................................................................ 28, 62

Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only ............................... 64

Playing Along with the PSR-2100/1100 ................................ 36

Playing Back Songs on Disk ................................................. 81

Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands ........ 27

Playing Fill-in patterns automatically

when changing accompaniment sections..........................69

Playing Several Sounds Simultaneously ................................ 59

Playing Styles ....................................................................... 28

Playing the Demos ......................................................... 20, 55

Playing the Internal Songs .................................................... 79

Playing the sounds of the PSR-2100/1100 through

an external audio system, and recording the sounds

to an external recorder.................................................... 156

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously ..................................... 26

Playing Voices...................................................................... 25

Playing with the Songs ......................................................... 36

PORTAMENT TIME (Sound Creator)..................................... 91

PORTAMENTO TIME (Mixing Console).............................. 126

Power Supply ....................................................................... 16

Powering Up ........................................................................ 17

Power-on Procedure............................................................. 16

PRESET drive .................................................................. 40, 41

Preset MIDI Templates........................................................ 148

Punch In/Out...................................................................... 104

Pure Major ......................................................................... 139

Pure Minor ......................................................................... 139

Pythagorean ....................................................................... 139

QUANTIZE .......................................................................... 84

Quantize .................................................................... 105, 118

Quantize Size..................................................................... 105

Quick Recording .................................................................. 96

QUICK START.................................................................... 140

Quick Start ......................................................................... 140

Realtime Recording ............................................................ 113

Realtime Recording Characteristics..................................... 111

[REC] button................................................................... 18, 95

REC END............................................................................ 104

Rec Mode........................................................................... 104

REC START......................................................................... 104

Recalling a Registration Memory Setup................................. 89

Recalling the Registered Settings........................................... 89

Receive .............................................................................. 150

Receive Transpose.............................................................. 149

Receiving MIDI Data.......................................................... 150

Record ................................................................................. 72

RECORD EDIT...................................................................... 74

Recording............................................................................. 37

Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompaniment....102

Recording Individual Notes .................................................. 99

Recording Melodies ........................................................... 101

Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs................ 95

Registering Panel Setups....................................................... 87

Registering the Panel Controls in One Touch Setting ............ 71

REGISTRATION EDIT display............................................... 88

Registration Memory ............................................................ 87

REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] – [8] buttons................... 19, 87

REGISTRATION MEMORY CONTENTS ............................... 87

Registration Sequence ........................................................ 145

Regular Voice Parameters..................................................... 91

RELEASE............................................................................... 92

Remove Event .................................................................... 118

Repeat Playback of a Specific Range.....................................82

[REPEAT] button .............................................................18, 82

Replace.................................................................................74

Resonance ............................................................................92

Response (RESP) (Organ Flutes).............................................94

Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings

of the PSR-2100/1100......................................................154

Reverb ................................................................................129

REVERB DEPTH (MIC.) .......................................................135

Reverb Depth (Organ Flutes).................................................94

REVERB DEPTH (Sound Creator)...........................................93

[REW] button..................................................................18, 81

Rhythm.................................................................................97

RIGHT CH............................................................................84

Root....................................................................................150

Rotary SP Speed (Organ Flutes).............................................94

RTR (Retrigger Rule)............................................................120

S.STOP WINDOW..............................................................141

SAVE.....................................................................................47

Save................................................................................39, 47

Saving Files...........................................................................47

Saving Your Registration Memory Setups ..............................88

Scale...................................................................................139

Scale Tune..........................................................................138

Score (PSR-2100 only) ..........................................................83

Searching the Ideal Setups ....................................................73

Searching the Music Finder Records .....................................34

Section button indications

— [BREAK], [INTRO], [MAIN], [ENDING] buttons............67

SECTION SET......................................................................141

Sections ................................................................................30

Select the Recording Options: Starting, Stopping,

Punching In/Out..............................................................104

Selecting a Scale.................................................................138

Selecting a Voice ..................................................................57

Selecting Files and Folders....................................................43

Selecting Intro and Ending Types ..........................................69

Selecting items......................................................................49

Selecting the Freeze Settings .................................................89

SEQUENCE END ................................................................145

Sequence Format ................................................................162

Sequencer...........................................................................159

Set Up.................................................................................107

Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters................141

Setting Chord Channels.......................................................150

Setting Harmony and Echo..................................................146

Setting Root Note Channels ................................................150

Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections

of the Keyboard.................................................................60

Setting Song-related Parameters ..........................................140

Setting the Fingering Method ..............................................142

Setting the Level Balance and Voice ...................................125

Setting the Microphone Volume and Related Effects ...........135

Setting the MIDI Parameters................................................148

Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set....145

Setting the volume ................................................................17

SFX .......................................................................................58

Simultaneously Playing a Song and an Accompaniment Style ... 80

SINGLE FINGER....................................................................65

SMF (Standard MIDI File)....................................................162

Song ...............................................................................14, 78

SONG [START / STOP] button........................................18, 79

SONG AUTO REVOICE......................................................125

SONG CHAIN PLAY...........................................................140

Song Creator.........................................................................95

Index

171

PSR-2100/1100

Song Playback..........................................................21, 78, 79

Song Recording .................................................................... 95

Song Settings ...................................................................... 140

SORT BY .............................................................................. 72

SORT ORDER....................................................................... 72

SOUND (SOUND CREATOR) .............................................. 92

[SOUND CREATOR] button........................................... 18, 90

Source Root/Chord ............................................................. 119

SOURCE1 .......................................................................... 106

SOURCE2 .......................................................................... 106

Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration Memory

Presets ............................................................................ 145

SPEED .................................................................................. 93

SPEED (HARMONY)............................................................. 93

Split Point........................................................................... 141

[STANDBY/ON] switch ............................................ 14, 18, 17

START SEARCH.................................................................... 73

Step Record.......................................................................... 99

Step Record (Chord) ........................................................... 102

Step Record (Note) ............................................................. 101

Step Recording ................................................................... 114

STOP ACMP....................................................................... 141

[STOP] button (MULTI PAD) .......................................... 18, 76

Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys ............... 68

Strength..............................................................................117

Style ............................................................................... 14, 62

STYLE [START / STOP] button ........................................ 18, 63

STYLE buttons ................................................................ 18, 62

Style Creator....................................................................... 111

Style File ...................................................................... 17, 162

Style File Format................................................................. 112

Style Sections ....................................................................... 30

Style Setting........................................................................ 141

Sustain ........................................................................... 92, 93

[SUSUTAIN] button........................................................ 19, 60

Sweet! .................................................................................. 58

Swing ................................................................................. 116

[SYNC.START] button .................................................... 18, 63

[SYNC.STOP] button ...................................................... 18, 68

SYS/EX. (System Exclusive).................................................. 109

System................................................................................ 148

System and Insertion .......................................................... 129

System Events..................................................................... 109

System Messages ................................................................ 161

System Reset....................................................................... 154

SYSTEM SET UP ................................................................. 154

[TALK] button............................................................... 19, 131

TALK SETTING...................................................................135

Tap Count .......................................................................... 152

[TAP TEMPO] button...................................................... 18, 54

TEMPO [

E] [ ] buttons ............................................. 18, 53

TEMPO FROM ..................................................................... 73

Tempo Indications — MAIN Display....................................54

TEMPO TO .......................................................................... 73

[TOP] button .................................................................. 18, 81

TOTAL VOLUME ATTENUATOR (MIC.) ............................ 135

TOUCH LIMIT (HARMONY)................................................ 93

TOUCH SENSE (Sound Creator) ........................................... 91

[TOUCH] button ............................................................ 19, 60

[TRACK 1 (R)] button...................................................... 18, 82

[TRACK 2 (L)] button ...................................................... 18, 82

Transmit ............................................................................. 149

Transmit Clock ................................................................... 149

Transmitting MIDI Data...................................................... 149

TRANSPOSE [

E] [F] buttons................................... 18, 144

Transpose Assign ................................................................144

Tune ...................................................................................126

TUNING.............................................................................126

Tuning the Overall Pitch.....................................................138

TYPE (HARMONY) ...............................................................93

[UPPER OCTAVE] button................................................19, 61

USB ......................................................................................17

[USB] terminal........................................................15, 19, 157

USER drive................................................................40, 41, 42

USER EFFECT (Function) .....................................................154

User Effect (Mixing Console)...............................................128

Using a Microphone ...........................................................131

Using the Music Finder.........................................................33

Using Your PSR-2100/1100 with Other Devices .................155

Utility .................................................................................151

[VARIATION] button ......................................................19, 61

Variation (Organ Flutes)........................................................94

Velocity ......................................................................100, 117

Velocity Change .................................................................118

[VH TYPE SELECT] button.............................................19, 131

VIBRATO..............................................................................93

VIBRATO DELAY (Sound Creator).........................................92

Vibrato Depth (Organ Flutes) ................................................94

VIBRATO DEPTH (Sound Creator) ........................................92

Vibrato On/Off (Organ Flutes)...............................................94

VIBRATO SPEED (Sound Creator) .........................................92

Vibrato Speed (VIB. SPEED) (Organ Flutes)............................94

[VOCAL HARMONY] button........................................19, 131

Vocal Harmony ....................................................................15

VOCAL HARMONY CONTROL .........................................134

Vocal Harmony Type..........................................................131

Voice Allocation Format .....................................................162

VOICE buttons..........................................................15, 19, 57

Voice Characteristics ............................................................58

Voice Effects .........................................................................60

VOICE PART ON / OFF [LAYER] button..........................19, 59

VOICE PART ON / OFF [LEFT] button.............................19, 59

VOICE PART ON / OFF [MAIN] button...........................19, 59

Voice Set ............................................................................146

VOL/ATTACK (Organ Flutes).................................................94

VOLUME (HARMONY) ........................................................93

VOLUME (MIC.) .................................................................135

VOLUME (Sound Creator).....................................................91

Volume (VOL) (Organ Flutes)................................................94

Volume/Voice.....................................................................125

Werckmeister......................................................................139

What You Can Do With MIDI.............................................161

What’s MIDI?......................................................................158

XF.................................................................................17, 162

XG................................................................................17, 162

Index

PSR-2100/1100

172

MEMO

Limited Warranty

90 DAYS LABOR 1 YEAR PARTS

Yamaha Corporation of America, hereafter referred to as Yamaha, warrants to the original consumer of a product included in the cate-

gories listed below, that the product will be free of defects in materials and/or workmanship for the periods indicated. This warranty is

applicable to all models included in the following series of products:

PSR SERIES OF PORTATONE ELECTRONIC KEYBOARDS

If during the ﬁrst 90 days that immediately follows the purchase date, your new Yamaha product covered by this warranty is found to

have a defect in material and/or workmanship, Yamaha and/or its authorized representative will repair such defect without charge for

parts or labor.

If parts should be required after this 90 day period but within the one year period that immediately follows the purchase date, Yamaha

will, subject to the terms of this warranty, supply these parts without charge. However, charges for labor, and/or any miscellaneous

expenses incurred are the consumers responsibility. Yamaha reserves the right to utilize reconditioned parts in repairing these products

and/or to use reconditioned units as warranty replacements.

THIS WARRANTY IS THE ONLY EXPRESS WARRANTY WHICH YAMAHA MAKES IN CONNECTION WITH THESE

PRODUCTS. ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MER-

CHANT ABILITY IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY. YAMAHA EXCLUDES AND

SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN ANY EVENT FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.

Some states do not allow limitations that relate to implied warranties and/or the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages.

Therefore, these limitations and exclusions may not apply to you.

This warranty gives you speciﬁc legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary from state to state.

CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITIES

If warranty service should be required, it is necessary that the consumer assume certain responsibilities:

1. Contact the Customer Service Department of the retailer selling the product, or any retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the

product for assistance. You may also contact Yamaha directly at the address provided below.

2. Deliver the unit to be serviced under warranty to: the retailer selling the product, an authorized service center, or to Yamaha with an

explanation of the problem. Please be prepared to provide proof purchase date (sales receipt, credit card copy, etc.) when requesting

service and/or parts under warranty.

3. Shipping and/or insurance costs are the consumers responsibility.* Units shipped for service should be packed securely.

*Repaired units will be returned PREPAID if warranty service is required within the ﬁrst 90 days.

IMPORTANT: Do NOT ship anything to ANY location without prior authorization. A Return Authorization (RA) will be

issued that has a tracking number assigned that will expedite the servicing of your unit and provide a tracking system if

needed.

4. Your owners manual contains important safety and operating instructions. It is your responsibility to be aware of the contents of this

manual and to follow all safety precautions.

EXCLUSIONS

This warranty does not apply to units whose trade name, trademark, and/or ID numbers have been altered, defaced, exchanged

removed, or to failures and/or damages that may occur as a result of:

1. Neglect, abuse, abnormal strain, modiﬁcation or exposure to extremes in temperature or humidity.

2. Improper repair or maintenance by any person who is not a service representative of a retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the

product, an authorized service center, or an authorized service representative of Yamaha.

3. This warranty is applicable only to units sold by retailers authorized by Yamaha to sell these products in the U.S.A., the District of

Columbia, and Puerto Rico. This warranty is not applicable in other possessions or territories of the U.S.A. or in any other country.

Please record the model and serial number of the product you have purchased in the spaces provided below.

Model________________________ Serial #_____________________________ Sales Slip #_____________________________

Purchased from______________________________________________________ Date__________________________________

(Retailer)

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA

Electronic Service Division

6600 Orangethorpe Avenue

Buena Park, CA 90620

KEEP THIS DOCUMENT FOR YOUR RECORDS. DO NOT MAIL!

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

(standby)

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instruc-

tions contained in this manual, meets FCC require-

ments. Modiﬁcations not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to acces-

sories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product

MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Fail-

ure to follow instructions could void your FCC authoriza-

tion to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to com-

ply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations,

Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with

these requirements provides a reasonable level of

assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with

other electronic devices. This equipment generates/

uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used

according to the instructions found in the users manual,

may cause interference harmful to the operation of

other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regula-

tions does not guarantee that interference will not occur

in all installations. If this product is found to be the

source of interference, which can be determined by

turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate

the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line ﬁlter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon

lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfac-

tory results, please contact the local retailer authorized

to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate

the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corpo-

ration of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600

Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

OBSERVERA!

Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) sá länge som

den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har

stängts av.

ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt,

sálæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — ogsá

selvom der or slukket pá apparatets afbryder.

VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko

laitetta verkosta.

Introduction

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply

(adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power sup-

ply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on

the name plate, or speciﬁcally recommended by Yamaha.

WARNING:

Do not place this product in a position where

anyone could walk on, trip over ,or roll anything over

power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an

extension cord is not recommended! IF you must use an

extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25' cord (or

less ) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number,

the larger the current handling capacity. For longer exten-

sion cords, consult a local electrician.

This product should be used only with the components

supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by

Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety

markings and instructions that accompany the accessory

product.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:

The information contained in this manual is believed to be

correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves

the right to change or modify any of the speciﬁcations

without notice or obligation to update existing units.

This product, either alone or in combination with an ampli-

ﬁer and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of pro-

ducing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing

loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high

volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you

experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you

should consult an audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time

period before damage occurs.

Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or

accessory mounting ﬁxtures that are either supplied with

the product or as optional accessories. Some of these

items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed.

Please make sure that benches are stable and any

optional ﬁxtures (where applicable) are well secured

BEFORE using.

Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating

only. No other uses are recommended.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relat-

ing to how a function or effect works (when the unit is

operating as designed) are not covered by the manufac-

turer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibil-

ity. Please study this manual carefully and consult your

dealer before requesting service.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user

safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe

that our products and the production methods used to pro-

duce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the let-

ter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the

following:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable

battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The

average life span of this type of battery is approxi-

mately ﬁve years. When replacement becomes neces-

sary, contact a qualiﬁed service representative to

perform the replacement.

This product may also use “household” type batteries.

Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that

the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and

that the charger is intended for the battery being

charged.

When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new,

or with batteries of a different type. Batteries MUST be

installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation

may result in overheating and battery case rupture.

Warning:

Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery.

Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used

batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your

area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type

batteries in your area for battery disposal information.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged beyond repair,

or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at

an end, please observe all local, state, and federal reg-

ulations that relate to the disposal of products that con-

tain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is

unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The name plate is located on the bottom of the prod-

uct. The model number, serial number, power require-

ments, etc., are located on this plate. You should

record the model number, serial number, and the date

of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain

this manual as a permanent record of your purchase.

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

92-BP (bottom)

HEAD OFFICE

Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-3273

[PK] 27

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha

representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou

au distributeur le plus proche de vous ﬁgurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten

Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana

o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V.,

Departamento de ventas

Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del

Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F.

Tel: 686-00-33

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA.

Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil

Tel: 011-853-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha de Panamá S.A. Sucursal de Argentina

Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 1-4371-7021

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha de Panamá S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM

Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

IRELAND

Danfay Ltd.

61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin

Tel: 01-2859177

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Switzerland

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: 01-383 3990

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

THE NETHERLANDS

Yamaha Music Central Europe

Branch Nederland

Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: 0347-358 040

BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Belgium

Rue de Geneve (Genevastraat) 10, 1140 - Brussels,

Belgium

Tel: 02-726 6032

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France, S.A.

Division Professionnelle

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.

Combo Division

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A.

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain

Tel: 91-201-0700

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-228 2160

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1

Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Ofﬁce

Generatorvej 8B

DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Norsk ﬁlial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1

N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120

IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone

P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.

Tel: +971-4-881-5868

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong,

Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 02-3770-0661

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 3-703-0900

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.

11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building,

Singapore

Tel: 65-747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.

Taiwan 104, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2511-8688

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor,

Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng,

Bangkok 10320, Thailand

Tel: 02-641-2951

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2317

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Victoria 3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.

146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,

Auckland, New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

OWNER’S MANUAL

DIC 99

OWNER’S MANUAL

M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation

WA44060 302APAP3.3-02B0

Printed in China

Yamaha PK CLUB (Portable Keyboard Home Page, English only)

http://www.yamahaPKclub.com/

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

Transcripción de documentos

DIC 99 OWNER’S MANUAL Yamaha PK CLUB (Portable Keyboard Home Page, English only) http://www.yamahaPKclub.com/ Yamaha Manual Library http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2003 Yamaha Corporation Printed in China WA44060 301APAP3.3-01A0 OWNER’S OWNER’S MANUAL MANUAL Introduction SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over ,or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! IF you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25' cord (or less ) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged. When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with batteries of a different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture. Warning: Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: Model Serial No. Purchase Date 92-BP (bottom) PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The • • • required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. Use the specified adaptor (PA-300 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. Do not open • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in • damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. If you notice any abnormality • If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Location • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, • • always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms. Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or • • • • (3)-7 extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables. Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. 1/2 PSR-2100/1100 3 Connections Saving data • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Saving and backing up your data • Some of the current memory data (see page 42) is lost when you turn off the power to the instrument. Save the data to a floppy disk/the User Drive (see page 39, 47). Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to a floppy disk. Maintenance When you change settings in a display page and then exit from that page, System Setup data (listed in the Parameter Chart of the separate Data List booklet) is automatically stored. However, this edited data is lost if you turn off the power without properly exiting from the relevant display. • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Handling caution Backing up the floppy disk • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the • • • • To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto two floppy disks. gaps on the panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Caution for data operations Make sure NEVER to turn the PSR-2100/1100’s power off during any kind of data operation involving the USER/ FLOPPY DISK drives — such as saving, deleting, or copying/pasting — until the operation is completely finished. (Make sure to wait until the alert message disappears.) Turning the power off during the operation results in the loss of the data being saved or pasted to the respective drive. Keeping the power on during such operations is particularly important in regard to the USER drive. Turning off the power while performing a save/delete/paste operation with the USER drive may result in loss of ALL data on the USER drive (upon the next power on) — and not just the data in question. In other words, if you are performing a save/delete/ paste operation on only the song data of the USER drive and you turn off the power before the operation is completed, you risk losing ALL your USER drive data — including all voices, styles, Multi Pad banks and Registration Memory presets you’ve saved to the USER drive. This caution also applies to creating a new folder on the USER drive or using the factory reset operation (page 154). Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. Even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. (3)-7 4 PSR-2100/1100 2/2 Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha PSR-2100/1100! We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the PSR-2100/1100. We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. PSR-2100/1100 5 Accessories ■ PA-300 AC Adaptor* ■ Floppy Disk (blank) ■ Music Rest (page 17) ■ Data List ■ Owner’s Manual * May not be included in your area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer. About this Owner’s Manual and Data List This manual consists of four main sections: Introduction, Quick Guide, Basic Operation, and Reference. Also, a separate Data List is provided. Introduction (page 2): Please read this section first. Quick Guide (page 20): This section explains how to use the basic functions. Basic Operation (page 38): This section explains how to use the basic operations including display-based controls. Reference (page 55): This section explains how to make detailed settings for the PSR-2100/1100’s various functions. Data List : Voice List, MIDI Data Format, etc. * The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. * The example Operation Guide displays shown in this Manual are taken from the PSR-2100, and in English. * This product (PSR-2100) is manufactured under license of U.S. Patents No.5231671, No.5301259, No.5428708, and No.5567901 from IVL Technologies Ltd. * The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd. * Copying of the commercially available software is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. COPYRIGHT NOTICE This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others' copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, styles files, MIDI files, WAVE data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON'T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. Trademarks: • Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. • IBM-PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. • Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation. • All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. 6 PSR-2100/1100 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disk Be sure to handle floppy disks and treat the disk drive with care. Follow the important precautions below. Compatible Disk Type • 3.5" 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used. Inserting/Ejecting Floppy Disks To insert a floppy disk into the disk drive: • Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly pushing it all the way in until it clicks into place and the eject button pops out. Drive lamp When the power is turned on, the drive lamp (at the bottom left of the drive) lights to indicate the drive can be used. • Never attempt to remove the disk or turn the power off when the data is being written to the floppy disk. Doing so can damage the disk and possibly the disk drive. Press the eject button slowly as far as it will go; the disk will automatically pop out. When the disk is fully ejected, carefully remove it by hand. • If the eject button is pressed too quickly, or if it is not pressed in as far as it will go, the disk may not eject properly. The eject button may become stuck in a halfpressed position with the disk extending from the drive slot by only a few millimeters. If this happens, do not attempt to pull out the partially ejected disk, since using force in this situation can damage the disk drive mechanism or the floppy disk. To remove a partially ejected disk, try pressing the eject button once again, or push the disk back into the slot and then repeat the eject procedure. • Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive before turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that can cause data read and write errors. Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head To eject a floppy disk: Before ejecting the disk, be sure to confirm that data is not being written to the floppy disk. If data is currently being written to the floppy disk in the following operations, the messages “Now executing,” “Now copying,” and “Now formatting” appears in the display. • Moving, copying, pasting, saving, or deleting data (page 45 - 47). • Naming files and folders (page 44); creating a new folder (page 47). • Copying a disk to an another disk (page 153); formatting the disk (page 153). • Clean the read/write head regularly. This instrument employs a precision magnetic read/write head which, after an extended period of use, will pick up a layer of magnetic particles from the disks used that will eventually cause read and write errors. • To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order Yamaha recommends that you use a commerciallyavailable dry-type head cleaning disk to clean the head about once a month. Ask your Yamaha dealer about the availability of proper head-cleaning disks. • Never insert anything but floppy disks into the disk drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive or floppy disks. Eject button PSR-2100/1100 7 About the Floppy Disks To handle floppy disks with care: • Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep floppy disks in their protective cases when they are not in use. • Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liquids. • Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed surface of the floppy disk inside. • Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such as those produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since magnetic fields can partially or completely erase data on the disk, rendering it unreadable. • Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or housing. • Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a floppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached in the proper location. To protect your data (Write-protect Tab): • To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab open). write-protect tab open (protect position) Data backup • For maximum data security Yamaha recommends that you keep two copies of important data on separate floppy disks. This gives you a backup if one disk is lost or damaged. To make a backup disk use the Disk to Disk function on page 153. About the Display Messages A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation. When such messages appear, simply follow the instructions as shown by pressing the corresponding button. F G H I J For this example, press the [G] (YES) button to execute formatting. 8 PSR-2100/1100 You can select the desired language from the Help display (page 52). Table of Contents Introduction ............................ 2 PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3 Accessories ............................................................... 6 About this Owner’s Manual and Data List .............. 6 Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disk..................................................... 7 About the Display Messages.................................... 8 Application Index ................................................... 12 What can you do with the PSR-2100/1100?.......... 14 Setting Up the PSR-2100/1100.............................. 16 Panel Controls and Terminals................................ 18 Reference Playing the Demos .................55 Voices.....................................57 Selecting a Voice .................................................... 57 Layer/Left — Playing Several Sounds Simultaneously .................................................... 59 Layer — Layering Two Different Voices ................... 59 Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard ..................... 60 Quick Guide ........................... 20 Applying Voice Effects ........................................... 60 PITCH BEND Wheel & MODULATION Wheel........ 61 Adjusting the Octave setting ................................. 61 Playing the Demos ................................................. 20 Song Playback ........................................................ 21 Styles......................................62 Playback of Songs ....................................................21 Playing Voices ........................................................ 25 Playing a style ........................................................ 62 Playing a Voice ........................................................25 Playing Two Voices Simultaneously ..........................26 Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands ............................................27 Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only .................. 64 Adjusting the Volume Balance/Channel Muting ...... 64 Playing Styles ......................................................... 28 Playing a style ..........................................................28 Style Sections...........................................................30 One Touch Setting...................................................32 Music Finder........................................................... 33 Using the Music Finder ............................................33 Searching the Music Finder Records.........................34 Playing with the Songs .......................................... 36 Playing Along with the PSR-2100/1100....................36 Recording ................................................................37 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data ....... 38 Contents shown in the Main Display .................... 38 Open/Save Display................................................. 39 Example — Open/Save display ................................40 Selecting Files and Folders..................................... 43 File/Folder-related Operations .............................. 44 Naming Files/Folders ...............................................44 Moving Files/Folders ................................................45 Copying Files/Folders...............................................46 Deleting Files/Folders...............................................46 Saving Files ..............................................................47 Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder ..............47 Displaying Upper Level pages ..................................47 Entering Characters and Changing Icons .................47 Using the [DATA ENTRY] Dial................................ 49 Direct Access — Instant Selection of Displays....... 50 Help Messages ....................................................... 52 Using the Metronome............................................ 53 Adjusting the Tempo ............................................. 53 Tap Tempo ..............................................................54 Chord Fingerings.................................................... 65 Arranging the Style Pattern (SECTIONS: MAIN A/B/C/D, INTRO, ENDING, BREAK) ......... 67 Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys (SYNC. STOP) ...................................................... 68 Selecting Intro and Ending Types (INTRO/ENDING) ...69 Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when changing accompaniment sections — Auto Fill In................ 69 Appropriate Panel Setting for the Selected Style (ONE TOUCH SETTING) ...................................... 70 Automatically Changing One Touch Settings with the Sections — OTS Link .............................. 71 Registering the Panel Controls in One Touch Setting (ONE TOUCH SETTING) ...................................... 71 Calling Up Ideal Setups for Your Music — Music Finder.................................................... 72 Searching the Ideal Setups — Music Finder Search.. 73 Editing Records — Music Finder Record Edit ........... 74 The Multi Pads .......................76 Playing the Multi Pads ........................................... 76 Chord Match .......................................................... 76 Multi Pad Edit......................................................... 77 Song Playback........................78 Compatible Song Types ......................................... 78 Song Playback ........................................................ 79 Playing the Internal Songs....................................... 79 Playing Back Songs on Disk ..................................... 81 Other Playback-related Operations.......................... 81 Muting Specific Parts — Track1/Track2/Extra Tracks ............................ 82 Repeat Playback of a Specific Range ..................... 82 PSR-2100/1100 9 Displaying Music Notation — Score ...................... 83 Displaying the Lyrics .............................................. 86 Creating Multi Pad — Multi Pad Creator ............121 Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory ........ 87 Operation ............................................................. 121 Multi Pad Realtime Recording — Record ............ 122 Registering Panel Setups — Registration Memory... 87 Saving Your Registration Memory Setups .................88 Recalling a Registration Memory Setup ................ 89 Editing Voices — Sound Creator ................... 90 Operation ............................................................... 90 Regular Voice Parameters...................................... 91 Organ Flutes (PSR-2100 only)................................ 94 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator ..................... 95 About Song Recording........................................... 95 Quick Recording..................................................... 96 Multi Recording ..................................................... 97 Recording Individual Notes — Step Record .......... 99 Operation ................................................................99 Recording Melodies — Step Record (Note) ............101 Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompaniment — Step Record (Chord) .............................102 Select the Recording Options: Starting, Stopping, Punching In/Out — Rec Mode.......................... 104 Editing a Recorded Song ..................................... 105 Step Recording or Editing Multi Pads — Edit...... 123 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console ................124 Operation ............................................................. 124 Setting the Level Balance and Voice — Volume/Voice ............................................... 125 Changing the Tone of the Voice — Filter............ 126 Changing Pitch-related Settings — Tune ............ 126 Adjusting the Effects ............................................ 127 Effect Structure ..................................................... 129 Setting the Equalizer—EQ (PSR-2100 only) ........ 130 Using a Microphone — MIC. (PSR-2100 only) .......131 Selecting a Vocal Harmony Type ......................... 131 Making Settings for the Vocal Harmony and Microphone — MICROPHONE SETTING ... 133 Adjusting the Vocal Harmony Settings and Microphone Effects — OVERALL SETTING ... 133 Setting the Microphone Volume and Related Effects — TALK SETTING............................................... 135 Editing Channel-related Parameters — Channel .....105 Editing Note Events — 1 - 16.................................108 Editing Chord Events — CHD.................................109 Editing System Events — SYS/EX. (System Exclusive) .............................109 Inputting and Editing Lyrics ...................................110 Customizing the Event List — Filter........................110 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function...........................136 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator ................... 111 Tuning the Overall Pitch — Master Tune............... 138 Selecting a Scale — Scale Tune ............................. 138 About Creating Accompaniment Styles .............. 111 Style File Format .................................................. 112 Operation ............................................................. 112 Realtime Recording — Basic ................................ 113 Step Recording..................................................... 114 Assembling an Accompaniment Style —Assembly ........................................................ 115 Edit the Created Accompaniment Style .............. 116 Change the Rhythmic Feel — Groove and Dynamics ....................................116 Editing the Channel Data.......................................118 Making Style File Format Settings — Parameter .....119 10 Start recording...................................................... 122 Stop recording...................................................... 122 PSR-2100/1100 Operation ............................................................. 136 Fine Tuning the Pitch/Selecting a Scale — Master Tune/Scale Tune............................... 138 Setting Song-related Parameters — Song Settings................................................ 140 Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting, Split Point, and Chord Fingering......................................... 141 Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting and Split Point .......................... 141 Setting the Fingering Method — Chord Fingering 142 Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard — Controller...................................................... 142 Making Settings for the Pedals .............................. 142 Changing the Touch Sensitivity Modulation and Transpose — Keyboard/Panel...................... 144 Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set..................................................... 145 Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration Memory Presets — Registration Sequence ..........145 Maintaining Panel Settings — Freeze .....................145 Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings — Voice Set ........................................................146 Setting Harmony and Echo.................................. 146 Setting the MIDI Parameters ............................... 148 Making Overall System Settings (Local Control, Clock, etc.) — System.........................................148 Transmitting MIDI Data — Transmit ......................149 Receiving MIDI Data — Receive .............................150 Setting Root Note Channels — Root ......................150 Setting Chord Channels — Chord Detect ..............150 Introduction Quick Guide Basic Operations - Organizing Your Data Other Settings — Utility ...................................... 151 Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome, Parameter Lock, and Tap — CONFIG 1...............151 Making Settings for the Display and Voice Number Indication — CONFIG 2........152 Copying and Formatting Disks — Disk ...................153 Entering Your Name and Language Preference — Owner............................................................154 Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the PSR-2100/1100 — System Reset .........................154 Playing the Demos Voices Styles Using Your PSR-2100/1100 with Other Devices.............. 155 The Multi Pad Using the Headphones (PHONES jack). ..................155 Connecting the Microphone or Guitar (MIC./LINE IN jack) (PSR-2100 only)...................155 Playing the sounds of the PSR-2100/1100 through an external audio system, and recording the sounds to an external recorder (AUX OUT/OUTPUT jacks) .....156 Using the Pedal (footswitch) or Foot Controller (FOOT PEDAL 1/2 jack).......................................156 Connecting external MIDI devices (MIDI terminals) .................................................156 Connecting to a Computer (USB terminal, MIDI terminal).............................157 What’s MIDI? .........................................................158 What You Can Do With MIDI .................................160 MIDI Data Compatibility ........................................161 Disk format ............................................................161 Sequence Format...................................................161 Voice Allocation Format .........................................162 Song Playback Troubleshooting.................. 163 Specifications ...................... 165 Index ................................... 167 Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups - Registration Memory Editing Voices - Sound Creator Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs - Song Creator Creating Accompaniment Styles - Style Creator Creating Multi Pad - Multi Pad Creator Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices - Mixing Console Using a Microphone - MIC. (PSR-2100 only) Making Global and Other Important Settings - Function Using Your PSR-2100/1100 with Other Devices Appendix PSR-2100/1100 11 Application Index Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your particular application and situation. Listening Listening to the internal songs ................................................................................................................ page 79 Listening to disk songs ....................................................................... “Playing Back Songs on Disk” on page 81 Listening to demo songs......................................................................................................................... page 55 Listening to the demo of the selected voices .......................................................................................... page 57 Listening to songs with the special voices of the PSR-2100/1100 ......................................................... page 125 Playing Playing an accompaniment that matches pitch..................................................“Transpose Assign” on page 144 Combining two voices ...................................................... “Layer — Layering Two Different Voices” on page 59 Playing separate voices with the right and left hands ...........................“Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard” on page 60 Changing the sound Enhancing the sound with touch and other effects ......................................“Applying Voice Effects” on page 60 .................................................................................................................“Adjusting the Effects” on page 127 Adjusting the Level Balance ................................................................................................................. page 125 Combining two voices ...................................................... “Layer — Layering Two Different Voices” on page 59 Playing separate voices with the right and left hands ...........................“Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard” on page 60 Creating voices ...................................................................................................................................... page 90 Playing the auto accompaniment Playing the accompaniment automatically ............................................................................................. page 62 Calling up ideal panel settings for your music ........................................................................................ page 72 Practicing Practicing with an accurate and steady tempo............................................. “Using the Metronome” on page 53 Recording Recording your performance...........................................................................................................pages 96, 97 Creating a song by entering notes .......................................................................................................... page 99 Creating your original settings Creating voices ...................................................................................................................................... page 90 Creating accompaniment styles............................................................................................................ page 111 Creating multi pads.............................................................................................................................. page 121 12 PSR-2100/1100 Application Index Using a microphone (PSR-2100 only) Connecting the microphone.............. “Connecting the Microphone or Guitar (MIC./LINE IN jack)” on page 155 Adding automatic harmonies to your singing ....................................................................................... page 131 Settings Registering Panel Setups......................................................................................................................... page 87 Tuning the pitch/Selecting a scale ........................................................................................................ page 138 Making detailed settings for playing back songs ................................................................................... page 140 Making detailed settings for the auto accompaniment.......................................................................... page 141 Making detailed settings for the keyboard voices ................................................................................. page 144 Making detailed settings for MIDI ........................................................................................................ page 148 Connecting the PSR-2100/1100 to other devices Basic information on MIDI..................................................................................... “What’s MIDI?” on page 158 Recording your performance........“Playing the sounds of the PSR-2100/1100 through an external audio system, and recording the sounds to an external recorder (AUX OUT/OUTPUT jacks)” on page 156 Raising the volume ......................“Playing the sounds of the PSR-2100/1100 through an external audio system, and recording the sounds to an external recorder (AUX OUT/OUTPUT jacks)” on page 156 Connecting a computer..................... .“Connecting to a Computer (USB terminal/MIDI terminals)” on page 157 Quick solution Basic functions of the PSR-2100/1100 and how you can best use it ................................................pages 12, 14 Resetting the PSR-2100/1100 to the default setting ................. “Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the PSR-2100/1100 — System Reset” on page 154 Displaying the Messages ......................................................................“About the Display Messages” on page 8 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................... page 163 PSR-2100/1100 13 What can you do with the PSR-2100/1100? SONG Multi Pads DEMO Playback previously recorded songs (page 21, 36, 78) Add spice to your performance with special dynamic phrases (page 76, 121) Explore the Demos (page 20, 55) Enjoy a wide variety of preset songs as well as songs on commercially available disks. These not only showcase the stunning voices and styles of the instrument, they introduce you to the various functions and features — and give you hands-on experience using the PSR2100/1100! By simply pressing one of the Multi Pads, you can play short rhythmic or melodic phrases. You can also create your original Multi Pad phrases by recording them directly from the keyboard. SONG EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) (STYLE) REC TOP NEW SONG STYLE POP & ROCK METRONOME REPEAT START/STOP REW DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR FF A SYNC. START SWING & JAZZ DIGITAL RECORDING BALLROOM MARCH & WALTZ B MIXING CONSOLE BALLAD LATIN DANCE C USER PART D MENU DEMO E TAP TEMPO TRANSPOSE TEMPO RESET RESET HELP MASTER VOLUME STOP FUNCTION BALANCE MULTI PAD DIRECT ACCESS FADE IN/OUT MIN STYLE CONTROL ACMP BREAK MAIN INTRO STANDBY ON 14 CHANNEL ON/OFF MAX ENDING / rit. SYNC. STOP AUTO FILL IN SYNC. START 1 PART START/STOP OTS LINK STYLE DIGITAL RECORDING Back up your performance with Auto Accompaniment (page 28, 62) Record your performances (page 95, 111) Playing a chord with your left hand automatically plays the auto accompaniment backing. Select an accompaniment style — such as pop, jazz, Latin, etc. — and let the PSR-2100/1100 be your backing band! With the powerful and easy-to-use song recording features, you can record your own keyboard performances, and create your own complete, fully orchestrated compositions — which you can then save to the USER drive or a floppy disk for future recall. PSR-2100/1100 2 3 4 4 LCD MUSIC FINDER VOICE The large LCD (together with the various panel buttons) provides comprehensive and easyto-understand control of the PSR-2100/1100’s operations. Call up the perfect accompaniment style (page 33, 72) Enjoy a huge variety of realistic voices (page 25, 57) If you know what song you want to play, but you don’t know which style or voice would be right for it, let the Music Finder help you. Just select the song title, and the PSR-2100/1100 automatically calls up the most appropriate style and voice. The PSR-2100/1100 features a wealth of exceptionally authentic and dynamic voices — including piano, strings, woodwinds, and more! BACK NEXT VOICE EFFECT LEFT HOLD TOUCH HARMONY/ MONO ECHO SUSTAIN VOICE PIANO & HARPSI. DSP VARIATION E.PIANO ORGAN & ACCORDION BASS BRASS WOODWIND SYNTH. XG PERCUSSION MAIN F LAYER GUITAR G LEFT H STRINGS CHOIR & PAD Organ Flutes (PSR-2100 only) I USER ORGAN FLUTES UPPER OCTAVE J MUSIC FINDER Craft your own organ voices (page 94) RESET MIC. VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT This special function not only gives you a full set of rich and luscious organ sounds, it also lets you create your own original organ voices, just as on a traditional organ, by increasing and decreasing the flute footages, and adding percussive sounds. MEMORY OVER SIGNAL ONE TOUCH SETTING ENTER EXIT 5 6 7 8 REGISTRATION MEMORY DATA ENTRY FREEZE USB terminal Vocal Harmony (PSR-2100 only) Make music with a computer — quickly and easily (page 157) Add automatic vocal backing to your singing (page 131) The amazing Vocal Harmony feature (on the PSR-2100) automatically produces backup vocal harmonies for lead vocals that you sing into a microphone. You can even change the gender of the harmony voices — for example, letting you add female backup to your own male voice (or vice versa). Dive in and take advantage of the wide world of computer music software. Connections and setup are exceptionally easy, and you can play back your computer recorded parts with different instrument sounds — all from a single PSR-2100/ 1100! LCD CONTRAST USB IN MIDI OUT 2 FOOT PEDAL MIC. LINE INPUT VOLUME MIC./ LINE IN R L AUX OUT R L/L+R OUTPUT DC IN 16V (LEVEL FIXED) PSR-2100/1100 15 Setting Up the PSR-2100/1100 Power Supply Power-on Procedure sure that the PSR-2100/1100’s STANDBY/ON 1 Make switch is at the STANDBY (off) position. 2 Connect one end of the AC cable to the PA-300. the PA-300’s DC plug to the PSR-2100/ 3 Connect 1100’s DC IN terminal on the instrument’s rear When you have made all the necessary connections (page 155) between your PSR-2100/1100 and any other devices, make sure that all volume settings are turned down all the way to zero. Then turn on every device in your setup in the order of MIDI masters (senders), MIDI slaves (receivers), then the audio equipment (mixers, amplifiers, speakers, etc.). This ensures smooth MIDI operation and prevents speaker damage. When powering down the setup, first turn down the volume for each audio device, then switch off each device in the reverse order (first audio devices, then MIDI). panel. MIDI master (transmitting device) R L AUX OUT R L/L+R OUTPUT POWER DC IN 16V ON!! (LEVEL FIXED) DC IN To electrical outlet PSR-2100/1100 as MIDI slave (MIDI receiving device) the other end (normal AC plug) to the 4 Connect nearest electrical outlet. WARNING Do not attempt to use an AC adaptor other than the Yamaha PA300 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha. The use of an incompatible adaptor may cause irreparable damage to the PSR2100/1100, and may even pose a serious shock hazard! ALWAYS UNPLUG THE AC ADAPTOR FROM THE AC POWER OUTLET WHEN THE PSR-2100/1100 IS NOT IN USE. CAUTION Never interrupt the power supply (e.g. unplug the AC adaptor) during any PSR-2100/1100 record operation! Doing so can result in a loss of data. CAUTION Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at a minimum level. When not using the PSR-2100/1100 for an extended period of time, be sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. 16 PSR-2100/1100 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 L R Audio equipment (first mixer, then amplifier) Powering Up Music Rest CAUTION In order to avoid possible damage to the speakers or other connected electronic equipment, always switch on the power of the 2100/1100 before switching on the power of the amplified speakers or mixer and amplifier. Likewise,always switch off the power of the 2100/1100 after switching off the power of the amplified speakers or mixer and amplifier. CAUTION Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position,electricity is still flowing to the instrument at a minimum level. When not using the PSR-2100/1100 for an extended period of time, be sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. n Before you switch your 2100/1100 on or off, first turn down the volume of any connected audio equipment. 1 Press the [STANDBY/ON] switch. → The main display appears in the display. The PSR-2100/1100 is supplied with a music rest that can be attached to the instrument by inserting it into the slot at the rear of the control panel. The Panel Logos The logos printed on the PSR-2100/1100 panel indicate standards/formats it supports and special features it includes. GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which guarantees that any data conforming to the standard will play accurately on any GM-compatible tone generator or synthesizer from any manufacturer. XG Format XG is a new Yamaha MIDI specification which significantly expands and improves on the “GM System Level 1” standard with greater voice handling capacity, expressive control, and effect capability while retaining full compatibility with GM. By using the PSR-2100/1100 XG voices, it is possible to record XG-compatible song files. XF Format The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) standard with greater functionality and open-ended expandability for the future. The PSR-2100/1100 is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is played. (SMF is the most common format used for MIDI sequence files. The PSR-2100/1100 is compatible with SMF Formats 0 and 1, and records “song” data using SMF Format 0.) STANDBY ON BACK NEXT MAIN A F B G C H LAYER D I E J LEFT MUSIC FINDER When you’re ready to turn off the power, press the [STANDBY/ON] switch again. → Both the display and the drive lamp (at the bottom left of the drive) will turn off. 2 Adjusting the display contrast If the LCD is difficult to read, adjust the contrast with the [LCD CONTRAST] knob on the rear panel. 3 Setting the volume Use the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to adjust the volume to an appropriate level. LCD CONTRAST Vocal Harmony (PSR-2100 only) Vocal Harmony employs state-of-the-art digital signal processing technology to automatically add appropriate vocal harmony to a lead vocal line sung by the user. Vocal Harmony can even change the character and gender of the lead voice as well as the added voices to produce a wide range of vocal harmony effects. Disk Orchestra Collection The DOC voice allocation format provides data playback compatibility with a wide range of Yamaha instruments and MIDI devices. Style File Format The Style File Format (SFF) is Yamaha’s original style file format, which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. The PSR-2100/1100 uses the SFF internally, reads optional SFF style disks, and creates SFF styles using the Style Creator feature. MASTER VOLUME FADE IN/OUT MIN MAX USB USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with peripheral devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the computer is on). PSR-2100/1100 17 Panel Controls and Terminals SONG EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 (STYLE) 74 USB TOP 10 9 START/STOP 11 NEW SONG SYNC. START 5 REW DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR FF 12 13 MARCH & WALTZ BALLROOM A B MIXING CONSOLE BALLAD LATIN DANCE 38 USER TAP TEMPO TRANSPOSE 39 40 41 TEMPO 16 17 RESET 18 RESET MASTER VOLUME STOP 22 21 MULTI PAD MAIN BREAK ACMP D E HELP FUNCTION BALANCE DIRECT ACCESS 20 24 26 27 25 43 SYNC. STOP AUTO FILL IN STANDBY ON 23 28 29 30 44 CHANNEL ON/OFF MAX ENDING / rit. INTRO C PART MENU DEMO FADE IN/OUT STYLE CONTROL 42 36 37 14 DIGITAL RECORDING SWING & JAZZ POP & ROCK 19 OUT MIDI (R) STYLE MIN 75 IN METRONOME REPEAT 10 8 (L) REC 15 TRACK 1 79 6 55 LCD CONTRAST SYNC. START 45 PART 46 START/STOP OTS LINK 31 32 33 34 35 1 PITCH BEND MODULATION 2 3 4 PHONES C1 CLICK 36 D1 T 37 E1 38 S 39 POWER 1 [STANDBY/ON] switch ......................................................... P. 17 WHEEL 2 3 PITCH BEND ....................................................................... P. 61 MODULATION (PSR-2100 only) .......................................... P. 61 PHONES 4 [PHONES] jack .................................................................. P. 155 METRONOME 5 [METRONOME] button ........................................................ P. 53 SONG 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 [EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button ...................................... P. 82 [TRACK 2 (L)] button............................................................ P. 82 [TRACK 1 (R)] button ........................................................... P. 82 [REPEAT] button .................................................................. P. 82 [REC] button ........................................................................ P. 95 [TOP] button......................................................................... P. 81 [START / STOP] button ........................................................ P. 79 [REW] button........................................................................ P. 81 [FF] button............................................................................ P. 81 STYLE 15 STYLE buttons ..................................................................... P. 62 TRANSPOSE 16 [E] [F] buttons ............................................................. P. 144 TEMPO 17 [E] [F] buttons ............................................................... P. 53 18 [TAP TEMPO] button ............................................................ P. 54 18 PSR-2100/1100 F1 40 R 41 G1 42 L 43 A1 44 L 45 B1 46 M 47 C2 H 48 D2 49 M 50 E2 51 H 52 F2 G2 L 53 54 H 55 A2 56 L 57 B2 58 M 59 L C3 M 60 H D3 C 61 1 H 62 E3 R 63 1 F3 64 R 65 G3 66 S 6 MASTER VOLUME 19 [MASTER VOLUME] dial...................................................... P. 17 20 [FADE IN / OUT] button........................................................ P. 68 MULTI PAD 21 [1] - [4] buttons ..................................................................... P. 76 22 [STOP] button ...................................................................... P. 76 STYLE CONTROL 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 [ACMP] button...................................................................... P. 63 [BREAK] button.................................................................... P. 67 [INTRO] button ............................................................... P. 31, 69 MAIN [A] button.................................................................... P. 67 MAIN [B] button.................................................................... P. 67 MAIN [C] button ................................................................... P. 67 MAIN [D] button ................................................................... P. 67 [ENDING / rit.] button ..................................................... P. 31, 69 [AUTO FILL IN] button.......................................................... P. 69 [OTS LINK] button................................................................ P. 71 [SYNC.STOP] button............................................................ P. 68 [SYNC.START] button .......................................................... P. 63 [START / STOP] button ........................................................ P. 63 DIGITAL STUDIO 36 [SOUND CREATOR] button ................................................. P. 90 37 [DIGITAL RECORDING] button ................................... P. 95, 111 38 [MIXING CONSOLE] button............................................... P. 124 MENU 39 [DEMO] button ..................................................................... P. 55 40 [HELP] button....................................................................... P. 52 41 [FUNCTION] button ........................................................... P. 136 76 77 78 72 2 FOOT PEDAL INPUT VOLUME MIC. LINE 47 BACK NEXT 73 79 R L AUX OUT MIC./ LINE IN R VOICE EFFECT LEFT HOLD 48 TOUCH 42 63 MAIN 49 PIANO & HARPSI. GUITAR LAYER G LEFT H I DC IN 16V HARMONY/ MONO ECHO SUSTAIN DSP VARIATION 57 58 59 60 61 62 56 VOICE F 80 L/L+R OUTPUT (LEVEL FIXED) 50 STRINGS 51 USER E.PIANO ORGAN & ACCORDION BASS BRASS WOODWIND SYNTH. XG CHOIR & PAD PERCUSSION 71 ORGAN FLUTES UPPER OCTAVE J MUSIC FINDER 65 66 64 RESET MIC. VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT OVER SIGNAL 67 ONE TOUCH SETTING ENTER EXIT 52 53 54 REGISTRATION MEMORY FREEZE DATA ENTRY 68 G3 S 67 A3 68 C 69 2 B3 70 R 71 2 C4 H 72 D4 L 73 E4 74 H 75 MEMORY 69 F4 L 76 H 77 70 G4 L 78 H 79 A4 L 80 B4 81 82 H 83 C5 L 84 D5 S 85 L 86 E5 87 H 88 F5 L 89 G5 M 90 O 91 DISPLAY CONTROL 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 [A] - [J] buttons ..................................................................... P. 43 [DIRECT ACCESS] button ................................................... P. 50 [BALANCE] button ............................................................... P. 64 [CHANNEL ON / OFF] button ........................................ P. 64, 81 [1▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons ................................................. P. 38 - 48 [BACK] button ................................................................ P. 43, 49 [NEXT] button ................................................................ P. 43, 49 VOICE PART ON / OFF [MAIN] button ................................ P. 59 VOICE PART ON / OFF [LAYER] button .............................. P. 59 VOICE PART ON / OFF [LEFT] button................................. P. 59 [ENTER] button .................................................................... P. 49 [DATA ENTRY] dial............................................................... P. 49 [EXIT] button ........................................................................ P. 43 [LCD CONTRAST] knob ...................................................... P. 17 VOICE EFFECT 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 [LEFT HOLD] button ............................................................ P. 61 [TOUCH] button ................................................................... P. 60 [SUSUTAIN] button .............................................................. P. 60 [HARMONY / ECHO] button ................................................ P. 61 [MONO] button ..................................................................... P. 61 [DSP] button......................................................................... P. 60 [VARIATION] button ............................................................. P. 61 VOICE 63 VOICE buttons ..................................................................... P. 57 UPPER OCTAVE A5 92 B5 93 94 C6 95 96 MIC. 65 MIC. buttons (PSR-2100 only) ........................................... P. 131 MUSIC FINDER 66 [MUSIC FINDER] button ...................................................... P. 72 ONE TOUCH SETTING 67 [1] - [4] buttons ..................................................................... P. 70 REGISTRATION MEMORY 68 [FREEZE] button.................................................................. P. 89 69 [1] – [8] buttons .................................................................... P. 87 70 [MEMORY] button ................................................................ P. 87 FLOPPY DISK 71 Floppy disk drive (3.5”)........................................................... P. 7 Microphone (PSR-2100 only) 72 [INPUT VOLUME] knob...................................................... P. 155 73 [MIC. LINE IN] jack............................................................. P. 155 Connectors 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 [USB] terminal.................................................................... P. 157 MIDI [OUT] [IN] terminals................................................... P. 156 [FOOT PEDAL 1 (SWITCH)] jack....................................... P. 156 [FOOT PEDAL 2] jack ........................................................ P. 156 AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) [L] [R] jacks ............................. P. 156 OUTPUT [L / L+R] [R] jacks............................................... P. 156 DC IN terminal ................................................................... P. 156 64 [UPPER OCTAVE] button..................................................... P. 61 PSR-2100/1100 19 Quick Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playing the Demos Reference on page 55 The PSR-2100/1100 features an extensive variety of Demo songs, that showcase its rich, authentic voices and its dynamic rhythms and styles. Demo button What’s more, there’s a special selection of Demo functions. These take you through a hands-on journey of all the important features and functions of the instrument — letting you see firsthand how to effectively use the PSR-2100/1100 in your own music. 1 2 Press the [DEMO] button to call up the menu for MENU DEMO selecting a Demo song. Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the Demo categories. BACK NEXT HELP FUNCTION Function Demos demonstrate many of the different functions on the PSR-2100/ 1100. Style Demos introduce you to the rhythms and accompaniment styles of the PSR-2100/1100 (page 55). For this example, VOICE is selected. Voice Demos showcase the voices of the PSR-2100/1100. 3 Press any of the [A] to [J] buttons or [8▼] (AUTO) button (FUNCTION page only) to select the Demo songs. For this example, press the [A] button to playback the Oboe demo. MAIN A F LAYER B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 For details about the Demos, refer to page 55. LEFT 8 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the demo mode and return to the MAIN display when you’ve finished playing the demo songs. When you’re done with the Demos, you can get to know your PSR-2100/1100 even better with these functions: • Song playback (page 21) • Short demo playback of the selected voice (in the Voice Open display; page 26). 20 Quick Guide Song Playback Song Playback Reference on page 78 Here’s where all of the amazing voices, effects, rhythms, styles and other sophisticated features of the PSR-2100/1100 come together — in songs! Song related buttons Make sure that the Language setting for the instrument (page 154) is the same as that of the file name of the song that you are playing back. BALANCE and CHANNEL buttons Floppy disk drive The following songs are compatible for playback on the PSR-2100/1100. Refer to pages 78, 161 for more details on the logos. Disks bearing this logo contain song data for voices defined in the GM standard. Disks bearing this logo contain song data using the XG format, an extension of the GM standard that provides a wider variety of voices and more comprehensive sonic control. Disks bearing this logo contain song data for voices defined in Yamaha’s DOC format. Songs containing a large amount of data may not be able to be read properly by the instrument, and as such you may not be able to select them. The maximum capacity is about 200– 300KB, however this may differ depending on the data contents of each song. Playback of Songs 1 If you want to play back a disk song, insert an appropriate disk containing song data into the disk drive. CAUTION • Make sure to read the section “Using the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks” on page 7. Quick Guide 21 Song Playback 2 Press the [A] button to call up the Song Open display. If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button. From the MAIN display (the display shown when the power is turned on), you can select songs, voices, accompaniment styles, etc. A B C D E FLOPPY DISK (commercially available songs, your own songs, etc.) PRESET (Songs for Demos) Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the drive. In the example display at left, the PRESET page is selected; at right, FLOPPY DISK is selected. 3 Press the [A] - [C] button to select the Voice/Style/Function folder. A B C D E 22 Quick Guide Song Playback 4 5 Press one of the [A] to [J] buttons to select the song file. Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to start playback. REC TOP NEW SONG 6 START/STOP • To rewind or fast forward to the playback point of the song, press the [REW] or [FF] button. • With song data software (Standard MIDI format 0) that includes lyrics, you can view the lyrics on the display during playback. You can also view the score. See pages 83 and 86 for details. SYNC. START While the song is playing, try using the Mute function to turn certain instrument channels off or on — letting you craft dynamic arrangements on the fly! 1) Press the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button. 2) Press the [1▲▼] - [8▲▼] button corresponding to the channel you wish to turn on or off. CHANNEL ON/OFF PART 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 If the STYLE tab is selected, press this button again. Quick Guide 23 Song Playback 7 Finally, take the producer’s seat and try your hand at mixing. These Balance controls let you adjust the levels of the individual parts — the song, the style, your singing (PSR-2100 only), and your playing. 1) Press the [BALANCE] button. 2) Press the [1▲▼] - [8▲▼] button corresponding to the part of which the volume you wish to adjust. BALANCE You can call up a full set of mixing controls by pressing the [MIXING CONSOLE] button (page 124). 1 8 3 4 5 6 7 8 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to stop playback. REC NEW SONG 24 2 Quick Guide TOP START/STOP SYNC. START • The [FADE IN/OUT] button (page 68) can be used to produce smooth fadeins and fade-outs when starting and stopping the song, as well as the accompaniment. Playing Voices Playing Voices Reference on page 57 The PSR-2100/1100 features a stunning variety of over 700 dynamic, rich and realistic voices. Try playing some of these voices now and hear what they can do for your music. Here, you’ll learn how to select individual voices, combine two voices in a layer, and split two voices between your left and right hands. Voice related buttons Playing a Voice 1 Press the [MAIN] button to turn the MAIN part on, then press the [F] button to call up the menu for selecting MAIN voice. If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button. Turn MAIN on. MAIN F LAYER G The voice you’re selecting here belongs to the MAIN part, and is called the MAIN voice. (See page 59 for more information.) LEFT H I J You’ll want to hear the MAIN voice all by itself — so make sure that the LAYER and LEFT parts are turned off. 2 Select a voice group. Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the memory location of the voice. For this example, PRESET is selected. For this example, STRINGS is selected. VOICE PIANO & HARPSI. GUITAR STRINGS USER E.PIANO ORGAN & ACCORDION BASS BRASS WOODWIND SYNTH. XG CHOIR & PAD PERCUSSION ORGAN FLUTES Quick Guide 25 Playing Voices 3 Select a voice. • You can instantly jump back to the Main display by “double-clicking” on one of the [A] - [J] buttons. • The voices displayed on the PSR-1100 are different from the example display at left; however, the operations are identical. A B C D For this example, ”Orchestra” is selected. E Press the corresponding buttons to select the other pages — and discover even more voices. 4 Press the [8▲] button to start the Demo for the selected voice. To stop the Demo, press this button again. There’s more to the Demo features than just voices, though–for more information, see page 55. Play the voices. Naturally, you can play the voice yourself from the keyboard, but you can also have the PSR-2100/1100 demonstrate the voice for you. Simply press the [8▲] button from the display above, and a Demo of the voice plays automatically. Playing Two Voices Simultaneously 1 Press the VOICE PART ON/OFF [LAYER] button to turn the LAYER part on. MAIN LAYER 2 3 Press the [G] button to select the LAYER part. Select a voice group. Here, we’ll select a lush pad to fill out the sound. Call up the “CHOIR & PAD” group. LEFT VOICE PIANO & HARPSI. GUITAR 4 Select a voice. For example, select “Gothic Vox.” STRINGS USER 5 E.PIANO ORGAN & ACCORDION BASS BRASS WOODWIND SYNTH. XG CHOIR & PAD PERCUSSION ORGAN FLUTES Play the voices. Now, you can play two different voices together in a rich sounding layer — the MAIN voice you selected in the previous section, plus the new LAYER voice you’ve selected here. And that’s just the beginning. Check out these other voice-related features: • Create your own original voices — quickly and easily — by changing the settings of existing voices (page 90). • Set up your favorite panel settings — including voices, styles, and more — and call them up whenever you need them (page 87). 26 Quick Guide Playing Voices Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands 1 Press the VOICE PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button to turn the LEFT part on. MAIN LAYER LEFT 2 3 Press the [H] button to select the LEFT part. Select a voice group. Here, we’ll select the “STRINGS” group — so that you can play rich, orchestral chords with your left hand. VOICE PIANO & HARPSI. GUITAR STRINGS 4 5 USER E.PIANO ORGAN & ACCORDION BASS BRASS WOODWIND SYNTH. XG CHOIR & PAD PERCUSSION ORGAN FLUTES Select a voice, then press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. For example, select “Symphon. Str.” Call up the SPLIT POINT display (page 141). From here, you can set the particular key on the keyboard that separates the two voices — called the Split Point. To do this, simultaneously hold down the [F] or [G] button and press the desired key on the keyboard. (For more information, see page 141.) MENU DEMO A B HELP C D FUNCTION E 6 7 Play the voices. The notes you play with your left hand sound one voice, while the notes you play with your right sound a different voice (or voices). MAIN and LAYER voices are meant to be played with the right hand. The LEFT voice is played with the left hand. Split Point LEFT Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. MAIN/LAYER EXIT Quick Guide 27 Playing Styles Playing Styles The PSR-2100/1100 has a huge variety of musical “styles” that you can call upon to back up your own performance. They give you anything from a simple, yet effective piano backing or percussion accompaniment to a full band or orchestra. Reference on page 62 Style related buttons Playing a style 1 Select a style group and a style. A STYLE POP & ROCK SWING & JAZZ BALLROOM MARCH & WALTZ DANCE LATIN USER B C BALLAD D E For this example, Dance is selected. 2 For this example, EuroTrance is selected. Turn ACMP on. The specified left-hand section of the keyboard becomes the “Auto Accompaniment” section, and chords played in this section are automatically detected and used as a basis for fully automatic accompaniment with the selected style. Split Point ACMP Auto Accompaniment section 28 Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the memory location of the style. For this example, PRESET is selected. Quick Guide • The point on the keyboard that separates the auto accompaniment section and the right-hand section of the keyboard is called the “split point.” Refer to page 141 for instructions on setting the split point. Playing Styles 3 Turn SYNC.START on. SYNC. START 4 As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the style starts. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below). Split Point Auto Accompaniment section 5 6 7 Change the tempo by using the TEMPO[ ] [ ] buttons if necessary. Simultaneously press the TEMPO [ ] [ ] buttons to return the tempo to its original setting. Press the [EXIT] button to leave the TEMPO display. The Tempo can also be adjusted by using the [TAP TEMPO] button (page 54). Try playing other chords with your left hand. For information on how to enter chords, see “Chord Fingerings” on page 65. Press the STYLE [START/STOP] button to stop the style. And there’s much more. Check out these other style-related features: • Easily create your own original styles (page 90). • Set up your favorite panel settings — including styles, voices, and more — and call them up whenever you need them (page 87). Embellish and enhance your melodies — with the automatic Harmony and Echo effects This powerful performance feature lets you automatically add harmony notes to the melodies you play with your right hand — based on the chords you play with your left. Tremolo, Echo, and other effects are available, too. 1 Turn HARMONY/ECHO on. LEFT HOLD VOICE EFFECT TOUCH SUSTAIN HARMONY/ MONO ECHO DSP VARIATION 2 Turn ACMP on (page 28). 3 Play a chord with your left hand and play some notes in the right-hand range of the keyboard. The PSR-2100/1100 has various Harmony/Echo types (page 146). The Harmony/Echo type may change according to the selected MAIN voice. For details about Harmony/ Echo types, refer to the separate Data List. • Harmony/Echo is just one of the many Voice Effects you can use. Try out some of the other effects and see how they can enhance your performance (page 60). Quick Guide 29 Playing Styles Style Sections Each style in the auto accompaniment is made up of “sections.” Since each section is a rhythmic variation of the basic style, you can use them to add spice to your performance and mix up the beats — while you’re playing. Intros, Endings, Main patterns, and Breaks — they’re all here, giving you the dynamic elements you need to create professionalsounding arrangements. INTRO MAIN BREAK ENDING 1-3 4 This is used for the beginning of the song. When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the main section. This is used for playing the main part of the song. It plays an accompaniment pattern of several measures, and repeats indefinitely until another section’s button is pressed. This lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment, to make your performance sound even more professional. This is used for the ending of the song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically. Use the same operations as in “Playing a style” on pages 28 and 29. Press the [INTRO] button. 5 MAIN BREAK INTRO ENDING / rit. As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the Intro starts. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below). Split Point Auto Accompaniment section When the playback of the intro is finished, it automatically leads into main section. 6 7 8 30 Press any of the MAIN [A] to [D] buttons or [BREAK] button as desired. (See the Accompaniment Structure on the next page.) MAIN BREAK Quick Guide ENDING / rit. or Press the [AUTO FILL IN] button to add a fill-in, if necessary. Fill-in patterns play automatically between each change in the Main sections. Press the [ENDING] button. This switches to the ending section. When the ending is finished, the style automatically stops. INTRO AUTO FILL IN OTS LINK MAIN BREAK INTRO ENDING / rit. Playing Styles ■ Accompaniment Structure INTRO (page (page 69) xx) INTRO A INTRO B INTRO C (max. three patterns) MAIN VARIATION via BREAK MAIN VARIATION B via BREAK MAIN VARIATION A MAIN VARIATION C via BREAK MAIN VARIATION D via BREAK Press the [ENDING] button. ENDING ENDING(page (page xx) 69) ENDING A ENDING B ENDING C You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the [ENDING] button again while the ending is playing back. (max. three patterns) • An Intro doesn’t necessarily have to be at the beginning! If you want, you can play an Intro section in the middle of your performance by simply pressing the [INTRO] button at the desired point. • Watch your timing with the Break sections. If you press a [BREAK] button too close to the end of the measure (i.e., after the final eighth note), the Break section starts playing from the next measure. This also applies to the Auto Fill-in. • Mix up your intros and use any of the other sections to start the style, if you want. • If you want to come back into the style right away after an Ending, simply press the [INTRO] button while the Ending section is playing. • If you press the [BREAK] button while the ending is playing, the break will immediately start playing, continuing with the main section. Other Controls FADE IN/OUT FADE IN/OUT TAP TEMPO TAP TEMPO SYNC.STOP SYNC. STOP The [FADE IN/OUT] button can be used to produce smooth fade-ins and fade-outs (page 68)when starting and stopping the style. The style can be started at any tempo you desire by “tapping” out the tempo with the [TAP TEMPO] button. For details, see page 54. When Synchro Stop is on, you can stop and start the style anytime you want by simply releasing or playing the keys (in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard). This is a great way to add dramatic breaks and accents to your performance. For details, see page 68. Quick Guide 31 Playing Styles ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons One Touch Setting One Touch Setting is a powerful and convenient feature that automatically calls up the most appropriate panel settings (voice number, etc.) for the currently selected style, with the touch of a single button. This is a wonderful way to instantly reconfigure all the settings on the PSR-2100/1100 to match the style you want to play. 1 2 3 4 5 Select a style (page 28). Press one of the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] buttons. Not only does this instantly call up all the settings (voices, effects, etc.) that match the current style (see page 70) — it also automatically turns on ACMP and SYNC. START, so that you can immediately start playing the style. ONE TOUCH SETTING As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the auto accompaniment starts. Split Point Play melodies with your right hand and play various chords with your left hand. Auto Accompaniment section Try out other One Touch Setting setups. You can also create your own One Touch Setting setups. For details, refer to page 71. ONE TOUCH SETTING • Here’s another way to further automate musical changes and spice up your performance: Use the convenient OTS (One Touch Setting) Link function to automatically change One Touch Settings when you select a different Main section (page 71). 32 Quick Guide Music Finder Music Finder Reference on page 72 MUSIC FINDER button If you want to play in a certain song but don’t know which style and voice settings would be appropriate, the convenient Music Finder can help you out. Simply select the song name from the Music Finder and the PSR-2100/ 1100 automatically makes all appropriate panel settings to let you play in that music style! Using the Music Finder 1 Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button. MUSIC FINDER 2 Select a record. Press the [BACK]/[NEXT] button to select the desired page of records. For this example, ALL is selected. Select the desired record. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 For this example, press the [1▲▼] - [3▲▼] buttons to select a record by song title. 3 Play along with the style playback. Split Point You can also have the voice and other important settings change automatically with the style changes. To do this, turn on OTS LINK (page 71) and set the OTS LINK TIMING (page 141) to “REAL TIME” Auto Accompaniment section Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. Quick Guide 33 Music Finder Searching the Music Finder Records The Music Finder is also equipped with a convenient search function that lets you enter a song title or keyword — and instantly call up all the records that match your search criteria. 1 Press the [MUSIC FINDER] button. MUSIC FINDER 2 Press the [I] button to call up the MUSIC FINDER SEARCH 1 display. The results of Search 1 and 2 appear in the correspondingly numbered SEARCH 1/ 2 displays. F G H I J Refer to page 48 for instructions on entering characters. 4 For this example, press the [A] button to call up the display for inputting the song title. A F B G C H D I E J For this example, ANY is selected. 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press the [F], [G] and [H] to clear the previous conditions, if necessary. 8 Enter the song title, then press the [8▲] (OK) button. For this example, ALL is selected. 34 7 3 Quick Guide 6 Press the [8▲] (START SEARCH) button. The search function calls up all records that contain the entered word or words. Music Finder 7 Select a record (see step #2 on page 33) and play along with the style playback. Split Point Auto Accompaniment section Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. You can also create your own Music Finder setups and save them to floppy disk (pages 38 and 47). In this way, you can expand your Music Finder collection by exchanging them with other PSR-2100/1100 users. For details, refer to page 74. Saving and Recalling Music Finder Data To save your Music Finder data, call up the MUSIC FINDER Open/Save window from the SYSTEM RESET page (page 154) of the UTILITY display, and follow the same procedure as that in the Open/Save window for Voice (page 43, 47). To recall the saved data, execute the appropriate operation from the MUSIC FINDER’s Open/Save window. Records can be replaced or added (page 74). Music Finder data is compatible for both the PSR-2100 and the PSR-1100. In the instructions above, all Music Finder data is handled together. Besides this, when you save or load style files, the Music Finder data that uses the relevant style file(s) is stored or added automatically. When you copy or move a style file on a floppy disk to the USER drive (page 45, 46), the record which was recorded when storing the relevant style is automatically added to the PSR-2100/1100. • In the example above, you specified a song title, but you can also look for relevant records by keyword or music genre — for example, Latin, 8-beat, etc. (page 73). Quick Guide 35 Playing with the Songs Playing with the Songs Reference on page 78 Song related buttons Playing Along with the PSR-2100/1100 In this section, try using the PSR-2100/1100’s song playback features to cancel or mute the right-hand melody while you play the part yourself. It’s like having a very talented and versatile playing partner accompany you while you perform. 1-4 5 Use the same operations as in “Song Playback” on pages 21 - 23. Press the [TRACK 1] button to cancel the right hand melody part. TRACK 1 To cancel the left hand part, press the [TRACK 2] button. (R) 6 If you want to have the notation displayed as you play, press the [C] button. If you want to see the lyrics, press the [B] button. If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button. If the selected song does not contain lyric data, lyrics are not displayed. A B C D E 7 Press the SONG [START/STOP] button and play the part. If you want, you can adjust the tempo by pressing the TEMPO[ buttons. REC NEW SONG 8 START/STOP SYNC. START Press the SONG [START/STOP] button to stop playback. REC NEW SONG 36 TOP Quick Guide TOP START/STOP SYNC. START ][ ] • If you want to start the song right away without an intro, use the Sync Start function. To set Sync Start to standby, simultaneously hold down the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button. Song playback starts automatically the moment you start playing the melody. • If you can hear the PSR-2100/1100 playing the melody part as well, check the channel setting for the melody part in the song data, and change the channel assigned to Track 1 (page 140). You can also change the song channel itself permanently (page 106). Playing with the Songs Recording The PSR-2100/1100 lets you record, too — quickly and easily. Try out the Quick Recording feature now and capture your keyboard performance. 1-3 4 Select a voice for recording. Use the same operations as in “Playing a Voice” on pages 25, 26. Press the [REC] and [TOP] buttons simultaneously to select “New Song” for recording. REC NEW SONG 5 TOP START/STOP REW FF SYNC. START Press the [REC] button. REC 6 Recording starts as soon as you start playing the keyboard. 7 When you’ve finished recording, press the [REC] button. REC 8 To hear your newly recorded performance, return the song to the beginning by using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button. REC NEW SONG 9 TOP START/STOP SYNC. START CAUTION The recorded data will be lost if you turn off the power. To keep your important recordings, you’ll need to save them to the User drive or floppy disk. Save the recorded data as required (pages 39, 47). Quick Guide 37 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Contents shown in the Main Display When the power is turned on, the MAIN Display appears, showing important and relevant operation information. Pressing the [A]-[J] buttons when the MAIN Display appears calls up displays corresponding to each button. The displays called up by the buttons (with the exception of [B] and [C]) are called Open/Save displays (see following page). Pressing the [B] and [C] buttons calls up the Lyrics display and Score display respectively. 8 If the MAIN Display is not shown, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button. 9 0 1 2 3 A B 4 5 6 C 7 E D F 1 Transpose (page 144) The [TRANSPOSE] buttons allow the pitch of the keyboard and song to be shifted down or up in semitones. The transpose value by the semitone shifted is displayed here. 2 Song (page 78) The name of the currently selected song and other song information is displayed. 3 Playback Position of Song (page 78) or Accompaniment Style (page 62) The current position of the song or the accompaniment style being played is displayed. 4 Tempo (page 53) When a song or a accompaniment style is playing, the tempo is displayed. 5 Chord (page 65) When [ACMP] is on, the chord specified in the left hand section is displayed. 6 Accompaniment Style (page 62) The name, beat, and tempo of the accompaniment style selected currently is displayed. 7 Intro and Ending (page 69) The names of the intro and ending of the currently selected style are displayed. 8 Octave (page 61) The [UPPER OCTAVE] buttons allow the pitch of the keyboard to be shifted down or up in octave steps. The octave value shifted is displayed here. 9 Split Point (page 141) Split Points are specific positions on the keyboard that divide the keyboard into separate sections. There are two kinds of Split Points: “A”, which separates the auto accompaniment from the rest of the keyboard, and “L”, which divides the left-hand and right-hand sections. 0 Registration Sequence (page 145) You can save your custom panel settings as a Registration Memory preset and recall it at any time pressing the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]-[8] button. You can also use the Registration Sequence function to program the Registration Memory presets to be selected in any specified order, and step through that order by using the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons or the pedal. The Registration Sequence is displayed here (unless Registration Sequence mis set to OFF). A Main Part (page 57) The voice selected for the Main part is displayed. B Layer Part (page 59) The voice selected for the Layer part is displayed. C Left Part (page 60) The voice selected for the Left part is displayed. D Multi Pad Bank (page 76) The Multi Pads allow you to instantly play back special phrases (such as rhythmic fills and melodies) during your performance, by pressing the MULTI PAD [1]-[8] buttons. Multi Pad data is stored in banks (four pads to a bank), and both preset and user banks are available. The name of the currently selected Multi Pad bank is displayed here. E Registration Memory Bank (page 88) Registration Memory presets are stored in banks, eight presets to a bank. The name of the currently selected Registration Memory bank is displayed here. F Volume balance of the parts (page 64) You can change the volume balance by pressing the [1▲▼]-[8▲▼] buttons under the LCD. The volume balance of each part is displayed. 38 PSR-2100/1100 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Open/Save Display The PSR-2100/1100 utilizes a variety of data types — including voices, accompaniment styles, songs, multi pads and registration memory settings. Much of this data is already programmed and contained in the PSR-2100/1100; you can also create and edit your own data with some of the functions on the instrument. All this data is stored in separate files — just as is done on a computer. Here, we’ll show you how to use the basic operations of the display controls in handling and organizing the data of the PSR-2100/1100 in files and folders. Files can be opened, saved, named, moved, or deleted in their respective Open/Save displays. You can select these displays according to their respective file types, as well: Song, Voice, Style, etc. Moreover, you can organize your data efficiently by putting various files of the same type into a single folder. The Open/Save displays for Song, Voice, Style, Multi Pad Bank and Registration Bank can be called up from the MAIN display (the display shown when the power is turned on) by pressing the appropriate [A] - [J] button. Open/Save display for Song (page 79) Open/Save display for Voice (page 57) Open/Save display for Multi Pads (page 76, 121) handles the Song files. handles the Voice files. handles the Multi Pad Bank files. A F B G C H D I E J Open/Save display for Style (page 62) handles the Style files. Open/Save display for Registration Bank (page 88) The following Open/ Save display types are also available; however, these are selected from displays other than the MAIN display (page 154). • SYSTEM SETUP • MIDI SETUP • USER EFFECT • MUSIC FINDER If the MAIN screen is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button. handles the Registration Bank files. PSR-2100/1100 39 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Example — Open/Save display Each Open/Save display consists of three kinds of drive pages: PRESET, USER, and FLOPPY DISK. In the examples given here, the Open/Save display for Voice is shown. PRESET drive The files that are preprogrammed and installed internally to the PSR-2100/1100 are kept here. Preset files can be loaded but cannot be re-written. However, you can use a preset file as a basis for creating your own original file (which can be saved in the USER or FLOPPY DISK drive). USER drive Files kept here are those containing your own original data, created or edited using the various functions of the PSR2100/1100. They are stored internally to the PSR-2100/1100. FLOPPY DISK drive You can also store your original data to floppy disk. Commercially available disk software can also be called up here. Naturally, these files are available only when the appropriate disk is inserted in the floppy disk drive. BACK NEXT Changes drives among PRESET, USER and FLOPPY DISK. Calls up the upper level directory page. In this example, the voice folder selection page can be called up. File All data, both preprogrammed and your own original, are stored as “files.” 40 PSR-2100/1100 Current Memory “Current Memory” is the area where the voice is called up when you select a voice. Also it is the area where you edit your voice using the SOUND CREATOR function. Your edited voice should then be saved as a file in the USER or FLOPPY DISK drive. Recording songs (page 95) and creating accompaniment styles (page 111) are done within the current memory. Please make sure to properly save this data to the USER/FLOPPY DISK drive as a file or files. The data will be lost if you turn off the power without saving. For details, see page 42. Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data ■ Files and Drives You can also manage files (copying, saving, etc.) on the USER drive or floppy disk by using a computer. (page 157) PRESET USER PRESET drive FLOPPY DISK USER drive FLOPPY DISK drives Cannot be overwritten Voice Voice Style Style Style Song Song Song Multi Pad Bank Multi Pad Bank Multi Pad Bank Registration Memory Bank Copy Vocal Harmony Type (PSR-2100 only) Vocal Harmony Type System Setup System Setup MIDI Template MIDI Template Copy & Paste / Cut & Paste Voice Registration Memory Bank System Setup Save MIDI Setup MIDI Setup MIDI Setup User Effect User Effect User Effect Music Finder Music Finder Music Finder This is the Voice Open/Save display called up by pressing the [PIANO] button in the VOICE section. BACK NEXT Select a Memory drive by using the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons. The Open/Save display indicates only those files that can be managed from the selected display. The FD (Floppy Disk) drive of the Voice Open/Save display, for example, indicates only voices even if style or song files are saved to the floppy disk. PSR-2100/1100 41 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data ■ Features and Memory Drives Data not maintained when the power is turned off Data maintained when the power is turned off Features Current Memory USER drive FLOPPY DISK drive Unedited voice Compare Sound Creator Style Creator Edit Record/ Assemble Register Register Panel settings Song Creator Multi Pad Creator Creating a New Record Record Record Voice Voice Style Style One Touch Setting Registration Memory Registration Memory Bank Music Finder Record Music Finder System Setup System Setup Song Save Song Four Multi Pads Multi Pad Bank MIDI settings MIDI Template Edit MIDI Save MIDI Setup Vocal Harmony Type (PSR-2100 only) Edit User Effect (Mixing Console) Edit Master EQ Edit (Mixing Console) (PSR-2100 only) Edit User Vocal Harmony User Effect User Master EQ CAUTION The data in the USER/ FLOPPY DISK drive is maintained even when the power is turned off. However, currently active data in memory may be lost when you select another file or turn the power off. Make sure to save any necessary data in memory to the User drive or the Floppy Disk drive before selecting another file or turning the power off. 42 PSR-2100/1100 User Effect * The Save operation is executed from the Open/Save display. **The corresponding Open/Save display can be called up from the [FUNCTION] → UTILITY → SYSTEM RESET display. Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Selecting Files and Folders Select a file shown in the display. In this example, we’ll select a voice file. First, press the VOICE [PIANO & HARPSI.] button to call up the display containing the files. This display (“Open/Save” display) is typical of those used to call up and store files (voice files). The PSR-2100/1100 already contains a variety of voices in the PRESET section. You can store your own original voices created with the Sound Creator function to the USER or FLOPPY DISK section. “PRESET,” “USER,” or “FLOPPY 1 Select DISK” by using the [BACK][NEXT] button. BACK A F B G C H D I E J NEXT Selecting a different language in the “LANGUAGE” display (page 52, 154) may cause the following problems. • Some characters of the file names you entered may be garbled. • Files may not be accessible. Restoring the original language solves the above problems. Reading the files on the computer with a different language system may cause similar problems to those above. ENTER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DATA ENTRY 3 Select the file/folder. the [1▲] - [7▲] buttons to 2 Use turn the pages. When the amount of pages exceeds seven, the bottom of the display changes as shown below. Press Next Press Prev.(previous) There are two ways to select the file/folder: • Press the [A] - [J] button. Press the letter button corresponding to the file/folder you wish to call up. (In the example display shown above, the voice files are shown.) • Use the [DATA ENTRY] dial and the [ENTER] button. When you turn the [DATA ENTRY] dial, the highlight moves among the available files/ folders. Highlight the desired file or folder (voice files are shown in the example above) and press the [ENTER] button to call up the selected item. Double-clicking the appropriate [A] -[J] button calls up the corresponding file and returns to the MAIN display. Highlighting the desired file and double-clicking the [ENTER] button calls up the corresponding file and returns to the MAIN display. END Press the [EXIT] button to go back to the MAIN display. You can go back to the previous display by pressing the [EXIT] button. Exiting from small pop-up windows You can also exit from small pop-up windows (such as in the illustration below) by pressing the [EXIT] button. PSR-2100/1100 43 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data File/Folder-related Operations Naming Files/Folders You can assign names to files and folders. Any file/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK sections can be named or renamed. Execute the following steps when there is data in the User drive. If there are Preset files/folders you wish to rename, copy them beforehand (page 46) and use them as User files/folders. 1 Press the [1▼] (NAME) button (page 39). A file/folder name can contain up to 50 half size letters (or 25 Hiragana and kanji letters), including the Icon ID (see the note below) and the extension. The NAME display appears. 2 Select the appropriate file/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button. The currently selected file/folder is highlighted. To select another file/folder, press one of the [A] [J] buttons. To cancel, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. The file name will appear on your computer as follows. If you change the Icon ID or the extension, the icon may change or the file may not be properly recognized. ABCDE.S002.MID A F B G C H D I E J 1 END 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Input the new name (page 48). Press the [8▲] (OK) button. To cancel, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. 44 PSR-2100/1100 File ID Icon ID Extension Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Moving Files/Folders You can move files and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any file/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK sections can be moved, using the cut-and-paste operation described below. 1 Press the [2▼] (CUT) button (page 39). The CUT display appears. This operation cannot be used to directly move a file/ folder from one floppy disk to another. If you want to do this, cut and paste the file or folder from the first floppy disk to the USER page, then change disks and paste it to the FLOPPY DISK page. 2 Select the desired file/folder for moving. Select the appropriate file/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button. The currently selected file/folder is highlighted. To select another file/folder, press one of the [A] [J] buttons. Several files/folders can be selected together, even those from other pages. To release or cancel the selection, press the button of the selected file/folder again. Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to select all the files/folders in the displayed page (USER/FLOPPY DISK). When the [6▼] (ALL) button is pressed the [6▼] button changes to “ALL OFF” button to release or cancel the selection. All files/folders in a floppy disk can be copied to another disk in one batch (page 153). After being pasted, the files are automatically re-ordered in alphabetical order and displayed. 3 Press the [7▼] (OK) button. To stop the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. 4 Call up the destination display. Only the USER and FLOPPY DISK pages can be selected as the destination. END Press the [4▼] (PASTE) button. The file/folder you cut is now pasted at the destination. About files/folders in a floppy disk In the FLOPPY DISK page of the Open/Save display, only the files which can be handled in that Open/Save display will appear — even though a folder in a floppy disk can contain different kinds of files. In the case of a folder cutand-paste operation (for floppy disk), an entire folder can be cut; however, only the specific files which can be handled in the current Open/ Save display will be pasted. PSR-2100/1100 45 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Copying Files/Folders You can also copy files and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any file/folder in the PRESET, USER and FLOPPY DISK sections can be copied, using the copy-and-paste operation described below. 1 Press the [3▼] (COPY) button (page 39). Please note that the copy functions are intended for your personal use only. The COPY display appears. 2 Select the desired file/folder. Select the appropriate file/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button. The currently selected file/folder is highlighted. To select another file/folder, press one of the [A] - [J] buttons. Several files/folders can be selected together, even those from other pages. To release or cancel the selection, press the button of the selected file/folder again. Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to select all the files/folders in the displayed page (PRESET/USER/ FLOPPY DISK). When the [6▼] (ALL) button is pressed, the [6▼] (ALL) button changes to “ALL OFF,” letting you release or cancel the selection. Press the [7▼] (OK) 3 button. To stop the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. up the destination 4 Call display. END Only the USER and FLOPPY DISK pages can be selected as the destination. This operation cannot be used to directly copy a file/ folder from one floppy disk to another. If you want to do this, copy and paste the file or folder from the first floppy disk to the User page, then change disks and paste it to the Floppy Disk page. Press the [4▼] (PASTE) button. The file/folder you copied is now pasted at the destination. Deleting Files/Folders You can also delete files and folders as desired, for organizing your data. Any file/folder in the USER and FLOPPY DISK sections can be deleted, using the operation described below. 1 Press the [5▼] (DELETE) button (page 39). The DELETE display appears. 2 Select the desired file/folder. Select the appropriate file/folder and press the [7▼](OK) button. The currently selected file/folder is highlighted. To select another file/folder, press one of the [A] - [J] buttons. Several files/folders can be selected together, even those from other pages. To release or cancel the selection, press the button of the selected file/folder again. Press the [6▼] (ALL) button to select all the files/folders in the displayed page (USER/FLOPPY DISK). When the [6▼] (ALL) button is pressed, the [6▼] (ALL) button changes to “ALL OFF,” letting you release or cancel the selection. 46 PSR-2100/1100 END Press the [7▼] (OK) button. To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. The message “Are you sure you want to delete the “******” file (or data/folder)? YES/NO” appears. YES ........... Deletes the highlighted item. NO............. Exits from the prompt without deleting. When several files have been selected, the message “Are you sure you want to delete the “******” file (or data/folder)? YES/YES ALL/NO/CANCEL” appears. YES/NO..... Deletes the highlighted item (YES), or skips the highlighted item without deleting (NO). YES ALL ... Deletes all selected items at once. CANCEL ... Exits from the prompt without deleting. Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Saving Files This operation lets you save the data (such as song and voice) you created in current memory (page 40) to files. The files can be saved only to the USER and FLOPPY DISK drives. If the Open/Save display for the type of data you wish to save is not shown, first return to the MAIN display by pressing the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button. Then, press the appropriate button [A]–[J] from the MAIN display to call up the respective Open/Save display. Finally, call up the USER or FLOPPY DISK page (pages 38, 40). the [6▼] 1 Press (SAVE) button. Enter a name for the new file (page 48). Press the [8▲] (OK) button. To stop the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. The internal memory capacity of the PSR-2100/1100 is about 580KB (PSR-2100) / 260KB (PSR-1100). Memory capacity for 2DD and 2HD floppy disks is about 720KB and 1440KB, respectively. When you store data to these locations, all file types of the PSR-2100/1100 (Voice, Style, Song, Registration, etc.) are stored together. The files of commercially available DOC software and Yamaha Disklavier software, and their edited files on the PSR-2100/1100, can be stored in the USER page, but cannot be copied to another floppy disk. Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder This operation lets you easily organize your various files into categories by creating a new folder for each category. Folders can only be created in the USER and FLOPPY DISK sections. up the page to 1 Call which you wish to create a new folder and press the [7▼] (NEW) button (page 39). Enter the name of the new folder (page 48). Folder directories can contain up to four levels. The maximum total number of files and folders which can be stored is 800 (PSR-2100) / 400 (PSR-1100), but this may differ depending on the length of the file names. The maximum number of files which can be stored in a folder will be 250. Press the [8▲](OK) button. To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. Displaying Upper Level pages Press the [8▼] (UP) button to call up the upper level pages. For example, you can call up the folder level pages from the file level pages. Entering Characters and Changing Icons the [1▼] 1 Press (NAME), [6▼] (SAVE), or [7▼] (NEW) button (page 39). Change the type of character by using the [1▲] button. If you select Japanese as the Language in the FUNCTION display (page 154), the following different types of characters and sizes can be entered: (kana-kan) Call up the ICON SELECT display by pressing Hiragana and kanji, marks (full size) the [1▼] button. This lets you change the icon (kana) at the left of the file name. Katakana (normal size), marks (full size) (kana) Katakana (half size), marks (half size) A B C — Alphabet (capital and small letters, full size), numbers (full size), marks (full size) ABC — Alphabet (capital and small letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size) If you’ve selected a language other than Japanese in the FUNCTION display (page 154), the following types of characters are available: CASE — Alphabet (capital letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size) case — Alphabet (lowercase letters, half size), numbers (half size), marks (half size) PSR-2100/1100 47 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Entering Characters The instructions that follow show you how to enter characters in naming your files and folders. The method is much the same as inputting names and numbers to your cell phone. 1 2 3 Move the cursor to the desired position by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial. Press the appropriate button, [2▲] - [7▲] and [2▼]- [6▼], corresponding to the character you wish to enter. Several different characters are assigned to each button, and the characters change each time you press the button. To actually enter the selected character, move the cursor or press another letter-input button. If you’ve entered a character by mistake, move the cursor to the character letter you wish to erase and press the [7▼] (DELETE) button. If you want to delete all of the characters on the line at once, press and hold down the [7▼] (DELETE) button for a while. When the cursor appears in reverse display (highlight), only the reversed area is deleted. To actually enter the new name, press the [8▲] (OK) button. To cancel the operation, press the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. ■ Converting into Kanji (Japanese language) This applies only if you are using the “ (kana-kan)” button (in Japanese). When the input “hiragana” characters are shown in reverse display (highlighted), press the [ENTER] button one or several times to convert the characters into the appropriate kanji. The reversed area can be changed by the [DATA ENTRY] dial. The converted area can be changed back to “hiragana” by the [7▼] (DELETE) button. The reversed area can be cleared at once by the [8▼] (CANCEL) button. To actually enter the change, press the [8▲] (OK) button or enter the next character. To enter the “hiragana” itself (without converting it), press the [8▲] (OK) button. The following half-size marks cannot be used in naming files and folders: ¥\/:*?“<> | ■ Entering special character marks (umlaut, accent, Japanese “ ” and “ ”) Select a character to which a character mark is to be added and press the [6▼] button (before actual entry of the character.) ■ Entering miscellaneous characters (marks) You can call up the mark list by pressing the [6▼] button, after actually entering a character by moving the cursor. Move the cursor to the desired mark by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial, then press the [8▲] (OK) or [ENTER] button. ■ Entering numbers First, select one of the following: “A B C” (full-size alphabet), “ABC” “CASE” (half-size capital alphabet) and “case” (half-size lowercase alphabet). Then, press and hold down the appropriate button, [2▲] - [7▲] and [2▼] - [5▼], for a while, or press it repeatedly until the desired number is selected. 48 PSR-2100/1100 In the case of characters which are not accompanied by special character marks (with the exception of kanakan and half-size katakana), you can call up the mark list by pressing the [6▼] button after selecting a character (before actual entry of a character). Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Changing the Icon You can also change the icon that appears at the left of the file name. Call up the ICON SELECT display by pressing the [1▼] (ICON) button from the character input display (page 48). Select the desired icon by using the [A] - [J] buttons, or by using the [3▲▼] - [5▲▼] buttons, then enter the selected icon by pressing the [8▲] (OK) button. BACK A F B G C H D I E J NEXT Turns pages for icon selection. Enters the selected icon. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Cancels the icon selection operation. Using the [DATA ENTRY] Dial This convenient control lets you easily select items in the display or quickly change parameter values. The actual function of the [DATA ENTRY] dial differs depending on the selected display. ■ Adjusting values You can change parameter values by rotating the [DATA ENTRY] dial. In the example [BALANCE] display, turning the dial adjusts the volume of the part in reverse display (highlight). To adjust the volume of another part, first select the part by pressing the [▲▼] button corresponding to the part, then rotate the [DATA ENTRY] dial. DATA ENTRY ■ Selecting items You can select the desired item or function in the display by rotating the [DATA ENTRY] dial. The selected item can then be called up or executed by using the [ENTER] button. In the example VOICE display, you can select the desired voice file with the [DATA ENTRY] dial, and call up the selected item by pressing the [ENTER] button on the panel. ENTER DATA ENTRY PSR-2100/1100 49 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Direct Access — Instant Selection of Displays DIRECT ACCESS SONG EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) (STYLE) TOP REC NEW SONG STYLE POP & ROCK METRONOME REPEAT START/STOP REW BACK SYNC. START BALLROOM MARCH & WALTZ DANCE LATIN USER VOICE EFFECT LEFT HOLD TOUCH PIANO & HARPSI. A F B G C H LAYER PART D I MENU DEMO E J LEFT GUITAR STRINGS USER TEMPO RESET RESET MIN MAIN INTRO STANDBY ON SYNC. START XG ORGAN FLUTES VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT ONE TOUCH SETTING ENTER DIRECT ACCESS EXIT CHANNEL ON/OFF SYNC. STOP AUTO FILL IN WOODWIND SYNTH. SIGNAL BALANCE MAX ENDING / rit. BRASS RESET MIC. FUNCTION MULTI PAD BREAK BASS CHOIR & PAD OVER STOP FADE IN/OUT ACMP VARIATION PERCUSSION UPPER OCTAVE HELP STYLE CONTROL DSP ORGAN & ACCORDION MUSIC FINDER TAP TEMPO TRANSPOSE MASTER VOLUME HARMONY/ MONO ECHO SUSTAIN E.PIANO MAIN DIGITAL RECORDING SWING & JAZZ MIXING CONSOLE BALLAD NEXT VOICE DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR FF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REGISTRATION MEMORY PART START/STOP OTS LINK DATA ENTRY FREEZE MEMORY With the convenient Direct Access function, you can instantly call up the desired display — with just a single additional button press. Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button and a message appears in the display prompting you to press the appropriate button. Then, simply press the button corresponding to the desired setting display to instantly call up that display. In the example below, Direct Access is used to call up the display for selecting the Chord Fingering (page 142). DIRECT ACCESS ACMP Refer to the Direct Access Chart (page 51) for a list of the displays that can be called up with the Direct Access function. 50 PSR-2100/1100 Here’s a convenient way to return to the MAIN display from any other display: Simply press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then the [EXIT] button. Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Direct Access Chart Operation: [DIRECT ACCESS] button + button listed below [TRACK1] [TRACK2] [EXTRA TRACKS] [REPEAT] [METRONOME] [REC] [TOP] [START/STOP] [REW] [FF] STYLE [POP & ROCK] [SWING & JAZZ] [BALLROOM] [MARCH & WALTZ] [BALLAD] [DANCE] [LATIN] [USER] TRANSPOSE [E ] [ ] TEMPO [E ] [ ] [TAP TEMPO] [FADE IN/OUT] MULTI PAD [1] [2] [3] [4] [STOP] STYLE CONTROL [ACMP] [BREAK] [INTRO] MAIN [A] MAIN [B] MAIN [C] MAIN [D] [ENDING/rit.] [AUTO FILL IN] [OTS LINK] [SYNC. STOP] [SYNC. START] [START/STOP] DIGITAL STUDIO [SOUND CREATOR] [DIGITAL RECORDING] [MIXING CONSOLE] PSR-2100 PSR-1100 MENU [DEMO] [HELP] [FUNCTION] [DIRECT ACCESS] [BALANCE] [CHANNEL ON/OFF] [NEXT] [BACK] VOICE PART [MAIN] [LAYER] [LEFT] [MUSIC FINDER] [EXIT] [ENTER] VOICE EFFECT [LEFT HOLD] [TOUCH] [SUSTAIN] [HARMONY/ECHO] [MONO] [DSP] [VARIATION] VOICE [PIANO & HARPSI] [E.PIANO] [ORGAN & ACCORDION] [PERCUSSION] [GUITAR] [BASS] [BRASS] [WOODWIND] [STRINGS] [CHOIR&PAD] [SYNTH.] [XG] [USER] [ORGAN FLUTES] (PSR-2100 only) UPPER OCTAVE [E ] [ ] MIC. (PSR-2100 only) [VH TYPE SELECT] [MIC. SETTING] [VOCAL HARMONY] [EFFECT] [TALK] ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] [2] [3] [4] REGISTRATION MEMORY [FREEZE] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [MEMORY] PEDAL [PEDAL1] [PEDAL2] WHEEL [PITCH BEND] [MODULATION] (PSR-2100 only) SONG FUNCTION Corresponding LCD display and function TRACK1 CHANNEL selection TRACK2 CHANNEL selection SONG SETTING See pages 140 140 140 UTILITY METRONOME settings 151 STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT SPLIT POINT (ACMP) setting 141 CONTROLLER TUNE TRANSPOSE assignment TRANSPOSE settings 144 126 — — — — — FUNCTION E MIXING CONSOLE E FUNCTION MIDI MIDI CLOCK setting 148 UTILITY TAP settings FADE IN/OUT settings 152 151 MULTI PAD MULTI PAD EDIT DIGITAL RECORDING FUNCTION MULTI PAD CREATOR CHORD FINGERING 77 REPEAT/CHORD MATCH settings FINGERING TYPE selection VOICE settings PANPOT settings VOLUME settings HARMONIC CONTENT settings BRIGHTNESS settings REVERB settings CHORUS settings DSP settings VOLUME/VOICE MIXING CONSOLE (STYLE PART) FILTER EFFECT FUNCTION STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT SYNC. STOP WINDOW setting 122 141 125 126 127 141 — — FUNCTION MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE MIXING CONSOLE EQ settings MASTER TUNING setting SCALE TUNING setting 138 130 — FUNCTION UTILITY MIDI LANGUAGE selection LCD BRIGHTNESS settings MIDI settings 154 152 148 VOLUME settings VOICE settings 125 OCTAVE settings 126 Exit from the Direct Access mode MIXING CONSOLE (SONG PART) VOLUME/VOICE — — MIXING CONSOLE TUNE MUSIC FINDER Return to the MAIN display MUSIC FINDER SEARCH1 (Searching the records) 34 — FUNCTION MIXING CONSOLE FUNCTION MIXING CONSOLE STYLE SETTING/SPLIT POINT CONTROLLER EFFECT HARMONY/ECHO TUNE EFFECT SPLIT POINT (LEFT) setting KEYBOARD TOUCH assignment REVERB settings PORTAMENTO TIME settings DSP settings EFFECT TYPE selection 141 144 127 146 126 127 FUNCTION VOICE SET settings 146 MIXING CONSOLE EQ settings 130 FUNCTION — — VOCAL HARMONY EDIT (Editing the VOCAL HARMONY parameters) MIC. EFFECT TYPE selection EFFECT MIC. REVERB setting MIC. DSP setting TALK SETTING — — — — FREEZE REGISTRATION BANK REGISTRATION EDIT (Editing the RAGISTRATION) E VOCAL HARMONY MIXING CONSOLE MIC. SETTING FUNCTION MIXING CONSOLE FUNCTION REGISTRATION SEQUENCE (Creating the REGISTRATION SEQUENCE) PEDAL1 function assignment CONTROLLER PEDAL2 function assignment TUNE PITCH BEND RANGE settings CONTROLLER MODULATION WHEEL settings 131 127 135 145 88 145 142 126 144 PSR-2100/1100 51 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Help Messages The Help messages give you explanations and descriptions of all the main functions and features of the PSR-2100/1100. HELP SONG EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) (STYLE) TOP REC NEW SONG STYLE POP & ROCK METRONOME REPEAT START/STOP REW BACK SYNC. START BALLROOM MARCH & WALTZ DANCE LATIN USER VOICE EFFECT LEFT HOLD TOUCH PIANO & HARPSI. A F B G C H GUITAR LAYER PART D I MENU DEMO E J STRINGS LEFT TEMPO RESET RESET MAIN INTRO SYNC. START MIC. SETTING VOCAL HARMONY HELP EFFECT ENTER EXIT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REGISTRATION MEMORY PART START/STOP DATA ENTRY OTS LINK FREEZE MEMORY MENU DEMO 1 TALK ONE TOUCH SETTING DIRECT ACCESS CHANNEL ON/OFF SYNC. STOP AUTO FILL IN STANDBY ON VH TYPE SELECT SIGNAL BALANCE MAX ENDING / rit. XG ORGAN FLUTES RESET MIC. FUNCTION FADE IN/OUT MIN BREAK WOODWIND SYNTH. OVER STOP MULTI PAD ACMP BRASS PERCUSSION UPPER OCTAVE HELP STYLE CONTROL VARIATION BASS MUSIC FINDER TAP TEMPO TRANSPOSE DSP ORGAN & ACCORDION CHOIR & PAD USER MASTER VOLUME HARMONY/ MONO ECHO SUSTAIN E.PIANO MAIN DIGITAL RECORDING SWING & JAZZ MIXING CONSOLE BALLAD NEXT VOICE DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR FF Help messages can be displayed in any one of the following languages: ENGLISH JAPANESE GERMAN FRENCH SPANISH ITALIAN 2 FUNCTION The language can also be selected in the FUNCTION “LANGUAGE” (page 154) display. 1 2-1 2 3 4 5 6 7 2-2 Select the desired Help topic. 8 Call up the topic. Select the Language, if necessary. The language selected here are also used for various “Messages” shown during operations. 3 BACK Selecting a different language here may cause the following problems. • Some characters of the file names you entered may be garbled. • Files may not be accessible. Restoring the original language solves the above problems. Reading the files on the computer with a different language system may cause similar problems to those above. NEXT When two or more pages available, use this to select different pages. ENTER END Press this to return to the previous display. EXIT DATA ENTRY Help messages also feature links to the detailed explanation or actual setting display of the selected topic. Simply select the underlined word (using the [DATA ENTRY] dial), and press the [ENTER] button to jump to the detailed explanation or actual setting display of the selected topic. 52 PSR-2100/1100 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Using the Metronome The metronome provides a click sound, giving you an accurate tempo guide when you practice, or letting you hear and check how a specific tempo sounds. METRONOME SONG EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) (STYLE) REC TOP NEW SONG METRONOME REPEAT REW START/STOP SYNC. START STYLE POP & ROCK BACK BALLROOM MARCH & WALTZ DANCE LATIN USER PART MENU DEMO TOUCH A F B G C H D I E J GUITAR LAYER STRINGS LEFT RESET RESET ACMP BREAK INTRO AUTO FILL IN STANDBY ON VH TYPE SELECT VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT ONE TOUCH SETTING EXIT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REGISTRATION MEMORY PART SYNC. START MIC. SETTING SIGNAL ENTER CHANNEL ON/OFF SYNC. STOP XG ORGAN FLUTES BALANCE DIRECT ACCESS MAX ENDING / rit. WOODWIND SYNTH. RESET MIC. FUNCTION FADE IN/OUT MIN MAIN BRASS VARIATION PERCUSSION OVER STOP MULTI PAD STYLE CONTROL BASS DSP UPPER OCTAVE HELP MASTER VOLUME ORGAN & ACCORDION CHOIR & PAD USER TEMPO E.PIANO MUSIC FINDER TAP TEMPO TRANSPOSE HARMONY/ MONO ECHO SUSTAIN PIANO & HARPSI. DIGITAL RECORDING SWING & JAZZ VOICE EFFECT LEFT HOLD MAIN MIXING CONSOLE BALLAD NEXT VOICE DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR FF START/STOP DATA ENTRY OTS LINK FREEZE MEMORY The metronome starts by pressing the [METRONOME] button. Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO[ ] [ ] buttons (see below). To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME] button again. The sound, volume level, and the beat (time signature) of the metronome can all be changed (page 151). Adjusting the Tempo This section shows you to adjust the playback tempo — which not only affects the metronome, but also the playback of a song or an accompaniment style. TAP TEMPO TEMPO RESET SONG EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) (STYLE) REC TOP NEW SONG STYLE POP & ROCK METRONOME REPEAT START/STOP REW BACK SYNC. START BALLROOM MARCH & WALTZ DANCE LATIN USER TOUCH A F B G C H PART D I MENU DEMO E J LAYER LEFT GUITAR STRINGS USER TRANSPOSE TEMPO RESET RESET MIN MAIN STANDBY ON 1 TAP TEMPO TEMPO SYNC. START XG ORGAN FLUTES VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT ONE TOUCH SETTING ENTER DIRECT ACCESS EXIT CHANNEL ON/OFF SYNC. STOP AUTO FILL IN WOODWIND SYNTH. SIGNAL BALANCE MAX ENDING / rit. INTRO BRASS RESET MIC. FUNCTION MULTI PAD BREAK BASS CHOIR & PAD OVER STOP FADE IN/OUT ACMP VARIATION PERCUSSION UPPER OCTAVE HELP STYLE CONTROL DSP ORGAN & ACCORDION MUSIC FINDER TAP TEMPO MASTER VOLUME HARMONY/ MONO ECHO SUSTAIN E.PIANO MAIN DIGITAL RECORDING SWING & JAZZ VOICE EFFECT LEFT HOLD PIANO & HARPSI. MIXING CONSOLE BALLAD NEXT VOICE DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR FF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REGISTRATION MEMORY PART START/STOP DATA ENTRY OTS LINK FREEZE 2 RESET Press either the TEMPO [ button or the [ ] button. E Press this to ND close the TEMPO display. MEMORY Songs and accompaniment styles have been given default (initial) tempo settings, designed to best suit the song/style. Adjust the tempo by using either the TEMPO [ ] [ ] buttons or the [DATA ENTRY] dial. The number in the display indicates how many quarter-note beats there are in one minute. The range is between 5 and 500. The higher the value, the faster the tempo. ] EXIT When you change the tempo, both tempos of the current song and style will be changed to the same tempo. To restore their respective default (initial) tempo settings, press both the TEMPO [ ] [ ] buttons simultaneously. Also refer to the “Tempo Indications — MAIN display” (page 54) for more about tempo. PSR-2100/1100 53 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data Tap Tempo This useful feature lets you tap out the tempo for a song or an accompaniment style. Simply tap the [TAP TEMPO] button at the desired speed, and the tempo of the song or the accompaniment style changes to match your tapping. the song or the 1 Playback accompaniment style (page 62, 79). 2 TAP TEMPO TEMPO RESET Tap the [TAP TEMPO] button twice to change the tempo. ■ Tempo Indications — MAIN Display There are three different tempo indications in the Main display, as shown below. Indicates the default (initial) tempo setting for the currently selected song (unless the tempo has been changed manually). Indicates the current tempo for the selected song, accompaniment style or the metronome which is now playing back. When nothing is playing back (stopped), this indicates the tempo for the selected style. When the song and style are played back simultaneously, the tempo of the style is automatically changed to match the tempo of the song, and is displayed here. This tempo is used for recording when recording a song or accompaniment style. Indicates the default (initial) tempo setting for the currently selected accompaniment style (unless the tempo has been changed manually). 54 PSR-2100/1100 Hitting the [TAP TEMPO] button produces a tapping sound. You can change this sound, if desired (page 152). n You can also use Tap Tempo to automatically start the song or accompaniment style at the desired tempo. While both the song and accompaniment style are stopped, tap the [TAP TEMPO] button several times, and the selected accompaniment style starts automatically at the tempo you tapped. While a song is set to Sync. Start stand-by (page 63, 79), tapping the [TAP TEMPO] button starts the song playback in the same manner. For songs and styles in 2/4 and 4/4 time, tap four times; for 3/4 time, tap three times; for 5/4 time, tap five times. Playing the Demos The PSR-2100/1100 is an extraordinarily versatile and sophisticated instrument, featuring a wide variety of dynamic voices and rhythms, plus a wealth of advanced functions. Three different types of Demo songs have been specially prepared showcasing the stunning sound and features of the PSR-2100/1100. Reference MENU DEMO SONG EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) (STYLE) TOP REC NEW SONG STYLE POP & ROCK METRONOME REPEAT START/STOP REW BACK HELP SYNC. START BALLROOM MARCH & WALTZ DANCE LATIN USER VOICE EFFECT LEFT HOLD TOUCH PIANO & HARPSI. A F B G C H PART D I MENU DEMO E J LAYER MIXING CONSOLE LEFT GUITAR STRINGS USER FUNCTION TEMPO RESET RESET MIN ACMP MAIN BREAK 1 SYNC. START WOODWIND SYNTH. XG ORGAN FLUTES VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT SIGNAL ONE TOUCH SETTING ENTER EXIT CHANNEL ON/OFF SYNC. STOP AUTO FILL IN BRASS OVER BALANCE DIRECT ACCESS MAX ENDING / rit. INTRO BASS CHOIR & PAD RESET MIC. FUNCTION FADE IN/OUT STYLE CONTROL VARIATION PERCUSSION UPPER OCTAVE HELP STOP MULTI PAD STANDBY ON DSP ORGAN & ACCORDION MUSIC FINDER TAP TEMPO TRANSPOSE MASTER VOLUME HARMONY/ MONO ECHO SUSTAIN E.PIANO MAIN DIGITAL RECORDING SWING & JAZZ BALLAD NEXT VOICE DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR FF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REGISTRATION MEMORY PART START/STOP DATA ENTRY OTS LINK FREEZE MEMORY MENU DEMO HELP FUNCTION 2 2-1 Use the [BACK][NEXT] buttons to select the desired Demo category. Function Demos ....... These demonstrate each of the different functions. Voice Demos ............. These showcase the voices. Style Demos .............. These introduce you to the rhythms and accompaniment styles. BACK A F B G C H D I E J NEXT 2-3 1 2-2 2 Use these to select different display pages. 3 4 5 6 7 Press one of these buttons to start the desired demo. 8 Press this to play back all Demo songs/items continuously, starting from the first item at the top left of the display. This is available only from the FUNCTION page. All of the available demos are played back in sequence, starting from the one at top left. The VOICE and STYLE pages do not have the [AUTO] button; however, all demo songs are played back in sequence. Pressing this button cancels the interactive features of the Function Demos (otherwise available in step 3 below). PSR-2100/1100 55 Playing the Demos 3 For the Function demos, an introduction screen appears in the display and the Demo starts playing. BACK This example shows the Sound System in the FUNCTION demo. NEXT n Press the SONG [START/ STOP] button to stop the Demo song. To start the Demo again from the point at which it was stopped, press the SONG [START/ STOP] button again. Rewind and fast-forward can also be used with the Demo songs (page 81). MAIN F LAYER G H LEFT I J Select the desired word or item by using the [DATAENTRY] dial, then press the [ENTER] button or number buttons ([1▼], [2▼], etc.) to call it up. EXIT END Return to the MAIN screen. 56 PSR-2100/1100 Use the [BACK][NEXT] buttons in the introduction screen to call up the previous or next page. ENTER Voices The PSR-2100/1100 gives you an enormous selection of authentic voices, including various keyboard instruments, strings and brass — and many, many more. VOICE PIANO & HARPSI. E.PIANO ORGAN & ACCORDION BASS BRASS WOODWIND SYNTH. XG GUITAR SONG STRINGS TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 1 METRONOME REPEAT CHOIR & PAD (STYLE) (L) (R) TOP REC NEW SONG STYLE POP & ROCK START/STOP REW BACK SYNC. START BALLROOM MARCH & WALTZ DANCE LATIN USER A F B G C H D I LAYER LEFT MENU DEMO TEMPO RESET RESET E MIN ACMP BREAK MAIN INTRO BRASS VARIATION PERCUSSION CHOIR & PAD WOODWIND SYNTH. XG ORGAN FLUTES MIC. VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT OVER SIGNAL ONE TOUCH SETTING ENTER EXIT CHANNEL ON/OFF SYNC. START BASS DSP RESET BALANCE DIRECT ACCESS SYNC. STOP AUTO FILL IN ORGAN & ACCORDION MUSIC FINDER FUNCTION MAX ENDING / rit. HARMONY/ MONO ECHO SUSTAIN E.PIANO UPPER OCTAVE J HELP STOP MULTI PAD FADE IN/OUT STYLE CONTROL GUITAR STRINGS USER TAP TEMPO STANDBY ON TOUCH MAIN PART TRANSPOSE MASTER VOLUME VOICE EFFECT LEFT HOLD PIANO & HARPSI. DIGITAL RECORDING SWING & JAZZ ORGAN FLUTES NEXT VOICE DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR FF MIXING CONSOLE BALLAD USER PERCUSSION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REGISTRATION MEMORY PART START/STOP DATA ENTRY OTS LINK FREEZE MEMORY Selecting a Voice 1 Press the [MAIN] button to turn the MAIN part on, then press [F] button to call up the menu for selecting the MAIN voice. MAIN Turn MAIN on. The voice you’re selecting here belongs to the MAIN part, and is called the MAIN voice. (See page 59 for more information.) F LAYER You’ll want to hear the MAIN voice all by itself — so make sure that the LAYER and LEFT parts are turned off. G LEFT H I J 2 Select the desired voice group. VOICE PIANO & HARPSI. GUITAR STRINGS USER E.PIANO ORGAN & ACCORDION BASS BRASS WOODWIND SYNTH. XG CHOIR & PAD PERCUSSION When you select a voice group, the last selected voice will automatically be selected. ORGAN FLUTES PSR-2100/1100 57 Voices 3 Indicates that the display is for selecting the MAIN voice (page 25). BACK 3-1 A F B G C H D I E J NEXT Select the memory location of the voice (PRESET/ USER/ FLOPPY DISK). Selecting a voice automatically selects the best-suited effect and other settings for that particular voice. You can disable this so that settings are not automatically selected (page 146). n You can set how much the volume of the voice changes according to your playing strength (page 144). n 3-3 Select the voice. For a list of the available voices, refer to the separate Data List. n 3-2 Select the various pages in the current voice group. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Press this to start the demo of the selected voice. To stop the demo at any time, press this button again. 8 Press this to call up the display for selecting the voice group. 4 Play the keyboard to hear the selected voice. END You can set whether the voice bank and program change numbers (“MSBLSB-Program Change number” at the right above the voice name) are displayed or not (page 152). n Press this to return to the MAIN EXIT display. XG is a major enhancement of the GM System level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specially to provide more voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future. Voice Characteristics The voice type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the voice name. Live! (PSR-2100 only) These acoustic instrument sounds were sampled in stereo, to produce a truly authentic, rich sound — full of atmosphere and ambience. Cool! These voices capture the dynamic textures and subtle nuances of electric instruments — thanks to a huge amount of memory and some very sophisticated programming. Sweet! These acoustic instrument sounds also benefit from Yamaha’s sophisticated technology — and feature a sound so finely detailed and natural, you’ll swear you’re playing the real thing! Drum Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard. SFX Various special effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard. Organ Flutes! (PSR-2100 only) This authentic organ voice lets you use the Sound Creator to adjust the various footages and craft your own original organ sounds. Keyboard Percussion When one of the drum of SFX kits is selected in the PERCUSSION voice group, various drum, percussion, and special effect sounds are assigned to individual keys, letting you play the sounds from the keyboard. The various drums and percussion instruments of the Standard Kit are indicated by symbols below the assigned keys. Keep in mind that even though different kits feature different sounds, some same-named sounds in different kits are identical. Refer to the separate Data List (Drum/key Assignment List) for a listing of the sounds in each drum/SFX kit. 58 PSR-2100/1100 Voices Layer/Left — Playing Several Sounds Simultaneously The PSR-2100/1100 lets you set three voices for simultaneous play: MAIN, LAYER, and LEFT. By effectively combining these three, you can create richly textured, multi-instrument setups for your performance. MAIN LAYER SONG EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) (STYLE) TOP REC NEW SONG STYLE POP & ROCK METRONOME REPEAT START/STOP REW BACK SYNC. START PIANO & HARPSI. BALLROOM MARCH & WALTZ DANCE LATIN USER PART A F B G C H D I MENU DEMO STRINGS LEFT E MIN STYLE CONTROL ACMP BREAK MAIN INTRO SYNC. START XG VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT ONE TOUCH SETTING BALANCE ENTER DIRECT ACCESS EXIT CHANNEL ON/OFF SYNC. STOP WOODWIND SYNTH. SIGNAL FUNCTION MAX AUTO FILL IN CHOIR & PAD ORGAN FLUTES OVER STOP ENDING / rit. BRASS VARIATION PERCUSSION RESET MIC. RESET MULTI PAD FADE IN/OUT STANDBY ON BASS DSP LEFT MUSIC FINDER HELP RESET ORGAN & ACCORDION UPPER OCTAVE J TAP TEMPO TEMPO MASTER VOLUME E.PIANO GUITAR LAYER USER TRANSPOSE HARMONY/ MONO ECHO SUSTAIN MAIN DIGITAL RECORDING SWING & JAZZ MIXING CONSOLE BALLAD TOUCH VOICE DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR FF VOICE EFFECT LEFT HOLD NEXT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REGISTRATION MEMORY PART START/STOP FREEZE DATA ENTRY OTS LINK MEMORY Playing a layer of two voices LAYER part MAIN part Playing two voices separately — on the left and right sections of the keyboard Split point LEFT part MAIN part Left range Playing three different voices — one on the left section of the keyboard, plus a layer of two on the right Right range Split point LAYER part LEFT part MAIN part Left range Right range Layer — Layering Two Different Voices 1 Press this to turn the LAYER function on. To turn it off, press the button again. MAIN 2 Select Layer with the [G] button. Press the same button to call up the VOICE display, from which you can select the specific voice you want to play in a layer with the Main voice. The method of selecting a voice here is the same as that in VOICE (MAIN) display (page 57). LAYER There is an alternate way for quickly selecting both the MAIN and LAYER voices from the panel: While holding down one panel voice button, press a second voice button. The first selected voice becomes the MAIN voice, and the second becomes the LAYER. LEFT F G H I J Press this to ND return to the MAIN display. E EXIT PSR-2100/1100 59 Voices Left — Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard 1 2 Set the LEFT to ON. Press this button again to set it to OFF. MAIN Select LEFT with the [H] button. Press the same button to call up the VOICE display, from which you can select the specific voice you want to play in a left. How to select the voice is the same as the way of VOICE (MAIN) screen (page 57). LAYER The split point can be freely set to any key on the keyboard. (page 141). n Each part (MAIN, LAYER, and LEFT) can have its own volume setting (page 64). n You can also use the LAYER and LEFT functions together, to create a combination layer/split. To do this, set separate voices for the left and right sections of the keyboard (as indicated), and set up a layer of two different voices on the right. LEFT F G H I J EXIT END Press this to return to the MAIN display. Applying Voice Effects This section of the panel lets you add a variety of effects to the voices you play on the keyboard. VOICE EFFECT LEFT HOLD SONG EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) (STYLE) REC TOP NEW SONG STYLE POP & ROCK TOUCH REW SYNC. START BALLROOM MARCH & WALTZ DANCE LATIN USER VARIATION PART NEXT VOICE EFFECT LEFT HOLD TOUCH PIANO & HARPSI. A F B G C H D I LAYER LEFT TEMPO RESET RESET GUITAR STRINGS MIN ACMP BREAK MAIN INTRO OTS LINK SYNC. START XG VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT SIGNAL ONE TOUCH SETTING ENTER EXIT CHANNEL ON/OFF SYNC. STOP AUTO FILL IN WOODWIND SYNTH. OVER BALANCE DIRECT ACCESS MAX ENDING / rit. BRASS CHOIR & PAD RESET MIC. FUNCTION FADE IN/OUT STYLE CONTROL BASS PERCUSSION ORGAN FLUTES MUSIC FINDER HELP STOP MULTI PAD STANDBY ON VARIATION ORGAN & ACCORDION UPPER OCTAVE J E TAP TEMPO TRANSPOSE MASTER VOLUME DSP E.PIANO MAIN USER MENU DEMO HARMONY/ MONO ECHO SUSTAIN VOICE DIGITAL RECORDING SWING & JAZZ DSP BACK DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR FF MIXING CONSOLE BALLAD HARMONY/ MONO ECHO METRONOME REPEAT START/STOP SUSTAIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REGISTRATION MEMORY PART START/STOP DATA ENTRY FREEZE MEMORY Press one of the effect buttons to turn the corresponding effects on. Press it again to turn the effect off. For explanations on each of the effects, see below. ■ TOUCH This button turns the touch response of the keyboard on or off. When this is set to off, the same volume is produced no matter how strongly or softly you play the keyboard. ■ SUSTAIN When this Sustain feature is on, all notes played on the keyboard (MAIN/LAYER parts only) have a longer sustain. You can also set the Sustain depth (page 93). ■ DSP The PSR-2100/1100 features a variety of dynamic built-in digital effects, letting you process the sound in various ways. You can use DSP to enhance the voices in subtle ways — such as by applying chorus to add animation and depth, or using a symphonic effect to give the sound warmth and richness. DSP also has effects such as distortion that can completely change the character of the sound. DSP is set for the currently selected part (MAIN/LAYER/LEFT). 60 PSR-2100/1100 The DSP and VARIATION effect types and the their depth can be selected and adjusted in the MIXING CONSOLE display (page 127). Voices ■ VARIATION This control changes the Variation effect settings, letting you alter some aspect of the effect, depending on the selected type. For example, when the Rotary Speaker effect is selected (page 127), this lets you switch the rotor speed between slow and fast. ■ HARMONY/ECHO This control adds Harmony or Echo effects to the voices played on the right hand section of the keyboard (page 146). The Portamento effect creates a smooth pitch glide between successively played notes. ■ MONO This control determines whether the voice is played monophonically (only one note at a time) or polyphonically for each part (MAIN/LAYER/LEFT). This is set to MONO when the lamp is lit, and set to polyphonic when the lamp is off. When set to MONO, only the last note played will sound. This lets you play wind instrument voices more realistically. Depending on the selected voice, the MONO setting also lets you effectively use the Portamento effect, when playing in legato. ■ LEFT HOLD This function causes the left part voice to be held even when the keys are released — the same effect as when the sustain pedal is pressed. This function is especially effective when used with the auto accompaniment. For example, if you play and release a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard (with the left part on and the Left voice set to Strings), the strings part sustains, adding a natural richness to the overall accompaniment sound. You can add special emphasis to melody lines you play over chords by using the Layer function with a monophonic voice. Set the Main voice to play polyphonically and set the Layer voice to play monophonically (MONO). In this case, the melody you play — including the top notes of any chords — sounds monophonically. Try this using the following voices. MAIN voice: Brass Section (polyphonic) + LAYER voice: Sweet Trump (monophonic) PITCH BEND Wheel & MODULATION Wheel Use the PSR-2100/1100 PITCH BEND wheel to bend notes up (roll the wheel away from you) or down (roll the wheel toward you) while playing the keyboard. The PITCH BEND wheel is self-centering and will automatically return to normal pitch when released. The Modulation function applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard (PSR2100). Moving the MODULATION wheel all the way towards yourself minimizes the depth of the effect, while rotating it away from yourself increases it. PITCH BEND The maximum pitch bend range can be changed (page 126). MODULATION In order to avoid accidentally applying modulation set the depth to its minimum setting. Adjusting the Octave setting The [UPPER OCTAVE] button allows the MAIN and LAYER parts to be simultaneously transposed up or down by one octave. UPPER OCTAVE RESET More detailed octave-related settings for each part can be made by using the Mixing Console function (page 126). PSR-2100/1100 61 Styles The PSR-2100/1100 features styles (accompaniment patterns) in a variety of different musical genres including pops, jazz, Latin and dance. To use it, all you have to do is play the chords with your left hand as you perform and the selected Accompaniment Style (style) matching your music will automatically play along, instantly following the chords you play. Try selecting some of the different styles (refer to separate Data List (Style List) ) and play them. STYLE CONTROL ACMP MAIN SYNC. STOP ENDING / rit. INTRO BREAK SONG EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) (STYLE) REC TOP NEW SONG STYLE POP & ROCK METRONOME REPEAT REW START/STOP BACK SYNC. START BALLROOM MARCH & WALTZ DANCE LATIN USER TOUCH PIANO & HARPSI. A F B G C H D I DIGITAL RECORDING SWING & JAZZ VOICE EFFECT LEFT HOLD LAYER PART LEFT GUITAR STRINGS USER MENU DEMO TRANSPOSE TEMPO RESET RESET E J MIN MAIN BREAK ACMP XG VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT SIGNAL ONE TOUCH SETTING EXIT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REGISTRATION MEMORY PART SYNC. START WOODWIND SYNTH. ENTER CHANNEL ON/OFF SYNC. STOP AUTO FILL IN BRASS CHOIR & PAD ORGAN FLUTES OVER BALANCE DIRECT ACCESS MAX ENDING / rit. INTRO BASS PERCUSSION RESET MIC. FUNCTION FADE IN/OUT STYLE CONTROL VARIATION ORGAN & ACCORDION MUSIC FINDER HELP STOP MULTI PAD STANDBY ON DSP E.PIANO UPPER OCTAVE TAP TEMPO MASTER VOLUME HARMONY/ MONO ECHO SUSTAIN START/STOP MAIN MIXING CONSOLE BALLAD NEXT VOICE DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR FF SYNC. START OTS LINK AUTO FILL IN START/STOP DATA ENTRY OTS LINK FREEZE MEMORY Playing a style 1 SONG EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) (STYLE) TOP REC NEW SONG METRONOME REPEAT START/STOP REW SYNC. START STYLE POP & ROCK BACK STYLE DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR FF BALLROOM DANCE LATIN TOUCH PIANO & HARPSI. POP & ROCK A F B G PART D MENU DEMO E STRINGS USER BREAK MAIN AUTO FILL IN STANDBY ON SYNC. START VOCAL HARMONY 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REGISTRATION MEMORY DATA ENTRY OTS LINK A F B G C H D I E J PSR-2100/1100 2 3 4 EFFECT EXIT 1 PART START/STOP FREEZE MEMORY BACK 1 TALK ENTER 2 62 MIC. SETTING ONE TOUCH SETTING BALANCE DIRECT ACCESS CHANNEL ON/OFF SYNC. STOP VH TYPE SELECT SIGNAL FUNCTION MAX ENDING / rit. INTRO USER RESET MIC. OVER STOP FADE IN/OUT MIN ACMP UPPER OCTAVE LATIN MUSIC FINDER RESET MULTI PAD STYLE CONTROL XG SYNTH. CHOIR & PAD MARCH & WALTZ WOODWIND ORGAN FLUTES DANCE J HELP RESET BRASS BASS I BALLAD TEMPO MASTER VOLUME VARIATION PERCUSSION BALLROOM GUITAR LEFT H C DSP ORGAN & ACCORDION USER TAP TEMPO TRANSPOSE HARMONY/ MONO ECHO SUSTAIN E.PIANO MAIN LAYER MARCH & WALTZ MIXING CONSOLE BALLAD VOICE EFFECT LEFT HOLD VOICE DIGITAL RECORDING SWING & JAZZ NEXT SWING & JAZZ 5 6 7 8 NEXT For a list of the available accompaniment styles, refer to the separate Data List. 2-1 Select a location (Preset, User, Floppy Disk) for saving the style. 2-2 Select a Style. When you've opened a lower directory's display, this button (UP) lets you call up the next higher directory, from which you can select Style groups. PSR2100_E.book Page 63 Tuesday, January 28, 2003 2:11 PM Styles 3 When the [ACMP] button is set to on, you can play/indicate chords from the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard. (Depending on the settings, this may be the range of the Left voice, or the entire keyboard.) STYLE CONTROL BREAK ACMP MAIN INTRO SYNC. STOP ENDING / rit. AUTO FILL IN 4 START/STOP OTS LINK Turn SYNC. (SYNCHRONIZED) START on. STYLE CONTROL ACMP SYNC. START You can set the key range for auto accompaniment (page 141). MAIN BREAK INTRO SYNC. STOP ENDING / rit. AUTO FILL IN SYNC. START START/STOP OTS LINK 5 As soon as you play a chord with the auto accompaniment section, the style starts. For details about chord fingerings, refer to page 65. Split point The Tempo can be adjusted using the TEMPO [ ][ ] or [TAP TEMPO] button. If you tap the [TAP TEMPO] button, the tempo will adjust to the same speed that you tapped. Auto Accompaniment section 6 Stop the style. SYNC. STOP SYNC. START START/STOP END Turn ACMP off. STYLE CONTROL ACMP BREAK INTRO Sync. Start Enabling this lets you start the style simply by playing the keyboard. • You can begin the rhythm channels (tracks) of the Style by pressing the [START/STOP] button. • The rhythm channels of the style can also be started by tapping the [TAP TEMPO] button. With the style stopped, tap the [TAP TEMPO] button three, four or five times (three for 3/4 time, four for 2/4 or 4/4 time, five for 5/4 time). When you simultaneously play back accompaniment styles with a song, the accompaniment parts recorded to the song (channels 9 - 16) are temporarily replaced by the selected accompaniment style — letting you try out and use different accompaniment with the song (page 80). Accompaniment Style Characteristics The defining characteristics of some of the accompaniment styles are indicated above the relevant style names in the Open/Save display. Session! These styles provide even greater realism and authentic backing by mixing in original chord types and changes, as well as special riffs with chord changes, with the Main sections. These have been programmed to add “spice” and a professional touch to your performances of certain songs and in certain genres. As a result, the styles may not necessarily be appropriate — or even harmonically correct — for all songs and for all chord playing. In some cases for example, playing a simple major triad may result in a seventh chord, or playing an on-bass chord may result in incorrect or unexpected accompaniment. PSR-2100/1100 63 Styles Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only 1 The Rhythm channels are part of the styles. Each style has different rhythm patterns. Select a style (page 62). 2 You can also start the rhythm simply by playing a key on the keyboard, if Sync Start is enabled (turn on the [SYNC.START] button). Rhythm starts. STYLE CONTROL ACMP MAIN INTRO BREAK ENDING / rit. SYNC. STOP AUTO FILL IN SYNC. START START/STOP OTS LINK Set to off. 3 Play along with the rhythm playback. The Tempo can be adjusted using the TEMPO [ ][ ] or [TAP TEMPO] buttons. If you tap the [TAP TEMPO] button, the tempo will adjust to the same speed that you tapped. END Press the STYLE [START/STOP] button again to stop the rhythm playback. Adjusting the Volume Balance/Channel Muting BALANCE display MULTI PAD part MIC part Call up the BALANCE display. STYLE part (Auto Accompaniment section) SONG part BALANCE Parts played from the keyboard (MAIN/LAYER/ LEFT) Adjust the output level of the Part. CHANNEL ON/OFF CHANNEL ON/OFF display PART Call up the Channel ON/ OFF display. 64 PSR-2100/1100 Call up the STYLE display by pressing the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button, then turn the instrument you want to cancel off. To listen to only one instrument by itself, hold down the appropriate button for the channel to set the channel to SOLO. To cancel SOLO, simply press the appropriate channel button again. Channel Refers to the MIDI channel in the song data (page 160). The channels are assigned as shown below. Song 1 - 16 Accompaniment Style 9 - 16 PSR2100_E.book Page 65 Tuesday, January 28, 2003 2:11 PM Styles Chord Fingerings The style playback can be controlled by the chords you play in the keys to the left of the split point. There are 7 types of fingerings as described below. Go to the CHORD FINGERING page (page 142), and select the Chord Fingerings. The page shows how to play chords with your left hand. SINGLE FINGER Single Finger accompaniment makes it simple to produce beautifully orchestrated accompaniment using major, seventh, minor and minor-seventh chords by pressing a minimum number of keys on the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard. The abbreviated chord fingerings described below are used. For a major chord, press the root key only. C For a minor chord, simultaneously press the root key and a black key to its left. Cm For a seventh chord, simultaneously press the root key and a white key to its left. C7 For a minor-seventh chord, simultaneously press the root key and both a white and black key to its left. Cm7 MULTI FINGER The Multi Finger mode automatically detects Single Finger or Fingered chord fingerings, so you can use either type of fingering without having to switch fingering modes. If you want to play minor, seventh, or minor-seventh chords using the SINGLE FINGER operation in the MULTI FINGER Mode, always press the closest white/black key(s) to the root of the chord. FINGERED This mode lets you produce accompaniment by playing full chords on the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard. The Fingered mode recognizes the various chord types listed on the next page. FINGERED ON BASS This mode accepts the same fingerings as the FINGERED mode, but the lowest note played in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard is used as the bass note, allowing you to play “on bass” chords. For example, to indicate a C-on-E chord, play a C major chord with E as the lowest note (E, G, C). FULL KEYBOARD This method detects chords in the entire key range. Chords are detected in a way similar to Fingered, even if you split the notes between your left and right hands — for example, playing a bass note with your left hand and a chord with your right, or by playing a chord with your left hand and a melody note with your right. AI FINGERED This mode is basically the same as FINGERED, with the exception that less than three notes can be played to indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.). Chord detection in the AI Full Keyboard mode occurs at approximately 8th-note intervals. Extremely short chords — less than an 8th note in length — may not be detected. In Full Keyboard mode, chords are detected based on the lowest and second lowest notes you play. If the two lowest notes fall within a single octave, those two notes determine the chord. If the lowest note and the second lowest note are separated by more than one octave, the lowest note becomes the bass and the chord is determined from the second lowest note and the other notes played in the same octave. AI Artificial Intelligence AI FULL KEYBOARD When this advanced auto accompaniment mode is engaged, the PSR-2100/1100 will automatically create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about anything, anywhere on the keyboard using both hands. You don’t have to worry about specifying the accompaniment chords. Although the AI Full Keyboard mode is designed to work with many songs, some arrangements may not be suitable for use with this feature. This mode is similarto FULL KEYBOARD, with the exception that less than three notes can be played to indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.). 9th and 11th chords cannot be played. PSR-2100/1100 65 Styles Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode (Example for “C” chords) CmM7 CmM7 9 ( ) ( ( C5 CM7 5 Cm7 9 Cm7 11 ) CM7aug 11 ( Caug CM7 ) Csus4 CM7 9 CM7 ) C6 ) C9 ( C6 9 C Cm9 Cm6 Cm7 Cm7 5 CmM7 5 Cdim Cdim7 C7 C7 13 C7 9 C7 5 C7aug C7sus4 Normal Voicing Display for root “C” Major [M] 1-3-5 C Ninth [9] 1-2-3-5 C9 Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6 Sixth ninth [69] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 or 3 - 6 - 2* C69 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7 Major seventh [M7] [M79] Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7 Flatted fifth [ 5] 11 Major seventh flatted fifth [M7 5] Suspended fourth [sus4] Augmented [aug] Major seventh augmented [M7aug] Minor [m] Minor ninth [m9] Minor sixth [m6] 1-4-5 1-3- 5 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 1- 3-5 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 3 - 7 - 2 1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - ( 7) Minor seventh [m7] Minor seventh ninth [m79] Minor seventh eleventh [m711] Minor major seventh [mM7] [mM79] Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7 5] Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7 5] Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 Seventh [7] Seventh flatted ninth [7 9] Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7 13] Seventh ninth [79] Seventh add sharp eleventh [7 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 1 - 3 - 5 1 - 3 - 5 - 6 Diminished [dim] Seventh add thirteenth ] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5)j - 7 CM79 1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - (5) - 7 CM7 11 1 - 3 - 5 C 5 1-3- 5-7 CM7 5 1 - 2 - 3 - 5 1 - 3 - 5 - 6 Minor major seventh ninth 11 ] [713] 9 1 - 3 - 5 - 6 - 7 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 3 - 7 - 2* 1 - (2) - 3 - 4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - (5) - 7 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - 7 or 3 - 6 - 7 Csus4 Caug CM7aug Cm Cm9 Cm6 Cm7 Cm79 Cm711 CmM7 CmM79 Cm7 5 CmM7 5 Cdim Cdim7 C7 C7 9 C7 13 C79 C7 11 C713 C7 9 C7 5 Seventh sharp ninth [7 ] Seventh flatted fifth [7 5] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 Seventh augmented [7aug] C7aug Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 3 - 5 - 7 1 - 4 - 5 - 7 Suspended second [sus2] 1-2-5 Csus2 PSR-2100/1100 ) • Notes in parentheses can be omitted. • For FINGERED, FINGERED ON BASS, and AI FINGERED, if you play any three adjacent keys (including black keys), the chord sound will be canceled and only the rhythm instruments will continue playing (Chord Cancel function). This let you play back only the rhythm. • Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompaniment based only on the root. • A perfect fifth (1 + 5) produces accompaniment based on the root and the fifth. • The auto accompaniment Style will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the minor seventh). • You can also have the PSR-2100/1100 “teach” you how to play Fingered chords. From the CHORD FINGERING display (page 142), specify the chord you want to learn, and the notes you should press are indicated in the display. C7sus4 * Only this voicing (inversion) is recognized. Other chords not marked with an asterisk can be played in any inversion. 66 ( ) ( ) ( ( ) ( ) ) ( Chord Name [Abbreviation] Major seventh ninth Csus2 ( ) 11 ( C7 C7 13 C7 9 ) ) ( ) ( C7 9 ( ( ) ) ( ) Cm Styles Arranging the Style Pattern (SECTIONS: MAIN A/B/C/D, INTRO, ENDING, BREAK) The PSR-2100/1100 features various types of Auto Accompaniment Sections that allow you to vary the arrangement of the Style. They are: Intro, Main, Break and Ending. By switching among them as you play, you can easily produce the dynamic elements of a professional-sounding arrangement in your performance. 1 2 Select a style (page 62). 2-1 Turn the ACMP function on. STYLE CONTROL ACMP MAIN BREAK SYNC. STOP ENDING / rit. INTRO AUTO FILL IN 2-3 2-2 3 SYNC. START START/STOP OTS LINK Turn the SYNC. START function on. Press the [INTRO] button. To cancel the INTRO section before starting the style, press the [INTRO] button again. The Intro section starts as soon as you play a key in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard, and changes to the Main section. Split point Auto Accompaniment section 4 Main sections can be shifted. STYLE CONTROL ACMP BREAK MAIN INTRO SYNC. STOP ENDING / rit. AUTO FILL IN Press this button to add breaks. OTS LINK SYNC. START START/STOP You can also use this function to play only rhythms (page 64). • If you press the [INTRO] button, you can play back an Intro section while an accompaniment is playing. • Section button indications — [BREAK], [INTRO], [MAIN], [ENDING] buttons LED is green — The section is not selected. LED is red — The section is currently selected. LED is off — No section data; the section cannot be played. • You can dynamically control the level of the accompaniment by how softly or strongly you play the keys in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard (page 141). • If you press the [SYNC. START] button while an accompaniment is playing, the accompaniment will stop and the PSR2100/1100 will enter Synchronized Start standby status. • You can also change style sections by using the pedal (page 142). • The Break section lets you add dynamic variations and breaks in the rhythm of the accompaniment, to make your performance sound even more professional. If you press the [BREAK] button while an accompaniment is playing, the fill-in will play back for one measure. • The indicator of the destination section (MAIN A/ B/C/D) will flash while the Break is playing. • When the [AUTO FILLIN] button is set to on and the MAIN [A][B] [C][D] button is pressed after the final half beat (eighth note) of the measure, the fill-in will begin from the next measure. PSR-2100/1100 67 Styles This switches to the ending section. When the ending is finished, the Style stops automatically. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the same [ENDING/rit.] button again while the ending is playing back. 5 STYLE CONTROL ACMP BREAK MAIN INTRO SYNC. STOP ENDING / rit. AUTO FILL IN SYNC. START START/STOP OTS LINK Fade-in/Fade-out The accompaniment style also include a convenient Fade-in/Fade-out function that gradually fades in and fades out the accompaniment. To start the style with a fade-in, press the [FADE IN/OUT] button, then turn SYNC. START on. To cancel the fade-in before starting the style, press the button again. To fade out and stop the Style, press this button while the style is playing. The time of the fade-in/fade-out can also be set (page 151). Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys (SYNC. STOP) When the Synchro Stop function is engaged, accompaniment playback will stop completely when all keys in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard are released. Accompaniment playback will start again as soon as the key in the Auto Accompaniment section is played. 1 Turn ACMP (Accompaniment) on. 2 Turn SYNC. STOP on. SYNC. START is also automatically set to on when SYNC. STOP is turned on. STYLE CONTROL ACMP BREAK MAIN INTRO SYNC. STOP ENDING / rit. AUTO FILL IN 3 SYNC. START START/STOP OTS LINK • Styles can also be started by pressing the STYLE [START/STOP] button. • You can select the Intro and Ending type by pressing the [E] button in the MAIN window (page 69). • If you press the [INTRO] button while the ending is playing, the Intro section will begin playing after the ending is finished. • When the [AUTO FILLIN] button is set to on and you press a MAIN button while the ending is playing, fill-in accompaniment will immediately start playing, continuing with the Main section. • You can begin the accompaniment by using the Ending instead of the Intro section. In this case, the auto accompaniment doesn’t stop when the ending is finished. • If you select a different style while the style is not playing, the “default” tempo for that style is also selected. If the accompaniment is playing, the same tempo is maintained even if you select a different style. • When STOP ACMP is set to on and the accompaniment is not playing, you can play both chords and bass in the Auto Accompaniment section in the keyboard (page 141). As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the auto accompaniment starts. Split point You can also use the SYNC. STOP function by pressing the auto accompaniment section/left-hand range briefly (page 141). Auto Accompaniment section 68 4 The auto accompaniment stops when you release your left hand from the keys. 5 Playing a chord with your left hand automatically restarts the auto accompaniment. PSR-2100/1100 END Press the [SYNC. STOP]/ [SYNC. START] button again to stop the accompaniment. Synchro Stop cannot be set to on when the fingering mode is set to Full Keyboard/AI Full Keyboard or the auto accompaniment on the panel is set to off. Styles Selecting Intro and Ending Types (INTRO/ENDING) 1 To call up the [MAIN] display, first press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button, then press the [EXIT] button. A B C D E 2 3 D E Select a Intro Play the style using the Intro or Ending section (page 30, 31). Select a Ending Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when changing accompaniment sections — Auto Fill In 1 2 STYLE CONTROL ACMP BREAK MAIN INTRO SYNC. STOP ENDING / rit. AUTO FILL IN SYNC. START START/STOP OTS LINK Play the style and switch among the accompaniment sections as they play (page 30, 31). Fill-in patterns play automatically between each change in the Main sections. END Fill A short phrase used to add variation to the style. To cancel the Auto Fill, press the [AUTO FILLIN] button again. You can also add a fill-in by pressing the selected MAIN button again. You can temporarily disable Auto Fill In during a performance by pressing the next Main section’s button twice quickly. PSR-2100/1100 69 Styles Appropriate Panel Setting for the Selected Style (ONE TOUCH SETTING) The convenient One Touch Setting function makes it easy for you to select voices and effects that are appropriate to the style you’re playing. Each preset style has four pre-programmed panel setups that you can select by pressing a single button. SONG EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) (STYLE) TOP REC NEW SONG METRONOME REPEAT START/STOP REW SYNC. START STYLE POP & ROCK BACK BALLROOM MARCH & WALTZ DANCE LATIN USER PART VOICE EFFECT LEFT HOLD TOUCH PIANO & HARPSI. A F B G C H D I LAYER LEFT GUITAR STRINGS USER MENU DEMO TRANSPOSE TEMPO RESET RESET J E BREAK MAIN INTRO STANDBY ON 1 2 SYNC. START WOODWIND SYNTH. XG VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING VOCAL HARMONY TALK ONE TOUCH SETTING EFFECT SIGNAL ONE TOUCH SETTING ENTER EXIT CHANNEL ON/OFF SYNC. STOP AUTO FILL IN BRASS OVER BALANCE DIRECT ACCESS MAX ENDING / rit. BASS CHOIR & PAD RESET MIC. FUNCTION FADE IN/OUT MIN ACMP VARIATION PERCUSSION ORGAN FLUTES MUSIC FINDER HELP STOP MULTI PAD STYLE CONTROL DSP ORGAN & ACCORDION UPPER OCTAVE TAP TEMPO MASTER VOLUME HARMONY/ MONO ECHO SUSTAIN E.PIANO MAIN DIGITAL RECORDING SWING & JAZZ MIXING CONSOLE BALLAD NEXT VOICE DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR FF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REGISTRATION MEMORY PART START/STOP DATA ENTRY OTS LINK FREEZE MEMORY Select a style (page 62). 3 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons ([1] - [4]). LED is red — The One Touch Setting is currently selected. ONE TOUCH SETTING As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the auto accompaniment starts. Split point LED is off — No One Touch Setting data. The button is not available. LED is green — The One Touch Setting is not selected. Auto Accompaniment section Various settings (such as voices, effects, etc.) that match the selected style can be instantly recalled. When the style is not playing, Auto Accompaniment and Sync. Start will automatically be turned on. For details about the One Touch Setting parameters, refer to the separate Data List (Parameter Chart). 4 Stop the Auto Accompaniment. STYLE CONTROL ACMP BREAK MAIN INTRO SYNC. STOP ENDING / rit. AUTO FILL IN 5 START/STOP Try out other One Touch Setting setups. You can also create your own One Touch Setting setups (page 71). ONE TOUCH SETTING 70 SYNC. START OTS LINK PSR-2100/1100 Styles Automatically Changing One Touch Settings with the Sections — OTS Link The convenient OTS (One Touch Setting) Link function lets you automatically have One Touch Settings change when you select a different Main section (A - D). 1 AUTO FILL IN END OTS LINK 2 When you switch among the Main sections (A - D), the corresponding One Touch Setting will be called up automatically. The Main sections A, B, C, and D correspond to One Touch Settings 1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively. The One Touch Settings can be set to change with the sections in one of two different timings (page 141): • Immediately when you press a section button. • At the next measure (in an accompaniment style), after you press a section button. To cancel the OTS Link function, press the [OTS LINK] button again. Registering the Panel Controls in One Touch Setting (ONE TOUCH SETTING) This section covers how to create your own One Touch Setting setups (four setups per style). For a list of One Touch Setting setup parameters, refer to the separate Data List (Parameter Chart). 2 1 Select a style. 4 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING buttons:[1] through [4]. Set up the panel controls such as selecting a voice as required. 3 Press the [MEMORY] button. MEMORY ONE TOUCH SETTING The items you can register in a One Touch Setting are Voice, Harmony, Multi Pad and Pedal END A message prompting you to save the current style will appear. Select “YES” to call up the STYLE display, then save the panel settings (page 39, 47). Unless you store the panel settings here, the registered settings will be deleted when you select a different accompaniment style. PSR-2100/1100 71 Styles Calling Up Ideal Setups for Your Music — Music Finder The Music Finder feature lets you instantly call up the appropriate settings for the instrument — including voice, style, and One Touch Settings — simply by selecting the desired song title. If you want to play a certain song but don’t know which style and voice settings would be appropriate, the convenient Music Finder function will help you out. The recommended settings, which together make up a “record,” can also be edited and stored. This lets you create and save your own Music Finder records for future recall. SONG EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) (STYLE) TOP REC NEW SONG STYLE POP & ROCK METRONOME REPEAT START/STOP REW BACK FF SYNC. START BALLROOM MARCH & WALTZ DANCE LATIN USER PART MUSIC FINDER VOICE EFFECT LEFT HOLD TOUCH PIANO & HARPSI. A F B G C H D I LAYER GUITAR STRINGS LEFT USER MENU DEMO TRANSPOSE TEMPO RESET RESET J E MIN ACMP BREAK MAIN 1 2 SYNC. START WOODWIND SYNTH. XG VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING VOCAL HARMONY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REGISTRATION MEMORY PART START/STOP DATA ENTRY OTS LINK FREEZE MEMORY Select a record. For example, select the top record by pressing the [1▲▼] button to call up the recommended setups. The setting data shown here is referred to as a “record.” press these buttons to move the cursor to the next /previous style. Simultaneously press the [▲▼] buttons to move the cursor to the first record. Play the style (page 63). PSR-2100/1100 Keep in mind that Music Finder is a performance aid in that it automatically finds appropriate accompaniment styles and voices for your playing. Even though you can specify song titles, it does not actually contain song data. MUSIC FINDER All...........................Show all records. FAVORITE..............Show the records that have added to the “Favorite” page. SEARCH1,2 ...........Show the results by SEARCH function (page 73). Sorting the records MUSIC....... The record is sorted by song title. STYLE .......The record is sorted by style name. BEAT......... The record is sorted by beat. TEMPO ..... The record is sorted by tempo. F Change the order of the records (ascending or descending). G 72 EFFECT ONE TOUCH SETTING Select a record by song title. When sorting records by song title, use the [1▲▼] button to skip up or down through the songs alphabetically. Simulta1 2 3 4 5 6 neously press the [▲▼] buttons to move the cursor to the first Select a record by style name. When record. sorting the records by style name, 3 TALK SIGNAL ENTER EXIT CHANNEL ON/OFF SYNC. STOP AUTO FILL IN BRASS OVER BALANCE DIRECT ACCESS MAX ENDING / rit. INTRO BASS CHOIR & PAD RESET MIC. FUNCTION FADE IN/OUT STYLE CONTROL VARIATION PERCUSSION ORGAN FLUTES MUSIC FINDER HELP STOP MULTI PAD STANDBY ON DSP ORGAN & ACCORDION UPPER OCTAVE TAP TEMPO MASTER VOLUME HARMONY/ MONO ECHO SUSTAIN E.PIANO MAIN DIGITAL RECORDING SWING & JAZZ MIXING CONSOLE BALLAD NEXT VOICE DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR The MUSIC FINDER records and its contents is just one example of the recommended panel setups. You can also create your own Music Finder settings for your favorite songs and genres. H I J Show the number of records of each page. 7 8 Add the selected record to “Favorite (Bookmark)” page When you press the [H] button, the “Add selected data to the favorite list? YES/NO” message will be displayed. Select [YES] to add the selected page to “FAVORITE” page. To delete the added record, select the record in the “FAVORITE” page and press the [H](DELETE FROM FAVORITE) button. Search record(s). Enter the condition of the search in the MUSIC FINDER SEARCH display (page 73). The results of SEARCH 1 or 2 appear in the “SEARCH 1” or “SEARCH 2” page respectively. Call up the MUSIC FINDER RECORD EDIT (page 74) display (for editing the selected record). Turn TEMPO LOCK on/off. TEMPO LOCK function lets you avoid changing the Tempo during style playback when selecting another record. The on/off setting affects all pages (ALL/FAVORITE/SEARCH 1/SEARCH 2). Records can be selected by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial and pressing the [ENTER] button. Styles Searching the Ideal Setups — Music Finder Search You can search the record by music title or keywords. The results appears in the display. 1 Press the [I] (SEARCH 1) button or [J] (SEARCH 2) button in the MUSIC FINDER display. 2 Enter the conditions for the search (see below), then start search by using [START SEARCH] button. A F B G C H D I E J Start searching the record. The results that satisfy all the conditions appear in the SEARCH page. For details about the search settings in this display, see below. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ■ [A] MUSIC Searches by music or song title. Press this button to call up the display for inputting the song title. When you enter the song title (page 48), the search function calls up all records that contain the entered word or words. ■ [B] KEYWORD Searches by keyboard. Press this button to call up the display for inputting the keyword. When you enter the keyword (page 48), the search function calls up all records that contain the entered word or words. You can search several different keywords simultaneously by inserting a separator (comma) between each. The search function finds and displays all records that contain at least one match in the keywords. ■ [C] STYLE Searches by style name. Press this button to call up the STYLE FILE SELECT display. Press the [A] through [J] button in the display to select the desired accompaniment style. This convenient function lets you find all songs that use a certain accompaniment style. ■ [D] BEAT The STYLE FILE SELECT display can only be used to select the style name for searching; it cannot be used to call up the actual accompaniment style. Searches by beat or rhythmic feel. ■ [E] SEARCH AREA Selects a specific location for searching. You can further narrow down your search by using the SEARCH 1 and 2 selections. ■ [F]~[H] CLEAR Clears the entered item at left. ■ [1▲▼] TEMPO FROM You can also narrow your search by specifying a tempo range. This lets you set the minimum tempo for the search. Press the [▲▼] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the tempo value to the minimum. ■ [2▲▼]TEMPO TO You can also narrow your search by specifying a tempo range. This lets you set the maximum tempo for the search. Press the [▲▼] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the tempo value to the maximum. ■ [3▲▼]~[5▲▼] GENRE Selects the specific music genre for searching. The available range includes all genres (ANY), the preset genres, and any genres you’ve entered yourself (page 72). ■ [8▼] CANCEL Press this to cancel the operation and return to the previous display. PSR-2100/1100 73 Styles Editing Records — Music Finder Record Edit From this display, you can call up existing records and edit them to suit your preferences. You can even use this to create your own Music Finder records. 1 2 Press the [8 ▲▼] (RECORD EDIT) button in the MUSIC FINDER display. Change/clear the record data. You can also register new records. For details about all settings and operations, see below. A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 You can also change/clear a preset record. To avoid changing/clearing the record, register the record as a new record after editing. All Music Finder records can be stored together as a single file (page 154). When calling up a stored file, a message appears prompting you to replace or append the records as desired. • Replace: All Music Finder records currently in the instrument are deleted and replaced with the records of the selected file. • Append: The records called up are added to the vacant record numbers. 8 ■ [A] MUSIC Selects the music or song title for editing. Press the button to call up the display for inputting the music or song title, then edit the name as desired. ■ [B] KEYWORD Selects the keyword for editing. Press the button to call up the display for inputting the keyword, then edit it as desired. You can enter several different keywords by inserting a separator (comma) between each. ■ [C] STYLE Selects the style name for editing. Always enter the name when a new record is registered. Press the button to call up the STYLE FILE SELECT display. Press the [A] through [J] button in the display to select the desired file you want to change/clear/register. ■ [D] BEAT The STYLE FILE SELECT display can only be used to select the style name for record editing; it cannot be used to call up the actual accompaniment style. Selects the beat (time signature) for editing. When another file is selected by pressing the [C] button, the current beat setting is replaced with the beat setting of the selected file. ■ [E] FAVORITE Adds the selected record to the FAVORITE page (page 72). ■ [F]~[H] CLEAR Keep in mind that the Beat setting made here is only for the Music Finder search function; this does not affect the actual Beat setting of the accompaniment style itself. Clears the entered item at left. ■ [I] DELETE RECORD Clears the selected record. The deleted record number becomes empty. When you press this button, a message appears prompting you to execute, abort or cancel the operation. YES ............. Press this to clear the record and close the display. NO ............. Press this to close the display without clearing the record. CANCEL...... Press this to close the message box and return to the previous display. 74 PSR-2100/1100 Styles ■ [J] NEW RECORD Registers a new record. The smallest available empty record number is used for registering. When you press this button, a message appears prompting you to execute, abort or cancel the operation. YES ............. Press this to register the record and close the display. NO ............. Press this to close the display without registering the record. CANCEL...... Press this to close the message box and return to the previous display. The maximum number of records is 2500 (PSR-2100)/ 1200 (PSR-1100), including internal records. ■ [1▼▲] TEMPO Determines the tempo for the selected style. When changing the style with the [C] button, the tempo is automatically changed to that of the changed style. ■ [3▼▲]~[5▼▲] GENRE Indicates and changes the genre to which the selected record is assigned. The available range includes all preset genres as well as any you’ve entered yourself. ■ [6▼▲] GENRE NAME For entering a genre name. Press the button to call up the display for inputting the genre name, then edit the name as desired. A maximum of 200 genre names can be stored. The genre name you input becomes effective when the current record is edited (overwritten) by pressing the [8▲] (OK) button, or when a new record is registered by pressing the [J] (NEW RECORD) button. If you exit from the MUSIC FINDER EDIT display without actually editing or registering a record, the input genre name is deleted. ■ [8▲] OK Executes all editing and changes to the record. When you press this button, a message appears prompting you to execute, abort or cancel the operation. YES ............. Press this to replace the record and close the display. NO ............. Press this to close the display without replacing the record. CANCEL...... Press this to close the message box and return to the previous display. ■ [8▼] CANCEL Press this to cancel the operation and return to the MUSIC FINDER display. CAUTION To maintain the edited and registered data, make sure to save all Music Finder records as a file (page 154). If no saved, the data will be lost when another Music Finder file is called up or the factory-programmed settings are restored (page 154). PSR-2100/1100 75 The Multi Pads The PSR-2100/1100 Multi Pads can be used to play a number of short pre-recorded rhythmic and melodic sequences that can be used to add impact and variety to your keyboard performances. Multi Pads Playing the Multi Pads 1 2 Select the desired bank in the MULTI PAD Bank display (page 38). Press any of the Multi Pads. STOP MULTI PAD The corresponding phrase (in this case, for Pad 4) starts playing back in its entirety as soon as the pad is pressed. The Multi Pad function provides two different ways to stop in the middle of the phrase: • To stop all pads, press and release the [STOP] button. • To stop specific pads, simultaneously hold down the [STOP] button and press the pad or pads you wish to stop. • Simply tap any of the Multi Pads at any time to play back the corresponding phrase at the currently set tempo. • You can even play two, three, or four Multi Pads at the same time. • Pressing the pad during its playback will stop playing and begin playing from the top again. Chord Match 1 2 Turn ACMP on (page 63). Play a chord with your left hand and press any of the Multi Pads. Split Point The Chord Match on/off status depends on the selected Multi Pad Bank. Auto Accompaniment section STOP MULTI PAD In this example, the phrase for Pad 1 will be transposed into F major before playing back. Try playing other chords and pressing the pads. Keep in mind that you can also change chords while a pad is playing back. 76 PSR-2100/1100 The Multi Pad Multi Pad Edit This function lets you copy individual Multi Pad settings from one Multi Pad bank to another. Select the desired Multi Pad(s). Open/Save display for Multi Pads (page 38) A F B G C H D I E J The same as the Open/Save display on pages 44 and 47. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Calls up the upper level directory page. 8 PSR-2100/1100 77 Song Playback Here you’ll learn how to play back songs. Songs include the internal songs of the instrument, performances you’ve recorded yourself using the recording functions (page 95), and commercially available song data. You can use this highly versatile feature in a variety of ways — playing along on the keyboard with the recorded song. You can also display the music notation (PSR-2100 only) and lyrics in the LCD. If you connect a microphone to the PSR-2100, you can sing along with the song or auto accompaniment and have vocal harmony parts added automatically (page 131). SONG EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) (STYLE) TOP REC NEW SONG STYLE POP & ROCK METRONOME REPEAT START/STOP REW BACK SYNC. START BALLROOM MARCH & WALTZ DANCE LATIN USER PART MENU DEMO TOUCH PIANO & HARPSI. A F B G C H D I E J GUITAR LAYER STRINGS LEFT USER TEMPO RESET RESET SONG ACMP STANDBY ON BREAK MIN EXTRA TRACKS MAIN INTRO MIC. (STYLE) AUTO FILL IN TRACK 1 SYNC. STOP OTS LINK (L) REC NEW SONG SYNC. START WOODWIND SYNTH. XG ORGAN FLUTES VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT SIGNAL ONE TOUCH SETTING BALANCE ENTER DIRECT ACCESS EXIT CHANNEL ON/OFF ENDING / rit. CHOIR & PAD RESET FUNCTION MAX TRACK 2 BRASS VARIATION PERCUSSION OVER STOP MULTI PAD FADE IN/OUT STYLE CONTROL BASS DSP UPPER OCTAVE HELP MASTER VOLUME ORGAN & ACCORDION MUSIC FINDER TAP TEMPO TRANSPOSE HARMONY/ MONO ECHO SUSTAIN E.PIANO MAIN DIGITAL RECORDING SWING & JAZZ MIXING CONSOLE BALLAD VOICE EFFECT LEFT HOLD NEXT VOICE DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR FF 1 PART START/STOP 2 REPEAT 3 4 5 6 7 METRONOME 8 REGISTRATION MEMORY DATA ENTRY FREEZE MEMORY (R) TOP START/STOP REW FF SYNC. START Compatible Song Types • Commercially available song data Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with GM (General MIDI). Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s XG format. XG is a significant enhancement of the “GM system level 1” standard, providing more voices, greater editing control, and support for multiple effect sections and effect types. Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) format. Disks having this logo mark feature song data compatible with Yamaha’s original MIDI file format. • Songs you recorded (page 95) and stored to the PSR-2100/1100 or disk. 78 PSR-2100/1100 Commercially available music data is subject to copyright restrictions, and is intended only for your own personal use. For more information on the song file types compatible with the PSR-2100/1100, see page 161. Song Playback Song Playback Playing the Internal Songs 1 BACK NEXT If the MAIN screen (at left) is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button. A F B G C H D I E J 2 2-1 2-2 Open a folder and select a song to be played back. 3 The song starts. SONG EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE) You can also make a variety of other settings (such as tempo, voice selection, etc.) and have them automatically called up when you play back the song (page 107). BACK Select the PRESET tab with the [BACK] button. NEXT You can enable the Synchro Start for the song by simultaneously pressing the [TOP] button and the SONG [START/STOP] button. The song starts as soon as you play the keyboard. You can also use this function along with the Style’s Synchro Start function (page 63). A F B G n C H You can have the volume automatically fade in and fade out at the beginning and end of the song. Simply press the [FADEIN/OUT] button at the start of song playback to fade in the song, and press it again at the end of the song to fade out. D I E J END TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) REC n TOP START/STOP REPEAT REW METRONOME FF START/STOP To stop the song immediately, press the button again. EXIT NEW SONG SYNC. START Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO [ ][ ] buttons (page 53) or the [TAP TEMPO] button. You can even change the playback speed by tapping out the tempo — simply tap the [TAP TEMPO] button twice. Songs can also be played back continuously. Set SONG CHAIN PLAY to ON from the SONG SETTING display (page 140). Press the button in order to go back to the previous screen. Make sure that the Language setting for the instrument (page 154) is the same as that of the file name of the song that you are playing back. PSR-2100/1100 79 Song Playback Simultaneously Playing a Song and an Accompaniment Style When playing back a song and an accompaniment style at the same time, channels 9 16 of the song data are replaced with accompaniment style channels — allowing you to use the auto accompaniment styles and features in place of the accompaniment parts of the song. Make the settings below and play your own chord substitutions in place of the song’s chord data. • [ACMP] button .................. ...ON • [AUTO FILL IN] button ..... ...ON 1 2 3 4 Select the song and start playback by pressing the SONG [START/STOP] button. Select the desired accompaniment style. Start the style by pressing the STYLE [START/STOP] button. While the song is playing, insert a break or change sections (with the STYLE section buttons.) Fill-in patterns play when you switch sections. END The style automatically stops when the song finishes or is stopped. Some of the internal songs have been created using the accompaniment styles. For these songs, the accompaniment styles are automatically started when starting song playback. 80 PSR-2100/1100 The accompaniment stops when you stop the song. If the accompaniment style is playing and you start the song, the accompaniment automatically stops. However, for internal songs that use accompaniment styles, the accompaniment style is not stopped. Song Playback Playing Back Songs on Disk Before proceeding, make sure to read the section “Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disk” (page 7). Insert the disk into the drive. n Insert the disk shutter side first and label face up. The method for playing back is the same as in the “Playing the Internal Songs” instructions (page 79), except that you should select FLOPPY DISK page in the SONG display. Other Playback-related Operations ■ Repeat / Rewind / Fast forward During playback, you can have the song return to the top and play back again from the beginning by pressing this button. When playback is stopped, pressing this button returns the song to the beginning. REC TOP NEW SONG START/STOP REW FF SYNC. START Press this button to call up the SONG POSITION display (see below). To return to the SONG display, press the [EXIT] button. SONG POSITION display When “BAR” is selected, you can specify a measure number (counted from the beginning of the song) by using the [REW] and [FF] buttons. When “PHRASE MARK” is selected, specify the phrase mark number by using the [REW] and [FF] buttons. You can set whether or not the PSR-2100/1100 automatically calls up the first disk song when a disk is inserted (page 153). n Some song data for the PSR2100/1100 has been recorded with special “free tempo” settings. During playback of such song data, the measure numbers shown in the display will not correspond to the actual measure; this only serves as a reference as to how much of the song has been played back. n Songs containing a large amount of data may not be able to be read properly by the instrument, and as such you may not be able to select them. The maximum capacity is about 200– 300KB, however this may differ depending on the data contents of each song. Phrase Mark This data specifies a certain location in the song data. “PHRASE MARK” is shown only when the song contains phrase marks. Press the [J] button to toggle between “BAR” and “PHRASE MARK,” then use the [REW] and [FF] buttons to select the desired measure or phrase mark. ■ Adjusting the Volume Balance / Muting Specific Channels BALANCE Press this button to call up the BALANCE display (page 64). CHANNEL ON/OFF Press this button to call up the CHANNEL ON/OFF display (see below). PART CHANNEL ON/OFF display Select the [SONG] tab with the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button, and mute the desired channel by setting it to [OFF]. To solo a channel (only that channel will sound), hold down the appropriate button corresponding to the channel. To release the solo for the channel, press that channel’s button again. Channel Refers to the MIDI channel in the song data. The channels are assigned as shown below for the PSR-2100/ 1100. Song 1 - 16 Accompaniment Style 9 - 16 PSR-2100/1100 81 Song Playback Muting Specific Parts — Track1/Track2/Extra Tracks This feature lets you mute certain parts of the song (Track1, Track2, Extra Tracks), and play back only those parts you want to hear. For example, if you want to practice the melody of a song, you can mute just the right-hand part and play that part yourself. 1 Select the song to be played back (page 78). You can change the channel assignments for Track 1 and Track 2 (page 140), letting you specify which parts are muted when pressing the [TRACK 1]/[TRACK 2]/ [EXTRA TRACKS] buttons. Use this button to turn on/off the additional performance parts (all but the right hand/left hand). 2 SONG EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) (STYLE) METRONOME REPEAT Use this button to turn on/off the right-hand part. All tracks are automatically set to on when selecting a different song. Use this button to turn on/off the left-hand part. Start the song. Adjust the tempo by using the TEMPO [ 3 REC TOP NEW SONG START/STOP REW ][ ] buttons (page 53). END START/STOP FF To stop the song, press the button again. SYNC. START Repeat Playback of a Specific Range This feature allows you to specify a certain range of the song (between Point A and Point B), and play it back repeatedly. 1 Play back the song (page 79, 81). 2 SONG EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) (STYLE) REPEAT You can also specify Points A and B when the song is stopped. Set Point A by pressing the [REPEAT] button, then use the [FF] button to move to the desired end location, then set Point B by pressing the [REPEAT] button again. METRONOME Press this button at the point you want the repeating phrase to start (Point A). Press this button at the point you want the repeating phrase to end (Point B). Point B cannot be selected unless Point A has been selected first. n 3 4 After an automatic lead-in (to help guide you into the phrase), the range from point A to point B is played back repeatedly. Regardless of whether the song is playing back or is stopped, pressing the [TOP] button returns to point A. Stop the song. START/STOP END REPEAT To cancel the Repeat function, press the button again. 82 PSR-2100/1100 Specifying only Point A results in repeat playback between Point A and the end of the song. n The specified A and B points will be erased when selecting a different song number, cancelling the Repeat function, or selecting a different repeat mode — such as Phrase Repeat or repeat in Song Chain Play (page 136). Song Playback Displaying Music Notation — Score With this feature, you can have the notation automatically shown on the display as the song plays. This can be used with your own recordings as well as the internal Demo songs. 1 Select the desired song (page 79, 81). 2 If the MAIN screen (at left) is not displayed, press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button followed by the [EXIT] button. A B C D E The displayed notation is generated by the PSR2100/1100 based on the song data. As a result, it may not be exactly the same as commercially available sheet music of the same song — especially when displaying notation of complicated passages or many short notes. 3 n Some song data for the PSR-2100/1100 has been recorded with special "free tempo" settings. For such song data, the tempo, beat, measure and music notation will not displayed correctly. Enables/disables display of the left-hand key range. Depending on other settings, this parameter may be unavailable and may appear grayed out. If this is the case, go to the detailed setting display (shown below; use the [8▲▼] buttons) and set the LEFT CH. parameter to any channel except “AUTO.” Or, go to the SONG SETTING display in the Function menu (page 136) and set the TRACK 2 parameter to any channel except “OFF.” n [RIGHT] and [LEFT] cannot be turned off at the same time. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Enables/disables display of the right-hand key range. Channel 1 is automatically selected when [TRACK1] is set to [OFF] from the SONG SETTING display (page 140). Enables/disables display of the lyrics. If the selected song does not contain lyric data, lyrics are not displayed. Enables/disables display of the chords. If the selected song does not contain chord data, chords are not displayed. Enables/disables display of the note name (pitch). Determines the display resolution (or zoom level) of the notation. SMALL...... Notation is shown in small size. LARGE ..... Notation is shown in large size. This calls up the detailed setting display for notation. For details, see the next page. 8 n The note name is indicated at the left of the note. When the space between the notes is too small, the indication may be moved to the top left of the note. n You can increase the number of measures that will be displayed by decreasing the other items to be displayed (parts, lyrics, chords, etc.). n When accidentals (sharp and flats) and notes cannot be displayed on one line, they are displayed in the next line from the middle of the measure. n The notation functions cannot be used to create song data by inputting notes. For information on creating song data, see page 99. PSR-2100/1100 83 Song Playback Detailed Settings for Notation When “LEFT” and “RIGHT” are set to the same channel, the notation of the right-hand notes and left-hand notes are displayed in piano format (two connected staves). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ■ [1▲▼] LEFT CH/[2▲▼] RIGHT CH This determines the Left channel (channel for the left-hand part) and Right channel (channel for the right-hand part). This setting returns to AUTO when a different song is selected. AUTO .........................The channels for the right- and left-hand parts are assigned automatically — setting the parts to the same channel as the channel which is specified in the SONG SETTING display of the Function menu (page 140). 1-16 ............................Assigns the part to the specified channel, 1- 16. OFF (LEFT CH only)....No channel assignment. ■ [3▲▼], [4▲▼] KEY SIGNATURE This lets you enter key signature changes in the middle of a song, at the stopped position. This menu is useful when the selected song contains no key signature settings for displaying notation. For a list of the key signatures, with their relative minor keys and accidentals, see the chart below. Key Signatures and Accidentals C Maj (A min) G Maj (E min) D Maj (B min) A Maj (F min) E Maj (C min) B Maj (G min) F Maj (D min) C Maj (A min) G Maj (E min) D Maj (B min) A Maj (F min) E Maj (C min) B Maj (G min) F Maj (D min) The note indicates the root note of the major key, and the C Maj (A min) note indicates the root of the relative minor. ■ [5▲▼] QUANTIZE This gives you control over the note resolution in the notation, letting you shift or correct the timing of all displayed notes so that they line up to a particular note value. Make sure to select the smallest note value which is used in the song. Note resolution: 1/4 note, 1/8 note, 1/16 note, 1/32 note, 1/4 note triplet, 1/8 note triplet, 1/16 note triplet, 1/32 note triplet 84 PSR-2100/1100 Short notes and ornamented notes (such as trills and grace notes) which are shorter than the Note resolution will not be displayed in the notation. Song Playback ■ [6▲▼] NOTE NAME Select the Note Name type when “NOTE” (page 83) is set to ON. ABC ................. Note names are indicated as letters (C, D, E, F, G, A, B). Fixed Do .......... Note names are indicated in solfeggio and differ depending on the selected language (page 52). English.............. Do Re Mi Fa Sol La Ti French .............. Ut Re Mi Fa Sol La Si Italian............... Do Re Mi Fa Sol La Si German............ Do Re Mi Fa Sol La Si Spanish............. Do re Mi Fa Sol La Si Japanese........... Movable Do..... Note names are indicated in solfeggio according to the scale intervals, and as such are relative to the key. The root note is indicated as Do. For example, in the key of G major the root note of Sol would be indicated as Do. As with “Fixed Do,” the indication differs depending on the selected language. ■ [8▲] OK This closes the detailed setting display and starts generating the notation. You can also execute this by pressing the [ENTER] button on the panel. ■ [8▼] CANCEL You can select the display pages (one before and after) by the using the [BACK]/ [NEXT] buttons or the pedal (page 142). This closes the detailed setting display without changing the settings. You can also execute this by pressing the [EXIT] button on the panel. PSR-2100/1100 85 Song Playback Displaying the Lyrics This function lets you display the lyrics while the song is playing back — making it easy to sing along with your performance or song playback. * Microphone input is available only on the PSR-2100. 1 Select the desired song (page 79, 81). 2 The language used for lyrics display depends on the particular lyric data. If the lyrics are garbled or unreadable, you can remedy this by changing the “LYRICS LANGUAGE” setting from the SONG SETTING display (page 140). A B C D E 3 If the selected song does not contain lyric data, lyrics are not displayed. In this example, select “Lyrics” in the Function folder of the PRESET (SONG) page. If the selected song contains chord data, chord names are displayed with the lyrics. 4 SONG Start the song. EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE) TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) REC TOP NEW SONG 5 The lyrics are in reverse display along with song playback. END SONG EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE) START/STOP TRACK 1 (L) (R) NEW SONG REW TOP START/STOP REPEAT PSR-2100/1100 FF METRONOME REW FF SYNC. START Stop the song. To return to the previous page, press the button. 86 METRONOME SYNC. START TRACK 2 REC REPEAT EXIT The lyrics can be changed (page 110). PSR2100_E.book Page 87 Tuesday, January 28, 2003 2:11 PM Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory Registration Memory is a powerful feature that lets you set up the PSR-2100/1100 just as you want — selecting specific voices, styles, effect settings etc. — and save your custom panel setup for future recall. Then, when you need those settings, simply press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button. SONG EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) (STYLE) TOP REC NEW SONG STYLE POP & ROCK METRONOME REPEAT START/STOP REW BACK SYNC. START BALLROOM MARCH & WALTZ DANCE LATIN USER TOUCH PIANO & HARPSI. A F B G C H DIGITAL RECORDING SWING & JAZZ VOICE EFFECT LEFT HOLD LAYER PART D I MENU DEMO E J LEFT RESET FREEZE STYLE CONTROL ACMP BREAK MAIN SYNC. STOP SYNC. START MIC. SETTING VOCAL HARMONY XG TALK EFFECT ONE TOUCH SETTING BALANCE ENTER DIRECT ACCESS EXIT CHANNEL ON/OFF AUTO FILL IN VH TYPE SELECT SIGNAL FUNCTION MAX ENDING / rit. INTRO STANDBY ON WOODWIND SYNTH. OVER STOP MULTI PAD FADE IN/OUT REGISTRATION MEMORY CHOIR & PAD RESET MIC. HELP RESET BRASS VARIATION PERCUSSION UPPER OCTAVE TAP TEMPO MIN BASS DSP ORGAN FLUTES MUSIC FINDER TEMPO MASTER VOLUME ORGAN & ACCORDION GUITAR STRINGS USER TRANSPOSE HARMONY/ MONO ECHO SUSTAIN E.PIANO MAIN MIXING CONSOLE BALLAD NEXT VOICE DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR FF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REGISTRATION MEMORY PART MEMORY START/STOP OTS LINK DATA ENTRY FREEZE MEMORY Registering Panel Setups — Registration Memory This shows you how to register your custom panel settings to the REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons. Make all the settings you want with the panel controls, and Registration Memory will “remember” them for you. 1 Set up the panel controls as desired. For a list of the settings that can be registered, refer to the separate Data List (Parameter Chart). Keep in mind that songs, styles or multi pads on disk cannot registered to Registration Memory. If you want to register a disk-based song, style or multi pad, copy the relevant data to “USER” in the SONG/ STYLE/MULTI PAD display (page 39) and register the data separately. REGISTRATION MEMORY 2 FREEZE MEMORY 3 Cancels the registration and returns to the MAIN display. You can also use the [EXIT] button. F Select the desired parameter groups for the settings you want to register. You can also use the [DATA ENTRY] dial to navigate in this display. To register a parameter group, checkmark the corresponding box. Groups left without checkmarks will not be included in the Registration Memory setting. This allows you to maintain certain settings, even when switching among Registration Memory presets. You can also use the Freeze function (page 89) to override the Registration Memory changes — letting you prevent certain panel settings from being changed. Press the desired ND number button for registering the settings. E G H I J Enters a checkmark to the selected box. You can also use the [ENTER] button. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Removes the checkmark from the selected box. You can also use the [ENTER] button. REGISTRATION MEMORY FREEZE MEMORY Indicator is green .....The panel setting is registered, but not selected. Indicator is red .........The panel setting is registered and is currently selected. Indicator is off..........The panel setting is not registered. To delete all currently registered settings at one time, simultaneously hold down the highest B key on the keyboard and turn on the power. For information on saving the settings registered here, refer to the next page. PSR-2100/1100 87 Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory Saving Your Registration Memory Setups The settings registered to the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1]-[8] buttons are saved as a single file. All settings registered to buttons [1][8] are referred to as a “bank.” The banks can be saved to “USER” or “FLOPPY DISK” as Registration bank files. BANK 01 Keep in mind that the size of the Registration bank files and the memory space they occupy depends on the amount of functions set in each. Press the [DIRECT ACCESS] button and [EXIT] button to call up the MAIN display. 1 F G H I J 2 Save the settings you’ve made to the Registration Memory buttons as a single Registration bank file (page 47). The REGISTRATION EDIT display appears. For details on this display, see below. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REGISTRATION EDIT display The contents of the current Registration Memory bank (REGIST.) are listed in the REGISTRATION EDIT screen. The names of the stored Registration Memory presets are shown in the display and the indicators of the relevant REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons are lit in green. From this screen, you can select, name, or delete the Registration Memory presets. Select ..........Press the [A] - [J] buttons. The REGIST. display is linked to the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] - [8] buttons. When you select the Registration Memory preset in the display, the related button turns on (indicator is red). Name ..........This operation is the same as that in “Naming Files and Folders” (page 44) in “Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data.” Delete .........This operation is the same as that in “Deleting Files/Folders” (page 46) in “Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data.” Save the result of the Name/Delete operation by returning to the REGISTRATION BANK display and pressing the [8▼] (UP) button. 88 PSR-2100/1100 Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups — Registration Memory Recalling a Registration Memory Setup You can recall all of the panel settings you’ve made — or only those you specifically want or need. For example, if you de-select “STYLE” in the REGISTRATION MEMORY display, you can keep the currently selected style even when you change the Registration Memory preset. Recalling the Registered Settings Select the desired bank in the REGISTRATION BANK display (page 88). Press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button (any whose indicators are green) to recall the desired settings. You can program your Registration Memory presets to be called up in sequence, in any order you desire. Once programmed, the presets 1 - 8 can be selected in sequence with the [BACK][NEXT] buttons or the pedal (page 145). REGISTRATION MEMORY FREEZE MEMORY Selecting the Freeze Settings 1 2 MENU DEMO HELP FUNCTION Call up the “FREEZE” page from the REGIST.SEQUENCE/ FREEZE/VOICE SET screen (page 145). Enters a checkmark to the selected box. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Removes the checkmark from the selected box. Select the Freeze settings. 3 Press the [FREEZE] button. When Freeze is active (lamp is lit), the settings you specified in the Freeze page will be maintained or left unchanged, even when changing Registration Memory presets. REGISTRATION MEMORY FREEZE 4 MEMORY Press the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY button (any whose indicators are green) to recall the desired settings. REGISTRATION MEMORY FREEZE MEMORY PSR-2100/1100 89 Editing Voices — Sound Creator The PSR-2100/1100 has a Sound Creator feature that allows you to create your own voices by editing some parameters of the existing voices. Once you’ve created a voice, you can save it as a USER voice for future recall. SONG EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) (STYLE) REC TOP NEW SONG STYLE POP & ROCK METRONOME REPEAT START/STOP REW BACK SYNC. START BALLROOM MARCH & WALTZ DANCE LATIN USER PART VOICE EFFECT LEFT HOLD TOUCH PIANO & HARPSI. A F B G C H D I LAYER LEFT GUITAR STRINGS USER MENU DEMO TRANSPOSE TEMPO RESET RESET E J MIN ACMP BREAK MAIN INTRO OTS LINK SYNC. START WOODWIND SYNTH. XG VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT SIGNAL ONE TOUCH SETTING ENTER EXIT CHANNEL ON/OFF DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR SYNC. STOP AUTO FILL IN BRASS OVER BALANCE DIRECT ACCESS MAX ENDING / rit. BASS CHOIR & PAD RESET MIC. FUNCTION FADE IN/OUT STYLE CONTROL VARIATION PERCUSSION ORGAN FLUTES MUSIC FINDER HELP STOP MULTI PAD STANDBY ON DSP ORGAN & ACCORDION UPPER OCTAVE TAP TEMPO MASTER VOLUME HARMONY/ MONO ECHO SUSTAIN E.PIANO MAIN DIGITAL RECORDING SWING & JAZZ MIXING CONSOLE BALLAD NEXT VOICE DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR FF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 • The Voice can be edited in realtime while playing back a song/style. • Keep in mind that adjustments made to the parameters may not make much change in the actual sound depending on the original settings of the voice. REGISTRATION MEMORY PART START/STOP DATA ENTRY FREEZE MEMORY Operation 1 Press the [F], [G] or [H] button to select the Part (MAIN, LAYER or LEFT) containing the voice you wish to edit. 2 Press the [SOUND CREATOR] button. DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR F G H DIGITAL RECORDING I J MIXING CONSOLE The voice can also be selected in the SOUND CREATOR display. CAUTION The settings are lost if the edited part's voice is switched to another voice. Important data should be saved to User Drive or floppy disk. PART 3 Edit the voice parameters. The operations for each function selected in this step are covered in detail, starting on page 92 (Regular Voice), and page 94 (Organ Flutes). Select the desired menu by pressing the [NEXT]/ [BACK] button. REGULAR VOICE Indicates the parameters available for editing in this display. These correspond to the parameters/values shown at the bottom of the display. Can be used during editing to compare the sound of the original voice with the edited voice. Select the desired menu. The selected menu is highlighted. 4 90 Save the edited voice to the USER drive (Flash ROM) as a USER voice (page 47). PSR-2100/1100 ORGAN FLUTES (PSR-2100 only) A F B G C H D I E J Select or adjust the parameters. Opens the Save (Voice) display for saving the edited voice as a User voice (page 47). 5 Press the [USER] button to select the edited voice, and play the keyboard. Editing the voice -SOUND CREATOR- Regular Voice Parameters COMMON Determines the common settings such as voice volume or octave. SOUND Determines the timbre/EG (Envelope Generator)/vibrato of the voice. EFFECT/EQ (PSR-2100) EFFECT (PSR-1100) Determines the effect depth/type and equalizer settings. HARMONY Determines the Harmony/Echo settings. Keep in mind that there are certain parameters whose Sound Creator settings affect only the Main part’s voice. The parameter for Organ Flute, see page 94 The following parameters are linked to the ones in each display. Common parameter Other location MONO VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL) page 61 PORTAMENTO TIME MIXING CONSOLE page 126 FILTER BRIGHTNESS MIXING CONSOLE page 126 FILTER HARMONIC CONTENT MIXING CONSOLE page 126 REVERB DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 127 CHORUS DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 127 DSP ON/OFF VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL) page 60 DSP DEPTH MIXING CONSOLE page 127 DSP TYPE/VARIATION MIXING CONSOLE/VOICE EFFECT (TOP PANEL) page 61,127 EQ LOW/GAIN MIXING CONSOLE page 124 EQ HIGH/GAIN MIXING CONSOLE page 124 HARMONY/ECHO TYPE HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 146 HARMONY/ECHO VOLUME HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 146 HARMONY/ECHO SPEED HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 146 HARMONY/ECHO ASSIGN HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 146 HARMONY/ECHO CHORD NOTE ONLY HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 146 HARMONY/ECHO TOUCH LIMIT HARMONY/ECHO (FUNCTION) page 146 COMMON The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 90. Set the volume of the current edited voice. Determines the touch sensitivity, or how greatly the volume responds to your playing strength. 0.........Produces more dramatic level drops, the more softly you play. 64.......Normal response. 127.....Produces high volume for any playing strength (fixed) Set the portamento time of each part (MAIN/LAYER/VOICE) (page 126). This determines whether the voice is played monophonically (page 61). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Shift the octave range of the selected voice up or down in octaves. When the Main or Layer part’s voice is used, the M/LYR parameter is available; when the Left part’s voice is used, the LEFT parameter is available. PSR-2100/1100 91 Editing the voice -SOUND CREATORSOUND The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 90. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Determines the filter, EG, and vibrato settings (see below). 8 ■ FILTER FILTER settings determine the overall timbre of the sound by boosting or cutting a certain frequency range. • BRIGHTNESS Determines the cutoff frequency or effective frequency (resonance) range of the filter (see diagram). Higher values result in a brighter sound. Volume Cutoff frequency These frequencies are “passed” by the filter. • Harmonic Content Determines the emphasis given to the cutoff frequency, set in BRIGHTNESS above (see diagram). Higher values result in a more pronounced effect. In addition to making the sound either brighter or more mellow, Filter can be used to produce electronic, synthesizer-like effects. Frequency (pitch) Cutoff range Volume Resonance Resonance Frequency (pitch) ■ EG The EG (Envelope Generator) settings determine how the level of the sound changes in time. This lets you reproduce many sound characteristics of natural acoustic instruments — such as the quick attack and decay of percussion sounds, or the long release of a sustained piano tone. • ATTACK ...... Determines how quickly the sound reaches its maximum level after the key is played. The higher the value, the slower the attack. Level • DECAY........ Determines how quickly the sound reaches its sustain level (a slightly lower level than maximum). The higher the value, the slower the decay. ATTACK Key on • RELEASE ..... Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after the key is released. The higher the value, the slower the release. 92 PSR-2100/1100 DECAY RELEASE Time Key off If RELEASE is set to a large value, the sustain becomes long. Editing the voice -SOUND CREATOR■ VIBRATO • DEPTH........ Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect (see diagram). Higher settings result in a more pronounced Vibrato. VIBRATO Creates a wavering in the sound by periodically changing the pitch. • SPEED......... Determines the speed of the Vibrato effect (see diagram). • DELAY ........ Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key and the start of the Vibrato effect (see diagram). Higher settings increase the delay of the Vibrato onset. SPEED Level DEPTH DELAY Time EFFECT/EQ The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 90. Determines the DSP type. For information on the effect structure, see page 129; for a list of available effect types, refer to the separate Data List. Determines the Frequency and Gain of the Low and High EQ bands (PSR-2100 only). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The same as the “Mixing Console” on page 127. Determines the Sustain depth of each voice when the [SUSTAIN] button is set to on. HARMONY The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 90. The parameters are the same as for HARMONY/ECHO display of FUNCTION. For details, see page 147. PSR-2100/1100 93 Editing the voice -SOUND CREATOR- Organ Flutes (PSR-2100 only) In addition to the many organ voices in the ORGAN voice category, the PSR-2100/1100 has an ORGAN FLUTES voice. The explanations here apply to step #3 on page 90. Adjust the Footage. ■ Parameters Organ Type This parameter specifies the type of organ tone generation to be simulated: Sine or Vintage. Rotary SP Speed The Rotary SP Speed ([C]) button alternately switches between the slow and fast rotary speaker speeds when a rotary speaker effect is selected for the Organ Flutes (see “DSP Type” below), and the VOICE EFFECT [DSP] button is turned on (the Rotary SP Speed button has the same effect as the VOICE EFFECT [VARIATION] button). Vibrato On/Off This ([G]) button alternately turns the vibrato effect for the Organ Flutes voice ON or OFF. Vibrato Depth Can be set to any of three levels via the Vibrato Depth ([H]) button. The button sequentially selects a depth of “1”, “2”, or “3”. Footage The footage settings determine the basic sound of the organ flutes. The term “footage” is a reference to the sound generation of traditional pipe organs, in which the sound is produced by pipes of different lengths (in feet). The longer the pipe, the lower the pitch of the sound. Hence, the 16’ setting determines the lowest pitched component of the voice, while the 1’ setting determines the highest pitched component. The higher the value of the setting, the greater the volume of the corresponding footage. Mixing various volumes of the footages lets you create your own distinctive organ sounds. Volume (VOL) Adjusts the overall volume of the Organ Flutes. The longer the graphic bar, the greater the volume. Response (RESP) The Response control affects both the attack and sustain portion of the sound, increasing or decreasing the response time of the initial swell and release, based on the FOOTAGE controls. The higher the value the slower the swell and release. Vibrato Speed (VIB. SPEED) Determines the speed of the vibrato effect controlled by the Vibrato On/Off and Vibrato Depth above. Mode The MODE control selects between two modes: FIRST and EACH. In the FIRST mode, attack is applied only to the first notes played and held simultaneously; while the first notes are held, any subsequently played notes have no attack applied. In the EACH mode, attack is applied equally to all notes. Attack (4’, 2 2/3’, 2’) The ATTACK controls adjust the attack sound of the ORGAN FLUTE voice. The 4’, 2 2/3 ‘and 2’ controls increase or reduce the amount of attack sound at the corresponding footages. The longer the graphic bar the greater the attack sound. Length (LENG) The LENGTH control affects the attack portion of the sound producing a longer or shorter decay immediately after the initial attack. The longer the graphic bar the longer the decay. Reverb Depth Chorus Depth DSP on/off DSP Depth For details about the digital effects, see pages 60, 127. DSP Type Determines the DSP effect type to be applied to the Organ Flutes voice. Normally this will be one of the seven available Rotary Speaker effects. If any other type of effect is selected, the Rotary SP Speed ([C]) button in the FOOTAGE/VOL/ATTACK display will not control rotary speaker speed. Instead, it will have the same effect as the VOICE EFFECT [VARIATION] button. Variation EQ Low EQ High 94 PSR-2100/1100 Variation Determines whether the DSP variation will be set to Slow or Fast when the Organ Flutes voice is selected (when the Voice Set function is ON — page 146). Value Sets the DSP variation parameter value (e.g., “LFO Freq” for a Rotary Speaker effect) when the DSP variation is turned on. The EQ parameters determine the Frequency and Gain of the Low and High EQ bands. Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator With these powerful yet easy-to-use song creating features, you can record your own keyboard performances and store them for future recall. Several different recording methods are available: Quick Recording (page 96), which lets you record easily and quickly; Multi Recording (page 97), which lets you record several different parts; and Step Recording (page 99), which lets you enter notes one by one. Songs can include not only the voice settings for the keyboard performance (Main, Layer, Left), but also the effects, vocal harmony and auto accompaniment parts. The recorded song can be stored to internal memory or floppy disk (page 38, 47). SONG EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) (STYLE) TOP REC NEW SONG METRONOME REPEAT START/STOP REW BACK SYNC. START STYLE POP & ROCK BALLROOM MARCH & WALTZ DANCE LATIN USER PART VOICE EFFECT LEFT HOLD TOUCH PIANO & HARPSI. A F B G C H D I LAYER LEFT GUITAR STRINGS USER MENU DEMO E TEMPO RESET RESET MIN STYLE CONTROL ACMP MAIN BREAK SONG SYNC. START WOODWIND SYNTH. XG VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT SIGNAL ONE TOUCH SETTING BALANCE ENTER DIRECT ACCESS EXIT CHANNEL ON/OFF SYNC. STOP AUTO FILL IN CHOIR & PAD RESET MIC. FUNCTION MAX ENDING / rit. INTRO BRASS VARIATION PERCUSSION OVER STOP MULTI PAD FADE IN/OUT STANDBY ON BASS DSP ORGAN FLUTES MUSIC FINDER HELP MASTER VOLUME ORGAN & ACCORDION UPPER OCTAVE J TAP TEMPO TRANSPOSE HARMONY/ MONO ECHO SUSTAIN E.PIANO MAIN DIGITAL RECORDING SWING & JAZZ MIXING CONSOLE BALLAD NEXT VOICE DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR FF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REGISTRATION MEMORY PART START/STOP DATA ENTRY OTS LINK FREEZE MEMORY DIGITAL RECORDING EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE) TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) REC TOP NEW SONG START/STOP REPEAT REW METRONOME FF SYNC. START About Song Recording There are two methods of recording songs: realtime recording and step recording. ■ Realtime Recording This method lets you record performance data in real time. There are two ways to use realtime recording: Quick and Multi. Quick Recording (page 96) This is the easiest recording method, and lets you quickly record the piano song you are practicing. You can select from four parts: right hand, left hand and auto accompaniment/multi pad. For example, you can record only your right hand performance, or you can simultaneously record both your right hand and the auto accompaniment. Multi Recording (page 97) This lets you record a song with several different instrument sounds, and create the sound of a full band or orchestra. Record the performance of each instrument individually and create fully orchestrated compositions. You can also record over an existing part on an internal song or a song on disk with your own performance. ■ Step Recording (page 99) This method lets you compose your performance by “writing” it down one event at a time. This is a non-realtime, manual recording method — similar to writing music notation onto paper. By using the Event List (page 108-110), you can input notes, chords and other events one by one. ■ Song Editing (page 105) The PSR-2100/1100 also lets you edit the songs you’ve recorded by the Quick Recording, Multi Recording and Step Recording methods. When re-recording a specific section of an already-recorded song, use the Punch IN/OUT function (page 104). • The internal memory capacity of the PSR-2100/1100 is about 1520KB (PSR-2100)/700KB (PSR1100). Memory capacity for 2DD and 2HD floppy disks is about 720KB and 1.44MB, respectively. When you store data to these locations, all file types of the PSR-2100/ 1100 (Voice, Style, Song, Registration, etc.) are stored together. • The microphone input signal (PSR2100 only) cannot be recorded. • Songs recorded on the PSR-2100/ 1100 are automatically recorded as SMF (Standard MIDI File format 0) data. For details on SMF, see page 161. • Playback of the recorded song data can be transmitted from MIDI OUT, letting you play the sounds of a connected external tone generator (page 149). • The volume level of each channel of the song can be adjusted from the Mixing Console and the settings can be saved. Moreover, even after you’ve set a voice for your keyboard play during recording, you can record voice selections, so that the voice changes automatically during playback (page 107). PSR-2100/1100 95 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Quick Recording This is the easiest recording method — perfect for quickly recording and playing back a piano song you’re practicing, so you can check your progress. CAUTION If you wish to save the recording, make sure to store it to internal memory (USER drive) or floppy disk (page 39, 47). If you turn off the power or re-record over an existing track before you save the performance, any previous recording will be erased. ■ When creating a new song: 1 REC NEW SONG TOP START/STOP REW FF SYNC. START ■ When recording over the part of an internal song or a song on disk with your own performance: 1 Select the desired song (page 79, 81). 2 Select the voice and accompaniment style you want to use in the song. If you want to record to the MAIN/Layer/Left voices, make sure to set the [MAIN]/[LAYER]/[LEFT] buttons to ON. Make any other desired settings (Reverb, Chorus, etc.) as well. 3 To record without specifying a particular track, press the [REC] button. In this case, your performance will be recorded automatically to TRACK 1. To specify the track for recording, simultaneously hold down the [REC] button and press the button corresponding to the track you want to record. You can select TRACK 1 or TRACK 2 and the EXTRA TRACKS for recording at the same time. • Specifying the recording track To record your keyboard performance: Press either the [TRACK 1] or [TRACK 2] button. To record the auto accompaniment and multi pad performance: EXTRA TRACK TRACK Press the [EXTRA TRACKS] button. REC TRACKS 2 1 To stop recording, press the [REC] button again. 4 (STYLE) (L) (R) Recording starts as soon as you play the keyboard. You can also start recording by pressing the SONG/STYLE [START/STOP] button. Recording can also be started by pressing down the foot pedal, if the song start/stop function is properly assigned to the pedal (page 142). END To stop recording, press the [REC] button again. Recording can also be stopped by pressing down the foot pedal, if the song start/stop function is properly assigned to the pedal (page 142). If the “LAYER” or “LEFT” button is on before pressing the REC button, the corresponding Layer and Left parts are automatically recorded to different channels. The performance of track 1/2 is recorded to the channel specified in the SONG SETTING display (page 140). You can overdub a second right-hand performance onto Track 2 after recording the first right-hand performance (including the layer voices) on Track 1. To do this, set the [LEFT] button to OFF and repeat steps 2 and 3. To pause, press the SONG [START/STOP] button. To resume recording, press the SONG [START/STOP] button again. You can also use the metronome click as a guide while recording. The sound of the metronome is not recorded. ■ Play back your new song To play back the performance you just recorded, return the song to the beginning by using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button. Playback stops automatically at the end of the song, and returns to the beginning of the song. You can edit the recorded song data from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16) displays (page 108). Press the [6▼] button from the Open/Save display for Song to store the recorded data (page 38, 47). 96 PSR-2100/1100 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Multi Recording This lets you record a song with several different instrument sounds on up to sixteen channels, and create the sound of a full band or orchestra. The structure of the channels and parts are shown in the chart below. Channels Parts (default settings) 1 Voice MAIN 2 Voice MAIN 3 Voice MAIN 4 Voice MAIN 5 Voice MAIN 6 Voice MAIN 7 Voice MAIN 8 Voice MAIN Available parts Channels Voice MAIN, LAYER, LEFT Multi Pad1 Multi Pad2 Multi Pad3 Multi Pad4 Accompaniment style RHYTHM 1 Accompaniment style RHYTHM 2 Accompaniment style BASS Accompaniment style CHORD1 Accompaniment style CHORD2 Accompaniment style PAD Accompaniment style PHRASE1 Accompaniment style PHRASE2 MIDI 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Parts (default settings) Accompaniment style RHYTHM 1 Accompaniment style RHYTHM 2 Accompaniment style BASS Accompaniment style CHORD1 Accompaniment style CHORD2 Accompaniment style PAD Accompaniment style PHRASE1 Accompaniment style PHRASE2 Available parts Voice MAIN, LAYER, LEFT Multi Pad1 Multi Pad2 Multi Pad3 Multi Pad4 Accompaniment style RHYTHM 1 Accompaniment style RHYTHM 2 Accompaniment style BASS Accompaniment style CHORD1 Accompaniment style CHORD2 Accompaniment style PAD Accompaniment style PHRASE1 Accompaniment style PHRASE2 MIDI About the accompaniment style parts Rhythm .....This is the basis for the accompaniment, containing the drum and percussion rhythm patterns. Usually one of the drum kits is used. Bass..........The Bass part uses various appropriate instrument sounds to match the style, such as acoustic bass, synth bass, and others. Chord ........This is the rhythmic chord backing, commonly used with piano or guitar voices. Pad ............This part features sustained chords and commonly uses lush sounds such as strings, organ, and choir. Phrase ......This part is used for various embellishments and riffs that enhance the song, such as brass section accents and chord arpeggios. CAUTION If you wish to save the recording, make sure to store it to internal memory (USER drive) or floppy disk (page 39, 47). If you turn off the power or re-record over an existing track before you save the performance, any previous recording will be erased. ■ When recording over the part of an internal song or a song on disk with your own performance: ■ When creating a new song: 1 REC NEW SONG 2 TOP START/STOP REW FF 1 SYNC. START Select the desired song (page 79, 81). Select the desired channel for recording (set it to “REC”) simultaneously holding down the [REC] button and pressing the appropriate button [1▲▼] [8▲▼]. Several channels can be selected at the same time. REC ......................... Enables recording for the channel ON ......................... Enables playback of the channel OFF......................... Mutes the channel To cancel or disable REC recording, press the [REC] button once again. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 The part is automatically selected when setting the several channels to “REC” at the same time. 8 PSR-2100/1100 97 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator 3 Select the part you want to assign to the channel to be recorded. This determines which of the keyboard-played parts (Main/Layer/Left) and the accompaniment style parts (RHYTHM 1/2, BASS, etc.) are recorded to the recording channels selected in step #2. For a list of the initial default assignments, see page 97. C D 4 5 6 Recording starts as soon as you play the keyboard. You can also start recording by pressing the SONG/STYLE [START/STOP] button. The recording can be started/stopped by pressing the foot pedal if the recording punch in/out function is set to the pedal (page 104). To stop recording, press the [REC] button again. You can also use the foot pedal to stop recording by releasing it, if the recording punch in/out function has been assigned to the pedal (page 104). A single part (with the exception of MIDI parts) cannot be assigned to several channels. The settings of the recorded parts is stored temporarily until you execute Quick Recording, select a song, or turn the power off. To pause, press the SONG [START/STOP] button. To resume recording, press the SONG [START/STOP] button again. Play back your new song. To play back the performance you just recorded, return the song to the beginning by using the [TOP] button and press the SONG [START/STOP] button. Playback stops automatically at the end of the song, and returns to the beginning of the song. END 98 When selecting the MIDI part • Setting a single channel to MIDI All incoming data received via any of the MIDI channels 1 - 16 is recorded. When using an external MIDI keyboard or controller to record, this lets you record without having to set the MIDI transmit channel on the external device. • Setting several channels to MIDI When using an external MIDI keyboard or controller to record, this records data only over the set MIDI channel — meaning the external device must also be set to the same channel. To record a new part, repeat steps 2 - 6 above. You can set previously recorded parts to play back, and monitor them while you record a new part. Continue in this way until you have a finished song. You can edit the recorded song data from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16) displays (page 108). Press the [6▼] button from the Open/Save display for Song to store the recorded data (page 38, 47). PSR-2100/1100 You can also use the metronome click as a guide while recording. The sound of the metronome is not recorded. Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Recording Individual Notes — Step Record This method lets you create a song by entering notes one by one, without having to perform them in real time. This is also convenient for recording the chords and the melody separately. Operation 1 Select an existing song (page 79, 81) to which you want to add parts or re-record. If you want to create a new song, simultaneously press the [REC] button and the [TOP] button. 3 Press the [A] button to call up the Song Creator display. A 2 B Press the [DIGITAL RECORDING] button. DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR C D E DIGITAL RECORDING MIXING CONSOLE PART 4 Using the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons, select the “1-16” tab for recording melodies and other parts, or select the “CHD” (Chord) tab for recording chords, and after selecting the “1 - 16” tab, select a record channel with the [F] (CH) button. BACK NEXT F G H I J 5 Call up the Step Record display by pressing the [G] button. F Any voice, effect and other settings you make in the Mixing Console are automatically cancelled when you call up the CHD (Chord) page. G H I J The voices in the USER and FLOPPY DISK pages cannot be selected for Step recording. You can select voices from the PRESET page; however, these may sound slightly different from the original voice. PSR-2100/1100 99 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator 6 First, select the desired voice. To enter the note, first specify the length and loudness in this display, then enter the pitch by actually playing the note on the keyboard. Moves the cursor position up and down. Returns the cursor to the beginning of the song (the first note of the first measure). Use these to move the selected event, in units of measures (BAR), beat, and clocks. For information on measure/beat/clock settings, see below. END A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Specifies the type of note to be input next. (Sixteenth notes are available only when recording the melody.) This also determines the position to which the pointer will advance after a note has been entered. Determines the velocity (loudness) of the note to be entered (only when recording the melody). For information on velocity settings, see below. Determines the length of the note (as a percentage) from the position at which it is to be entered. (This is available only when recording the melody.) For information on gate time settings, see below. Each press of this button toggles among the three basic note selectors at the bottom of the display: normal, dotted, and triplet. (This is available only when recording the melody.) 8 Deletes the event at the cursor. To close the STEP RECORD display, press the [EXIT] button. Make sure to store the recorded data by pressing the [I] (SAVE) button (page 47). ■ Bar/Beat/Clock Bar 1 Beat Clock 1 2 2 3 4 1 000- 000- 000- 0001919 1919 1919 1919 2 3 4 000- 000- 000- 0001919 1919 1919 1919 ■ Velocity The table below shows the available settings and the corresponding velocity values. Kbd. Vel Actual playing strength fff ff f mf mp p pp ppp 127 111 95 79 63 47 31 15 ■ Gate Time The following settings are available: Normal ....................... 80% Tenuto ........................ 99% Staccato...................... 40% Staccatissimo .............. 20% Manual ....................... The gate time (note length) can be specified as a percentage by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial. 100 PSR-2100/1100 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Recording Melodies — Step Record (Note) In this section, we’ll show you how to use Step Recording by guiding you through this actual music example, shown at right. The operations here apply to step 6 on page 100. 1 1-1 1-2 Select this note. 1-3 2 While holding down this note... ...press this (to input a tie). The notation display on the instrument (PSR-2100) may not be accurate, especially for tied notes or longer notes. To have the notation displayed accurately, set the gate time to tenuto by using the [H] button, and input the notes as desired. 2-2 2-3 2-1 Select this note. 3 Select this note. Selecting a note enters a rest of the equivalent value. For example, selecting an eighth note ( ) here results in a eighth note rest ( ). 4 5 4-1 Press this button to display the dotted notes. 4-3 4-2 Select this note. 5-1 Call up the normal notes by pressing this button. 5-3 5-2 Select this note. To input rests, simply move the measure/beat/clock location for the desired rest time, then input the next note. ■ Play back the newly created melody Use the [C] ( ▲ ) button to move the cursor to the beginning of the song, and press the SONG [START/STOP] button to hear the newly entered notes. To actually enter the recorded data, press the [EXIT] button. The entered data can be edited from the SONG CREATOR (1 - 16) display (page 108). PSR-2100/1100 101 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompaniment — Step Record (Chord) The Chord Step recording feature makes it possible to record auto accompaniment chord changes one at a time with precise timing. Since the changes don’t have to be played in real time, you can easily create complex, tight chord changes — over which you can record the melody in normal fashion. The operations here apply to step 6 on page 100. Entering Chords and Sections (Chord Step) For example, you can input the following chord progression by the procedure described below. MAIN A C 1 BREAK F G F MAIN B G7 Enter the chords by using the currently selected chord fingering method in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard. C Press the MAIN [A] button to specify the section, and enter the chords as shown at right. MAIN A C MAIN F C 001:1:000 F Select this note value and play the chords indicated at right. 2 G 001:3:000 G 002:1:000 Press the [BREAK] button to specify the Break section, and enter the chords as shown at right. MAIN A BREAK C INTRO BREAK F G F 002:3:000 G7 002:4:000 Select this note value and play the chords indicated at right. 102 PSR-2100/1100 F G7 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator 3 Press the MAIN [B] button to specify the section and enter the chord indicated at right. MAIN A BREAK MAIN B MAIN C F G F G7 C C 003:1:000 Select this note value and play the chords indicated at right. ■ Play back the newly created chord progression Use the [C] ( ▲ ) button to move the cursor to the beginning of the song, and press the SONG [START/STOP] button to hear the newly entered notes. To actually enter the recorded data, press the [EXIT] button. The entered data can be edited from the SONG CREATOR (CHD) display (page 109). Finally, press the [F] (EXPAND) button from the SONG CREATOR (CHD) display in order to convert the input data into song data. To enter a fill-in, press the [AUTO FILL IN] button and press one of the MAIN [A]– [D] buttons. END Mark An “END” mark is shown in the display, indicating the end of the song data. The actual position of the End mark differs depending on the section that is input at the end of the song. When an Ending section is input, the End mark automatically follows the Ending data. When a section other than Ending is input, the End mark is set two measures after the final section. The End mark can be freely set to any position desired. PSR-2100/1100 103 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Select the Recording Options: Starting, Stopping, Punching In/Out — Rec Mode From this display you can set up how recording is started and stopped for either Quick Recording or Multi Recording. To call up these settings, select the REC MODE display by using the [BACK][NEXT] button, after performing operation steps 1 - 3 on page 99. These settings determine how recording will start. Normal Overwrite recording starts when you press the SONG [START/STOP] button or when you play the keyboard with Synchro standby set to ON. F G Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data. H First Key On Overwrite recording starts as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This setting also preserves the previous lead-in data, letting you record over the original lead-in without erasing it. I J Determines the Punch Out measure — the measure at which Punch In overwrite recording stops (when “PUNCH OUT AT” is selected). Punch In At The song plays back normally up to the indicated Punch In measure (set by the [3▲▼] buttons), then starts overwrite recording at that Punch In measure. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines the measure at which Punch In overwrite recording starts (when “PUNCH IN AT” is selected). These settings determine how recording will stop as well as what happens to previously recorded data. Replace All This deletes all data following the point at which recording is stopped. Punch Out This maintains all data following the point at which recording is stopped. Punch Out At Overwrite recording continues until the indicated Punch Out measure (set by the [6▲▼] buttons), then stops at that Punch Out measure, after which song playback continues normally. When this is set to ON, you can use the foot pedal 2 to control the punch-in and punch-out points. (The current function assignment of the foot pedal is cancelled.) Press and hold down the foot pedal to record. Recording stops when you release the pedal. About Punch In/Out This feature is useful primarily for re-recording or replacing a specific section of an already recorded channel. The illustrations below indicate a variety of situations in which selected measures in an eight-measure phrase are re-recorded. REC START setting REC END setting NORMAL REPLACE ALL NORMAL PUNCH OUT NORMAL PUNCH OUT AT=006 FIRST KEY ON REPLACE ALL FIRST KEY ON PUNCH OUT FIRST KEY ON PUNCH OUT AT=006 PUNCH IN AT=003 REPLACE ALL PUNCH IN AT=003 PUNCH OUT PUNCH IN AT=003 PUNCH OUT AT=006 104 PSR-2100/1100 Original data 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 1 1 Start/ play back original data 1 Start/ play back original data 1 Start/ play back original data 1 Start/ play back original data 1 Start/ play back original data 1 8 5 *1 When measures 1 - 2 are not overwritten, recording starts from measure 3. *2 You’ll have to press the [REC] button at the end of 5 measures. Deleted 5 6 7 8 7 8 Stop overwrite recording/ play original data Start/start overwrite recording *1 Start/ play back original data 7 Stop recording *2 Start/start overwrite recording *1 1 6 Stop recording *2 Start/start overwrite recording *1 1 5 2 3 4 Start playing the keys/ start overwrite recording 2 3 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5 Deleted Stop recording *2 4 5 6 7 8 Stop overwrite recording/ play original data Start overwrite recording 2 5 Stop recording *2 Start overwrite recording 2 Deleted Stop overwrite recording/ play original data Start overwrite recording 2 5 Stop recording *2 Start playing the keys/ start overwrite recording 2 6 Stop recording *2 Start playing the keys/ start overwrite recording 2 5 4 5 6 7 8 Previously recorded data Newly recorded data Deleted data Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Editing a Recorded Song Whether you’ve recorded a song using Quick Recording, Multi Recording, or Step Recording, you can use the editing features to change the song data. Editing Channel-related Parameters — Channel Calling up the operations here apply to step 4 on page 99. To call up the display shown below, use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons. Quantize Quantize lets you “clean up” or tighten the timing of a previously recorded channel. For example, the following musical passage has been written with exact quarter-note and eighth-note values. Even though you think you may have recorded the passage accurately, your actual performance may be slightly ahead of or behind the beat. Quantize allows you to align all the notes in a channel so that the timing is absolutely accurate to the specified note value (see below). Use this to select the desired edit operation. Executes the Quantize operation. After the operation is completed, this button changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data if you’re not satisfied with the Quantize results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data. Determines how strongly the notes will be quantized. If a value less than 100% is selected, notes will be moved toward the specified quantization beats only by the specified amount. Applying less than 100% quantization lets you preserve some of the “human” feel in the recording. Selects the quantize size (resolution). See the below for the details. Selects the desired channel to be quantized. ■ About Quantize Size Set the Quantize size to correspond to the smallest notes in the channel you are working with. For example, if the data was recorded with both quarter notes and eighth notes, use 1/8 note for the Quantize size. If you apply a 1/4 note Quantize size, the eighth notes would be moved on top of the quarter notes. One measure of eighth notes before quantization After 1/8 note quantization Quantize Size 1/4 note 1/4 note triplet 1/8 note 1/8 note triplet 1/16 note 1/16 note triplet 1/32 note 1/8 note + 1/8 note triplet * 1/16 note + 1/8 note triplet * 1/16 note + 1/16 note triplet * The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks (*) are exceptionally convenient, since they allow you to quantize two different note values at the same time, without compromising the quantization of either one. For example, if you have both straight 1/8 notes and 1/8 note triplets recorded to the same channel, and you quantize to straight 1/8 notes, all notes in the channel are quantized to straight 1/8 notes — completely eliminating any triplet feel in the rhythm. However, if you use the 1/8 note + 1/8 note triplet setting, both the straight and triplet notes will be quantized correctly. PSR-2100/1100 105 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Delete This lets you delete recorded data in the specified channel. Use these to select the desired edit operation. Deletes all data in the selected channel. After the operation is completed, this button changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data. These select the channel to be deleted. 8 Mix This function lets you mix the data of two channels and place the results in a different channel. It also lets you copy the data from one channel to another. Use these to select the desired edit operation. Executes the Mix operation. After the operation is completed, this button changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data if you’re not satisfied with the Mix results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 These let you specify the two source channels to be mixed. 4 5 6 7 PSR-2100/1100 Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data. 8 Determines the channel into which the mix or copy results will be placed. If “COPY” is selected here, the data from Source 1 is copied to the Destination channel. 106 All data other than the mixed note data is derived from the Source 1 channel. Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Channel Transpose This allows you to transpose the recorded data of individual channels up or down by a maximum of two octaves in semitone increments. Use these to select the desired edit operation. Executes the Channel Transpose operation. After the operation is completed, this button changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data if you’re not satisfied with the Channel Transpose results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. A F B G C H D I E J Toggles between the two channel displays: Channels 1 - 8, and Channels 9 - 16. To simultaneously set all channels to the same value, adjust the Channel Transpose for one of the channels while holding down this button. Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines the amount of Channel Transpose for each channel. Set Up You can change the initial settings of the song — such as voice, level, and tempo — to the current settings of the mixing console or panel controls. Use these to select the desired edit operation. Executes the SET UP operation. Once SET UP has been executed, the operation cannot be cancelled or undone. A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data. Use this to checkmark the selected item. Checkmarked items are stored with the song. Determines which playback features and functions will be automatically called up along with the selected song. All events, with the exception of “KEYBOARD VOICE,” can be recorded only at the beginning of the song. Before you select or checkmark any of these items (other than Keyboard Voice), make sure to return the song to the beginning by using the [TOP] button, and stop playback. Song ............................ Stores the tempo setting and all settings made from the Mixing Console. Keyboard Voice........... This lets you automatically set the voice of the keyboard-played parts (Main/Layer/Left) when playing back the song. Stores the keyboard-played voice and the part ON/OFF settings. To record a voice change for the keyboard-played part in the middle of a song, stop the song at the desired point, make the voice change, and press the [D] (EXECUTE) button. Lyrics language.......... Stores the settings of the Lyrics display. Score Setting.............. Stores the settings of the Score display (PSR-2100 only). Mic. Settings ............... Stores the microphone settings in the mixing console (PSR-2100 only). PSR-2100/1100 107 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Editing Note Events — 1 - 16 From this display, you can edit individual note events (see below). Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 99. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. Use these to move the cursor up/down and select the desired event. Determines the channel to be edited. A F Returns to the beginning position of the current song (the first note of the first measure). B G C H D I Use these to move the cursor left/right and select the desired parameter of the highlighted event. E J Calls up the Step Recording display (page 100). Calls up the Filter display (page 110), letting you select only the events you wish to shown in the Event List. Calls up the SONG display, from which you can save the edited data. Holding this button down while using the [A] and [B] buttons lets you select multiple events. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Pastes all cut or copied events to the selected location. Determines the current position of the event being edited. For coarse adjustment of the event For fine adjustment of the event value. Cuts (deletes) all selected events. The cut events are copied and can be pasted to another location. Adds a new event to the Event List. If the value at the cursor has been changed, pressing this restores the original value. Copies all selected events. The copied events can be pasted to another location. Deletes the event at the cursor position. To actually enter an edited value, move the cursor away from the value or press the SONG [START/STOP] button. Note Events Parameter Note Ctrl (Control change) Prog (Program change) P.Bnd (Pitch bend) A.T. (After touch) Description Determines the pitch, velocity (volume) and length of the note. Determines the control change number and value. For details on control change messages, refer to the separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format). Determines the voice (program) number. For details on program change messages and how to set them, refer to the separate Data List booklet (Voice List). Determines the pitch bend value. Determines the after touch value. The sound of the voices recorded with Step recording may sound slightly different from the original. 108 PSR-2100/1100 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Editing Chord Events — CHD From this display, you can edit the chord events you’ve recorded to the song. Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 99. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. With the exception of the [F] (EXPAND) button, the operations here are the same as those in Editing Note Events (page 108). A F B G C H D I E J Press this to convert the recorded chord and section entries into song data. To actually enter an edited value, move the cursor away from the value or press the SONG [START/STOP] button. Chord Events Parameter Style (Accompaniment style) Tempo Chord Sect (Section) OnOff (Channel on/off) CH.Vol (Channel volume) S.Vol (Style volume) Description Displays the accompaniment style name. To enter an accompaniment style, call up the STYLE display and select the desired style. Determines the tempo value. Specifies the chord — its root note, chord type, and on-bass note. Specifies the section — its name and variation. Determines whether specific channels (rhythm, bass, etc.) are turned on/off. Determines the level of specific channels (rhythm, bass, etc.). Determines the level of the entire accompaniment style. Editing System Events — SYS/EX. (System Exclusive) From this display, you can edit recorded System events. Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 99. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. The operations here are the same as those in Editing Note Events (page 108). System Events Parameter Description ScBar (Score initial measure) This determines the number of the top measure. The measure number is indicated in the MAIN display or in the music notation. Only one value can be specified at the beginning of the song data. Tempo Determines the tempo value. Time (Time signature) Determines the time signature. Key Determines the key, as well as the major/minor setting. XG Prm (XG parameters) Allows you to make various detailed changes to the data. For more information on XG parameters, refer to the separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format). SYS/EX. (System Exclusive) Displays the System Exclusive data in the song. This does not let you change the actual contents of the data; however, it lets you delete, cut, copy, and paste the data. Meta (Meta event) Displays the SMF meta events in the song. This does not let you change the actual contents of the data; however, it lets you delete, cut, copy, and paste the data. PSR-2100/1100 109 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs — Song Creator Inputting and Editing Lyrics This convenient function lets you enter the song name and the lyrics for the song. It also lets you change or correct already existing lyrics. For more information on lyric events, see the chart below. Calling up operations here apply to step 4 on page 99. Use the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons to call up the display below. The operations here are the same as those in Editing Note Events (page 108). In the following example, we’ll rewrite a portion of the lyrics to one of the songs, “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star.” Select the internal song “Twinkle Twinkle Little Star.” The method for selection is the same as described on pages 79 and 86. 1 Move the cursor to the event containing the lyric “star.” 2 Move the cursor to the word “star.” 3 Use these buttons to call up the Lyric display, from which you can input lyrics. From the Lyric display (page 48), enter the new word, “(your name).” A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4 Press this button to save the newly changed lyric data. To actually enter an edited value, move the cursor away from the value or press the SONG [START/STOP] button. 8 Lyrics Events Parameter Name (Song name) Lyrics Code (Other controls) Description Determines the song name. This calls up the NAME display, from which you can enter the name. Allows you to enter lyrics. CR : Enters a line break in the lyrics text. LF : Deletes the currently displayed lyrics and displays the next set of lyrics. Customizing the Event List — Filter This function lets you determine which event types will be shown in the event editing displays. To select an event for display, checkmark the box corresponding to the event name. To filter out an event so that it is not shown on the list, remove the checkmark so that the box is empty. To call up the display below, press the [H] (FILTER) button from any of the following displays: CHD, 1 - 16, SysEX, or LYRICS (page 108 - page 110). Calls up the Main Filter display. For more information on each event type, refer to the separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format). Calls up the Control Change Filter display. For more information on each event type, refer to the separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format). A F B G C H D I E J 1 END Execute the settings by pressing the [EXIT] button. 110 PSR-2100/1100 Selects only note data; checkmarks for all other boxes are removed. Reverses the checkmark settings for all boxes. In other words, this enters checkmarks to all boxes that were previously un-checked and vice versa. Calls up the Accompaniment Filter display. For more information on each event type, refer to the separate Data List booklet (MIDI Data Format). EXIT Enters checkmarks for all items. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Enters/removes the checkmark for the selected item. Selects the item, scrolling up/ down one item at a time. When “MAIN FILTER” or “ACCOMPANIMENT FILTER” is selected, these select the item, scrolling up/down to the top or the bottom. When “CONTROL CHANGE FILTER” is selected, these select the item, scrolling up/down eight items at a time. Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator This powerful feature lets you create your own original styles, which can then be used for auto accompaniment — just as with the preset styles. SONG EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) (STYLE) REC TOP NEW SONG STYLE POP & ROCK DIGITAL RECORDING METRONOME REPEAT START/STOP REW BACK SYNC. START BALLROOM MARCH & WALTZ DANCE LATIN USER PART MENU DEMO VOICE EFFECT LEFT HOLD TOUCH PIANO & HARPSI. A F B G C H D I E J LAYER LEFT GUITAR STRINGS USER TEMPO RESET RESET MIN ACMP STANDBY ON BREAK MAIN INTRO SYNC. STOP SYNC. START WOODWIND SYNTH. XG ORGAN FLUTES VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT SIGNAL ONE TOUCH SETTING BALANCE ENTER DIRECT ACCESS ACMP CHANNEL ON/OFF AUTO FILL IN BRASS RESET MIC. STYLE CONTROL FUNCTION MAX ENDING / rit. BASS CHOIR & PAD OVER STOP MULTI PAD FADE IN/OUT STYLE CONTROL VARIATION PERCUSSION UPPER OCTAVE HELP MASTER VOLUME DSP ORGAN & ACCORDION MUSIC FINDER TAP TEMPO TRANSPOSE HARMONY/ MONO ECHO SUSTAIN E.PIANO MAIN DIGITAL RECORDING SWING & JAZZ MIXING CONSOLE BALLAD NEXT VOICE DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR FF 1 2 3 4 5 6 BREAK 7 8 EXIT START/STOP OTS LINK MAIN ENDING / rit. INTRO DATA ENTRY FREEZE SYNC. STOP AUTO FILL IN REGISTRATION MEMORY PART SYNC. START START/STOP OTS LINK MEMORY About Creating Accompaniment Styles The chart at right shows the basic parts (or “channels”) that make up each section of an accompaniment style. To create an accompaniment style, record patterns to the various channels one by one, for each of the sections you want to create. Section Channel INTRO A - D MAIN A - D ■ Realtime Recording (page 113) FILL IN A - D You can record accompaniment styles by simply playing the parts from the keyboard in real time. However, you don’t have to record every part yourself — you can choose an existing preset accompaniment style that is close to the style you want, then add or replace parts in that style as needed to create your own custom style. BREAK RHYTHM 1, RHYTHM 2, BASS, CHORD 1, CHORD 2, PAD, PHRASE 1, PHRASE 2 ENDING A - D For information on the part structure of accompaniment styles, see page 97. Realtime Recording Characteristics • Loop recording Since auto accompaniment playback repeats the accompaniment patterns of several measures in a “loop,” you can also record patterns in a loop. For example, if you start recording with a two-measure Main section, the two measures are repeatedly recorded. Notes that you record will play back from the next loop (repetition), letting you record new material while hearing the parts you previously recorded. • Overdub recording This feature lets you record new material to a channel already containing recorded data, without deleting the original data. In style recording, the recorded data remains intact, unless you specifically delete it yourself. For example, if you start recording with a two-measure Main section, the two measures are repeated. As you record notes to each pass of the loop (repetition), those notes play back from the next loop, letting you overdub new material while hearing the previous parts. ■ Step Recording (page 114) This method is like writing music notation on paper, since it allows you to enter each note or individually, and specify its length. This is ideal for making precise recordings, or for recording parts that are difficult to play. ■ Assembling an Accompaniment Style (page 115) This convenient feature lets you create composite styles by combining various patterns from the internal preset accompaniment styles. For example, if you want to create your own original 8-beat style, you could take rhythm patterns from the “8 Beat 1” style, use the bass pattern from “8 Beat 2,” and import the chord patterns from the “60’s 8 Beat” style — combining the various elements to create one accompaniment style. 8Beat 1 Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Chord 2 Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 2 60’s 8 Beat Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Chord 2 Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 2 Chord 2 8Beat 2 Rhythm 1 Rhythm 2 Bass Chord 1 Chord 2 Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 2 ■ Editing the created Accompaniment Style (page 116) Pad Phrase 1 Phrase 2 Any voice can be selected for the RHY1 channel, with the exception of Organ Flutes. With the editing features, you can custom edit the styles you’ve created by real time recording, step recording, and assembling from other styles. PSR-2100/1100 111 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator Style File Format These are the patterns recorded to the accompaniment styles (page 119). Source Pattern The Style File Format (SFF) combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into a single unified format. By using the edit functions, you can take full advantage of the SFF format and freely create your own styles. The chart at right indicates the process by which the accompaniment is played back. (This does not apply to the rhythm channels.) The basic or “source” pattern in the chart is the original style data. This source pattern is recorded using accompaniment style recording (see below). As shown in the chart at right, the actual output of the accompaniment is determined by various parameter settings and chord changes (played in Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard) entered to this source pattern. 1 Source Root (root note of basic chord) 2 Source Chord (type of basic chord) Chord changes (in Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard) Pitch Conversion 3 NTR (Note Transposition Rule) 4 NTT (Note Transposition Table) This data is created by chords played in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard (page 65). These settings are edited from the PARAMETER display. These parameters determine how the pitch of the source pattern is converted when you play chords in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard. Other Settings 5 High Key (threshold of the pitch conversion) 6 Note Limit (soundable range) 7 RTR (Retrigger Rule; how the pitches of the chord change) Output Operation 1 Select the desired accompaniment style for editing. To record a new accompaniment style from scratch, call up the BASIC page in the Style Creator display and select “New Style” by pressing the [C] button. 3 A B C D 2 E DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR DIGITAL RECORDING MIXING CONSOLE PART 4 Record and edit the accompaniment style. For details on the operations for each display, refer to the explanations starting on the next page. BACK F G NEXT Use the [BACK]/ [NEXT] buttons to select the various pages. 5 Call up the Style display by pressing the [I] (SAVE) button (in Assembly page: [J] button), then save the recorded / edited data to the USER or FLOPPY DISK page. H I J 112 PSR-2100/1100 END Press the [EXIT] button to close the STYLE CREATOR display. Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator Realtime Recording — Basic You can use the Realtime Recording features to create your own accompaniment style — either from scratch or based on the preset accompaniment data. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 112. 1 Select the desired channel for recording by simultaneously holding down the [F] (REC CH) button and pressing the appropriate [1▲▼] - [8▲▼] button. Before recording to one of the non-rhythm channels (BASS - PHR 2), make sure to delete the existing data of the appropriate channel. You can make other settings (see the box “Other Parameters in the BASIC page” on page 114) after closing the REC CHANNEL display by pressing the [EXIT] button. To call up the REC CHANNEL display again, press the [F] (REC CH) button. Calls up the display for changing the tempo or beat (time signature). Selects an empty style, allowing you to create a new style from scratch. A B C D E Available only when the channel is set to [RHY1] or [RHY2], this lets you delete specific percussion sounds during recording. Simultaneously hold down this button and press the key corresponding to the instrument you want to delete. When this button is pressed, “DELETE” will appear over channels containing data. To delete data from a specific channel, simultaneously hold down this button and press the appropriate [1▲] - [8▲] button. To release or cancel the selection, press the [1▼] [8▼] button corresponding to the channel you wish to cancel. As long as you continue to hold down the F [J] button, you can toggle G between deleting and restoring the selected data. H Releasing the [J] button I permanently deletes the data. Before recording to J one of the non-rhythm channels (BASS - PHR 2), make sure to delete the existing data of the appropriate channel. REC.... Channel is enabled for recording. ON ...... Channel is enabled for playback. OFF .... Channel is muted. 2 First, select the desired voice. Start recording by pressing the STYLE [START/ STOP] button. The selected section of the style starts playing back. Since the rhythm pattern loops repeatedly, you can record new sounds and notes on each pass while listening to the pattern. Icons above the keys conveniently indicate the percussion instruments assigned to the keys. 3 Stop recording by pressing the STYLE [START/STOP] button again. END With the REC CHANNEL display shown, close the display by pressing the [EXIT] button. If you’ve enabled Sync Start (by pressing the SYNC. START button), you can start recording by simply pressing a key on the keyboard. • Only Drum Kit/SFX Kit can be selected for the RHY 2 channel. • For the non-rhythm channels (BASS - PHR 2), allvoices with the exception of the Organ Fultes voice/ Drum Kit/SFX Kit can be selected. PSR-2100/1100 113 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator Other Parameters in the Basic Display [I] (SAVE) button Calls up the Style display for saving the accompaniment style data. [3▲▼][4▲▼] (Section) buttons Determines the section to be recorded. [5▲▼][6▲▼] (Pattern Length) buttons Determines the length of the selected section’s pattern in measures (1 - 32). The Fill In/Break section is fixed at a length of one measure. [D] (Execute) button Executes the Pattern Length change. You can also select the desired section for recording by pressing appropriate panel button. Pressing one of the Section buttons calls up the SECTION display, from which you can change sections by using the [6▲▼]/ [7▲▼] buttons. To actually enter the change, press the [8▲] button.To select the Fill In section, press the [AUTO FILL IN] button. Recording — Precautions • The basic chord used for the accompaniment style is called the source chord. All chords that play and the pitches that sound are derived from the source C R C C R C chord. When recording the Main and Fill In sections (for a source chord of CM7), C = chord note keep the following points in mind: C, R = recommended note * When recording to the Bass or Phrase channels, try to use only the recommended notes; this will ensure that you can play various chords with the accompaniment style and get optimum results. (Other notes may work, providing you use them as short passing tones.) * When recording to the Chord or Pad channels, use only the notes of the CM7 chord; this will ensure that you can play various chords with the accompaniment style and get optimum results. (Other notes may work, providing you use them as short passing tones.) The source chord is set by default to CM7; however, you can change this to any chord you prefer. Refer to the section “Making Style File Format Settings – Parameter” on page 119. • When recording Intro and Ending sections, you can ignore the source chord and use any notes or chord progressions you like. In this case, if you set the NTR parameter to “ROOT TRANSPOSE” and NTT to “HARMONIC MINOR” or “MELODIC MINOR” (in the PARAMETER page), the normal pitch conversions that would result from playing different chords are cancelled (for playback) — meaning that the accompaniment pitch conversion will only occur for changes in the root note or major/minor shifts. Step Recording With this method, you can create a style pattern by entering notes and other data individually, without having to perform them in real time. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 112. F G H I J The actual recording process is the same as in Step Recording of songs (page 99), with the exception of the points described below. You can also edit each event from the Edit page, and the editing process the same as in editing songs (page 108). • In song recording, the end mark position can be changed freely. However, it cannot be changed when creating accompaniment styles. This is because the length of the accompaniment style is automatically fixed according to the selected section. For example, when creating an accompaniment style based on a four-measure section, the end mark position is automatically set to the end of the fourth measure, and cannot be changed from the Step Record screen. • When editing the data recorded on the Edit page, you can switch between the type of data you want to edit (event data or control data). Press the [F] (TRACK EVT) button to switch between the Event display (Note, Control Change, etc.) and the Control display (System Exclusive, etc.). Make sure to set the record channel from another display (e.g., BASIC display; page 112) beforehand. 114 PSR-2100/1100 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator Assembling an Accompaniment Style —Assembly This convenient function lets you combine accompaniment elements — such as rhythm, bass, and chord patterns — from existing styles, and use them to create your own original accompaniment styles. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 112. 1 These let you select the accompaniment style that will be used for each channel of your original style. Select the desired channel by pressing the [A] – [D], [F] – [I] buttons and press the same button to call up the Style screen, from which you can select the accompaniment style. A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 2 3 4 5 6 7 After repeating steps 1 and 2 as desired, press the [J] (SAVE) button to save the assembled style data. From here, you can store the settings of all channels (RHYTHM 1, RHYTHM 2, BASS, etc.) to a single accompaniment style. 8 Selects the style section and channel that will be copied to the corresponding channels, selected with the [A]-[D] and [F]-[I] buttons above. Determines the playback settings for each channel. You can assemble the accompaniment style while the style section and channel that will be copied are playing. SOLO ............Mutes all but the selected channel. RHYTHM channels set to REC in the REC CHANNEL display (page 114) are played back simultaneously. ON ................Plays back the selected channels. Any channels set to ON in the REC CHANNEL display (page 113) are played back simultaneously. OFF ...............If the selected channel is set to ON in the REC CHANNEL display (page 113), OFF does not appear and is not available. If you change the section and channel in steps #1 and #2, the currently specified section and channel are also changed. The channels being recorded are also changed and recording is stopped automatically. The PLAY TYPE parameter affects only the playback, and does not change the actual accompaniment style data. PSR-2100/1100 115 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator Edit the Created Accompaniment Style Change the Rhythmic Feel — Groove and Dynamics These versatile features give you a wide variety of tools for changing the rhythmic feel of your created accompaniment style. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 112. ■ Groove Use these to select the desired edit operation. A F B G C H D I E J Executes the Groove operation. After the operation is completed, this button changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data if you’re not satisfied with the Groove results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. Calls up the Style display and lets you store the edited accompaniment style data. Determines the settings for each of the Groove parameters (see the list below). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Groove parameters 116 Original Beat Specifies the beats to which Groove timing is to be applied. In other words, if “8 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to the 8th notes; if “12 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to 8th-note triplets. Beat Converter Actually changes the timing of the beats (specified in the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above) to the selected value. For example, when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “8 Beat” and BEAT CONVERTER is set to “12,” all 8th notes in the section are shifted to 8th-note triplet timing. The “16A” and “16B” Beat Converter which appear when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “12 Beat” are variations on a basic 16th-note setting. Swing Produces a “swing” feel by shifting the timing of the back beats, depending on the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above. For example, if the specified ORIGINAL BEAT value is 8th notes, the Swing parameter will selectively delay the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th beats of each measure to create a swing feel. The settings “A” through “E” produce different degrees of swing, with “A” being the most subtle and “E” being the most pronounced. Fine Selects a variety of Groove “templates” to be applied to the selected section. The “PUSH” settings cause certain beats to be played early, while “HEAVY” settings delay the timing of certain beats. The numbered settings (2, 3, 4, 5) determine which beats are to be affected. All beats up to the specified beat —but not including the first beat — will be played early or delayed (for example, the 2nd and 3rd beats, if “3” is selected). In all cases, “A” types produce minimum effect, “B” types produce medium effect, and “C” types produce maximum effect. PSR-2100/1100 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator ■ Dynamics Use these to select the desired edit operation. A F B G C H D I E J Executes the Dynamics operation. After the operation is completed, this button changes to [UNDO], letting you restore the original data if you’re not satisfied with the Dynamics results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. 1 2 3 Select the desired channel to which Dynamics is to be applied. 4 5 6 7 Calls up the Style display and lets you store the edited accompaniment style data. 8 Determines the settings for each of the Dynamics parameters (see the list below). Dynamics parameters Accent Type Selects the type of accent. Strength Determines how strongly the selected Accent Type (above) will be applied. The higher the value, the stronger the effect. Expand/Compress Expands or compresses the range of velocity values, around a central velocity value “64.” Values higher than 100% expand the dynamic range, while values lower than 100% compress it. Boost/Cut Boosts or cuts all velocity values in the selected section/channel. Values above 100% boost the overall velocity, while values below 100% reduce it. Velocity is determined by how strongly you play the keyboard. The more strongly you play the keyboard, the higher the velocity value and, hence, the louder the sound. PSR-2100/1100 117 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator Editing the Channel Data In this display, there are five different channel-related edit functions, including Quantize, for editing the recorded accompaniment style data. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 112. See the explanations below. Preset channel BASSPHRASE 2 can not be edited. ■ Quantize Refer to page 105. ■ Velocity Change Boosts or cuts the velocity of all notes in the specified channel (selected with the [1▲▼]/[2▲▼] (CHANNEL) buttons), according to the specified percentage (selected with the [4▲▼]/[5▲▼] (BOOST/CUT) buttons). ■ Bar Copy This function allows data to be copied from one measure or group of measures to another location within the specified channel. Use the [4▲▼] (TOP) and [5▲▼] (LAST) buttons to specify the first and last measures in the region to be copied. Use the [6▲▼] (DEST) button to specify the first measure of the destination location, to which the data is to be copied. ■ Bar Clear This function clears all data from the specified range of measures within the selected channel. Use the [4▲▼] (TOP) and [5▲▼] (LAST) buttons to specify the first and last measures in the region to be cleared. ■ Remove Event This function lets you remove specific events from the selected channel. Use the [4▲▼] - [6▲▼] (EVENT) buttons to select the desired event type to be removed. 118 PSR-2100/1100 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator Making Style File Format Settings — Parameter This display provides a variety of style controls— such as determining how the pitch and sound of the recorded style change when playing the chords in the left-hand range of the keyboard. For details about the relationship between the parameters, refer to “Style File Format” on page 112. The operations here are the same as described in step 4 on page 112. When NTR is set to “Root Fixed” and NTT is set to “Bypass,” the “Source Root” and “Source Chord” parameters are changed to “Play Root” and “Play Chord,” respectively. In this case, you can change chords and hear the resulting sound for all channels. See the explanations below. ■ Source Root/Chord These settings determine the original key of the source pattern (i.e., the key used when recording the pattern). The default setting of CM7 (with a Source Root of “C” and a Source Type of “M7”), is automatically selected whenever the preset data is deleted prior to recording a new style, regardless of the Source Root and Chord included in the preset data. When you change Source Root / Chord from the default CM7 to another chord, the chord notes and recommended notes will also change, depending on the newly selected chord type. For details on chord notes and recommended notes, see page 114. When the Source Root is C: C6 CMaj CM711 CM7 CM79 C9 C69 C C R C C R C R C C C R Cm Caug R C R Cm711 C R C C7 5 C C C C C C C C R C R C R C C C C C C C1+5 C C C7sus4 C C R C C C C R C C C C C C R C C C C C C R C C R C C C C = chord note C, R = recommended note R C C C R C C C C79 Csus2 Csus4 R C C C R C C C C C713 C C C R C R C C R R C C C C C7 C C C R C Cm79 C C C79 C C R C C R C R C R C C R R C C R R C C C Cm9 C C713 C C R C C R Cdim7 C R C C1+8 C7aug CM7aug C C C R C Cdim C711 C79 C R C C C C C C C Cm75 C R C C CmM79 R C C R C Cm7 C R C C R C C C R C C C CmM7 C C R C R C Cm6 C R C R C C R C C R ■ NTR (Note Transposition Rule) and NTT (Note Transposition Table) • NTR (Note Transposition Rule) This determines the system for pitch conversion of the source pattern. Two settings are available. Root Trans (Root Transpose) When the root note is transposed, the pitch relationship between notes is maintained. For example, the notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key of C become F3, A3 and C4 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that contain melody lines. Root Fixed The note is kept as close as possible to the previous note range. For example, the notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key of C become C3, F3 and A3 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that contain chord parts. PSR-2100/1100 119 Creating Accompaniment Styles — Style Creator • NTT (Note Transposition Table) This sets the note transposition table for the source pattern. Six transposition types are available. Bypass No transposition. Melody Suitable for melody line transposition. Use this for melody channels such as Phrase 1 and Phrase 2. Chord Suitable for chord transposition. Use for the Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels, especially when they contain piano or guitar-like chordal parts. Bass Suitable for bass line transposition. This table is basically similar to the Melody table above, but recognizes onbass chords allowed in the FINGERED ON BASS fingering mode. Use this primarily for bass lines. Melodic Minor When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third interval in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third interval is raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Harmonic Minor When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third and sixth intervals in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third and flatted sixth intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. ■ High Key/Note Limit • High Key This sets the highest key (upper octave limit) of the note transposition for the chord root change. Any notes calculated to be higher than the highest key are transposed down to the octave just below the highest key. This setting is effective only when the NTR parameter (page 119) is set to “Root Trans.” • Note Limit This sets the note range (highest and lowest notes) for voices recorded to the style channels. By judicious setting of this range, you can ensure that the voices sound as realistic as possible — in other words, that no notes outside the natural range are sounded (e.g., high bass sounds or low piccolo sound). The actual notes that sound are automatically shifted to the set range. Example — When the highest key is F Root changes CM CM Notes played C3-E3-G3 C 3-F3-G 3 FM F3-A3-C4 FM F 2-A 2-C 3 Example — When the lowest note is C3 and the highest is D4 Root changes CM CM FM 3-C4 E3-G3-C4 F3-G F3-A3-C4 Notes played High Limit Low Limit ■ RTR (Retrigger Rule) These settings determine whether notes stop sounding or not and how they change pitch in response to chord changes. Stop The notes stop sounding. Pitch Shift The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the type of the new chord. Pitch Shift to Root The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the root of the new chord. Retrigger The note is retriggered with a new attack at a new pitch corresponding to the next chord. Retrigger To Root The note is retriggered with a new attack at the root note of the next chord. However, the octave of the new note remains the same. 120 PSR-2100/1100 Creating Multi Pad — Multi Pad Creator The PSR-2100/1100 lets you create your own original Multi Pad phrases — which you can use in your performances in the same way as the preset Multi Pads. SONG EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) (STYLE) TOP REC NEW SONG STYLE POP & ROCK METRONOME REPEAT START/STOP REW BACK SYNC. START BALLROOM MARCH & WALTZ DANCE LATIN USER PART VOICE EFFECT LEFT HOLD TOUCH PIANO & HARPSI. A F B G C H D I GUITAR LAYER STRINGS LEFT USER MENU DEMO E TEMPO RESET RESET MIN STYLE CONTROL ACMP BREAK MAIN INTRO MIC. SYNC. START WOODWIND SYNTH. XG VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT SIGNAL ONE TOUCH SETTING BALANCE ENTER DIRECT ACCESS EXIT CHANNEL ON/OFF SYNC. STOP AUTO FILL IN CHOIR & PAD RESET FUNCTION MAX ENDING / rit. BRASS VARIATION PERCUSSION OVER STOP MULTI PAD FADE IN/OUT STANDBY ON BASS DSP ORGAN FLUTES MUSIC FINDER HELP MASTER VOLUME ORGAN & ACCORDION UPPER OCTAVE J TAP TEMPO TRANSPOSE HARMONY/ MONO ECHO SUSTAIN E.PIANO MAIN DIGITAL RECORDING SWING & JAZZ MIXING CONSOLE BALLAD NEXT VOICE DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR FF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REGISTRATION MEMORY PART START/STOP DATA ENTRY OTS LINK FREEZE MEMORY STOP MULTI PAD Operation 1 Select the desired Multi Pad Bank for editing. To record a new Multi Pad from scratch, call up the RECORD page in the Multi Pad Creator display and select “New Bank” by pressing the [C] (NEW BANK) button. 3 A B C D 2 DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR E DIGITAL RECORDING MIXING CONSOLE PART 4 Record and Edit the Multi Pad. For details on the operations for each display, refer to the explanations starting on the next page. BACK F G H NEXT Use the [BACK]/ [NEXT] buttons to select the RECORD or EDIT page. 5 Call up the Multi Pad display by pressing the [I] (SAVE) button, then save the recorded / edited data to the USER or FLOPPY DISK page. I J END Press the [EXIT] button to close the MULTI PAD display. PSR-2100/1100 121 Creating Multi Pad — Multi Pad Creator Multi Pad Realtime Recording — Record The operations here apply to step 4 on page 121. Select the desired Multi Pad for recording or editing. You can also select it by pressing the MULTI PAD [1] to [4] button. A F B G C H D I E J Select this to engage the Record standby mode (synchronized standby). Select this to save the recorded pad data to USER or FLOPPY DISK drive. Selects an empty Multi Pad bank, allowing you to create a new Multi Pad from scratch. Calls up the NAME display to input the new name. Turn Repeat/Chord Match of each pad on or off (see below). Start recording First, select the desired voice. Press the [H] (REC) button to set the Record standby mode. Recording begins automatically as soon as you play on the keyboard. You can also start recording by pressing the STYLE [START] button. If Chord Match (see below) is set to on for the Multi Pad to be recorded, you should record using the notes of the C major seventh scale (C, D, E, G, A and B). C R C C R C C = chord note C, R = recommended note Others: non-recommended note • Other notes besides those of the C major seventh scale can be recorded; however, this may result in the recorded phrase not matching the chord when being played back. • The rhythm part of the currently selected style is used as a rhythmic guide (in place of a metronome), playing back during recording. However, it is not recorded to the Multi Pad. Stop recording Press the [H] (STOP) button or the panel STYLE/MULTI PAD [STOP] button to stop recording when you've finished playing the phrase. Turning Chord Match and Repeat On/Off ■ Repeat Unless the Repeat function is on for the selected pad, playback will end automatically as soon as the end of the phrase is reached. A phrase can be stopped while it is playing by pressing the MULTI PAD [STOP] button. ■ Chord Match If a Multi Pad is played while Style is playing and the Chord Match function for that pad is ON, the phrase will be automatically re-harmonized to match the accompaniment chords. 122 PSR-2100/1100 Creating Multi Pad — Multi Pad Creator Step Recording or Editing Multi Pads — Edit With this method, you can create a Multi Pad by entering notes and other data individually, without having to perform them in real time. The operations here apply to step 4 on page 121. F F G G H H I I J J The actual recording process is the same as in Step Recording of songs (page 99), with the exception of the points described below. You can also edit each event from the Edit page, and the editing process the same as in editing songs (page 108). • Just as with Song Recording, the End Mark position can be changed freely in the Multi Pad Creator. This allows you to finely adjust the phrase length for the Pad. This would be convenient, for example, in synchronizing repeat playback of a Pad (set to Repeat On) with the keyboard and auto accompaniment playback. • Since the Multi Pads have only one track (channel), the track (channel) cannot be changed. PSR-2100/1100 123 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console Set up just like a real mixing console, this display gives you comprehensive control over the sound. SONG EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) (STYLE) REC TOP NEW SONG STYLE POP & ROCK METRONOME REPEAT START/STOP REW BACK MARCH & WALTZ DANCE LATIN USER MIXING CONSOLE BALLAD PART TOUCH PIANO & HARPSI. F B G C H D I LAYER LEFT GUITAR STRINGS USER MENU DEMO E RESET MIN STYLE CONTROL ACMP BREAK MAIN INTRO SYNC. STOP SYNC. START WOODWIND XG SYNTH. VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT ONE TOUCH SETTING BALANCE ENTER DIRECT ACCESS MAX AUTO FILL IN CHOIR & PAD ORGAN FLUTES SIGNAL FUNCTION MIXING CONSOLE ENDING / rit. PERCUSSION OVER STOP MULTI PAD FADE IN/OUT STANDBY ON BRASS VARIATION RESET MIC. HELP RESET ORGAN & ACCORDION BASS MUSIC FINDER TEMPO MASTER VOLUME E.PIANO Mixing Console This set of controls lets you adjust the balance of the voices and their stereo position, as well as the amount of effect that is applied to each voice. DSP UPPER OCTAVE J TAP TEMPO TRANSPOSE HARMONY/ MONO ECHO SUSTAIN MAIN A DIGITAL RECORDING BALLROOM VOICE EFFECT LEFT HOLD VOICE DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR FF SYNC. START SWING & JAZZ NEXT EXIT CHANNEL ON/OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REGISTRATION MEMORY PART START/STOP OTS LINK DATA ENTRY FREEZE MEMORY PART You can call up additional basic mixing controls by using the [BALANCE] button and the [CHANNEL ON/OFF] button (page 64). Operation 1 MIXING CONSOLE PART From the MIXING CONSOLE display, press the button repeatedly until the desired display is called up. Each press of the button switches among the displays listed below. PANEL PART Includes the keyboard-played parts (Main/ Layer, Left), accompaniment parts, song, microphone input (PSR-2100 only) STYLE PART Accompaniment parts SONG CH 1 - 8 Channels 1 - 8 of song playback SONG CH 9 -16 Channels 9 - 16 of song playback 2 Select the other Mixing Console pages by using the [BACK]/ [NEXT] buttons and set the desired parameters. For information on the various parameters and settings and how to use them, refer to the explanations starting on page 125. You can quickly and easily set all parts to the same value for the same parameter (except for the VOICE parameter). Simultaneously hold down the [A] [J] button that corresponds to the parameter you want to change and use the [1] [8] buttons or the [DATA ENTRY] dial to change the value. n For details on parameters related to the Sound Creator, see page 91. END Close the Mixing Console display by pressing the [EXIT] button. ■ About the parameters • VOL/VOICE (Volume/Voice) (page 125) This contains settings related to the volume and voice of each part/channel. Here you can also enable the Auto Revoice feature — which automatically plays XG-compatible songs (page 162) with the rich and dynamic voices that are exclusive to the PSR-2100/1100. This gives you much more authentic and realistic instrument sounds for your song playback. • FILTER (page 126) These controls affect the tone quality of the voice, letting you add power, punch, or brightness to the sound. • TUNE (page 126) These give you various tuning controls. • EFFECT (page 127) These control the amount of effect applied to the sound. • EQ (Equalizer) (PSR-2100 only) (page 130) Determines the overall tone quality of the instrument, letting you adjust the sound to match the particular performance space. Also you can adjust the volume or tone quality for each part. 124 PSR-2100/1100 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console Setting the Level Balance and Voice — Volume/Voice The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 124. 1 Set this to ON to enable automatic replacement of the XG voices (in XG song data) with the special voices of the PSR-2100/1100. To use the normal XG voice set, turn this off. Use these to select the VOICE, PANPOT, or VOLUME parameter rows. DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR The [RHY2] categories in the STYLE PART display are only for the Drum Kit/SFX Kit (percussion) voice. n A F B G C H D I E J The [RHY1] channel in the STYLE PART display can be assigned to any voice except for the Organ Flutes voice. DIGITAL RECORDING MIXING CONSOLE PART Each press of this button switches among the various parts/channels. n Allows you to select the specific voice to be replaced. These let you select the voice of each part, and adjust the panpot and volume. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 VOICE Calls up the VOICE display, from which you can select the desired voice (page 57). When the Style part is selected, neither Organ Flutes voices nor User voices can be selected. When the Song part is selected, User voices cannot be selected. PANPOT Determines the stereo position of the selected voice or track. A setting of 0 pans the sound hard left, while 64 is at center, and 127 is at hard right. VOLUME Determines the level of each channel, giving you fine control over the balance of all the parts. 2 F ALL REVOICE Replaces all of the replaceable XG voices with the rich and authentic voices of the PSR2100/1100. G When playing GM song data, channel 10 (in the SONG CH 9 - 16 page) can only be used for a Drum Kit voice. When changing the rhythm/ percussion voices (drum kits, etc.) of the accompaniment style and song from the VOICE parameter, the detailed settings related to the drum voice are reset, and in some cases you may be unable to restore the original sound. In the case of song playback, you can restore the original sound by returning to the beginning of the song and playing back from that point. In the case of accompaniment style play, you can restore the original sound by selecting the same style again. Keep in mind that using the Revoice function may result in unnatural or unexpected sound, depending on the particular song data. H I J BASIC REVOICE Replaces only the recommended voices that are suitable for playing back the song. ALL NO REVOICE All the voices are returned to the original XG voices. 1 2 3 Selects the XG voices to be replaced (voices usually used when playing back) 4 5 6 7 8 Executes the settings and closes the Auto Revoice Setup display. Closes the Auto Revoice Setup screen without executing the settings. Selects the voices used to replace the XG voices (when SONG AUTO REVOICE is set to ON). PSR-2100/1100 125 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console Changing the Tone of the Voice — Filter The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 124. Switches between the HARMONIC and BRIGHTNESS parameters. For details about the Filter, see page 92. DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR n A F B G C H D I E J DIGITAL RECORDING MIXING CONSOLE PART Be careful with these controls. Depending on the selected voice, extreme settings may result in noise or distortion. Each press of this button switches among the various parts/ channels. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 HARMONIC ........ Allows you to adjust the resonance effect (see “Harmonic Content” on page 92). BRIGHTNESS .... Determines the brightness of the sound by adjusting the cutoff frequency (page 92). 8 Changing Pitch-related Settings — Tune The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 124. Switches among the available parameters: PORTAMENTO TIME, PITCH BEND RANGE, OCTAVE, and TUNING. A F B G C H D I E J Portamento is used to create a smooth transition in pitch from one note to the next. Refer to the explanation below. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 These increase/decrease (transpose) the pitch in semitone units. MASTER ... Transposes both the pitch of the keyboard and that of the song playback. SONG........ Transposes the pitch of the song playback. KBD .......... Transposes the pitch of the keyboard. PORTAMENTO TIME ............When the part is set to Mono (page 61, 91), this determines the Portamento time. The higher the value, the longer the time it takes for the pitch to change. Portamento is only applied when you play legato (playing the next note before releasing the previous one). PITCH BEND RANGE ...........Determines the range of the PITCH BEND wheel for the corresponding part. The range is from “0” to ”12” with each step corresponding to one semitone. OCTAVE................................Determines the range of the pitch change in octaves, over two octaves up or down. The value of this parameter is added to the value set via the [UPPER OCTAVE] button. TUNING...............................Determines the pitch of the instrument. 126 PSR-2100/1100 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console Adjusting the Effects The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 124. 1 Indicates the type name for each effect block. Press this to edit and store the effect (page 127, 128). DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR A F B G C H There are three effect sections: Reverb, Chorus, and DSP (which contains a variety of effect types). For details, refer to the Effect Block list (page 128). DIGITAL RECORDING MIXING CONSOLE PART D I E J Each press of this button switches among the various parts/channels. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Switches among the effect sections: REVERB, CHORUS, and DSP. 8 Determines the amount of effect that is applied to each part. For more information about the characteristics of each effect, see the Effect Block list on page 128. 2 F G H I J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 When the BLOCK parameter is set to REVERB, CHORUS, or DSP1-4/DSP, press this to call up the display from which you can change the detailed settings for the effects. These determine the effect block and let you assign the effect. BLOCK............ Determines the effect block (group of similar or related effects). PART ............... Determines the part to which the Insertion effect is applied. It is effective only when BLOCK is set to “DSP1/DSP,” PARAMETER is set to “CONNECTION,” and VALUE is set to “Insertion” — or when BLOCK is set to “DSP2–4” (PSR-2100). CATEGORY..... The various effect programs (in Type below) are grouped into categories. This parameter may not be available depending on the selected block. TYPE ............... Determines the type of effect that is assigned to the selected effect block. The actual effect types that are available may differ depending on the selected block. PSR-2100/1100 127 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console 3 A F B G C H D I E J Switches between the upper/lower parameters. For the lower parameter, the depth can be changed when the [VARIATION] button is on. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Calls up the display for storing the effect. Determines the level of the effect (return level). This is not available when BLOCK is set to “DSP1/DSP,” PARAMETER is set to “CONNECTION,” and VALUE is set to “Insertion” or when BLOCK is set to “DSP2– 4” (PSR-2100). 8 Determines the effect block. Determines the value of the selected parameter. Determines the effect category. Determines the effect parameter to be adjusted. Determines the effect type. 4 F Calls up the display for naming the User Effect (page 48). G Keep in mind that in some cases noise may result if you adjust the effect parameters while playing the instrument. H I J Select the destination to which the effect is to be stored. The number of memory spaces available for the destination differs for each block (refer to the chart below). Stores the effect settings you made above to a User Effect location (SYSTEM) for future recall. To call up the effect, select USER from the CATEGORY parameter and select the desired effect from the TYPE parameter. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Effect Block Block REVERB CHORUS DSP 1 (PSR-2100) DSP(PSR-1100) DSP2 - 4 (PSR-2100 only) 128 PSR-2100/1100 Parts Characteristics All parts Reproduces the warm ambience of playing in a concert hall or jazz club. Number of User Effect 3 All parts Produces a rich “fat” sound as if several parts are being played simultaneously. 3 Main, Layer, Left, Song (Ch. 1 - 16), MIC (PSR-2100 only), Style In addition to reverb and chorus effects, this section features a variety of special effects, including distortion. 3 Main, Layer, Left, Song (Ch. 1 - 16), MIC (automatically assigned) Any unused DSP blocks are automatically assigned to the remaining active parts. 10 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console Effect Structure The PSR-2100/1100 features the following digital effect systems. The effect type, depth, and various parameters can be set with the panel controls. About the Effect Connections – System and Insertion All the effect blocks are connected or routed in one of two ways: System or Insertion. System applies the selected effect to all parts, while Insertion applies the selected effect to one specific part. Reverb and Chorus are System effects, and DSP 2 - DSP 4 (PSR-2100 only) are Insertion effects. The DSP1/DSP effect, on the other hand, can be configured for either System or Insertion routing. The illustration below shows how the various effect blocks are set up and traces the signal flow for the send/return controls set on the PSR-2100/1100. PSR-2100 Unused DSP blocks are automatically assigned to the active parts. MAIN VOICE DSP2 DRY LINE Dry REVERB Rev Send Reverb Return Cho Send DSP Send Dry LAYER VOICE DSP3 Rev Send Cho Send Dry LEFT VOICE DSP4 Rev Send Master EQ CHORUS OUT Chorus Return Cho Send Dry MIC MIC Effect Vocal Harmony Rev Send Cho Send DSP Send SONG (each channel) Dry Rev Send Cho Send DSP Send STYLE (each channel) Dry DSP1 When DSP is set as an Insertion effect (here PART is set to one of the STYLE channels), it is put here in the signal flow. Rev Send Cho Send When DSP is set as a System effect, it is put here in the signal flow. DSP Send DSP1 DSP Return DRY LINE PSR-1100 Dry MAIN VOICE DSP Rev Send When DSP is set as an Insertion effect (here PART is set to MAIN), it is put here in the signal flow. Cho Send REVERB Reverb Return DSP Send Dry LAYER VOICE Rev Send Cho Send DSP Send Dry LEFT VOICE OUT CHORUS Chorus Return Rev Send Cho Send DSP Send Dry STYLE/SONG (each channel) Rev Send Cho Send When DSP is set as a System effect, it is put here in the signal flow. DSP Send DSP DSP Return PSR-2100/1100 129 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices — Mixing Console Setting the Equalizer—EQ (PSR-2100 only) Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to match the special character of the room. The sound is divided into several frequency bands, allowing you to correct the sound by raising or lowering the level for each band. The equalizer allows you to adjust the tone or timbre of the sound to match the performance space, or to compensate for certain acoustic characteristics in your room. For example, you can cut some of the low range frequencies when playing on stages or in large studio spaces where the sound is too “boomy,” or boost the high frequencies in rooms and close spaces where the sound is relatively “dead” and free of echoes.The PSR-2100 possesses a high grade five-band digital equalizer function. With this function, a final effect —tone control— can be added to the output of your instrument. The operations for this page apply to step 2 of the procedure on page 124. 1 Call up the MASTER EQ EDIT display. Select the desired Master EQ type. A F B G C H D I E J Select the EQ type to adjust the EQ HIGH using the [1▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons. Select the EQ type to adjust the EQ LOW using the [1▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons. 2 Select the desired Master EQ type. A F B G C H D I E J 1 Q 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 An edited PRESET or USER curve can be stored to USER 1 or 2. The PRESET and USER curves can be edited as required via the corresponding LCD buttons — EQ1 through EQ5.Each of the 5 bands can be boosted (“+” values) or cut (“–”values) by up to 12 dB. Adjusts the overall gain of all EQ bands simultaneously. GAIN FREQ 130 PSR-2100/1100 Whenever an EQ band is edited the corresponding EQ value is highlighted and the number of the edited band appears above the Q and FREQ controls. The Q and FREQ controls can then be used to adjust the Q (bandwidth) and the FREQ (center frequency) of the selected band. The higher the “Q,” the narrower the bandwidth. The available FREQ range is different for each band. Using a Microphone — MIC. (PSR-2100 only) This extraordinarily powerful feature uses advanced voice-processing technology to automatically produce vocal harmony based on a single lead vocal. Four distinct harmony modes as well as an extensive selection of preset harmony types are provided. In addition to straightforward harmony, the PSR-2100 also lets you change the apparent gender of the harmony and/or lead vocal sound. For example, if you are a male singer, you can have the PSR-2100 automatically generate a two-part female backup. A comprehensive set of parameters gives you exceptionally precise and flexible control over the vocal harmony sound. MIC. VH TYPE SELECT VOCAL HARMONY MIC. SETTING TALK For details about connecting a microphone, see page 155. EFFECT OVER SIGNAL SONG EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) (STYLE) REC TOP NEW SONG STYLE POP & ROCK METRONOME REPEAT START/STOP REW BACK SYNC. START BALLROOM MARCH & WALTZ DANCE LATIN USER A F B G C H D I GUITAR LAYER PART STRINGS LEFT USER MENU DEMO E TEMPO RESET RESET MIN STYLE CONTROL ACMP BREAK MAIN INTRO MIC. SYNC. START WOODWIND SYNTH. XG VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT SIGNAL ONE TOUCH SETTING BALANCE ENTER DIRECT ACCESS EXIT CHANNEL ON/OFF SYNC. STOP AUTO FILL IN CHOIR & PAD RESET FUNCTION MAX ENDING / rit. BRASS VARIATION PERCUSSION OVER STOP MULTI PAD FADE IN/OUT STANDBY ON BASS DSP ORGAN FLUTES MUSIC FINDER HELP MASTER VOLUME ORGAN & ACCORDION UPPER OCTAVE J TAP TEMPO TRANSPOSE HARMONY/ MONO ECHO SUSTAIN E.PIANO MAIN DIGITAL RECORDING SWING & JAZZ TOUCH PIANO & HARPSI. MIXING CONSOLE BALLAD VOICE EFFECT LEFT HOLD NEXT VOICE DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR FF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REGISTRATION MEMORY PART START/STOP FREEZE DATA ENTRY OTS LINK MEMORY Use the SIGNAL and OVER indicators to determine the appropriate setting (page 155). MIC. VH TYPE SELECT VOCAL HARMONY MIC. SETTING EFFECT TALK OVER SIGNAL Determines the on/off setting of the effect applied to the microphone, set in the MIXING CONSOLE display (page 127). This calls up the VOCAL HARMONY TYPE display (page 131) and lets you set the desired harmony type. This convenient function lets you temporarily cancel the vocal harmony or other microphone effects when using a connected microphone. This is especially useful when you talk between songs during a performance. This calls up the MICROPHONE SETTING display (page 133) and lets you adjust the level of the microphone and vocal harmony effect. If you connect a microphone to the PSR-2100, you can sing along with the song or auto accompaniment and have vocal harmony parts added automatically. Selecting a Vocal Harmony Type 1 Press the [VH TYPE SELECT] button. Select a Vocal Harmony type. 2 A F B G C H D I E J This lets you adjust the amount of harmony effect that is applied. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PSR-2100 131 Using a Microphone — MIC. (PSR-2100 only) 3 A F B G C H D I E J Select a Vocal Harmony type. Return to the VOCAL HARMONY TYPE display. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Select a Vocal Harmony parameter. END Save the changed data (page 38, 47). Adjust the parameter value. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display. The saved settings can be named (page 44) or deleted (page 46) in the USER page. Vocal Harmony Parameter List 132 Chordal Type/Vocoder Type Determines how the harmony notes are applied. Harmony Gender Type Can be set to “Off” or “Auto”. When “Auto”, the gender of the harmony sound is changed automatically. Lead Gender Type Determines whether and how the gender of the lead vocal sound (i.e., the direct microphone sound) will be changed. When “Off” no gender change occurs. When ”Unison”, “Male” or “Female” is selected the corresponding gender change is applied to the lead vocal. (In this case the number of harmony notes which can be produced in addition to the lead vocal is reduced to one.) Lead Gender Depth Adjusts the degree of lead vocal gender change produced when one of the Lead Gender Types (above) is selected. Lead Pitch Correction When “Correct” is selected the pitch of the lead vocal is shifted in precise semitone steps. This parameter is only effective when one of the Lead Gender Types is selected. Auto Upper Gender Threshold Gender change will occur when the harmony pitch reaches or exceeds the specified number of semitones above the lead vocal pitch. Auto Lower Gender Threshold Gender change will occur when the harmony pitch reaches or exceeds the specified number of semitones below the lead vocal pitch. Upper Gender Depth Adjusts the degree of gender change applied to harmony notes higher than the Auto Upper Gender Threshold. Lower Gender Depth Adjusts the degree of gender change applied to harmony notes lower than the Auto Lower Gender Threshold. Vibrato Depth Sets the depth of vibrato applied to the harmony sound. Also affects the lead vocal sound if a Lead Gender Type is selected. Vibrato Rate Sets the speed of the vibrato effect. Vibrato Delay Specifies the length of the delay before the vibrato effect begins when a note is produced. Harmony1 Volume Sets the volume of the first harmony note. Harmony2 Volume Sets the volume of the second harmony note. Harmony1 Pan Specifies the stereo (pan) position of the first harmony note. When “Random” is selected the stereo position of the sound will change randomly whenever the keyboard is played. Harmony2 Pan Specifies the stereo (pan) position of the second harmony note. When “Random” is selected the stereo position of the sound will change randomly whenever the keyboard is played. Harmony1 Detune Detunes the first harmony note by the specified number of cents. Harmony2 Detune Detunes the second harmony note by the specified number of cents. Pitch to Note When “ON” the lead vocal sound “plays” the PSR-2100 tone generator system. (However, dynamic changes in the vocal sound do not affect the volume of the tone generator.) Pitch to Note Part Determines which of the PSR-2100 parts will be controlled by the lead vocal when the Pitch to Note parameter is “ON”. PSR-2100 Using a Microphone — MIC. (PSR-2100 only) Making Settings for the Vocal Harmony and Microphone — MICROPHONE SETTING Operation 1 2 Press the [MIC. SETTING] button. Select the MICROPHONE SETTING page by using the [BACK]/[NEXT] button and set the parameters. BACK NEXT For information on the various parameters and settings and how to use them, refer to the explanations below. END Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display. A F B G C H D I E J Adjusting the Vocal Harmony Settings and Microphone Effects — OVERALL SETTING The explanations here apply to step 2 above. A F B G C H D I E J Select the 3BAND EQ. Select the NOISE GATE/ COMPRESSOR. Select the VOCAL HARMONY CONTROL/MIC. Use these to change the value for each function or setting. For details, see below. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ■ 3BAND EQ (3-BAND EQUALIZER) Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to match the special character of the room. The sound is divided into several frequency bands, allowing you to correct the sound by raising or lowering the level for each band. The PSR-2100 features a high grade three-band digital equalizer function for the microphone sound. Hz .............. Adjusts the center frequency of the corresponding band. dB ............... Boosts or cuts the level of the corresponding band by up to 12 dB. ■ NOISE GATE This effect mutes the input signal when the input from the microphone falls below a specified level. This effectively cuts off extraneous noise, allowing the desired signal (vocal, etc.) to pass. SW.............. “SW” is the abbreviation of Switch. This turns Noise Gate on or off. TH. ............. “TH.” is the abbreviation of Threshold. This adjusts the input level at which the gate begins to open. PSR-2100 133 Using a Microphone — MIC. (PSR-2100 only) ■ COMPRESSOR This effect holds down the output when the input signal from the microphone exceeds a specified level. This is useful when recording a signal with widely varying dynamics. It effectively “compresses” the signal, making soft parts louder and loud parts softer. SW.............. “SW” is the abbreviation of Switch. This turns Compressor on or off. TH. ............. “TH.” is the abbreviation of Threshold. This adjusts the input level at which compression begins to be applied. RATIO ........ This adjusts the compression ratio. OUT ........... Adjusts the final output level. ■ VOCAL HARMONY CONTROL The following parameters determine how the harmony is controlled. VOCODER CONTROL The Vocal Harmony effect is controlled by note data — the notes you play on the keyboard and/or the notes of the song data. This parameter lets you determine which notes are used to control the harmony. • SONG CHANNEL MUTE/PLAY: When set to “MUTE,” the channel selected below is muted (turned off) during keyboard performance or song playback. OFF: Song data control over harmony is turned off. 1-16: When playing back a song from disk or external MIDI sequencer, the note data recorded to the assigned song channel controls the harmony. • KEYBOARD OFF: Keyboard control over harmony is turned off. UPPER: Notes played to the right of the split point control the harmony. LOWER: Notes played to the left of the split point control the harmony. BALANCE This lets you set the balance between the lead vocal (your own voice) and Vocal Harmony. Raising this value increases the volume of the Vocal Harmony and decreases that of the lead vocal. When this is set to L<H63 (L: Lead Vocal, H: Vocal Harmony), only the Vocal Harmony is output; when it is set to L63>H, only the lead vocal is output. MODE All of the Vocal Harmony types fall into one of three modes which produce harmony in different ways. The harmony effect is dependent on the selected Vocal Harmony Mode and Track, and this parameter determines how the harmony is applied to your voice. The three modes are described below. VOCODER: The harmony notes are determined by the notes you play on the keyboard (Main, Layer and Left) and/ or song data which includes Vocal Harmony tracks. CHORDAL: During accompaniment playback, chords played in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard control the harmony. During song playback, chords contained in song data control the harmony. (Not available if the song does not contain any chord data.) AUTO: When the auto accompaniment or Left part is set to ON and if chord data exists in the song, the mode is automatically set to CHORDAL. In all other cases, the mode is set to VOCODER. CHORD The following parameters specify the song data which will be used for chord detection. OFF: Chords are not detected. XF: Chords of XF format are detected. 1-16: Chords are detected from note data in the specified song channel. ■ MIC (MICROPHONE) The following parameters determine how the microphone sound is controlled. MUTE .............. When set to OFF, the microphone sound is turned off. VOLUME ......... Adjusts the volume of the microphone sound. 134 PSR-2100 Using a Microphone — MIC. (PSR-2100 only) Setting the Microphone Volume and Related Effects — TALK SETTING Determines the settings when the [TALK] button is on. The explanations here apply to step 2 on page 133. VOLUME/PAN/REVERB DEPTH/CHORUS DEPTH/TOTAL VOLUME ATTENUATOR A F B G C H D I E J This determines the amount of attenuation to be applied to the overall sound (excepting the microphone input) — allowing you to effectively adjust the balance between your voice and the overall instrument sound. This determines the volume of the microphone sound. 1 2 3 4 5 6 This sets the stereo pan position of the microphone sound. 7 8 These set the depth of the reverb and chorus effects applied to the microphone sound. DSP/TYPE/DEPTH A F B G C H D I E J This sets the depth of the DSP effect applied to the microphone sound. 1 This turns the DSP effect applied to the microphone sound ON or OFF. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 This selects the type of DSP effect to be applied to the microphone sound. PSR-2100 135 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function The Function mode gives you access to various advanced functions related to the instrument as a whole. These sophisticated functions let you customize the PSR-2100/1100 to your own musical needs and preferences. SONG EXTRA TRACKS TRACK 2 TRACK 1 (L) (R) (STYLE) TOP REC NEW SONG METRONOME REPEAT START/STOP REW BACK SYNC. START STYLE POP & ROCK BALLROOM MARCH & WALTZ DANCE LATIN USER PART MENU DEMO VOICE EFFECT LEFT HOLD TOUCH PIANO & HARPSI. A F B G C H D I E J LAYER LEFT GUITAR STRINGS USER TEMPO RESET RESET MIN STYLE CONTROL ACMP BREAK MAIN INTRO SYNC. START XG ORGAN FLUTES VH TYPE SELECT MIC. SETTING VOCAL HARMONY TALK EFFECT SIGNAL ONE TOUCH SETTING BALANCE ENTER DIRECT ACCESS EXIT CHANNEL ON/OFF SYNC. STOP AUTO FILL IN WOODWIND SYNTH. CHOIR & PAD RESET MIC. FUNCTION MAX ENDING / rit. BRASS VARIATION PERCUSSION OVER STOP MULTI PAD FADE IN/OUT STANDBY ON BASS DSP UPPER OCTAVE HELP MASTER VOLUME ORGAN & ACCORDION MUSIC FINDER TAP TEMPO TRANSPOSE HARMONY/ MONO ECHO SUSTAIN E.PIANO MAIN DIGITAL RECORDING SWING & JAZZ MIXING CONSOLE BALLAD NEXT VOICE DIGITAL STUDIO SOUND CREATOR FF FUNCTION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REGISTRATION MEMORY PART START/STOP OTS LINK DATA ENTRY FREEZE MEMORY Operation 1 MENU DEMO 2 Select the desired function. HELP FUNCTION 3 Set the parameters of the selected function. The operations for each function are covered in the following explanations. END To return to the previous display, press the [EXIT] button. Adjusting the Pitch and Tuning — Master Tune and Scale Tune ■ Master Tune (page 138) This allows you to make fine adjustments to the overall pitch of the instrument — letting you accurately match the tuning with that of other instruments. ■ Scale Tune (page 138) This determines the particular tuning system (or temperament) for the instrument. This is especially useful for playing period pieces, to match the tuning system used during specific musical eras. Setting Song-related Parameters — Song Settings (page 140) These allow you to set parameters related to song playback. Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting, Split Point, and Chord Fingering ■ Style Setting / Split Point (page 141) These determine the auto accompaniment-related settings, and let you set the split point. ■ Chord Fingering (page 142) This determines the method for playing/indicating chords when using the auto accompaniment features. You can even check how to play the chord, since the individual notes are indicated in the display. 136 PSR-2100/1100 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard — Controller ■ Pedal (page 142) These settings determine how the connected foot pedals (including foot controllers and footswitches) are used. They can be assigned to a variety of functions, letting you control operations with your feet — such as turning the accompaniment style on/ off, or triggering Fill In patterns. ■ Keyboard / Panel (page 144) These settings determine the touch sensitivity of the keyboard (how touch affects volume), the on/off status of the Modulation wheel (PSR-2100 only), and the pitch transpose settings (for the keyboard, song data, and entire instrument). Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set ■ Registration Sequence (page 145) This determines the order in which the Registration Memory presets (1 - 8) are called up — by using the [BACK][NEXT] buttons or the pedal. ■ Freeze (page 145) This lets you specify the settings you want to be maintained or left unchanged, even when changing Registration Memory presets. ■ Voice Set (page 146) This lets you determine whether certain voice-related settings (such as Effects, EQ, Harmony, etc.) are automatically called up or not when you select a voice. Making MIDI Settings ■ System (page 148) These determine various system messages settings (such as Clock, Start/Stop, System Exclusive), as well as Local Control on/off. ■ Transmit (page 149) This determines how playback data is sent to connected MIDI devices — i.e., which parts are assigned to which MIDI Transmit channels. This also lets you specify the type of data to be transmitted over each channel. ■ Receive (page 150) This determines how the parts of the PSR-2100/1100 respond to data from connected MIDI devices — i.e., which parts are assigned to which MIDI Receive channels. This also lets you specify the type of data to be received over each channel. ■ Root (page 150) This determines the channel(s) recognized for the root notes, for use with the auto accompaniment. ■ Chord Detect (page 150) This determines the channel(s) recognized for the chords, for use with the auto accompaniment. Other Settings — Utility ■ Config 1 (page 151) This page contains settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome, Parameter Lock, and the Tap sound. ■ Config 2 (page 152) From this page, you can adjust the display, and change the voice number indication. ■ Disk (page 153) Setting Harmony and Echo (page 146) These let you set the type of Harmony or Echo effect applied to the keyboard-played voices, as well as the amount of effect. From this page, you can format disks, and copy from disk to disk. ■ Owner (page 154) From this page, you can set the language of the instrument, and input your own name — which is shown automatically every time the power is turned on. ■ System Reset (page 154) This function restores the PSR-2100/1100 to its original factory settings. You can also specify which types of settings are to be restored, as well as store your own original settings for future recall. PSR-2100/1100 137 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Fine Tuning the Pitch/Selecting a Scale — Master Tune/Scale Tune The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 136. Tuning the Overall Pitch — Master Tune Hz (Hertz) This unit of measurement refers to the frequency of a sound, and represents the number of times a sound wave vibrates in a second. n The Tune function does not affect the Drum Kit or SFX Kit voices. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Determines the overall pitch of the PSR-2100/ 1100, from 414.8 466.8 Hz. Press the 4 or 5 [▲▼] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to the factory setting of 440.0 Hz. 8 Selecting a Scale — Scale Tune Cent A unit of pitch equal to 1/100 of a semitone (100 cents = 1 semitone). Select the desired scale template. n You can register your original scale tunings to a REGISTRATION MEMORY button. To do this, checkmark “SCALE” in the REGISTRATION MEMORY display (page 87). A B C D E Determines the base note for each scale. When the base note is changed, the pitch of the keyboard is transposed, yet maintains the original pitch relationship between the notes. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Selects which parts should be affected by the scale setting. Select the part to be set by pressing 6 or 7 [▲▼] and set the function ON or OFF by pressing [▲▼]. Parts that are set to OFF remain in Equal Temperament. Determines the fine tuning of the selected note in 1cent steps. Press the 4 or 5 [▲▼] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to the factory setting. Determines the note to be tuned and the amount of tuning. The tuning range is from “-64” through “0” to “+63.” Each increment equals one cent (one “cent” is one hundredth of a semitone). 138 PSR-2100/1100 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Scale ■ Equal Temperament The pitch range of each octave is divided equally into twelve parts, with each half-step evenly spaced in pitch. This is the most commonly used tuning in music today. ■ Pure Major/Pure Minor These tunings preserve the pure mathematical intervals of each scale, especially for triad chords (root, third, fifth). You can hear this best in actual vocal harmonies — such as choirs and acapella singing. ■ Pythagorean This scale was devised by the famous Greek philosopher and is created from a series of perfect fifths, which are collapsed into a single octave. The 3rd in this tuning are slightly unstable, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and suitable for some leads. ■ Mean-Tone This scale was created as an improvement on the Pythagorean scale, by making the major third interval more “in tune.” It was especially popular from the 16th century to the 18th century. Handel, among others, used this scale. ■ Werckmeister/Kirnberger This composite scale combines the Werckmeister and Kirnberger systems, which were themselves improvements on the mean-tone and Pythagorean scales. The main feature of this scale is that each key has its own unique character. The scale was used extensively during the time of Bach and Beethoven, and even now it is often used when performing period music on the harpsichord. ■ Arabic Use these tunings when playing Arabic music. Pitch settings for each scale (in cents; example scale of C) The values shown in this chart are actually rounded off to the nearest whole number for use on the instrument. C C D E E F F G A A B B Equal Temperament 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Pure Major 0.0 -29.7 3.9 15.6 -14.1 -2.3 -9.4 2.3 -27.3 -15.6 18.0 -11.7 Pure Minor 0.0 33.6 3.9 15.6 -14.1 -2.3 31.3 2.3 14.1 -15.6 18.0 -11.7 Pythagorean 0.0 14.1 3.9 -6.3 7.8 -2.3 11.7 2.3 15.6 6.3 -3.9 10.2 Mean-Tone 0.0 -24.2 -7.0 10.2 -14.1 3.1 -20.3 -3.1 -27.3 -10.2 7.0 -17.2 Werckmeister 0.0 -10.2 -7.8 -6.3 -10.2 -2.3 -11.7 -3.9 -7.8 -11.7 -3.9 -7.8 Kirnberger 0.0 -10.2 -7.0 -6.3 -14.1 -2.3 -10.2 -3.1 -7.8 -10.2 -3.9 -11.7 Arabic1 0.0 0 -50.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -50.0 0.0 0.0 Arabic2 0.0 0 0.0 0.0 -50.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 -50.0 PSR-2100/1100 139 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Setting Song-related Parameters — Song Settings The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 136. Allows you to play back all songs from the same folder continuously. Turns Quick Start on/off (see note). A F B G C H D I E J Quick Start On some commercially available song data, certain settings related to the song (such as voice selection, volume, etc.) are recorded to the first measure, before the actual note data. When Quick Start is set to “ON,” the PSR-2100/1100 reads all initial non-note data of the song at the highest possible speed, then automatically slows down to the appropriate tempo at the first note. This allows you to start playback as quickly as possible, with a minimum pause for reading of data. n 1 Determines the MIDI channel assigned to the [TRACK2] button. Determines the MIDI channel assigned to the [TRACK1] button. Determines the harmony channel for Vocoder (PSR-2100 only) (page 134). 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines whether the Phrase Mark Repeat function for the song is on or off. When this is on, you can repeatedly play back a specified phrase (selection of measures) of the song. The method for specifying a phrase mark is the same as that in the SONG POSITION display (page 81). Determines the language of the displayed lyrics. When this is set to “AUTO,” the language defaults to that of the song data. When not set to “AUTO,” the language defaults to Japanese, when the internal setting (page 154) is JAPANESE; for all other languages, this is set to “INTERNATIONAL.” When set to “ON,” this automatically sets the proper Track 1 and Track 2 channels. Normally, this should be set to “ON.” 140 PSR-2100/1100 Channel Refers to the MIDI channel (page 160). The channels are assigned as follows: Song 1 - 16 Accompaniment Style 9 - 16 n Phrase Mark This data specifies a certain location in the song data. Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting, Split Point, and Chord Fingering The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 136. Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters — Style Setting and Split Point F G H I J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 These select the part to which the split point About Section Set setting is applied: accompaniment, left-hand When any of the Main A-D range, or both. Press the desired key for the split sections is not included in point while holding down one of these buttons. the accompaniment style The pressed key is included in the range for the data, the nearest section is Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard automatically selected. For (ACMP) or the left-hand range (LEFT). example, when Main D is not A+L (ACMP + LEFT) contained in the selected Allows you to simultaneously set the split accompaniment style, Main point for both the left-hand range and the C will be called up. Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard. L (LEFT) Allows you to set the split point for the left-hand range of the keyboard. A (ACMP) Allows you to set the split point for the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard. Determines the split points for the auto accompaniment (ACMP) and the lefthand range (LEFT). The same value can be set for both or for each independently, using buttons [F], [G], and [H] (see above). You can use these buttons by themselves to set the split point value. Determines the default section that is automatically called up when selecting different accompaniment styles (when accompaniment is stopped). Turns touch response for the accompaniment on/off. When this is set to “ON,” the accompaniment volume changes in response to your playing strength (in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard). The PSR-2100/1100 lets you automatically enable Sync Stop (page 68) simply by quickly pressing/releasing keys in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard. This parameter lets you set the length of the key-hold time. This applies to the OTS Link function, in which One Touch Settings are automatically called up with changes in the section. This determines the timing in which the One Touch Settings change with the section. (The [OTS LINK] button must be on.) Real Time One Touch Setting is immediately called up when you press a section button. Next Bar One Touch Setting is called up at the next measure, after you press a section button. Stop Accompaniment When auto accompaniment is turned on and Synchro Start is off, you can play chords in the left-hand (accompaniment) section of the keyboard with the style stopped, and still hear the accompaniment chords. You can determine whether the chord played in the chord section will sound or not in the Stop Accompaniment condition. When this is set to “OFF,” you can use the Chord Match function (page 122) with the Multi Pads or the Harmony effect (page 61) without having to playback a style. About Split Point Split point is the position on keyboard that separates the Auto Accompaniment section (ACMP) and left-hand section (LEFT) from the right-hand section (MAIN). The LEFT split point cannot be set lower than the ACMP split point, and the ACMP split point cannot be set higher than the LEFT split point. Split point (A) Auto Accompaniment section Split point (L) Right-hand Left-hand section section Split point (A) + (L) Auto Accompaniment section + Left-hand section Right-hand section PSR-2100/1100 141 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Setting the Fingering Method — Chord Fingering This determines how the notes you play on the keyboard indicate or play the chords of the accompaniment. To learn how to play certain chords, use the convenient Chord Tutor function (see note below). Indicates the note that belongs to a chord. Some notes can be omitted. The chord name is indicated next to “CHORD NAME.” ...Required ...Can be omitted ...Either note can be omitted ...Can be omitted when the note indicated by is omitted 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 This lets you change the chord type. Determines the fingering type (page 65). Indicates the note that belongs to a chord in the music. The chord indication in the display applies to the Fingered method, regardless if another method is actually selected. Chord Tutor The Chord Tutor feature is essentially an electronic “chord book” that shows you appropriate fingerings for chords; it is useful when you want to play certain chords. Simply specify the desired chord via the [6▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons, and the fingerings for the Fingered method are indicated in the display. This lets you change the root note from the chord. Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard — Controller The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 136. Making Settings for the Pedals Determines the particular pedal to which a function is to be assigned. A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 Determines the function to be assigned to the selected pedal. Any one of the available functions can be assigned to each pedal. For information on the assignable functions, see “Pedal-controllable Functions” on the next page. 142 PSR-2100/1100 3 4 5 6 7 8 If necessary, you can turn the corresponding part ON/ OFF or set the control depth (see the next page). Pedal on/off operation may differ depending on the particular pedal you’ve connected to the [FOOT PEDAL 1/2] jack. For example, pressing down on one pedal may turn the selected function on, while pressing a different make/ brand of pedal may turn the function off. If necessary, use this setting to reverse the operation. Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Pedal-controllable Functions VOLUME* Allows you to use a foot controller (FOOT PEDAL 2 only) to control the volume. SUSTAIN When the pedal is pressed notes played have a long sustain. Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes. SOSTENUTO If you press and hold the pedal here, only the first note will be sustained (the note that you played and held when pressing the pedal). This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played staccato. SOFT Pressing the pedal subtly reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played. It only applies to certain voices — PIANO, for example. GLIDE When the pedal is pressed the pitch changes, and then back to normal pitch when the pedal is released. PORTAMENTO The portamento effect (a smooth slide between notes) can be produced while the pedal is pressed. Portamento is produced when notes are played legato style (i.e., a note is played while the preceding note is still held). The portamento time can be set via the Mixing Console display (page 126). PITCHBEND* Bend notes up or down while pedal is pressed (FOOT PEDAL 2 only). Same as the PITCH BEND wheel. MODULATION* Applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard. The depth of the effect increases while pedal is pressed (FOOT PEDAL 2 only). Same as the MODULATION wheel. DSP VARIATION Same as the [VARIATION] button. HARMONY/ECHO Same as the [HARMONY/ECHO] button. VOCAL HARMONY (PSR-2100 only) Same as the [VOCAL HARMONY] button TALK (PSR-2100 only) Same as the [TALK] button. SCORE PAGE+ (PSR-2100 only) While the song is stopped, you can turn to the previous score page (one page only). SCORE PAGE- (PSR-2100 only) While the song is stopped, you can turn to the next score page (one page only). SONG START/STOP Same as the SONG [START/STOP] button. STYLE START/STOP Same as the STYLE [START/STOP] button. TAP TEMPO Same as the [TAP TEMPO] button. SYNCHRO START Same as the [SYNC. START] button. SYNCHRO STOP Same as the [SYNC. STOP] button. INTRO Same as the [INTRO] button. MAIN A Same as the [MAIN A] button. MAIN B Same as the [MAIN B] button. MAIN C Same as the [MAIN C] button. MAIN D Same as the [MAIN D] button. FILL DOWN A fill-in plays, automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate left. FILL SELF Fill-in starts playing. FILL BREAK Break starts playing. FILL UP A fill-in plays, automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate right. ENDING Same as the [ENDING/rit.] button. FADE IN/OUT Same as the [FADE IN/OUT] button. FING/ON BASS The pedal alternately switches between the Fingered and On Bass modes (page 65). BASS HOLD While the pedal is pressed, the Accompaniment Style bass note will be held even if the chord is changed. If the fingering is set to “FULL KEYBOARD,” the function does not work. PERCUSSION The pedal plays a percussion instrument selected by the [4▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons. You can use the keyboard to select the desired percussion instrument. MAIN ON/OFF Same as the [MAIN] button. LAYER ON/OFF Same as the [LAYER] button. LEFT ON/OFF Same as the [LEFT] button. OTS+ Calls up the next One Touch Setting. OTS- Calls up the previous One Touch Setting. * For best results, use the optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller. The parameters below correspond to buttons [2▲▼] - [8▲▼], and their availability depends on the selected control Type. For example, if SUSTAIN is selected as the Type, the parameters “HALF PEDAL POINT”, “MAIN”, “LAYER” and “LEFT” automatically appear in the display. SONG, STYLE, M.PAD, MIC (PSR-2100 only), LEFT, LAYER, MAIN These specify the part(s) that will be affected by the pedal. HALF PEDAL POINT* You can specify how far down you should press on the foot pedal until the damper effect starts working. This can be set for certain kinds of pedals, such as the foot pedal (YAMAHA FC7) (FOOT PEDAL 2 only). UP/DOWN When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines whether the pitch change goes up (is raised) or down (is lowered). RANGE When GLIDE or PITCH BEND is selected, this determines the range of the pitch change, in semitones. ON SPEED When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal is pressed. OFF SPEED When GLIDE is selected, this determines the speed of the pitch change, when the pedal is released. KIT When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all available drum kits are shown here, letting you select the particular drum kit used for the pedal. PERCUSSION When PERCUSSION is assigned to the pedal, all sounds of the selected drum kit (in KIT above) are shown here. This determines the particular instrument sound assigned to the pedal. * For best results, use the optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller. PSR-2100/1100 143 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Changing the Touch Sensitivity Modulation and Transpose — Keyboard/Panel Keyboard Touch/Modulation Wheel The Touch feature lets you control the volume of the voices by your playing strength. These settings allow you to customize the keyboard’s touch response (sensitivity) to your personal playing preferences. You can also set whether the Modulation wheel is effective or not — for each individual keyboard part. Selects the desired parameter: Keyboard Touch, Modulation Wheel (PSR-2100) or Transpose Assign. HARD 2 Requires strong playing to produce high volume. Best for players with a heavy touch. HARD 1 Requires moderately strong playing for higher volume. A B C NORMAL Standard touch response. D SOFT 1 Produces high volume with moderate playing strength. SOFT 2 Produces relatively high volume even with light playing strength. Best for players with a light touch. E Determines the Touch sensitivity setting (Keyboard Touch only; refer to the table at right). Determines the fixed volume level when touch is set to “off” (Keyboard Touch only). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 The TOUCH setting affects all voices globally. Keep in mind that you can set each voice to a different touch sensitivity (TOUCH SENSE). For example, to play a pipe organ voice most authentically, you can set this so that the voice is not affected by touch (page 91). Determines whether Touch and Modulation Wheel controls are on or not for the corresponding parts. Transpose Assign This determines which aspect of the instrument is affected by the [TRANSPOSE] button. Transpose Allows you to shift the pitch of the keyboard-played voices, accompaniment style playback, and song data in semitone units. 1 Press one of the [TRANSPOSE] buttons. TRANSPOSE RESET 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SONG For this setting, Transpose affects only the pitch of the songs. MASTER For this setting, Transpose affects the pitch of the entire instrument (keyboard voices, accompaniment styles, and songs). The transpose function does not affect the Drum Kit or SFX Kit voices. PSR-2100/1100 A TRANSPOSE pop-up window, selected via TRANSPOSE ASSIGN, appears. 3 Adjust the value by using the [TRANSPOSE] buttons. 8 KEYBOARD For this setting, Transpose affects the pitch of the keyboard-played voices (Main, Layer, and Left) and the accompaniment styles. 144 2 END Close the TRANSPOSE windows by pressing the [EXIT] button. • Selectively Transposing Keyboard/Song These settings can be used to match both the song and your keyboard performance to a certain key. For example, let’s say you wish to play and sing along with a certain recorded song. The song data is in F, but you feel most comfortable singing in D, and you are accustomed to playing the keyboard part in C. To match up the keys, keep the Master Transpose setting at “0,” set the Keyboard Transpose to “2,” and set Song Transpose to “-3.” This brings the keyboard part up in pitch and the song data down to your comfortable singing key. Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 136. Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration Memory Presets — Registration Sequence You can save your custom panel settings to the Registration Memory presets, and call them up by pressing the appropriate REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons [1] - [8]. The convenient Registration Sequence function lets you call up the presets in any order you specify, by simply using the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons or the pedal as you play. Indicates the file name of the selected Registration Memory bank. Determines which pedal is used to advance (increment) through the sequence. Determines which pedal is used to reverse (decrement) through the sequence. Determines how Registration Sequence behaves when reaching the end of the sequence. Stop Pressing the [NEXT] button or the “advance” pedal has no effect. The sequence is “stopped.” Top The sequence starts again at the beginning. Next Bank The sequence automatically moves to the beginning of the next Registration Memory bank in the same folder. A F B G C H D I E J 1 2 3 4 5 6 Turns the Registration Sequence function on/off. When this is set to “ON,” the programmed Registration Sequence is shown at the top right of the Main display, and you can step through the sequence in this display by using the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons or the pedals. Deletes the number at the cursor position. Inserts the number of the currently selected Registration Memory preset immediately before the cursor position. Replaces the number at the cursor position with the currently selected Registration Memory number. END 8 n Deletes all Registration Memory numbers in the sequence. Indicates the Registration Memory preset numbers, in the order of the current Registration Sequence. These move the cursor position in the sequence. 7 Execute the settings by pressing the [EXIT] button. When you are using the pedal to call up specified presets, you can easily reset the Registration Sequence and go back to the first entry by holding down the pedal for a few seconds (the red box indicator at the top right of the MAIN display goes out). Press and release the foot pedal to re-select the first entry in the sequence. Setting Registration Sequence Enable to “ON” overrides any other Pedal settings (for pedals assigned to “Regist (+) Pedal” and “Regist (-) Pedal” here). These include the pedal settings on page 142, and in Voice Set on page 146. n When both “Regist (+) Pedal” and “Regist (-) Pedal” are set to “OFF,” the pedals cannot be used to step through the Registration Sequence; only the [BACK]/[NEXT] buttons can be used in the MAIN display. n When both “Regist (+) Pedal” and “Regist (-) Pedal” are set to the same pedal, “Regist (+) Pedal” takes priority. Registration Sequence data is included as part of the Registration Memory bank file. To save your newly programmed Registration Sequence, store the current Registration Memory bank file (page 38, 47). Any Registration Sequence data is lost when changing Registration Memory banks, unless you’ve stored it with the Registration Memory bank file. Maintaining Panel Settings — Freeze This lets you specify the settings you want to be maintained or left unchanged, even when changing Registration Memory presets. For details, see page 89. PSR-2100/1100 145 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings — Voice Set When changing voices (selecting a voice file), the settings best matching the voice — the same as those set in the Sound Creator — are always and automatically called up. From this page, you can set the on/off status for each part. For example, each of the preset voices has its own LEFT PEDAL setting; however, even changing voices will not change the LEFT PEDAL setting, if it is set to “OFF” in this page. Normally, these should all be set to “ON.” A Use these to select the desired part. B C Harmony/echo cannot be set for the Layer and Left parts. D E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 These determine whether the corresponding voice-related settings (Voice selection, Effects, EQ (PSR-2100 only) and Harmony/echo assignment) are automatically called up or not when you select a voice. These settings can be turned on or off independently for each part. Setting Harmony and Echo The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 136. Determines the Harmony type. For details, see page 147. 1 2 3 4 5 Determines the level of the Harmony effect. Determines the speed of the Echo, Tremolo, and Trill effects. This parameter is only available when Echo, Tremolo, or Trill is selected in Type above. 146 PSR-2100/1100 6 7 8 Determines the lowest velocity value at which the harmony note will sound. This allows you to selectively apply the harmony by your playing strength, letting you create harmony accents in the melody. The harmony effect is applied when you play the key strongly (above the set value). When this is set to “ON,” the Harmony effect is applied only to the note that belongs to a chord played in the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard. This parameter is not available when Multi Assign, Echo, Tremolo, or Trill is selected in Type above. This lets you assign the Harmony effect to various parts. For details, see page 147. Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function About the Harmony Types When a normal Harmony type (“Standard Duet” through “Strum”) is selected Split point Chords played to the left of the split point control the harmony. Harmony notes (based on the chord and the selected type) are automatically added to the melody played to the right of the split point. When “Multi Assign” is selected Multi Assign automatically assigns notes played simultaneously on the right-hand section of the keyboard to separate parts (voices). For example, if you play two consecutive notes, the first is played by the Main voice and the second by the Layer voice. When “Echo” is selected An echo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard, in time with the currently set tempo. When “Tremolo” is selected A tremolo effect is applied to the note played on the keyboard, in time with the currently set tempo. When “Trill” is selected Two notes held on the keyboard are played alternately, in time with the currently set tempo. About the Harmony Assignments AUTO Harmony notes are automatically assigned the MAIN and LAYER parts. Multi This automatically assigns the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th added harmony notes to different parts (voices). For example, if the Main and Layer parts are turned on and the “Standard Duet” type is selected, the note you play on the keyboard will be played by the Main voice, and the added harmony note will be played by the Layer voice. Main Harmony is applied only to the Main part. When the Main part is turned off, Harmony is not applied. Layer Harmony is applied only to the Layer part. When the Layer part is turned off, Harmony is not applied. PSR-2100/1100 147 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Setting the MIDI Parameters In this section, you can make MIDI-related settings for the instrument. These settings can be stored all together from the USER display, for future recall.For general information and details about MIDI, see “What is MIDI?” (page 158). The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 136. 1 A F B G C H D I E J 1 3 Preset MIDI Templates (Factory Set) Select the desired template. 2 3 4 Call up the User display and press this button to save the newly edited MIDI settings. Up to ten setups can be saved. 5 2 6 7 All Parts Transmit all parts including Main, Layer and Left. Master KBD The PSR-2100/1100 functions as a master keyboard for controlling external tone generators or other devices. KBD & Style Transmit Upper and Lower keyboard play instead of the individual parts (Main/ Layer/Left). Song All Transmit channels are set to correspond to the Song channels 1-16. Use this to play the PSR-2100/1100 song data with an external tone generator, or to record your entire performance to an external sequencer. Clock Ext. MIDI IN terminal receives MIDI clock and PSR-2100/1100 synchronizes with a external MIDI device. MIDI Accord 1 An ideal setup for controlling the keyboard voice and accompaniment style with a MIDI accordion. MIDI Accord 2 Chord and bass buttons on a MIDI accordion control the accompaniment style, as well as play the chord and bass parts. MIDI Pedal 1 The MIDI pedal connected to MIDI IN terminal controls the bass note of the accompaniment. MIDI Pedal 2 The MIDI pedal connected to MIDI IN terminal plays the bass part. MIDI OFF MIDI signals are neither sent nor received. 8 Call up the Edit display, then select and set the desired functions/parameters. For details about each of the MIDI edit displays, see the following pages. The saved settings can be named (page 44) or deleted (page 46) in the User page. END Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display. Making Overall System Settings (Local Control, Clock, etc.) — System Call up the display as described in step 2 above. For editing the Local Control parameters. For editing the Clock, Transmit Clock, Receive Transpose, and Start/Stop parameters. For editing the Message Switch parameters. Local Control Turns the Local Control for each part on or off. When Local Control is set to “ON,” the keyboard of the PSR-2100/1100 controls its own (local) internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard. If you set Local to “OFF,” the keyboard and controllers are internally disconnected from the PSR-2100/1100’s tone generator section so that no sound is output when you play the keyboard or use the controllers. For example, this allows you to use an external MIDI sequencer to play the PSR-2100/1100’s internal voices, and use the PSR-2100/1100 keyboard to record notes to the external sequencer and/or play an external tone generator. 148 PSR-2100/1100 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Clock, Transmit Clock, Receive Transpose, Start/Stop ■ Clock Determines whether the PSR-2100/1100 is controlled by its own internal clock or a MIDI clock signal received from an external device. “INTERNAL” is the normal Clock setting when the PSR-2100/1100 is being used alone. If you are using the PSR-2100/1100 with an external sequencer, MIDI computer, or other MIDI device, and you want the PSR2100/1100 to be synchronized to the external device, set this function to “EXTERNAL.” In the latter case, the external device must be connected to the PSR-2100/1100 MIDI IN terminal, and must be transmitting an appropriate MIDI clock signal. ■ Transmit Clock Turns MIDI clock transmission on or off. When this is set to “OFF,” no MIDI clock or START/STOP data is transmitted. ■ Receive Transpose When this parameter is set to “OFF,” note data received by the PSR-2100/1100 is not transposed, and when it is set to “ON,” the received note data is transposed according to the current PSR-2100/1100 keyboard transpose (page 144) setting. ■ Start/Stop Determines whether incoming FA (start) and FC (stop) messages affect song or style playback. FA, FC MIDI messages for starting/stopping the song or style. The “FA” message corresponds to start, and “FC” corresponds to stop. Message Switch SYS/EX. Tx (TRANSMIT)..................... Turns MIDI transmission of MIDI system exclusive message data ON or OFF. SYS/EX. Rx (RECEIVE) ........................ Turns MIDI reception of MIDI exclusive data generated by external equipment ON or OFF. CHORD SYS/EX. Tx (TRANSMIT) ...... Turns MIDI transmission of MIDI chord exclusive data (chord detect — root and type) ON or OFF. CHORD SYS/EX. Rx (RECEIVE).......... Turns MIDI reception of MIDI chord exclusive data generated by external equipment ON or OFF. Transmitting MIDI Data — Transmit This determines which parts will send MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will be sent. A Determines the channel for changing transmit settings. B C D E Determines the Part for the selected channel. The dots corresponding to each channel (1-16) flash briefly whenever any data is transmitted on the channel(s). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Turns transmission of the specified data type on or off. See below for details on the data types. Data Types in the MIDI TRANSMIT/RECEIVE Display Note Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played. Each message includes a specific note number which corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played. Control Change (CC) Control change data includes pedal and any other controller data. Program Change (PC) Program change data corresponds to voice or “patch” numbers. Pitch Bend (PB) See page 143. After Touch (AT)* With this function, the PSR-2100/1100 senses how much pressure you apply to the keys while playing, and uses that pressure to affect the sound in various ways, depending on the selected voice. This allows you to play with greater expressiveness and add effects with your playing technique. * Available in RECEIVE display only (page 150). PSR-2100/1100 149 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Receiving MIDI Data — Receive This determines which parts will receive MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will be received. The MIDI IN/OUT terminals and Port 1 of the USB terminal correspond to channels 1 - 16. Port 2 of the USB terminal corresponds to channels 17 - 32. A Determines the channel for changing receive settings. B C The dots corresponding to each channel (1 - 32) flash briefly whenever any data is received on the channel(s). D E Determines the Part for the selected channel. See below for details about the receive parts. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Turns reception of the specified data type on or off. See page 149 for details on the data types. MIDI Receive Parts OFF No MIDI data is received. SONG Normally, the part receiving the MIDI data corresponds to the part/voice used in playing back the song data. Channels 1 - 16 correspond to song channels 1 - 16, respectively. MAIN The MAIN part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel. LAYER The LAYER part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel. LEFT The LEFT part is controlled by the MIDI data received on the corresponding channel. KEYBOARD MIDI note data received by the PSR-2100/1100 plays the corresponding notes in the same way as if they are played on the keyboard. ACMP RHYTHM1-2 The received notes are used as the accompaniment RHYTHM 1 and RHYTHM 2. ACMP BASS The received notes are used as the accompaniment BASS. ACMP CHORD1-2 The received notes are used as the accompaniment CHORD 1 and CHORD 2. ACMP PAD The received notes are used as the accompaniment PAD. ACMP PHRASE1-2 The received notes are used as the accompaniment PHRASE 1 and PHRASE 2. EXTRA PART1-5 There are five parts specially reserved for receiving and playing MIDI data. Normally, these parts are not used by the instrument itself. When these five channels are enabled, you can use the instrument as a 32-channel multi-timbral tone generator. Setting Root Note Channels — Root The note ON/OFF messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the root notes in the accompaniment section. The root notes will be detected regardless of the accompaniment ON/OFF and split point settings. The MIDI IN/OUT terminals and Port 1 of the USB terminal correspond to channels 1 - 16. Port 2 of the USB terminal corresponds to channels 17 - 32. A Selects the channels in groups of eight: 1 - 8, 9 - 16, 17 - 24, and 25 - 32, respectively. B C D E When several channels are simultaneously set to “ON,” the root note is detected from merged MIDI data received over the channels. Sets the desired channel to ON or OFF. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Sets all channels to OFF. Setting Chord Channels — Chord Detect The note ON/OFF messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the chord notes in the accompaniment section. The chords to be detected depend on the fingering type. The root notes will be detected regardless of the accompaniment ON/OFF and split point settings. The operation procedure is basically the same as that of the ROOT display above. 150 PSR-2100/1100 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Other Settings — Utility The explanations here apply to step #3 of the procedure on page 136. Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome, Parameter Lock, and Tap — CONFIG 1 Fade In Time, Fade Out Time, Fade Out Hold Time These determine how long it takes for the accompaniment style and song to fade in or fade out. Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade in, or go from minimum to maximum (range of 0 - 20.0 seconds). Determines the time the volume is held at 0 following the fade out (range of 0 5.0 seconds). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade out, or go from maximum to minimum (range of 0 - 20.0 seconds). Metronome These let you make settings for the metronome-related parameters. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines the level of the metronome sound. Determines which sound is used for the metronome. Bell Off ........................ Conventional metronome sound, with no bell. Bell On......................... Conventional metronome sound, with bell. Determines the time signature of the metronome sound. When you start the song or accompaniment style, the values matching to them are automatically set. PSR-2100/1100 151 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Parameter Lock This function is used to “lock” the specified parameters so that they can only be changed directly via the panel controls — in other words, instead of via Registration Memory, One Touch Setting, Music Finder, or song and sequence data. PSR-2100 only Selects the desired parameter for locking/ unlocking. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines whether the selected parameter is locked (checkmarked) or unlocked (empty). Tap Count This lets you change settings of the tap sound, used for the Tap Start function (page 54). Determines the particular sound used for the Tap Start function. Any drum or percussion sound in the Standard Kit (page 58) can be selected. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines the level of the tap sound. Making Settings for the Display and Voice Number Indication — CONFIG 2 Determines the brightness of the backlit display. 1 152 PSR-2100/1100 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Determines whether or not the voice bank and number are shown in the PRESET page of the VOICE display (page 57). This is useful when you want to check the proper bank select MSB/LSB values and program number to specify when selecting the voice from an external MIDI device. Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Copying and Formatting Disks — Disk This function copies all the data from one disk to another, letting you back up all your important data before editing. For instructions, see “Copying from Disk to Disk” below. F G H I This function formats a floppy disk (see below). J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Turns the Song Auto Open function on or off. When this is set to “ON,” the PSR-2100/1100 automatically calls up the first disk song when a disk is inserted. Copying from Disk to Disk As shown below, first copy the data of the original (source) disk to the PSR-2100/1100, then copy the data to the backup (destination) disk. 1 3 Press the [F] button. A message appears, prompting you to insert the source disk. At the “Please insert a destination disk and press the OK button ” prompt, eject the source disk and replace it with a blank, formatted disk, then press “OK.” To abort the operation, press “CANCEL.” 2 4 • Copying cannot be done between a 2DD disk and 2HD disk. When copying, make sure both disk are the same type. • Depending on the amount of data contained in the original source disk, you may have to swap the two disks several times until all of the data is properly copied. • Make sure to read the section “Using the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disks” on page 7. Internal memory Copy Insert the disk containing the original data into the drive and press “OK.” A “Now copying” message appears, and the PSR-2100/ 1100 begins copying data to internal memory. To abort the operation, press “CANCEL.” When the operation is finished (or when prompted), eject the destination disk. Formatting a Disk When using an unformatted disk for the first time, make sure to properly format it on the PSR-2100/1100. This includes blank disks as well as disks already initialized in a different format. Formatting erases all data on the disk. Disk Lamp When the power is turned on, the disk lamp (at the bottom left of the drive) lights to indicate the drive can be used. Insert the disk with shutter facing away from you and the label side up. To start the Format operation, press the [H] (DISK FORMAT) button, in the DISK page above. Source disk Copy Destination disk Commercially available music data is subject to protection by copyright laws. Copying commercially available data is strictly prohibited, except for your own personal use. Some music software is purposely copy-protected and cannot be copied. The Format operation initializes a disk with a specific file system, allowing the corresponding device (in this case, the PSR-2100/1100) to access it properly. Since there are several types of formats and disks available, you should know which ones to use with the PSR2100/1100. 2DD disks are formatted to a capacity of 720 KB, and 2HD disks are formatted to a capacity of 1.44 MB. CAUTION Formatting a disk completely erases all data on the disk. Make sure that the disk you’re formatting does not contain important data! PSR-2100/1100 153 Making Global and Other Important Settings — Function Entering Your Name and Language Preference — Owner F Selecting a different language here may cause the following problems. • Some characters of the file names you entered may be garbled. • Files may not be accessible. Restoring the original language solves the above problems. Reading the files on the computer with a different language system may cause similar problems to those above. G Press this button to enter an Owner name (page 17; for instructions on naming see page 48). This name is automatically shown when you turn the power on. Determines the language used for the display messages. Once you change this setting, all messages will be shown in the selected language. H I J 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the PSR-2100/1100 — System Reset This operation lets you restore the PSR-2100/1100 to its original factory settings. These settings include System Setup, MIDI Setup, User Effect, Music Finder, and Files & Folders. Restores the System Setup parameters to the original factory settings. You can also restore only the System Setup settings by simultaneously holding down the highest key on the keyboard (C6) and turning on the power. Restores the MIDI templates to the original factory settings. Restores the User Effects (page 128) to the original factory settings. A F B G C H D I E J Restores the Music Finder data to the original factory settings. Deletes all files and folders stored in the User page. 1 2 Executes the Factory Reset operation for all items checkmarked above. 154 PSR-2100/1100 3 4 5 6 7 8 These call up the corresponding Open/ Save displays. These let you store the corresponding data as files to disk, for future recall. Pressing each of these buttons calls up the corresponding Open/Save display, from which you can select the corresponding PRESET page. From this PRESET page, you can save the relevant data. The functions and settings below do not apply to the Factory Reset operation. However, you can restore these to their original settings by calling up the preset System Setup files, using the Open/Save System Files function. Language Owner Name LCD Brightness All Music Finder records can be stored together as a single file. When calling up a stored file, a message appears prompting you to replace or append the records as desired. Replace: All Music Finder records currently in the instrument are deleted and replaced with the records of the selected file. Append: The records called up are added to the vacant record numbers. Using Your PSR-2100/1100 with Other Devices CAUTION Before connecting the PSR-2100/1100 to other electronic components, turn off the power to all the components. Before turning the power on or off to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may occur. 1 Connect your microphone to the MIC./LINE IN jack (standard 1/4" phone jack). Use an unidirectional microphone for best results. 2 Set the [MIC. LINE] switch (located next to the MIC./ LINE IN jack) to the MIC. position. MIC. LINE MIC. LINE When connecting a microphone When connecting a guitar 1 1 Using the Headphones (PHONES jack). A standard pair of stereo headphones can be plugged in here for private practice or late-night playing. The internal stereo speaker system is automatically shut off when a pair of headphones is plugged into the PHONES jack (page 152). 2 Connecting the Microphone or Guitar (MIC./LINE IN jack) (PSR-2100 only). By connecting a microphone to the PSR-2100, you can enjoy singing along with your own performance or song playback. (A dynamic microphone is recommended.) The PSR-2100 outputs your vocals or guitar sounds through the built-in speakers. You should set the [MIC. LINE] switch to the LINE position when connecting an audio source with line-level output to the MIC./LINE IN jack. 3 Use the [INPUT VOLUME] knob (located next to the MIC./LINE IN jack) to set the microphone volume then trying singing into the microphone. The volume should be set high enough that the SIGNAL lamp on the top panel lights steadily when you sing, but not so high that the OVER lamp lights (page 131). P.155 P.156 2 3 INPUT VOLUME MIC. LINE MIC./ LINE IN R L AUX OUT R L/L+R OUTPUT DC IN 16V (LEVEL FIXED) P.157 6 P.156 5 IN USB MIDI OUT P.156 4 2 FOOT PEDAL PSR-2100/1100 155 Using Your PSR-2100/1100 with Other Devices 3 Playing the sounds of the PSR-2100/1100 through an external audio system, and recording the sounds to an external recorder (AUX OUT/ OUTPUT jacks) 4 Using the Pedal (footswitch) or Foot Controller (FOOT PEDAL 1/2 jack) You can connect the PSR-2100/1100 to a wide range of audio equipment by using the AUX OUT and OUTPUT jacks. Connect as shown in the illustrations below using standard audio cables. By connecting an optional Foot Controller (such as the FC7) to the FOOT PEDAL 2 jack, you can control any one of a variety of important functions with your foot — such as dynamically adjusting the volume as you play (page 142). Use audio cables and adaptor plugs with no resistance. By connecting a Foot Switch (the FC4 or FC5) to one of the FOOT PEDAL jacks, you can replicate the function of some panel buttons, doing things like starting and stopping accompaniment. The polarity of the foot switch (normal or reverse) can also be changed (page 142). CAUTION CAUTION When the PSR-2100/1100 AUX OUT and OUTPUT jacks are connected to an external audio system, first turn on the power to the PSR-2100/1100, then to the external audio system. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. Make sure to connect or disconnect the pedal only when the power is turned off. 5 Connecting external MIDI devices (MIDI terminals) To powered speaker Audio cable RCA pin plug Phone plug (standard) RCA pin plug AUX IN R L AUX OUT R L/L+R OUTPUT (LEVEL FIXED) Cassette tape recorder stereo system When these are connected (with RCA pin plug; LEVEL FIXED), the sound is output to the external device at a fixed level, regardless of the [MASTER VOLUME] control setting. When these are connected (with standard phone plugs), you can use the [MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the volume of the sound output to the external device. • If you connect the PSR-2100/1100 to a monaural device, use only the OUTPUT L/L+R jack. 156 PSR-2100/1100 Use the built-in MIDI terminals and standard MIDI cables to connect external MIDI devices. For more information about MIDI connections, see “What You Can Do With MIDI” on page 160. The MIDI terminals cannot be used when the USB terminal is connected to a computer and active. MIDI IN ...........Receives MIDI messages from an external MIDI device MIDI OUT........Sends out MIDI messages generated by the PSR-2100/1100 For a general overview of MIDI and how you can effectively use it, refer to the following sections: • What’s MIDI? (page 158) • What You Can Do With MIDI (page 160) • MIDI functions (page 148) • Never use MIDI cables longer than 15 meters. Using Your PSR-2100/1100 with Other Devices 6 Connecting to a Computer (USB terminal, MIDI terminal) Connecting your PSR-2100/1100 to a computer allows you to transfer data back and forth between the two and take advantage of the powerful and versatile music software available. You can connect the devices in one of two ways: ■ Using the USB terminal ■ Using the MIDI terminals The MIDI terminals cannot be used when the USB terminal is in use. An appropriate MIDI application for your computer platform is required. For details about the necessary MIDI settings for computer and sequence software you are using, refer to the relevant owner’s manuals. Using the USB terminal Connect the USB terminal of a computer to the USB terminal of the PSR-2100/1100 using a USB cable. Make sure to use a standard USB cable with the USB logo. USB cable NEC MultiSync PC-9821 AS NEC About the USB driver You must install the specified USB driver (YAMAHA USB MIDI Driver) to your computer before you can transfer data between the computer and the PSR2100/1100. You can download a copy of the YAMAHA USB MIDI Driver free of charge from the XG Library on the Yamaha Web site (http://www.yamaha-xg.com/). CAUTION If you are using a USB cable to connect the PSR-2100/1100 to your computer, you must connect the USB cable before turning on the power of the instrument. Also, do not turn the power of the PSR-2100/1100 on/off while any application software that uses USB or MIDI is running. If you turn the power of the PSR-2100/1100 on or off or connect/ disconnect the USB cable in the following states, problems will occur in the computer system, possibly causing it to “freeze” (hang up), or causing the PSR-2100/1100 to stop functioning. • While installing the driver. • While starting or shutting down the operating system. • While the computer is in an energy-save or sleep mode. • When a MIDI application program is starting. Make sure NOT to perform any of the following operations. Otherwise, the computer may lock up or the PSR-2100/1100 functions may be disabled. • Turning the power on/off, or connecting/disconnecting the cable too often. • Shifting to energy-save or sleep mode while MIDI data is being transferred, or returning from sleep mode. • Disconnecting/connecting the cable while the PSR-2100/1100 is on. • Turning the power of the PSR-2100/1100 on/off, starting up your computer, or installing the driver while a large amount of data is being transferred. • The PSR-2100/1100 will begin transmission a short time after the USB connection is made. • When using a USB cable to connect PSR-2100/1100 to your computer, make the connection directly without passing through a USB hub. • Depending on the state of your computer, the operating state of PSR-2100/1100 may become unstable. Do not use your computer in a way that causes it to enter an unstable state. Using the MIDI terminals When using a MIDI interface device installed in the personal computer, connect the MIDI terminals of the personal computer and the PSR-2100/1100 with standard MIDI cables. When connecting the PSR-2100/1100 to a personal computer, first turn off the power to both the PSR-2100/1100 and the computer before connecting any cables. After making the proper connections and settings, turn on the power of the computer first, then that of the PSR-2100/1100. • When the computer has a MIDI interface installed, connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the personal computer to the MIDI IN terminal. MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI OUT MIDI IN NEC MultiSync PC-9821 AS NEC PSR-2100/1100 157 Using Your PSR-2100/1100 with Other Devices • When using a MIDI interface with a Macintosh series computer, connect the RS-422 terminal of the computer (modem or printer terminal) to the MIDI interface, then connect the MIDI OUT terminal on the MIDI interface to the MIDI IN terminal of the PSR2100/1100, as shown in the diagram below. MIDI IN Now let’s examine what happens when we play back a recording. When you playback a music CD (for example, a solo piano recording), you’re hearing the actual sound (vibrations in air) of the acoustic instrument. This is called audio data, to distinguish it from MIDI data. Recording and playing back the performance of an acoustic instrument (audio data) RS422 Recording MIDI OUT Playback MINI DIN 8-pin • When using a Macintosh series computer, set the MIDI interface clock setting in the application software to match the setting of the MIDI interface you are using. For details, refer to the owner’s manual for the particular software you are using. What’s MIDI? Let’s consider an acoustic piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some strings and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note sounds. But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note? Acoustic guitar note production In the above example, the actual acoustic sounds of the pianist’s performance are captured in the recording as audio data, and this is recorded to CD. When you play back that CD on your audio system, you can hear the actual piano performance. The piano itself is not necessary, since the recording contains the actual sounds of the piano, and your speakers reproduce them. Recording and playing back the performance of a digital instrument (MIDI data) Recording Playback Digital instrument note production Tone generator Internal amp L Tone generator (Electric circuit) Sequencer Internal amp R Controller (keyboard, etc.) FD Playing the keyboard Pluck a string and the body resonates the sound. Based on playing information from the keyboard, a sampled note stored in the tone generator is played through the speakers. As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument, the sampled note (previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is played based on information received from the keyboard, and output through the speakers. 158 PSR-2100/1100 FD In the case of digital instruments, the audio signals are sent through output jacks (such as AUX OUT) on the instrument. Using Your PSR-2100/1100 with Other Devices The “controller” and “tone generator” in the illustration above are equivalent to the piano in our acoustic example. Here, the player’s performance on the keyboard is captured as MIDI song data (see illustration below). In order to record the audio performance on an acoustic piano, special recording equipment is needed. However, since the PSR-2100/1100 features a built-in sequencer that lets you record performance data, this recording equipment is unnecessary. Instead, your digital instrument — the PSR-2100/1100 — allows you to both record and play back the data. ■ Example Keyboard Data Voice number (with what voice) 01 (grand piano) Note number (with which key) 60 (C3) Note on (when was it pressed) and note off (when was it released) Timing expressed numerically (quarter note) Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong) Panel operations on the PSR-2100/1100, such as playing the keyboard and selecting voices, are processed and stored as MIDI data. The auto accompaniment styles and songs also consist of MIDI data. Tone generator Sequencer Keyboard performance (MIDI data) However, we also need a sound source to produce the audio, which eventually comes from your speakers. The tone generator of the PSR-2100/1100 fills this function. The recorded performance is reproduced by the sequencer, playing back the song data, using a tone generator capable of accurately producing various instrument sounds — including that of a piano. Looked at in another way, the relation of the sequencer and the tone generator is similar to that of the pianist and the piano — one plays the other. Since digital instruments handle playback data and the actual sounds independently, we can hear our piano performance played by another instrument, such as guitar or violin. Even though it is a single musical instrument, the PSR-2100/1100 can be thought of as containing several electronic components: a controller, a tone generator, and a sequencer. Finally, we’ll take a look at the actual data that gets recorded and that serves as the basis for playing the sounds. For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on the PSR-2100/1100 keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note, the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with what voice,” “with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed” and “when was it released.” Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent to the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the stored sampled note. MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, which allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program Change and various other types of MIDI data, or messages. The PSR-2100/1100 can control a MIDI device by transmitting note related data and various types of controller data.The PSR-2100/1100 can be controlled by incoming MIDI messages which automatically determine the tone generator mode, select MIDI channels, voices and effects, change parameter values and of course play the voices specified for the various parts. MIDI data has the following advantages over audio data: • The amount of data is much less, letting you easily store MIDI songs to floppy disk. • The data can be effectively and easily edited, even to the point of changing voices and transforming the data. MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel messages and System messages. ■ Channel Messages The PSR-2100/1100 is an electronic instrument that can handle 16 channels (or 32 channels, when using the USB terminal). This is usually expressed as “it can play 16 instruments at the same time.” Channel messages transmit information such as Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for each of the 16 channels. Message Name PSR-2100/1100 Operation/Panel Setting Note ON/OFF Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played. Each message includes a specific note number which corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played. Program Change Voice selecting (control change bank select MSB/LSB setting) Control Change Volume, panpot (Mixing Console), etc. The performance data of all songs and styles is handled as MIDI data. PSR-2100/1100 159 Using Your PSR-2100/1100 with Other Devices MIDI channels MIDI performance data is assigned to one of sixteen MIDI channels. Using these channels, 1 - 16, the performance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable. Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV station transmits its broadcasts over a specific channel.Your home TV set receives many different programs simultaneously from several TV stations and you select the appropriate channel to watch the desired program. As you can see, it is essential to determine which data is to be sent over which MIDI channel when transmitting MIDI data (page 149). The PSR-2100/1100 also allows you to determine how the received data is played back. (page 150). ■ System Messages This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI system. System messages include messages like Exclusive Messages that transmit data unique to each instrument manufacturer and Realtime Messages that control the MIDI device. Message Name PSR-2100/1100 Operation/Panel Setting System Exclusive Message Effect type settings (Mixing Console), etc. Realtime Messages Clock setting, Start/stop operation Weather Report News 1 2 News 2 MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The transmitting instrument sends MIDI data on a specific MIDI channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single MIDI cable to the receiving instrument. If the receiving instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive Channel) matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument will sound according to the data sent by the transmitting instrument. MIDI cable MIDI transmit channel 2 MIDI receive channel 2 The PSR-2100/1100’s keyboard and internal tone generator are also connected by MIDI (page 148). For example, several tracks (channels) can be transmitted simultaneously, including the style data (as shown below). Example: Recording the auto accompaniment of the PSR-2100/ 1100 to an external sequencer The messages transmitted/received by the PSR-2100/1100 are shown in the MIDI Data Format and MIDI Implementation Chart in the separate Data List. What You Can Do With MIDI The following MIDI settings can be made on the PSR2100/1100: • MIDI templates (preset MIDI setups for various applications) (page 148) • Transmit (page 149) • Receive (page 150) • Local Control (page 148) • Clock (page 149) ■ Record performance data (1-16 channels) using the PSR-2100/1100 Auto Accompaniment features on a external sequencer (such as a personal computer). After recording, edit the data with the sequencer, then play it again on the PSR-2100/1100 (playback). PSR-2100/1100 MIDI receive MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI OUT MIDI IN NEC MultiSync PC-9821 AS NEC MIDI transmit MIDI cable or serial cable PSR-2100/1100 track (channnel) MAIN LAYER LEFT STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument STYLE instrument Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 9 Channel 10 Channel 11 External sequencer Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 Track 6 Track 7 Track 8 Track 9 Track 10 Track 11 When you want to use the PSR-2100/1100 as an XGcompatible multi-timbral tone generator, set the receive part for MIDI channels 1 to 16 to “SONG” in MIDI Receive (page 150). ■ Play and control the PSR-2100/1100 from a separate keyboard PSR-2100/1100 MIDI receive MIDI IN 160 PSR-2100/1100 Personal cumputer, QY series etc. MIDI OUT Using Your PSR-2100/1100 with Other Devices MIDI Data Compatibility This section covers basic information on data compatibility: whether or not other MIDI devices can playback the data recorded by PSR-2100/1100, and whether or not the PSR-2100/1100 can playback commercially available song data or song data created for other instruments or on a computer. Depending on the MIDI device or data characteristics, you may be able to play back the data without any problem, or you may have to perform some special operations before the data can be played back. If you run into problems playing back data, please refer to the information below. Disk format Sequence Format The system which records song data is called “sequence format.” Playback is only possible when the sequence format of the disk matches that of the MIDI device. The PSR-2100/ 1100 is compatible with the following formats. ■ SMF (Standard MIDI File) This is the most common sequence format. Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two types: Format 0 or Format 1. Many MIDI devices are compatible with Format 0, and most commercially available software is recorded as Format 0. • The PSR-2100/1100 is compatible with both Format 0 and Format 1. Floppy disks are the main storage medium for data used with various devices, including computers. Different devices have different systems of storing data, therefore it is necessary to first configure the floppy disk to the system of the device being used.This operation is called “formatting.” • Song data recorded on the PSR-2100/1100 is automatically recorded as SMF Format 0. • There are two types of floppy disks: MF2DD (double sided, double density) and MF2HD (double sided, high density), and each type has different formatting systems. ■ ESEQ • PSR-2100/1100 can record and playback with both types of floppy disks. • When formatted by the PSR-2100/1100, a 2DD disk stores up to 720 KB (kilobytes) and a 2HD disk stores up to1.44 MB (megabytes). (The figures “720 KB” and “1.44MB” indicate the data memory capacity. They are also used to indicate the format type of disk.) • Playback is only possible when the MIDI device to be used is compatible with the format of the disk. • Song data loaded to the PSR-2100/1100 is automatically saved as SMF Format 0 regardless of the original format. This sequence format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the PSR-2100/1100 series instruments.This is a common format used with various Yamaha software. ■ XF The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) format with greater functionality and open-ended expandability for the future. • The PSR-2100/1100 is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is played. ■ Style File The Style File Format – SFF – is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. PSR-2100/1100 161 Using Your PSR-2100/1100 with Other Devices Voice Allocation Format With MIDI, voices are assigned to specific numbers, called “program numbers.” The numbering standard (order of voice allocation) is referred to as the “voice allocation format.” Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice allocation format of the song data matches that of the compatible MIDI device used for playback. The PSR-2100/1100 is compatible with the following formats. Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions above, the data may still not be completely compatible, depending on the specifications of the devices and particular data recording methods. ■ GM System Level 1 This is one of the most common voice allocation formats. • Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System Level1, as is most commercially available software. ■ XG XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into the future. • Song data recorded on the PSR-2100/1100 using voices in the [XG] category is XG-compatible. ■ DOC This voice allocation format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the PSR series instruments. This is also a common format used with various Yamaha software. 162 PSR-2100/1100 Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause and Solution • The PSR-2100/1100 does not turn on; there is no power. Make sure that the PSR-2100/1100 has been plugged in properly (page 16). • A click or pop is heard when the power is turned on or off. This is normal when electrical current is applied to the instrument. • Noise is heard from the PSR-2100/1100’s speakers. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the PSR-2100/1100 may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone, or use it further away from the PSR-2100/1100. • The display is too bright or too dark to read. The brightness of the display may be affected by the surrounding temperature; try adjusting the contrast (page 17). • The keyboard volume is low compared to that of the Auto Accompaniment or song playback. The overall keyboard volume or the independent volume level of the keyboard part may be set too low. Raise the MAIN/LAYER/LEFT volume voices or lower the STYLE/SONG volume in the BALANCE display (page 64). • The volume of the Auto Accompaniment or song playback is low compared to that of the keyboard. The volume level of one or more accompaniment parts or song channels is set too low. Raise the part or channel level(s) in the appropriate MIXER display (page 125). • The overall volume is low, or no sound is heard. • The Master Volume is set too low; set it to an appropriate level with the [MASTER VOLUME] dial. • The volume of the individual parts may be set too low. Raise the volume of MAIN, LAYER, LEFT, STYLE, and SONG in the BALANCE display (page 64). • Make sure the desired channel is set to ON (page 64, 81). • Headphones are connected, disabling the speaker output. Unplug the headphones. • Make sure the Local Control function is set to ON (page 148). • Not all simultaneously-played notes sound. You may be exceeding the maximum polyphony of the PSR-2100/1100. When this happens, the earliest played notes will stop sounding, letting the latest played notes sound. See page 165 for information on the maximum polyphony. • Accompaniment style or Song playback does not start. • MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure this is set to “INTERNAL” (page 149). • Make sure to press the appropriate [START/STOP] button. To play an accompaniment style, press the STYLE [START/STOP] button (page 64); to playback a song, press the SONG [START/STOP] button (page 79). • “New Song” (a blank song) has been selected. Make sure to select an appropriate song in the SONG display (page 79). • The song has been stopped at the end of the song data. Return to the beginning of the song by pressing the [TOP] button (page 81). • The Multi Pads do not play back, even when one of the MULTI PAD buttons is pressed. MIDI Clock may be set to “EXTERNAL.” Make sure this is set to “INTERNAL” (page 149). • Only the rhythm channel plays. Make sure the Auto Accompaniment function is turned on; press the [ACMP] button. • The accompaniment style does not start, even when Synchro Start is in standby condition and a key is pressed. You may be trying to start accompaniment by playing a key in the right hand range of the keyboard. Make sure to play a key in the left-hand (accompaniment) range of the keyboard. • The desired chord is not recognized or output by the auto accompaniment. • You may not be playing the correct keys to indicate the chord. Refer to “Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode” (page 66). • You may be playing the keys according to a different fingering mode, and not the one currently selected. Check the accompaniment mode, and play the keys according to the selected mode (page 65). • An unexpected result or malfunction occurred during an operation. If, during execution of an operation, you simultaneously press three or more buttons that are unrelated to the operation or normal procedure, unexpected or unusual results may occur. • Auto accompaniment chords are recognized regardless of the split point or where chords are played on the keyboard. This is normal if the fingering mode is set to “Full Keyboard” or “AI Full Keyboard.” If either of these is selected, chords are recognized over the entire range of the keyboard, irrespective of the split point setting. If desired, select a different fingering mode (page 65). PSR-2100/1100 163 Troubleshooting Problem 164 Possible Cause and Solution • Certain notes sound at the wrong pitch. The Scale parameter has probably been set to something other than “Equal,” changing the tuning system of the keyboard. Make sure “Equal” is selected as the Scale in the Scale Tune page (page 138). • Some channels do not properly play back when playing back song data. Make sure that playback of the relevant channel(s) is turned on (page 81). • The solution to this problem is to ensure that as little extraneous sound as possible is picked up by your vocal microphone: • Sing as closely to the microphone as possible. • Use a directional microphone. • Turn down the MASTER VOLUME or volume for each part. • Separate the microphone from the instrument's speakers as much as possible. • Cut the Low band via the 3 Band EQ function in the MICROPHONE SETTING display (page 133). • Increase the microphone input level (“TH.”) in the Compressor function from the MICROPHONE SETTING display (page 133). If you experience distorted or out-of-tune sound from the Vocal Harmony feature, your vocal microphone may be picking up extraneous sounds (other than your voice) — the Auto Accompaniment sound from the PSR-2100/1100, for example. In particular, bass sounds can cause mistracking of the Vocal Harmony feature (PSR-2100 only). • Appropriate harmony notes are not produced by the Vocal Harmony feature (PSR-2100 only). Make sure you are using the appropriate method to specify the harmony notes for the current Vocal Harmony mode. See page 134. • The Harmony function does not operate. Harmony cannot be used with the Full Keyboard or AI Full Keyboard fingering modes. Select an appropriate fingering mode (page 65). • The microphone input signal and Vocal Harmony sound (PSR-2100 only) cannot be recorded. This is normal; recording the audio input of the microphone is not possible. • MIDI data is not transmitted or received via the MIDI terminals, even when MIDI cables are connected properly. Remove the USB cable from the PSR-2100/1100’s USB terminal. • When a voice is changed, the previously selected effect is changed. Each voice has its own suitable preset values which are automatically recalled when the corresponding Voice Set parameters are turned on (page 146). • There is a slight difference in sound quality between notes played on the keyboard. • Some voices have a looping sound. • Some noise or vibrato is noticeable at higher pitches, depending upon the voice. This is normal and is a result of the PSR-2100/1100’s sampling system. • Some voices will jump an octave in pitch when played in the upper or lower registers. This is normal. Some voices have a pitch limit which, when reached, causes this type of pitch shift. • Even though a Registration Memory setting containing a User voice is selected, the Open/ Save display shows a Preset voice. This is normal; even with the Preset voice shown, the actual sounding voice is the selected User voice. When a User voice is registered to the User drive or floppy disk, the actual registered is: 1) the source Preset voice, and 2) the parameter settings as set in the Sound Creator. When you recall a Registration Memory setting containing a User voice, the PSR-2100/1100 selects the Preset voice (on which the User voice is based), then applies the relevant parameter settings to it – so that your original User voice is sounded. • Disk save operations take a long time. This is normal. Keep in mind that it takes approximately 1 minute to save 1 megabyte of data to a floppy disk. • The voice produces excessive noise. Certain voices may produce noise, depending on the Harmonic Content and/or Brightness settings in the FILTER page of the Mixing Console display (page 126). • The sound is distorted or noisy. • The volume may be turned up too high. Make sure all relevant volume settings are appropriate. • This may be caused by the effects. Try canceling all unnecessary effects, especially distortion-type effects (page 127). • Some filter resonance settings in the Custom Voice Creator display (page 92) can result in distorted sound. Adjust these settings if necessary. • Is the gain of the Low band set too high in the Master Equalizer display (Mixing Console — page 130)? (PSR-2100 only) • A strange “flanging” or “doubling” sound occurs. Also, the sound is slightly different each time the keys are played. Both the Main and Layer parts are set to “ON,” and both parts are set to play the same voice. Set the Layer part to “OFF” (page 59) or change the voice for each part (page 57). PSR-2100/1100 Specifications : available Model Name PSR-2100 Sound Source PSR-1100 AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling Display 320 ✕ 240 dots backlit graphic LCD Keyboard 61 keys (C1 - C6 with Initial Touch) Voice Polyphony (max) 64 32 338 voices + 480 XG voices + 16 Drum Kits 287 voices + 480 XG voices + 16 Drum Kits 328 287 Sweet Voice 14 8 Cool Voice 6 2 Voice Selection Regular Voice Live Voice 12 1 Others 296 276 10 (8 Footages) — Organ Flutes Sound creator Effects Effect Blocks Effect Types Reverb 1 Chorus 1 DSP 4 1 Microphone 1 — REVERB 29 Preset+3 User 23 Preset+3 User CHORUS 25 Preset+3 User 15 Preset+3 User DSP1/DSP 164 Preset+3 User 92 Preset+3 User DSP2, 3, 4 88 Preset +10 User — Master EQ 5 Preset + 2 User — 27 Parts — Part EQ Vocal Harmony Accompaniment Style Number of Accompaniment Styles 49 Preset +10 User — 197 181 Number of Session Styles Fingering 6 Single Finger, Fingered, Fingered On Bass, Multi Finger, AI Fingered, Full Keyboard, AI Full Keyboard Style Creator OTS (One Touch Setting) 4/Accompaniment Style OTS link Music Finder 2500 (max.) 1200 (max.) Edit Song Format SMF (Format 0,1), ESEQ Preset Songs Lyrics Score Recording Quick Recording, Multi Recording, Step Recording, Song Editing Record Channels 4 Pads ✕ 54 Banks Multi Pad Preset Memory Device Floppy Disk (2HD, 2DD) Flash Memory (internal) Flash Availability Tempo 16 1524KB 698KB Song (SMF), Style (SFF), Registration, Voice, etc. Tempo Range 5 - 500 Tap Tempo Metronome Sound Bell on/off PSR-2100/1100 165 Specifications Model Name Registration Memory PSR-2100 PSR-1100 Buttons 8 Regist Sequence Freeze Others Demo Language Function, Voice, Style 6 languages (English, Japanese, German, French, Spanish, Italian) Help Direct Access Master Volume Fade In/Out Transpose Keyboard/Song/Master Tuning Scale Equal Temperament, Pure Major/Pure Minor, Pythagorean, Mean-Tone, Werckmeister/Kirnberger, Arabic 1/2 Touch Response Jacks/Connectors 5 level DC IN, PHONES, MIDI (OUT, IN), USB, FOOT PEDAL1 (SWITCH), FOOT PEDAL2, AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) (L/R), OUTPUT (L/L+R) MIC (INPUT VOLUME, MIC./ LINE) Pedal Functions Amplifiers/ Speakers 12 W ✕ 2 Amplifiers Speakers [12 cm + 4 cm (dome)] ✕ 2 Power Consumption (12 cm + 5 cm) ✕ 2 31 W Power supply Yamaha AC adaptor PA-300 (included) *May not be included in your area.Please check with your Yamaha dealer. Dimensions [W ✕ D ✕ H] (without Music Rest) Weight Optional accessories — VOLUME, SUSTAIN, SOSTENUTO, SOFT, GLIDE, PORTAMENTO, PITCHBEND, MODULATION, DSP VARIATION, SONG START/STOP, STYLE START/STOP, etc. 973 ✕ 399 ✕ 161 mm [38-5/16" ✕ 15-11/16" ✕ 6-5/16"] 10.5 Kg (23 lbs., 2 oz) 10.0 Kg (22 lbs., 1 oz) Headphones HPE-150 Foot Switch FC4 / FC5 Foot Controller FC7 Keyboard Stand L-6, L-7s * Specifications and descriptions in this owner's manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. 166 PSR-2100/1100 Index Numerics 1 - 16 ........................................................................... 99, 108 [1▲▼] - [8▲▼] buttons ........................................... 19, 38–48 3BAND EQ (3-BAND EQUALIZER) .................................... 133 A A (ACMP) ........................................................................... 141 [A] - [J] buttons............................................................... 19, 43 Accent Type ....................................................................... 117 Accessories ............................................................................ 6 Accompaniment style parts................................................... 97 [ACMP] button ............................................................... 18, 63 ACMP TOUCH .................................................................. 141 ADD TO FAVORITE ............................................................. 72 Adjust the Volume Balance and Changing Voices .............. 124 Adjusting the display contrast ............................................... 17 Adjusting the Effects ........................................................... 127 Adjusting the Tempo ............................................................ 53 Adjusting the Vocal Harmony Settings and Microphone Effects .................................................. 133 Adjusting the Volume Balance ............................................. 64 Adjusting the Volume Balance / Muting Specific Channels ... 81 Adjusting values ................................................................... 49 AI ......................................................................................... 65 AI FINGERED ....................................................................... 65 AI FULL KEYBOARD ............................................................ 65 A+L (ACMP + LEFT)............................................................ 141 Append ................................................................................ 74 Applying Voice Effects.......................................................... 60 Appropriate Panel Setting for the Selected Style.................... 70 Arabic ................................................................................ 139 Arranging the Style Pattern ................................................... 67 Assembling an Accompaniment Style ................................. 115 ASSIGN (HARMONY) .......................................................... 93 Attack (Organ Flutes) ............................................................ 94 ATTACK (Regular Voice) ...................................................... 92 AUTO .................................................................................. 20 AUTO CH SET ................................................................... 140 [AUTO FILL IN] button................................................... 18, 69 Auto Revoice...................................................................... 125 Automatically Changing One Touch Settings with the Sections............................................................... 71 AUX OUT (LEVEL FIXED) [L] [R] jacks.......................... 19, 156 B [BACK] button .......................................................... 19, 43, 49 BALANCE............................................................................. 64 [BALANCE] button ......................................................... 19, 64 Bar Clear ............................................................................ 118 Bar Copy ............................................................................ 118 Bar/Beat/Clock.................................................................... 100 Basic Operations — Organizing Your Data .......................... 38 Bass...................................................................................... 97 BEAT .............................................................................. 73, 74 Beat Converter.................................................................... 116 Boost/Cut ........................................................................... 117 [BREAK] button .............................................................. 18, 67 BRIGHTNESS ....................................................................... 92 C Calling Up Ideal Setups for Your Music ................................ 72 Cent....................................................................................138 Change the Rhythmic Feel ..................................................116 Changing Pitch-related Settings...........................................126 Changing the Automatically Selected Voice Settings ...........146 Changing the Icon.................................................................49 Changing the Tone of the Voice..........................................126 Changing the Touch Sensitivity Modulation and Transpose .. 144 Channel ..................................................64, 81, 105, 118, 140 Channel Messages ..............................................................160 Channel Muting ....................................................................64 CHANNEL ON/OFF........................................................64, 81 [CHANNEL ON / OFF] button ..................................19, 64, 81 Channel Transpose .............................................................107 CHD ...................................................................................109 Chord ...................................................................................97 Chord Detect ......................................................................150 Chord Events.......................................................................109 Chord Fingering ............................................................65, 142 CHORD NOTE ONLY (HARMONY).....................................93 Chord Tutor ........................................................................142 Chord Types Recognized in the Fingered Mode ....................66 Chorus ................................................................................129 CHORUS DEPTH (MIC.) .....................................................135 Chorus Depth (Organ Flutes).................................................94 CHORUS DEPTH (Sound Creator) ........................................93 Clock ..................................................................................149 COMMON ...........................................................................91 COMPARE ............................................................................90 Compatible Song Types ........................................................78 COMPRESSOR....................................................................134 CONFIG 1 ..........................................................................151 CONFIG 2 ..........................................................................152 Connecting external MIDI devices ......................................156 Connecting the Microphone or Guitar (PSR-2100 only) ......155 Connecting to a Computer ..................................................157 Controller ...........................................................................142 Converting into Kanji (Japanese language) ............................48 Cool! ....................................................................................58 COPY ...................................................................................46 Copying and Formatting Disks ............................................153 Copying Files/Folders............................................................46 Copying from Disk to Disk..................................................153 Creating Accompaniment Styles..........................................111 Current Memory ...................................................................40 Customizing the Event List — Filter.....................................110 CUT......................................................................................45 D Data Compatibility..............................................................161 [DATA ENTRY] dial ........................................................19, 49 Data Types in the MIDI TRANSMIT/RECEIVE Display .........149 DC IN terminal .............................................................19, 156 DECAY .................................................................................92 DELETE (Basic Operations)....................................................46 Delete (Song Creator)..........................................................106 DELETE RECORD..................................................................74 Deleting Files/Folders............................................................46 [DEMO] button.........................................................14, 18, 55 DEPTH..................................................................................93 DESTINATION....................................................................106 Detailed Settings for Notation ...............................................84 [DIGITAL RECORDING] button........................14, 18, 95, 111 PSR-2100/1100 167 Index [DIRECT ACCESS] button ............................................... 19, 50 Direct Access Chart .............................................................. 51 Disk ................................................................................... 153 Disk drive....................................................................... 41, 42 Disk format......................................................................... 161 Disk Orchestra Collection .................................................... 17 DISPLAY VOICE NUMBER ................................................. 152 Displaying Music Notation ................................................... 83 Displaying the Lyrics ............................................................ 86 Displaying Upper Level pages .............................................. 47 DOC .................................................................................. 162 Drum ................................................................................... 58 [DSP] button .......................................................... 19, 60, 129 DSP Depth (Organ Flutes) .................................................... 94 DSP DEPTH (Sound Creator) ................................................ 93 DSP on/off (Organ Flutes) ..................................................... 94 DSP Type (Organ Flutes) ...................................................... 94 Dynamics ........................................................................... 117 E ECHO .......................................................................... 61, 146 Edit..................................................................................... 114 Edit the Created Accompaniment Style ............................... 116 Editing a Recorded Song..................................................... 105 Editing Channel-related Parameters .................................... 105 Editing Chord Events .......................................................... 109 Editing Note Events ............................................................ 108 Editing Records .................................................................... 74 Editing System Events ......................................................... 109 Editing the Channel Data.................................................... 118 Editing Voices ...................................................................... 90 [EFFECT] button ........................................................... 19, 131 Effect Block ........................................................................ 128 Effect Connections.............................................................. 129 Effect Structure ................................................................... 129 EFFECT/EQ ........................................................................... 93 EFFECT/EQ (Organ Flutes) .................................................... 94 Effects................................................................................. 127 EG ........................................................................................ 92 EG ATTACK (Sound Creator) ................................................ 92 EG DECAY (Sound Creator) .................................................. 92 EG RELES. (Sound Creator) ................................................... 92 Embellish and enhance your melodies — with the automatic Harmony and Echo effects.............. 29 END Mark .......................................................................... 103 ENDING .............................................................................. 69 [ENDING / rit.] button .............................................. 18, 30, 68 [ENTER] button .............................................................. 19, 49 Entering Characters............................................................... 48 Entering Chords and Sections (Chord Step) ......................... 102 Entering miscellaneous characters (marks) ............................ 48 Entering numbers ................................................................. 48 Entering special character marks (umlaut, accent, Japanese “ ” and “ ”) ......................... 48 Entering Your Name and Language Preference ................... 154 EQ.............................................................................. 124, 130 EQ High (Organ Flutes) ........................................................ 94 EQ Low (Organ Flutes) ......................................................... 94 Equal Temperament............................................................ 139 ESEQ .................................................................................. 162 Example Keyboard Data ..................................................... 160 [EXIT] button .................................................................. 19, 43 Exit from Small Pop-up Windows ......................................... 43 Expand/Compress ............................................................... 117 [EXTRA TRACKS (STYLE)] button .................................... 18, 82 F Fade In Time, Fade Out Time, Fade Out Hold Time............151 [FADE IN / OUT] button .................................................18, 68 FAVORITE ............................................................................74 [FF] button ......................................................................18, 81 File .......................................................................................40 File/Folder-related Operations...............................................44 Files/folders in a floppy disk..................................................45 Fill ........................................................................................69 Filter .....................................................................92, 110, 126 FILTER BRIGHT (Sound Creator) ...........................................92 FILTER HARMO. (Sound Creator)..........................................92 Fine ....................................................................................116 FINGERED ............................................................................65 FINGERED ON BASS ............................................................65 First Key On........................................................................104 FLOPPY DISK drive...................................................40, 41, 42 FLOPPY DISK SONG AUTO OPEN ....................................153 Floppy disk drive ..............................................................7, 19 FOOT PEDAL 1/2 jack ........................................................156 FOOTAGE (Organ Flutes) .....................................................94 Footage (Organ Flutes) ..........................................................94 [FOOT PEDAL 1 (SWITCH)] jack ..................................19, 156 [FOOT PEDAL 2] jack...................................................19, 156 Formatting a Disk................................................................153 [FREEZE] button ..............................................................19, 89 Freeze...........................................................................89, 145 FULL KEYBOARD .................................................................65 [FUNCTION] button .....................................................18, 136 G Gate Time...........................................................................100 GENRE............................................................................73, 75 GENRE NAME ......................................................................75 GM System Level 1 .......................................................17, 162 Groove ...............................................................................116 Groove parameters .............................................................116 GROUP SELECT....................................................................87 H Handling the Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Floppy Disk.........7 Harmonic Content ................................................................92 HARMONY ............................................................61, 93, 146 Harmony Assignments ........................................................147 Harmony Types ..................................................................147 [HARMONY / ECHO] button ..........................................19, 61 Headphones .......................................................................155 Help messages can be displayed in any one of the following languages...........................................................52 [HELP] button .................................................................18, 52 High Key.............................................................................120 Hz ......................................................................................138 I ICON....................................................................................49 ICON SELECT .......................................................................49 [INPUT VOLUME] knob ...............................................19, 155 Inputting and Editing Lyrics.................................................110 Instant Selection of Displays .................................................50 INTRO ..................................................................................69 [INTRO] button.........................................................18, 31, 67 K Kbd.Vel...............................................................................100 KEY SIGNATURE ..................................................................84 168 PSR-2100/1100 Index Keyboard Percussion ............................................................ 58 Keyboard Touch ................................................................. 144 Keyboard/Panel .................................................................. 144 KEYWORD..................................................................... 73, 74 Kirnberger .......................................................................... 139 L L (LEFT) .............................................................................. 141 Layer .................................................................................... 59 Layering Two Different Voices ............................................. 59 LCD ..................................................................................... 15 [LCD CONTRAST] knob................................................. 19, 17 Left ....................................................................................... 60 LEFT CH ............................................................................... 84 [LEFT HOLD] button ...................................................... 19, 61 Length (LENG) (Organ Flutes). .............................................. 94 Live! ..................................................................................... 58 Local Control ..................................................................... 148 Loop recording ................................................................... 111 Lyrics ........................................................................... 86, 110 LYRICS LANGUAGE .......................................................... 140 M MAIN A/B/C/D ..................................................................... 67 MAIN [A] button ............................................................ 18, 67 MAIN [B] button ............................................................ 18, 67 MAIN [C] button ............................................................ 18, 67 MAIN [D] button ............................................................ 18, 67 Maintaining Panel Settings ................................................. 145 Making Global and Other Important Settings...................... 136 Making Overall System Settings (Local Control, Clock, etc.)...148 Making Settings for Fade In/Out, Metronome, Parameter Lock, and Tap ................................................ 151 Making Settings for the Display and Voice Number Indication ......................................... 152 Making Settings for the Pedals and Keyboard ..................... 142 Making Settings for the Vocal Harmony and Microphone... 133 Making Style File Format Settings ....................................... 119 Master Tune ....................................................................... 138 [MASTER VOLUME] dial ................................................ 18, 17 Mean-Tone......................................................................... 139 [MEMORY] button.......................................................... 19, 87 Message Switch .................................................................. 149 Messages ................................................................................ 8 Metronome ........................................................................ 151 [METRONOME] button .................................................. 18, 53 MIC. ................................................................................... 131 MIC. buttons (PSR-2100 only) ...................................... 19, 131 [MIC. LINE IN] jack ...................................................... 19, 155 MICROPHONE SETTING ................................................... 133 [MIC. SETTING] button ................................................ 19, 131 MIDI .................................................................................. 148 MIDI [OUT] [IN] terminals ........................................... 19, 156 MIDI channels.................................................................... 160 MIDI IN.............................................................................. 156 MIDI OUT.......................................................................... 156 MIDI Receive Parts ............................................................. 150 MIDI SET UP ...................................................................... 154 MIDI terminals ................................................................... 156 Mix .................................................................................... 106 [MIXING CONSOLE] button......................................... 18, 124 Mode (Organ Flutes)............................................................. 94 MODULATION...................................................... 18, 61, 144 [MONO] button ............................................................. 19, 61 MONO POLY (Sound Creator) ............................................. 91 Moving Files/Folders ............................................................ 45 MULTI FINGER.....................................................................65 MULTI PAD [1] - [4] buttons...........................................18, 76 Multi Pads.............................................................................14 Multi Recording ....................................................................97 [MUSIC FINDER] button .....................................15, 19, 33, 72 Music Finder Record Edit ......................................................74 Music Finder Search .............................................................73 Music Rest ............................................................................17 Muting Specific Parts ............................................................82 N NAME.............................................................................44, 47 Naming Files and Folders......................................................44 NEW (Folder) ........................................................................47 NEW RECORD .....................................................................75 [NEXT] button...........................................................19, 43, 49 NOISE GATE.......................................................................133 Normal ...............................................................................104 Note Events.........................................................................108 Note Limit...........................................................................120 NOTE NAME ........................................................................85 Nrm. ...................................................................................100 NTR (Note Transposition Rule)............................................119 NTT (Note Transposition Table) ..........................................120 NUMBER OF RECORDS .......................................................72 O OCTAVE .............................................................................126 OCTAVE LEFT (Sound Creator) .............................................91 OCTAVE M/LYR (Sound Creator) ..........................................91 One Touch Setting ................................................................32 ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] - [4] buttons...................19, 70, 71 Open/Save displays...............................................................39 Organ Flutes .............................................................15, 58, 94 Organ Type (Organ Flutes)....................................................94 Organizing Files by Creating a New Folder...........................47 Original Beat ......................................................................116 Other Parameters in the Basic Display ................................114 Other Playback-related Operations .......................................81 Other Settings .....................................................................151 OTS LINK TIMING..............................................................141 [OTS LINK] button ..........................................................18, 71 OUTPUT [L / L+R] [R] jacks..........................................19, 156 OVERALL SETTING ............................................................133 Overdub recording .............................................................111 Owner ................................................................................154 P Pad .......................................................................................97 PAN (MIC.) .........................................................................135 PANEL SUSTAIN (Sound Creator) .........................................93 Parameter ...........................................................................119 Parameter Lock ...................................................................152 PASTE .............................................................................45, 46 Pedal ..................................................................................142 PEDAL 1/2 POLARITY.........................................................142 PEDAL PUNCH IN/OUT.....................................................104 Pedal-controllable Functions...............................................143 [PHONES] jack .............................................................18, 155 Phrase...................................................................................97 Phrase Mark..................................................................81, 140 PHRASE MARK REPEAT......................................................140 PITCH BEND ..................................................................18, 61 PITCH BEND RANGE .........................................................126 Pitch settings for each scale ................................................139 Playback of Songs .................................................................21 PSR-2100/1100 169 Index Playing a style ................................................................ 28, 62 Playing a Style’s Rhythm Channels only ............................... 64 Playing Along with the PSR-2100/1100 ................................ 36 Playing Back Songs on Disk ................................................. 81 Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands ........ 27 Playing Fill-in patterns automatically when changing accompaniment sections .......................... 69 Playing Several Sounds Simultaneously ................................ 59 Playing Styles ....................................................................... 28 Playing the Demos ......................................................... 20, 55 Playing the Internal Songs .................................................... 79 Playing the sounds of the PSR-2100/1100 through an external audio system, and recording the sounds to an external recorder .................................................... 156 Playing Two Voices Simultaneously ..................................... 26 Playing Voices...................................................................... 25 Playing with the Songs ......................................................... 36 PORTAMENT TIME (Sound Creator) ..................................... 91 PORTAMENTO TIME (Mixing Console).............................. 126 Power Supply ....................................................................... 16 Powering Up ........................................................................ 17 Power-on Procedure............................................................. 16 PRESET drive .................................................................. 40, 41 Preset MIDI Templates........................................................ 148 Punch In/Out...................................................................... 104 Pure Major ......................................................................... 139 Pure Minor ......................................................................... 139 Pythagorean ....................................................................... 139 Q QUANTIZE .......................................................................... 84 Quantize .................................................................... 105, 118 Quantize Size..................................................................... 105 Quick Recording .................................................................. 96 QUICK START.................................................................... 140 Quick Start ......................................................................... 140 R Realtime Recording ............................................................ 113 Realtime Recording Characteristics..................................... 111 [REC] button................................................................... 18, 95 REC END............................................................................ 104 Rec Mode........................................................................... 104 REC START......................................................................... 104 Recalling a Registration Memory Setup................................. 89 Recalling the Registered Settings........................................... 89 Receive .............................................................................. 150 Receive Transpose.............................................................. 149 Receiving MIDI Data .......................................................... 150 Record ................................................................................. 72 RECORD EDIT...................................................................... 74 Recording............................................................................. 37 Recording Chord Changes for the Auto Accompaniment .... 102 Recording Individual Notes .................................................. 99 Recording Melodies ........................................................... 101 Recording Your Performances and Creating Songs................ 95 Registering Panel Setups ....................................................... 87 Registering the Panel Controls in One Touch Setting ............ 71 REGISTRATION EDIT display ............................................... 88 Registration Memory ............................................................ 87 REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] – [8] buttons ................... 19, 87 REGISTRATION MEMORY CONTENTS ............................... 87 Registration Sequence ........................................................ 145 Regular Voice Parameters..................................................... 91 RELEASE ............................................................................... 92 Remove Event .................................................................... 118 170 PSR-2100/1100 Repeat Playback of a Specific Range.....................................82 [REPEAT] button .............................................................18, 82 Replace.................................................................................74 Resonance ............................................................................92 Response (RESP) (Organ Flutes).............................................94 Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the PSR-2100/1100......................................................154 Reverb ................................................................................129 REVERB DEPTH (MIC.) .......................................................135 Reverb Depth (Organ Flutes).................................................94 REVERB DEPTH (Sound Creator)...........................................93 [REW] button ..................................................................18, 81 Rhythm .................................................................................97 RIGHT CH ............................................................................84 Root....................................................................................150 Rotary SP Speed (Organ Flutes) .............................................94 RTR (Retrigger Rule)............................................................120 S S.STOP WINDOW..............................................................141 SAVE.....................................................................................47 Save................................................................................39, 47 Saving Files...........................................................................47 Saving Your Registration Memory Setups ..............................88 Scale...................................................................................139 Scale Tune ..........................................................................138 Score (PSR-2100 only) ..........................................................83 Searching the Ideal Setups ....................................................73 Searching the Music Finder Records .....................................34 Section button indications — [BREAK], [INTRO], [MAIN], [ENDING] buttons............67 SECTION SET......................................................................141 Sections ................................................................................30 Select the Recording Options: Starting, Stopping, Punching In/Out ..............................................................104 Selecting a Scale .................................................................138 Selecting a Voice ..................................................................57 Selecting Files and Folders ....................................................43 Selecting Intro and Ending Types ..........................................69 Selecting items......................................................................49 Selecting the Freeze Settings .................................................89 SEQUENCE END ................................................................145 Sequence Format ................................................................162 Sequencer...........................................................................159 Set Up.................................................................................107 Setting Auto Accompaniment-related Parameters................141 Setting Chord Channels.......................................................150 Setting Harmony and Echo..................................................146 Setting Root Note Channels ................................................150 Setting Separate Voices for the Left and Right Sections of the Keyboard .................................................................60 Setting Song-related Parameters ..........................................140 Setting the Fingering Method ..............................................142 Setting the Level Balance and Voice ...................................125 Setting the Microphone Volume and Related Effects ...........135 Setting the MIDI Parameters................................................148 Setting the Registration Sequence, Freeze, and Voice Set ....145 Setting the volume ................................................................17 SFX .......................................................................................58 Simultaneously Playing a Song and an Accompaniment Style ... 80 SINGLE FINGER....................................................................65 SMF (Standard MIDI File) ....................................................162 Song ...............................................................................14, 78 SONG [START / STOP] button ........................................18, 79 SONG AUTO REVOICE......................................................125 SONG CHAIN PLAY...........................................................140 Song Creator .........................................................................95 Index Song Playback .......................................................... 21, 78, 79 Song Recording .................................................................... 95 Song Settings ...................................................................... 140 SORT BY .............................................................................. 72 SORT ORDER....................................................................... 72 SOUND (SOUND CREATOR) .............................................. 92 [SOUND CREATOR] button ........................................... 18, 90 Source Root/Chord ............................................................. 119 SOURCE1 .......................................................................... 106 SOURCE2 .......................................................................... 106 Specifying the Order for Calling Up Registration Memory Presets ............................................................................ 145 SPEED .................................................................................. 93 SPEED (HARMONY)............................................................. 93 Split Point........................................................................... 141 [STANDBY/ON] switch ............................................ 14, 18, 17 START SEARCH.................................................................... 73 Step Record .......................................................................... 99 Step Record (Chord) ........................................................... 102 Step Record (Note) ............................................................. 101 Step Recording ................................................................... 114 STOP ACMP....................................................................... 141 [STOP] button (MULTI PAD) .......................................... 18, 76 Stopping the Style Playback While Releasing Keys ............... 68 Strength .............................................................................. 117 Style ............................................................................... 14, 62 STYLE [START / STOP] button ........................................ 18, 63 STYLE buttons ................................................................ 18, 62 Style Creator....................................................................... 111 Style File ...................................................................... 17, 162 Style File Format................................................................. 112 Style Sections ....................................................................... 30 Style Setting........................................................................ 141 Sustain ........................................................................... 92, 93 [SUSUTAIN] button........................................................ 19, 60 Sweet! .................................................................................. 58 Swing ................................................................................. 116 [SYNC.START] button .................................................... 18, 63 [SYNC.STOP] button ...................................................... 18, 68 SYS/EX. (System Exclusive).................................................. 109 System................................................................................ 148 System and Insertion .......................................................... 129 System Events ..................................................................... 109 System Messages ................................................................ 161 System Reset....................................................................... 154 SYSTEM SET UP ................................................................. 154 T [TALK] button............................................................... 19, 131 TALK SETTING ................................................................... 135 Tap Count .......................................................................... 152 [TAP TEMPO] button...................................................... 18, 54 TEMPO [E] [ ] buttons ............................................. 18, 53 TEMPO FROM ..................................................................... 73 Tempo Indications — MAIN Display .................................... 54 TEMPO TO .......................................................................... 73 [TOP] button .................................................................. 18, 81 TOTAL VOLUME ATTENUATOR (MIC.) ............................ 135 TOUCH LIMIT (HARMONY) ................................................ 93 TOUCH SENSE (Sound Creator) ........................................... 91 [TOUCH] button ............................................................ 19, 60 [TRACK 1 (R)] button...................................................... 18, 82 [TRACK 2 (L)] button ...................................................... 18, 82 Transmit ............................................................................. 149 Transmit Clock ................................................................... 149 Transmitting MIDI Data ...................................................... 149 TRANSPOSE [E] [F] buttons................................... 18, 144 Transpose Assign ................................................................144 Tune ...................................................................................126 TUNING.............................................................................126 Tuning the Overall Pitch .....................................................138 TYPE (HARMONY) ...............................................................93 U [UPPER OCTAVE] button................................................19, 61 USB ......................................................................................17 [USB] terminal ........................................................15, 19, 157 USER drive................................................................40, 41, 42 USER EFFECT (Function) .....................................................154 User Effect (Mixing Console) ...............................................128 Using a Microphone ...........................................................131 Using the Music Finder .........................................................33 Using Your PSR-2100/1100 with Other Devices .................155 Utility .................................................................................151 V [VARIATION] button ......................................................19, 61 Variation (Organ Flutes) ........................................................94 Velocity ......................................................................100, 117 Velocity Change .................................................................118 [VH TYPE SELECT] button.............................................19, 131 VIBRATO..............................................................................93 VIBRATO DELAY (Sound Creator).........................................92 Vibrato Depth (Organ Flutes) ................................................94 VIBRATO DEPTH (Sound Creator) ........................................92 Vibrato On/Off (Organ Flutes)...............................................94 VIBRATO SPEED (Sound Creator) .........................................92 Vibrato Speed (VIB. SPEED) (Organ Flutes)............................94 [VOCAL HARMONY] button ........................................19, 131 Vocal Harmony ....................................................................15 VOCAL HARMONY CONTROL .........................................134 Vocal Harmony Type..........................................................131 Voice Allocation Format .....................................................162 VOICE buttons ..........................................................15, 19, 57 Voice Characteristics ............................................................58 Voice Effects .........................................................................60 VOICE PART ON / OFF [LAYER] button..........................19, 59 VOICE PART ON / OFF [LEFT] button.............................19, 59 VOICE PART ON / OFF [MAIN] button...........................19, 59 Voice Set ............................................................................146 VOL/ATTACK (Organ Flutes).................................................94 VOLUME (HARMONY) ........................................................93 VOLUME (MIC.) .................................................................135 VOLUME (Sound Creator).....................................................91 Volume (VOL) (Organ Flutes)................................................94 Volume/Voice.....................................................................125 W Werckmeister......................................................................139 What You Can Do With MIDI.............................................161 What’s MIDI?......................................................................158 X XF .................................................................................17, 162 XG ................................................................................17, 162 PSR-2100/1100 171 E Index MEMO 172 PSR-2100/1100 Limited Warranty 90 DAYS LABOR 1 YEAR PARTS Yamaha Corporation of America, hereafter referred to as Yamaha, warrants to the original consumer of a product included in the categories listed below, that the product will be free of defects in materials and/or workmanship for the periods indicated. This warranty is applicable to all models included in the following series of products: PSR SERIES OF PORTATONE ELECTRONIC KEYBOARDS If during the first 90 days that immediately follows the purchase date, your new Yamaha product covered by this warranty is found to have a defect in material and/or workmanship, Yamaha and/or its authorized representative will repair such defect without charge for parts or labor. If parts should be required after this 90 day period but within the one year period that immediately follows the purchase date, Yamaha will, subject to the terms of this warranty, supply these parts without charge. However, charges for labor, and/or any miscellaneous expenses incurred are the consumers responsibility. Yamaha reserves the right to utilize reconditioned parts in repairing these products and/or to use reconditioned units as warranty replacements. THIS WARRANTY IS THE ONLY EXPRESS WARRANTY WHICH YAMAHA MAKES IN CONNECTION WITH THESE PRODUCTS. ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANT ABILITY IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY. YAMAHA EXCLUDES AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN ANY EVENT FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Some states do not allow limitations that relate to implied warranties and/or the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages. Therefore, these limitations and exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary from state to state. CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITIES If warranty service should be required, it is necessary that the consumer assume certain responsibilities: 1. Contact the Customer Service Department of the retailer selling the product, or any retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product for assistance. You may also contact Yamaha directly at the address provided below. 2. Deliver the unit to be serviced under warranty to: the retailer selling the product, an authorized service center, or to Yamaha with an explanation of the problem. Please be prepared to provide proof purchase date (sales receipt, credit card copy, etc.) when requesting service and/or parts under warranty. 3. Shipping and/or insurance costs are the consumers responsibility.* Units shipped for service should be packed securely. *Repaired units will be returned PREPAID if warranty service is required within the first 90 days. IMPORTANT: Do NOT ship anything to ANY location without prior authorization. A Return Authorization (RA) will be issued that has a tracking number assigned that will expedite the servicing of your unit and provide a tracking system if needed. 4. Your owners manual contains important safety and operating instructions. It is your responsibility to be aware of the contents of this manual and to follow all safety precautions. EXCLUSIONS This warranty does not apply to units whose trade name, trademark, and/or ID numbers have been altered, defaced, exchanged removed, or to failures and/or damages that may occur as a result of: 1. Neglect, abuse, abnormal strain, modification or exposure to extremes in temperature or humidity. 2. Improper repair or maintenance by any person who is not a service representative of a retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product, an authorized service center, or an authorized service representative of Yamaha. 3. This warranty is applicable only to units sold by retailers authorized by Yamaha to sell these products in the U.S.A., the District of Columbia, and Puerto Rico. This warranty is not applicable in other possessions or territories of the U.S.A. or in any other country. Please record the model and serial number of the product you have purchased in the spaces provided below. Model________________________ Serial #_____________________________ Sales Slip #_____________________________ Purchased from______________________________________________________ (Retailer) Date__________________________________ YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA Electronic Service Division 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue Buena Park, CA 90620 KEEP THIS DOCUMENT FOR YOUR RECORDS. DO NOT MAIL! FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/ uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) sá länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av. ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sálæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — ogsá selvom der or slukket pá apparatets afbryder. VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta. (standby) (class B) Introduction SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over ,or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! IF you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25' cord (or less ) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged. When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with batteries of a different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture. Warning: Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly. The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V., Departamento de ventas Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F. Tel: 686-00-33 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA. Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil Tel: 011-853-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha de Panamá S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 1-4371-7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha de Panamá S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177 GERMANY Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Switzerland Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 01-383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: THE NETHERLANDS Model Serial No. Purchase Date 92-BP (bottom) Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NAME PLATE LOCATION: NOTICE: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Yamaha Music Central Europe Branch Nederland Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. ASIA FRANCE Yamaha Musique France, S.A. Division Professionnelle BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Combo Division Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-201-0700 GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong, Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3770-0661 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-703-0900 PHILIPPINES DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 8B DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. 11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building, Singapore Tel: 65-747-4374 TAIWAN NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1 N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120 IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor, Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng, Bangkok 10320, Thailand Tel: 02-641-2951 THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971-4-881-5868 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd. 146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa, Auckland, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Belgium Rue de Geneve (Genevastraat) 10, 1140 - Brussels, Belgium Tel: 02-726 6032 PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-3273 [PK] 27 PSR2100/1100_Cover 裏 - 1 - Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. DIC 99 OWNER’S MANUAL Yamaha PK CLUB (Portable Keyboard Home Page, English only) http://www.yamahaPKclub.com/ Yamaha Manual Library http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2003 Yamaha Corporation Printed in China WA44060 302APAP3.3-02B0 OWNER’S OWNER’S MANUAL MANUAL